Abstract Algebra

Groups, Rings and Fields, Advanced Group Theory,

Modules and Noetherian Rings, Field Theory,
Applications

Y OTSANAN M EEMARK

Semi-formal based on the graduate courses

2301613–4 Abstract Algebra I & II, offered at
Department of Mathematics and Computer Science,
Faculty of Science, Chulalongkorn University
Published by
Yotsanan Meemark
Department of Mathematics and Computer Science
Faculty of Science, Chulalongkorn University,
Bangkok, 10330 Thailand

First digital edition October 2013

First bound edition May 2014

Available for free download at

http://pioneer.netserv.chula.ac.th/~myotsana/

Please cite this book as:

Y. Meemark, Abstract Algebra, 2014, PDF available at
http://pioneer.netserv.chula.ac.th/~myotsana/

Any comment or suggestion, please write to

[email protected]
c 2014 by Yotsanan Meemark.

Meemark, Yotsanan
Abstract Algebra / Yotsanan Meemark – 1st ed. Bangkok:
Danex Intercorporation Co., Ltd., 2014. 195pp.
ISBN 978-616-361-389-9

Printed by Danex Intercorporation Co., Ltd., Bangkok, Thailand. www.protexts.com

Foreword

This book is written based on two graduate abstract algebra courses offered at Department of
Mathematics and Computer Science, Faculty of Science, Chulalongkorn University. It grows out
of my lecture notes that I used while I was teaching those courses many times. My intention is
to develop essential topics in algebra that can be used in research as illustrated some in the final
chapter. Also, it can be served as a standard reference for preparing for a qualifying examination
in Algebra. I have tried to make it self-contained as much as possible. However, it may not be
suitable for reading it for the first course in abstract algebra. It hits and goes through many basic
points quickly. A typically mathematical book style that begins with some motivation, definitions,
examples and theorems, is used throughout. I try to pause with remarks to make readers have
some thoughts before moving on.
The book also requires some background in undergraduate level linear algebra and elementary
number theory. For example, I assume the readers to have known matrix theory over a field in
which treatment can be found in most linear algebra books. My number theory lecture note is
available on the web-page as well. I give many examples to demonstrate new definitions and
theorems. In addition, when the converse of a theorem may not hold, counter examples are
provided. The major points are divided into six chapters as follows.
 1 Groups A group is a basic algebraic structure but it is a core in this course. I choose the
approach via group actions. Although it is not quite elementary, it is an important aspect in
dealing with groups. I also cover Sylow theorems with some applications on finite groups.
The structure theorem of finite abelian groups is also presented.
 2 Rings and Fields The abstract treatments of rings and fields using groups are presented
in the first section. Rings discussed throughout this book always contain the identity. Ideals
and factorizations are discussed in detail. In addition, I talk about polynomials over a ring
and which will be used in a construction of field extensions.
 3 Advanced Group Theory In this chapter, I give deeper theory of groups. Various kinds
of series of a group are studied in the first three sections. I also have results on a linear
group. Finally, I show how to construct a group from a set of objects and presentations.
 4 Modules and Noetherian Rings Modules can be considered as a generalization of vector
spaces. I cover basic concepts of modules and work on free modules. Projective and injective
modules are introduced. Moreover, I present the proof of the structure theorems for modules
over a PID. In the end, Noetherian and Artinion rings are explored.
 5 Field Theory I give more details on a construction of extension fields. Also, I prepare the
readers to Galois theory. Applications of Galois theory are provided in proving fundamental
theorem of algebra, finite fields, and cyclotomic fields. For the sake of completeness, I
discuss some results on a transcendental extension in the final section.
 6 Applications I demonstrate some aspects in doing research in algebra. In the first section,
the readers will see some applications of module theory, especially a free R-module over
commutative rings, to obtain a structure theorem for finite dimensional symplectic spaces
over a local ring. The symplectic graphs over a commutative ring is defined and studied.
Although the problems seem combinatorial, it requires many algebraic topics presented
throughout this book.

i
 The whole book is designed for a year course. Chapters 1 and 2 are appropriate for a first
course and Chapters 3, 4 and 5 can be served as a more advanced course. Chapter 6 can be
assigned as optional reading.
The book would not have been possible without great lectures from my abstract algebra
teachers—Ajchara Harnchoowong and Yupaporn Kemprasit at Chulalongkorn University, and Ed-
ward Formanek at the Pennsylvania State University. They initiate wonderful resources to com-
pose each section in this book. I express my gratitude to them all.
I take full responsibility for typos/mistakes that may be found in the manuscript. If you catch
ones or have any other suggestions, please write to me. I shall include and correct them in the
more up-to-date version once a year on the website. Finally, I hope that the textbook will benefit
many students, teachers and researchers in Algebra and Number Theory.
Yotsanan Meemark
Bangkok, Thailand

ii
Contents

Foreword i

Contents iii

1 Groups 1
1.1 Definitions and Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1.1 Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1.2 Subgroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1.3 Homomorphisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2 Group Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.3 Quotient Groups and Cyclic Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.3.1 Quotient Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.3.2 Cyclic Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.4 The Symmetric Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.5 Sylow Theorems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.5.1 Sylow p-subgroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.5.2 Applications of Sylow Theorems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.6 Finite Abelian Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

2 Rings and Fields 39

2.1 Basic Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.1.1 Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.1.2 Quaternions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.1.3 Characteristic, Ring Homomorphisms and Group Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.2 Ideals, Quotient Rings and the Field of Fractions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.3 Maximal Ideals and Prime Ideals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.4 Factorizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.4.1 Irreducible Elements and Prime Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.4.2 Unique Factorization Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.5 Polynomial Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.5.1 Polynomials and Their Roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

iii
 2.5.2 Factorizations in Polynomial Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.6 Field Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.6.1 Algebraic and Transcendental Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.6.2 More on Roots of Polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

3 Advanced Group Theory 75

3.1 Jordan-Hölder Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.2 Solvable Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.3 Nilpotent Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
3.4 Linear Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3.5 Free Groups and Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

4 Modules and Noetherian Rings 95

4.1 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4.2 Free Modules and Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4.3 Projective and Injective Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4.4 Modules over a PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
4.5 Noetherian Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
4.6 Artinian Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

5 Field Theory 131

5.1 Splitting Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
5.2 Algebraic Closure of a Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
5.3 Multiple Roots and Separability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.4 Automorphisms of Fields and Galois Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
5.5 Some Consequences of Galois Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
5.6 Finite Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
5.7 Cyclotomic Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
5.8 Normal Bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
5.9 Transcendental Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

iv
6 Applications 169
6.1 Symplectic Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
6.2 Symplectic Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
6.3 Vertex and Arc Transitivities of Symplectic Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
6.4 Chromatic Number of Symplectic Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Bibliography 183

Index 185

v
This page intentionally left blank
1 | Groups

We write N for the set of positive integers, Z for the set of integers, Q for the set of rational
numbers, R for the set of real numbers and C for the set of complex numbers.
In this first chapter, we talk about a group which is a basic algebraic structure. However, it
is a core in this course. Our approach here relies on group actions. Although it is not quite
elementary, it is an important aspect in dealing with groups. We also discuss Sylow theorems
with some applications and the structure of finite abelian groups.

1.1 Definitions and Examples

1.1.1 Groups
We shall begin with the definition of a group.

Definition. For a nonempty set S, a function · : S × S → S is called a binary operation and

image of (a, b) in S ×S is denoted by a·b and it is said to be the product of a and b. A groupoid
is a system (S, ·) consisting of a nonempty set S with binary operation · on S.

We may write S for (S, ·) and ab for a · b where a, b ∈ S if there is no ambiguity. Let S be a
groupoid. For nonempty subsets A and B of S and x ∈ S, let

AB = {ab : a ∈ A and b ∈ B}, xA = {x}A and Ax = A{x}.

Definition. If S satisfies the associative law, i.e., ∀a, b, c ∈ S, (a · b) · c = a · (b · c), we say that
S is a semigroup.

Notice that if S is a semigroup, then any bracketing of x1 , . . . , xn gives the same product, so
we can write x1 · · · xn for this product. In addition, for a ∈ S and m ∈ N, we may let am = a · · · a
(m copies).

Definition. A groupoid S is said to be commutative if ∀a, b ∈ S, ab = ba.

Definition. An element e of a groupoid S is a two-sided identity or identity if ∀a ∈ S, ae =

a = ea.

Clearly, S contains at most one identity (if e and e′ are identity, then e = ee′ = e).

Definition. A monoid is a semigroup with (unique) identity. Let S be a monoid with identity e.
If a and b in S are such that ab = e = ba, then b is called a two-sided inverse or inverse of a.

We have that every element of S has at most one inverse. For, if b and b′ are inverses of a, then
ab = e = ba and ab′ = e = b′ a, so b = be = b(ab′ ) = (ba)b′ = eb′ = b′ .

1
2 1. Groups

Definition. A group is a monoid G such that every element of G has an inverse, and for a ∈ G,
let a−1 denote the (unique) inverse of a.

Remark. For a nonempty set G with binary operation on G is a group if the following axioms are
all satisfied:
(G1) [associativity] ∀a, b, c ∈ G, (a · b) · c = a · (b · c)
(G2) [identity] ∃e ∈ G, ∀a ∈ S, ae = a = ea
(G3) [inverse] ∀a ∈ G, ∃b ∈ G, ab = e = ba.

Definition. A group G is commutative if ∀a, b ∈ G, ab = ba. A commutative group is also called

an abelian group.

Definition. The order of a group G is the cardinal number |G|.

Let G be a group with identity e. For a ∈ G and m ∈ N, let a0 = e and a−m = (a−1 )m .
Remarks. 1. For a group G, we have:
(a) e−1 = e and ∀a ∈ G, (a−1 )−1 = a,
(b) ∀a ∈ G, ∀m, n ∈ Z, am an = am+n and (am )n = amn , and
(c) ∀a, b ∈ G, (ab)−1 = b−1 a−1 because (ab)(b−1 a−1 ) = e.
2. In case G is abelian, we may choose to write G additively. This means:
(a) The binary operation is denoted by +.
(b) 0 denotes the identity element and −a denotes the inverse of a.
(c) ∀a ∈ G, ∀m ∈ N, ma = a + · · · + a (m copies).
3. A group G satisfies the cancellation law: ∀a, b, c ∈ G, ab = ac (or ba = ca) ⇒ b = c.
Examples 1.1.1. 1. (Z, −) is a groupoid which is not a semigroup; (N, +) is a semigroup
which is not a monoid; (N, ·) is a monoid which is not a group.
2. (Z, +), (Q, +), (R, +), (C, +), (Q∗ , ·), (R∗ , ·) and (C∗ , ·) are infinite abelian groups. Here, A∗
denotes the set of nonzero elements of A.
3. Let X be a set and P (X) the power set of X. For subsets A and B of X, we define A△B =
(A r B) ∪ (B r A). Then (P (X), △) is an abelian group having the empty set as its identity
and A−1 = A for all A ∈ P (X). Also, (P (X), ∩) is a commutative monoid with identity X.
4. For n ∈ N, let Zn = {0, 1, . . . , n − 1} called the set of integers modulo n, where a =
{kn + a : k ∈ Z} for all a ∈ Z. Define + and · on Zn by

a + b = a + b and a · b = a · b for all a, b ∈ Z.

Then (Zn , +) is an abelian group of order n. Moreover, (Zn , ·) is a commutative monoid

with identity 1.
5. For n ∈ N and n ≥ 2, let Z× ×
n = {a : gcd(a, n) = 1}. Then (Zn , ·) is an abelian group of order
×
φ(n), the Euler φ-function. Note that Zn = Zn r {0} ⇔ n is a prime.
Proof. If n is a prime, then Z×n = {1, 2, . . . , n − 1} = Zn r {0}. Conversely, assume that n is compos-
ite. Then n = bc for some 1 < b, c < n, so gcd(b, n) and gcd(c, n) are > 1. Thus, b, c ∈ / Z×n . Since
b, c < n, we have b, c 6= 0. Hence, Z×
n $ Z n r {0}.

Remark. We recall some properties of the Euler’s φ-function as follows.

(a) If p is a prime, then φ(p) = p − 1 and φ(pk ) = pk − pk−1 for all k ∈ N.
(b) φ is multiplicative, namely, if gcd(m, n) = 1, then φ(mn) = φ(m)φ(n).
6. Write F for any of Q, R, C or other fields. Let Mn (F ) be the set of n × n matrices over F
and GLn (F ) the set of matrices over F with nonzero determinants. Then (Mn (F ), +) is an
abelian group and GLn (F ) is a group under multiplication which is not abelian if n > 1.
The later group is called the general linear group.
1.1. Definitions and Examples 3

7. For a nonempty set X, a function on X which is 1-1 and onto (a bijection on X) is said to be
a permutation of X. Let S(X) be the set of all permutations of X. Then under composition,
(S(X), ◦) is a group called the symmetric group on X; in case X = {1, 2, . . . , n}, we write
Sn and call Sn the symmetric group on n letters. It is a group of order n!.

Some equivalent definitions of groups are collected in the next theorem.

Theorem 1.1.1. Let G be a semigroup. Then the following statements are equivalent.
(i) G is a group.
(ii) (a) ∃e ∈ G ∀a ∈ G, ea = a and (b) ∀a ∈ G ∃b ∈ G, ba = e.
(iii) (a) ∃e ∈ G ∀a ∈ G, ae = a and (b) ∀a ∈ G ∃b ∈ G, ab = e.
(iv) ∀a, b ∈ G ∃x, y ∈ G, ax = b and ya = b.
(v) ∀a ∈ G, aG = G = Ga.

Proof. If (i) holds, (ii)–(v) are clearly true. (iv) ⇔ (v) is obvious.
(ii) ⇒ (i). Assume (ii). Let a ∈ G. Then ∃b ∈ G, ba = e, and so ∃c ∈ G, cb = e. Thus,

ab = e(ab) = (cb)(ab) = c(ba)b = c(eb) = cb = e.

Moreover, ae = a(ba) = (ab)a = ea = a.

“(iii) ⇒ (i)” is similar to “(ii) ⇒ (i)”.
(iv) ⇒ (iii). Assume (iv). Let a ∈ G. Then ∃e ∈ G, ae = a. Let b ∈ G. Then ∃c ∈ G, bc = e and
∃y ∈ G, ya = b. Thus, be = (ya)e = y(ae) = ya = b.

Theorem 1.1.2. If G is a finite cancellative semigroup, then G is a group.

Proof. We shall show that ∀a ∈ G, aG = G = Ga. Let a ∈ G. Since G is cancellative, |aG| = |G| =
|Ga|. Clearly, aG ⊆ G and Ga ⊆ G. Since G is finite, aG = G = Ga.

Remark. (N, +) is an infinite cancellative semigroup, but it is not a group.

1.1.2 Subgroups
Sometimes a group contains a nonempty subset that is closed under its operation. In this subsec-
tion, we discuss a small group in a bigger one with the same operation.

Definition. A nonempty subset H of a group G is said to be a subgroup of G if H is a group

under the same operation of G and we write H 6 G.

Observe that for ∅ =

6 H ⊆ G,

H6G ⇔ ∀a, b ∈ H, ab ∈ H ∧ a−1 ∈ H ⇔ ∀a, b ∈ H, ab−1 ∈ H.

Moreover, {e} and G are always subgroups of G.

Corollary 1.1.3. If H is a finite nonempty subset of a group G which is closed under the operation
of G, then H is a subgroup of G.

Proof. Since G is a cancellative semigroup and ∅ =

6 H ⊆ G, H is a finite cancellative semigroup.
Hence, H is a group by Theorem 1.1.2.

Next, we investigate the group of symmetries. We begin with the following groups.
4 1. Groups

Examples 1.1.2. 1. The set of rotations about a point 0 in the plane; composition as usual. If 0
is taken to be the origin, the rotation through an angle θ can be represented analytically as
the map
 

cos θ sin θ
(x, y) 7→ (x cos θ − y sin θ, x sin θ + y cos θ) = x y .
− sin θ cos θ

For θ = 0, we get the identity map and the inverse of the rotation through the angle θ is the
rotation through −θ. It is called the rotation group.
2. The set of rotations together with the set of reflections in the lines which passes through 0 with
slope tan α. The latter are given analytically by
 

cos 2α sin 2α
(x, y) 7→ (x cos 2α + y sin 2α, x sin 2α − y cos 2α) = x y .
sin 2α − cos 2α

The product of two reflections is a rotation and the product in either order of a reflection
and a rotation is a reflection.
3. Consider the regular n-gon (that is, the n-sided polygon in which the sides are all the same
length and are symmetrically placed about a common center) inscribed in the unit circle
in the plane, so that one of the vertices is (1, 0). The vertices subtend angles of 0, 2π/n,
4π/n, . . . , 2(n − 1)π/n radians with the positive x-axis. The subset of rotation maps which
maps our figure into itself consists of the n rotations through angles of 0, 2π/n, 4π/n, . . . , 2(n−
1)π/n radians, respectively. These elements form a subgroup Rn of the rotation group de-
fined in (1).
4. We now consider the set Dn of rotations and reflections which map the regular n-gon, as in
(3), into itself. These form a subgroup of the group defined in (2). We shall call the elements
of this group the symmetries of the regular n-gon. The reflection in the x-axis is one of our
symmetries. Multiplying this on the right by the n rotational symmetries we obtain n distinct
reflectional symmetries. These give them all, for if we let σ denote the reflection in the x-
axis and τ denote any reflectional symmetry then στ is one of the n-rotational symmetries
ρ1 , . . . , ρn , say ρi . Since σ 2 = 1, στ = ρj gives τ = σρj which is one of those we counted.
Thus, Dn consists of n rotations and n reflections and its order is 2n. The group Dn is called
the dihedral group. Note that Dn = {σ i ρj : i ∈ {0, 1} and j ∈ {0, 1, 2, . . . , n − 1}}.

Remark. It is easy to see that the intersection of a family of subgroups of a group G is a subgroup
of G. If H and K are subgroups of a group G, then, in general, H ∪ K is not a subgroup of G.
However, if H and K are subgroups of a group G with G = H ∪ K, then H = G or K = G.
Proof. Assume that there is an x ∈ G r H and a y ∈ G r K. Since G = H ∪ K, we have x ∈ K and y ∈ H.
Thus, xy ∈
/ H and xy ∈/ K, a contradiction.

Definition. Let G be a group and A a subset of G. Define hAi to be the intersection of all
subgroups of G containing A. It is the smallest subgroup of G containing A and is called the
subgroup of G generated by A. The elements of A are called generators. Moreover, we have
h∅i = {e} and
hAi = {an1 1 . . . ank k : ai ∈ A and ni ∈ Z} if A 6= ∅.
For a1 , . . . , am ∈ G, we write ha1 , . . . , am i for h{a1 , . . . , am }i. Then ∀a ∈ G, hai = {an : n ∈
Z} = ha−1 i is called the cyclic subgroup of G generated by a and the order of a is |hai| (finite
or infinite) and denoted by |a| or o(a). If G = hai for some a ∈ G, then G is said to be the cyclic
group generated by a.

Definition. A subgroup N of G is normal, denoted by N E G, if ∀g ∈ G ∀x ∈ N, gxg −1 ∈ N .

1.1. Definitions and Examples 5

Examples 1.1.3. 1. {e} and G are normal subgroups of G. They are called the trivial normal
subgroups.
2. Every subgroup of an abelian group is normal.
3. Let SLn (F ) be the set of matrices over F with determinant one. Then SLn (F ) is a normal
subgroup of GLn (F ) because det(P QP −1 ) = det Q for all P, Q ∈ GLn (F ).
4. Rn = hρ2π/n i and Rn E Dn because σρj σ = ρ−1 j for all j.

Remarks. 1. N E G if and only if (N ≤ G and ∀g ∈ G, gN g −1 = N ).

2. (∀g ∈ G, gN g −1 = N ) ⇔ (∀g ∈ G, gN = N g).

Definition. Let G be a group and X a nonempty subset of G. The centralizer of X is the set

CG (X) = {g ∈ G : ∀x ∈ X, gx = xg}

and the normalizer of X is the set

NG (X) = {g ∈ G : gX = Xg}.

We call Z(G) = CG (G) = {z ∈ G : ∀x ∈ G, zx = xz}, the center of G.

Remarks. 1. The centralizer and normalizer of X are subgroups of G.

Proof. Since ∀x ∈ G, ex = xe, we have e ∈ CG (X). Let g, h ∈ CG (X). Let x ∈ X. Then gx = xg and
hx = xh, so xh−1 = h−1 x and

(gh−1 )x = g(h−1 x) = g(xh−1 ) = (gx)h−1 = (xg)h−1 = x(gh−1 ).

Thus, gh−1 ∈ CG (X). We leave NG (X) as an exercise.

T
2. Z(G) E G and Z(G) = x∈G CG ({x}).

Proof. By (1), Z(G) is a subgroup of G. To see it is normal, let g ∈ G and z ∈ Z(G). Let x ∈ G. Then
zg = gz and zx = xz, so

(gzg −1 )x = (zgg −1 )x = zx = xz = x(zgg −1 ) = x(gzg −1 ).

Hence, gzg −1 ∈ Z(G). Finally, for z ∈ G,

\
z ∈ Z(G) ⇔ ∀x ∈ G, xz = zx ⇔ ∀x ∈ G, z ∈ CG ({x}) ⇔ z ∈ CG ({x}).
x∈G

This proves the second statement.

3. G is abelian ⇔ Z(G) = G. (This is clear.)

4. If K ≤ G, then K E NG (K) and NG (K) is the largest subgroup of G containing K in which
K is normal (this means ∀H ≤ G, K E H ⇒ H ⊆ NG (K)).
Proof. If g ∈ K, then gK = K = Kg, so K ≤ NG (K). To see K is normal in NG (K), let x ∈ NG (K)
and g ∈ K. Since Kx = xK, we have xg ∈ Kx, so xg = kx for some k ∈ K. Thus xgx−1 = k ∈ K.
Next, let H be a subgroup of G such that K is normal in H. Then ∀h ∈ H, Kh = hK which implies
H ⊆ NG (K).

1.1.3 Homomorphisms
We now study a function between two groups that is required to preserve group operations.
6 1. Groups

Definition. Let G and H be two groups. A homomorphism from G to H is a map ϕ : G → H

which satisfies
ϕ(xy) = ϕ(x)ϕ(y) for all x, y ∈ G.
A 1-1 homomorphism is called a monomorphism and an onto homomorphism is called an
epimorphism. An isomorphism is a homomorphism which is 1-1 and onto. We write G ∼ =H
if ∃ϕ : G → H, ϕ is an isomorphism. An endomorphism of G is a homomorphism on G and an
automorphism of G is an isomorphism of G onto itself.

Definition. The kernel of a homomorphism ϕ : G → H is given by the set

ker ϕ = {g ∈ G : ϕ(g) = eH }.

Remarks. 1. ϕ(eG ) = eH and ϕ(a−1 ) = (ϕ(a))−1 for all a ∈ G.

Proof. Note that eH ϕ(eG ) = ϕ(eG ) = ϕ(eG eG ) = ϕ(eG )ϕ(eG ). By cancellation in H, we have eH =
ϕ(eG ). Next, let a ∈ G. Then ϕ(a)ϕ(a−1 ) = ϕ(aa−1 ) = ϕ(eG ) = eH . Hence, ϕ(a−1 ) = ϕ(a)−1 .
2. ϕ is 1-1 ⇔ ker ϕ = {eG }.
Proof. Assume that ϕ is 1-1. By (1), eG ∈ ker ϕ. Let x ∈ ker ϕ. Then ϕ(x) = eH = ϕ(eG ). Since ϕ is
1-1, we have x = eG . Conversely, suppose that ker ϕ = {eG }. Let x, y ∈ G be such that ϕ(x) = ϕ(y).
Then eH = ϕ(x)−1 ϕ(y) = ϕ(x−1 )ϕ(y) = ϕ(x−1 y). Thus, x−1 y ∈ ker ϕ, so x−1 y = eG . Hence,
x = y.

Theorem 1.1.4. Let ϕ be a homomorphism of a group G into a group H.

1. ker ϕ is a normal subgroup of G.
2. im ϕ = {ϕ(g) : g ∈ G} = ϕ(G) is a subgroup of H.

Proof. Since ϕ(eG ) = eH , eG ∈ ker ϕ and eH ∈ im ϕ. Let x, y ∈ ker ϕ. Then ϕ(x) = eH = ϕ(y), so

ϕ(xy −1 ) = ϕ(x)ϕ(y −1 ) = ϕ(x)ϕ(y)−1 = eH e−1

H = eH .

Thus, xy −1 ∈ ker ϕ. Hence, ker ϕ is a subgroup of G. Next, let g ∈ G and x ∈ ker ϕ. Then
ϕ(x) = eH and

ϕ(gxg −1 ) = ϕ(g)ϕ(x)ϕ(g −1 ) = ϕ(g)ϕ(x)ϕ(g)−1 = ϕ(g)eH ϕ(g)−1 = eH .

Thus, gxg −1 ∈ ker ϕ, and so ker ϕ is normal. Finally, let y, z ∈ im ϕ. Then ∃x1 , x2 ∈ G, ϕ(x1 ) = y
and ϕ(x2 ) = z. Thus,

yz −1 = ϕ(x1 )ϕ(x2 )−1 = ϕ(x1 )ϕ(x−1 −1

2 ) = ϕ(x1 x2 ).

Since x1 x−1
2 ∈ G, yz
−1 ∈ im ϕ. Hence, im ϕ is a subgroup of H.

Remark. If ϕ : G → H is a homomorphism and H1 ≤ H, then ker ϕ ⊆ ϕ−1 (H1 ) ≤ G.

The next result is clear.

Theorem 1.1.5. If G1 and G2 are groups, then the Cartesian product

G1 × G2 = {(x, y) : x ∈ G1 , y ∈ G2 }

is a group under coordinatewise multiplication (x1 , y1 )(x2 , y2 ) = (x1 x2 , y1 y2 ) for all x1 , x2 ∈ G1

and y1 , y2 ∈ G2 .
1.2. Group Actions 7

Exercises 1.1. 1. Let G be the set of pairs of real numbers (a, b) with a 6= 0 and define:
(a, b)(c, d) = (ac, ad + b) and 1 = (1, 0).
Verify that this defines a group.
2. Consider the eight objects ±1, ±i, ±j and ±k with multiplication rules:
ij = k jk = i ki = j
ji = −k kj = −i ik = −j
2 2 2
i = j = k = −1
where the minus signs behave as expected and 1 and −1 multiply as expected. (For example, (−1)j =
−j and (−i)(−j) = ij = k.) Show that these objects form a group containing only one element of
order 2. This group is called the quaternion group and is denoted by Q8 .
3. Let H = {σ ∈ S4 : {σ(1), σ(2)} = {1, 2} or {σ(1), σ(2)} = {3, 4}}. Prove that H is a subgroup of S4
and find |H|. Is H normal in S4 ? Justify your answer.
4. Let G be a semigroup such that ∀a ∈ G, ∃b ∈ G, a = aba and ∃!e ∈ G, e2 = e. Prove that G is a group.
5. Let G be a semigroup such that ∀a, b ∈ G, a2 b = b = ba2 . Prove that G is an abelian group.
6. A certain multiplicative operation on a nonempty set G is associative and allows cancellations on
the left, and there exists a ∈ G such that x3 = axa for all x ∈ G. Prove that G endowed with this
operation is an abelian group.
7. Let G be a group with the following properties:
(i) G has no element of order 2 and (ii) (xy)2 = (yx)2 , for all x, y ∈ G.
Prove that G is abelian. If (i) fails, give an example to support that “G may not be abelian”.
8. If H and K are subgroups of a group G, prove that HK ≤ G if and only if HK = KH.
9. Let ϕ : G → Ḡ be a group homomorphism, and let N be a normal subgroup of G. Show that ϕ[N ] is
a normal subgroup of im ϕ.
10. Let ϕ : G → Ḡ be a group homomorphism, and let N̄ be a normal subgroup of Ḡ. Show that ϕ−1 [N̄ ]
is a normal subgroup of G.
11. Let G be a group with identity e and ϕ : G → G a function such that
ϕ(g1 )ϕ(g2 )ϕ(g3 ) = ϕ(h1 )ϕ(h2 )ϕ(h3 )
whenever g1 g2 g3 = e = h1 h2 h3 . Prove that there exists an element a ∈ G such that ψ(x) = aϕ(x)
for all x ∈ G is a homomorphism.
12. Let Dn be the dihedral group of order 2n where n > 2. Show that the center of Dn has one or two
elements according as n is odd or even.

1.2 Group Actions

In this section, we talk about how a group acting on a set, called a group action. There are many
nice results and applications as we shall see in the following sections and chapters.

Definition. Let G be a group with identity element e and X a nonempty set. We say that G acts
on X or X is a G-set if there is a mapping G × X → X (denoted by g · x or gx) which satisfies:
1. ∀ x ∈ X, e · x = x and
2. ∀g, h ∈ G, ∀x ∈ X, g · (h · x) = (gh) · x.

Remark. Let a group G act on a set X. Then each g ∈ G determines a set map φg : X → X by
φg (x) = gx.
Moreover, ∀g ∈ G, φg is a bijection (1-1 and onto). Hence, φg ∈ S(X), the symmetric group on X.
θ
The map g 7→ φg defines a group homomorphism from G to S(X) (i.e., φgh = φg ◦ φh for all
g, h ∈ G). Its kernel is the set
{g ∈ G : gx = x for all x ∈ X}.
8 1. Groups

Definition. Let a group G act on a set X.

1. If g = e is the only element of G such that gx = x for all x ∈ X, then G is said to act
faithfully on X. In this case, G ֒→ S(X).
2. If x ∈ X, the set Gx = {gx : g ∈ G} is called the orbit of x.
3. If Gx = X for some (and hence all) x ∈ X, then G is said to act transitively on X.
4. If Y ⊆ X, the set {g ∈ G : gY = Y } is called the stabilizer of Y , denoted by StabG Y .
The stabilizer of Y is a subgroup of G.
Proof. Clearly, e ∈ StabG Y . Let g, h ∈ StabG Y . Then gY = Y and hY = Y . Thus, (gh)Y =
g(hY ) = gY = Y and g −1 Y = g −1 (gY ) = eY = Y .

Examples 1.2.1. 1. If X is a set, S(X) acts naturally on X by f · x = f (x) for all f ∈ S(X)
and x ∈ X. This action is faithfully if |X| > 1. In particular, Sn acts on {1, 2, . . . , n}. The
orbit of each i ∈ {1, 2, . . . , n} is all of {1, 2, . . . , n}, thus Sn acts transitively on {1, 2, . . . , n}.
If Y ⊆ {1, 2, . . . , n}, the stabilizer of Y is isomorphic to S(Y ) × S(Z) ∼ = Sk × Sn−k where
Z = {1, 2, . . . , n} r Y . Hence, the stabilizer of {n} is isomorphic to Sn−1 .
2. Let G be any group and let X = G, considered as a set. Let G act on X by left multiplication

g · x = gx.

This action is called the left regular representation. It is faithful and transitive.
3. GLn (F ) acts faithfully on F n , the set of n × 1 column vectors by left multiplication. The
orbit of ~0 is itself and GLn (F ) acts transitively on the nonzero vectors.
4. Let G be any group and let X be any set. Let G act on X by g ·x = x for all g ∈ G and x ∈ X.
This is called the trivial G action. Assuming g 6= e and X has more than one element, this
action is not faithful and not transitive. All orbits are singleton and G is the stabilizer of
every subset of X.
5. Let G be a group and let X = G, considered as a set. Let G act on X by conjugation

g · x = gxg −1 .

This action may not be faithful. The center of G acts trivially. The orbit of x ∈ G is the set
of conjugates of x, that is
g · X = {gxg −1 : g ∈ G},
called the conjugacy class of x. If |G| > 1, then this action is not transitive. The number
of orbits of the number of conjugacy classes. If Y is a subset of G, the stabilizer of Y under
the action is its normalizer, i.e., StabG Y = NG (Y ).
6. Let G be a group and let H be a subgroup of G. Let H act on G by left multiplication. This
action is faithful and the orbit of x ∈ G is

H · x = {hx : h ∈ H} = Hx.

The action is not transitive unless H = G. Moreover, we can let H act on G by h · g = gh−1
for all h ∈ H and g ∈ G. This action is also faithful and the orbit of x ∈ G is

H · x = {xh−1 : h ∈ H} = {xh : h ∈ H} = xH.

7. Let X = C ∪ {∞}, a set that becomes the Riemann sphere in complex analysis. The group
GL2 (C) acts on X by the linear fractional transformation
 
a b az + b
·z = ,
c d cz + d

the understanding being the image of ∞ is a/c and the image of −d/c is ∞, just as if we
were to pass to a limit in each case.
1.2. Group Actions 9

8. Let SL2 (R) be the subgroup of real matrices in GL2 (R) of determinant one, and let H be the
subset of C ∪ {∞} in which Im z > 0, called the Poincaré upper half plane. Then SL2 (R)
acts on H by linear fractional transformations.

Theorem 1.2.1. [Cayley] Every group G is isomorphic to a subgroups of S(X) for some set X.

Proof. Choose X = G. By Example 1.2.1 (2), G acts faithfully on G by left multiplication, so

θ
g 7→ φg is 1-1. Hence, G ∼
= im θ ≤ S(G).

Theorem 1.2.2. Let G be a group and suppose G acts on a nonempty set X. Define a relation ∼
on X by
x ∼ y ⇔ ∃g ∈ G, y = g · x.
Then
1. ∼ is an equivalence relation on X.
2. The equivalence class of x ∈ X under ∼ is Gx = {gx : g ∈ G}, the orbit of x. Thus, X is a
disjoint union of orbits under the action of G.

Proof. It is routine to show that ∼ is an equivalence relation on X. The equivalence class of x is

[x]∼ = {y ∈ X : x ∼ y} = {y ∈ X : ∃g ∈ G, y = gx} = {gx : x ∈ X} = Gx

S
and hence X = x∈X Gx.

Definition. If H is a subgroup of G and x ∈ G, the set

Hx = {hx : h ∈ H} and xH = {xh : h ∈ H}

are called a left coset of H in G and a right coset of H in G, respectively.

From Example 1.2.1 (6), we can let H act on G in two ways. Then Hx [xH] is an orbit of x,
and so G is a disjoint union of left [right] cosets of H in G. If we choose a subset {xα } of G
such that G is the disjoint union of the left cosets Hxα , then {xα } is called a right transversal or
system of left coset representatives of H in G and if we choose a subset {xα } of G such that G
is the disjoint union of the right cosets yα H, then {yα } is called a left transversal or system of
right coset representatives of H in G.
Remarks. 1.SBy Theorem 1.2.2,
S
(a) G = x∈G Hx [G = x∈G xH],
(b) ∀x, y ∈ G, Hx = Hy or Hx ∩ Hy = ∅ [∀x, y ∈ G, xH = yH or xH ∩ yH = ∅],
(c) ∀x, y ∈ G, Hx = Hy ⇔ xy −1 ∈ H [∀x, y ∈ G, xH = yH ⇔ y −1 x ∈ H].
2. ∀a ∈ G, |H| = |Ha| = |aH| by cancellation on H.
3. The map aH 7→ Ha−1 for all a ∈ G is a 1-1 correspondence between the sets {xH : x ∈ G}
and {Hx : x ∈ G}.
Proof. For a, b ∈ G, aH = bH ⇔ b−1 a ∈ H ⇔ a−1 b ∈ H ⇔ Ha−1 = Hb−1 . Then this map is 1-1,
well defined and clearly onto.

Definition. The index of H in G, denoted by [G : H], is the cardinal number of distinct right
(or left) cosets of H in G, that is,

[G : H] = |{Hx : x ∈ G}| = |{xH : x ∈ G}|.

Theorem 1.2.3. If H is a subgroup of G of index two, then H is normal in G.

10 1. Groups

Proof. Since [G : H] = 2, G has exactly two right (or left) cosets. Then Hg = G r H and
gH = G r H for all g ∈ G not in H. Hence, ∀g ∈ G, Hg = gH, so H is normal in G.

Remark. Let I and A be sets. Define Ai = {(i, a) : a ∈ A} for all i ∈ I. Then |Ai | = |A| for all
i ∈ I, Ai ∩ Aj = ∅ if i 6= j, and

[ X X
Ai = |Ai | = |A| = |I||A|.
i∈I i∈I i∈I

Theorem 1.2.4. [Lagrange] If H is a subgroup of G, then |G| = [G : H]|H|. In particular, if G is

finite and H < G, then |H| divides |G|, and so |a| = |hai| divides |G| for all a ∈ G.

Proof. Since G is a disjoint union of distinct left cosets Hxα , α ∈ Λ, and |Λ| = [G : H],

[ X X
|G| = Hxα = |Hxα | = |H| = |Λ||H| = [G : H]|H|.
α∈Λ α∈Λ α∈Λ

If G is finite, then |H| divides |G|. In addition, ∀a ∈ G, hai ≤ G, so |a| = |hai| divides |G| for all
a ∈ G.

Corollary 1.2.5. If G is a group of prime order, then {e} and G are the only two subgroups of G
and G must be cyclic.

Proof. Let H ≤ G. Then |H| divides |G| = p, so |H| = 1 or |H| = p. Thus, H = {e} and H = G.
Also, if a 6= e, then hai =
6 {e}. Hence, hai = G and so G is cyclic.

A relationship between the stabilizer of x in a group G and the number of elements in the
orbit G · x is recorded in the next theorem.

Theorem 1.2.6. [Orbit-Stabilizer Theorem] Let a group G act on a set X and suppose x ∈ X.
Then [G : StabG x] = |G · x|, that is, the index of the stabilizer of x in G is the number of elements
in the orbit of x.

Proof. Let x ∈ X. Note that for all g1 , g2 ∈ G,

g1 x = g2 x ⇔ (g2−1 g1 )x = x ⇔ g2−1 g1 ∈ StabG {x} ⇔ g1 StabG {x} = g2 StabG {x}.

Then |{gx : g ∈ G}| = |{g StabG x : g ∈ G}|. Hence, |G · x| = [G : StabG x].

This theorem is most useful when this index is finite but it is true in general. We see some
applications of this theorem in the following results.

Theorem 1.2.7. Let G be a group and x ∈ G. Then the following statements hold.
1. |{gxg −1 : g ∈ G}| = [G : CG (x)], i.e., the number of conjugates of x is [G : CG (x)].
2. If G is finite, then the number of conjugates of x is a divisor of |G|.

Proof. It follows directly from the Orbit-Stabilizer Theorem if we consider the action of G on G
by conjugation.

Remark. For each x ∈ G,

|{gxg −1 : g ∈ G}| = 1 ⇔ {gxg −1 : g ∈ G} = {x} ⇔ ∀g ∈ G, gx = xg ⇔ x ∈ Z(G).

1.2. Group Actions 11

Corollary 1.2.8. [Class Equation] Let G be a finite group and let x1 , . . . , xs represent the conju-
gacy classes of G which contains more than one element. Then
s
X
|G| = |Z(G)| + [G : CG (xi )].
i=1

Now, let G act on the set of all subsets of G by conjugation, i.e., if Y ⊂ G, then g · Y = gY g −1 .
Under this action the stabilizer of Y is {g ∈ G : gY g −1 = Y } = NG (Y ), the normalizer of Y , and
the orbit of Y is {gY g −1 : g ∈ G}, the set of conjugates of Y . Thus, the number of conjugates
of Y is the index of the normalizer of Y . Hence, we have shown:

Theorem 1.2.9. Let G be a finite group and Y a subset of G. Then the number of conjugates of Y
is [G : NG (Y )] where NG (Y ) is the normalizer of Y . In particular, the number of conjugates of Y
divides the group order.

Remark. If H is a subgroup of G, then H ⊳ NG (H) < G. Hence, if G is finite, then the number of
conjugates of H is
[G : H]
[G : NG (H)] = ≤ [G : H].
[NG (H) : H]

Burnside’s theorem gives the number of orbits in X under the action of a finite group G.

Theorem 1.2.10. [Burnside] Let a finite group G act on a finite set X. For each g ∈ G, let
Xg = {x ∈ X : gx = x}, the set of points in X fixed by g. Then the number of orbits in X is

1 X
N= |Xg |.
|G|
g∈G

Proof. Let U be the subset of G × X defined by

U = {(g, x) ∈ G × X : gx = x}.

For h ∈ G, let
U (h) = U ∩ ({h} × X) = {(h, x) : x ∈ X and hx = x}.

For y ∈ X, let

U [y] = U ∩ (G × {y}) = {(g, y) : g ∈ G and gy = y} = (StabG {y}) × {y}.

S S
Now, U = g∈G U (g) = x∈X U [x] and these unions are “disjoint”. Note that for each g ∈ G,
|U (g)| = |Xg | and for each x ∈ X, |U [x]| = | StabG {x}| = [G : G · x] = |G|/|G · x|. Thus,

X X X X |G| X 1
|Xg | = |U (g)| = |U | = |U [x]| = = |G| = |G|N
|G · x| |G · x|
g∈G g∈G x∈X x∈X x∈X

as desired.

P
Corollary 1.2.11. Let a finite group G act transitively on a finite set X. Then |G| = g∈G |Xg |.
Moreover, if |X| > 1, then there exists a g ∈ G fixing no point of X.
12 1. Groups

P
Proof. Since G acts transitively on X, N = 1, and so |G| = g∈G |Xg |. Assume that |X| > 1 and
no g ∈ G fixing no point of X. Then ∀g ∈ G, ∃x ∈ X, gx = x which implies that |Xg | ≥ 1 for all
g ∈ G. Thus, X
|G| ≤ |Xg | = |G|.
g∈G

This forces that |Xg | = 1 for all g ∈ G. But |Xe | = |X| > 1, a contradiction. Hence, there exists a
g ∈ G fixing no point of X.
We have known from Lagrange’s theorem that the order of any subgroups of a group G is a
divisor of |G|. The next theorem implies that if |G| has a prime divisor p, then G has a subgroup
of order p. Its proof is another application of group actions.

Theorem 1.2.12. [Cauchy] Suppose G is a finite group and a prime p divides |G|. Then the
number of solutions of g p = e in G is a multiple of p. Hence, G contains an element of order p.

Proof. Consider the set Y = G × G × · · · × G (p copies) and let X = {(g1 , g2 , . . . , gp ) ∈ Y :

g1 g2 · · · gp = e}. Then |X| = |G|p−1 since gp = (g1 g2 . . . gp−1 )−1 . Let Rp = hρ2π/p i act on X by
ρ2π/p (g1 , g2 , . . . , gp ) = (g2 , g3 , . . . , gp , g1 ).
Note that the orbit of (g1 , g2 , . . . , gp ) ∈ X under this action has either
(a) length p, in case g1 , g2 , . . . , gp are not all equal, or
(b) length 1, in case g1 = g2 = · · · = gp = g, i.e., g p = e.
Thus, # of orbits of length 1 = # of solutions of g p = e in G. By Theorem 1.2.2 (2),
|G|p−1 = |X| = p(# of orbits of length p) + 1(# of orbits of length 1).
Since p divides |G|, it follows that |{g ∈ G : g p = e}| > 1 is a multiple of p.

Corollary 1.2.13. If G is a finite group and a prime p divides |G|, then G has a subgroup of
order p.

Exercises 1.2. 1. Let G act on S, H act on T and assume S ∩ T = ∅. Let U = S ∪ T and define
(g, h)s = gs and (g, h)t = ht for all g ∈ G, h ∈ H, s ∈ S, t ∈ T . Show that this gives an action of the
group G × H on U .
2. Let H and K be subgroups of a group G.
|H||K|
(a) If H and K are finite, then HK is a finite set and |HK| = .
|H ∩ K|
(b) For x and y in G, prove that xH ∩ yK is empty or is a coset of H ∩ K.
(c) Deduce from (b) that if H and K have finite index in G, then so does H ∩ K.
(d) If [G : H] and [G : K] are finite and relatively prime, prove that G = HK.
3. Let α be an automorphism of a finite group G which leaves only the identity fixed. Prove that
G = {x−1 α(x)|x ∈ G}.
4. Let a group G act on a set X transitively. Prove that
(a) ∀x, y ∈ X, ∃g ∈ G, gx = y, and
(b) ∀x, y ∈ X, ∃g ∈ G, gGx g −1 = Gy , i.e., allT
stabilizers are conjugate.
5. Let H be a subgroup of a group G and N = x∈G xHx−1 . Prove that
(a) N is a normal subgroup of G, and (b) if [G : H] is finite, then [G : N ] is finite.
6. Determine the number of conjugacy classes in a non-abelian group G of order p3 where p is a prime.
7. Let S and T be sets and let M (S, T ) denote the set of all functions of S into T . Let G be a finite group
acting on S. For each map f : S → T and x ∈ G define the map πx f : S → T by (πx f )(s) = f (x−1 s).
(a) Prove that x 7→ πx is an action of G on M (S, T ).
(b) Assume that S and T are finite. Let n(x) denote the number of orbits of the cyclic group hxi
on S. Prove that the number of orbits of G in M (S, T ) is equal to
1 X
|T |n(x) .
|G|
x∈G
1.3. Quotient Groups and Cyclic Groups 13

8. A group H is said to act on a group K by automorphisms if we have an action of H on K and for

every h ∈ H the map k 7→ hk of K is an automorphism. Suppose this is the case and let G be the
product set K × H. Define a binary operation in K × H by

(k1 , h1 )(k2 , h2 ) = (k1 (h1 k2 ), h1 h2 )

and define 1 = (1, 1) – the units of K and H, respectively. Verify that this defines a group such
that h 7→ (1, h) is a monomorphism of H into K × H and k 7→ (k, 1) is a monomorphism of K into
K × H whose image is a normal subgroup. This group is called a semi-direct product of K by H and
is denoted by K ⋊ H.

1.3 Quotient Groups and Cyclic Groups

This section contains a construction of a new group using a normal subgroup, called a quotient
group. We also work on an important kind of subgroups of G which are generated by a single
element. We conclude this section by studying the group of automorphisms of G.

1.3.1 Quotient Groups

Suppose G is any group and N is a normal subgroup of G. Then for any g ∈ G,

N = gN g −1 or N g = gN.

In other words, every left coset of N in G is also a right coset of N in G. If we have two left cosets
of N in G;
N x = {ax : a ∈ N } and N y = {by : b ∈ N },
then N xN y = {axby : a, b ∈ N } = N (xN )y = N (N x)y = N xy is again a left coset of N in G.
Thus
N xN y = N xy
defines a binary operation on the set G/N = {N x : x ∈ G} of left cosets of N in G.
S
Theorem 1.3.1. Suppose G is a group and N is a normal subgroup of G. Let G = N xα be a
decomposition of G as a disjoint union of left (or right) cosets. Then the binary operation

N xα N xβ = N xα xβ

makes the set of left cosets of N into a group, called the quotient or factor group of G by the
normal subgroup N . This group is denoted by G/N . The map π : G → G/N defined by

π(x) = N x

is a group homomorphism whose kernel is N , called the canonical projection.

Remarks. 1. If H is a subgroup of G which is not normal, then the set of left cosets of H
in G does not form a group in any natural way. For example, if G = S3 and H = h(12)i =
{(1), (12)}, then H is not normal in G and {H, H(13), H(23)} is not a group because

H(13)H(23) = {(13), (132)}{(23), (123)} = {(132), (12), (13), (1)}

which is not one of the cosets.

2. |G/N | = [G : N ], the index of N in G.
14 1. Groups

3. If G is abelian written additively, then

G/N = {N + x : x ∈ G}

and the binary operation on G/N is given by

(N + x) + (N + y) = N + (x + y)

for all x, y ∈ G.

We now present three group isomorphism theorems.

Theorem 1.3.2. [First Isomorphism Theorem] Suppose ϕ : G → H is a group homomorphism.

Then G/(ker ϕ) ∼
= im ϕ.

Proof. By Theorem 1.1.4, im ϕ is a subgroup of H and ker ϕ is a normal subgroup of G, and so

G/(ker ϕ) is a group. Let ϕ : G/ ker ϕ → im ϕ by ϕ : x(ker ϕ) 7→ ϕ(x). Then for all x, y ∈ G,

ϕ(x(ker ϕ)) = ϕ(y(ker ϕ)) ⇔ ϕ(x) = ϕ(y) ⇔ xy −1 ∈ ker ϕ ⇔ x(ker ϕ) = y(ker ϕ),

so ϕ is well defined and 1-1. In addition, for all x, y ∈ G,

ϕ(x(ker ϕ)y(ker ϕ)) = ϕ(xy(ker ϕ)) = ϕ(xy) = ϕ(x)ϕ(y) = ϕ(x(ker ϕ))ϕ(y(ker ϕ)).

Moreover, ϕ is clearly onto. Hence, ϕ is an isomorphism.

Examples 1.3.1. Z/nZ ∼

= Zn , Dn /Rn ∼
= Z2 , R/Z ∼
= S1 and GLn (F )/SLn (F ) ∼
= F r {0}.

θ / ϕ
Definition. Let G H / K be a sequence of group homomorphisms. We say that it is
exact at H if im θ = ker ϕ. A short exact sequence of groups is a sequence of groups and
homomorphisms
θ ϕ
1 /G /H /K /1

which is exact at G, H and K. That is, θ is 1-1, ϕ is onto and im θ = ker ϕ. Here, 1 stands for
the smallest group of order one.

Remark. If N is a normal subgroup of G, then

ι π
1 /N /G / G/N /1

is exact. Here ι denotes the inclusion map. On the other hand, if N ≤ G and

ι
1 /N /G /H /1

is exact, then N is normal in G and H ∼

= G/N . Thus short exact sequences are just another notation
for normal subgroups and factor groups.

Theorem 1.3.3. [Second Isomorphism Theorem] Suppose G is a group and H and N are sub-
groups of G, with N normal in G. Then HN = N H is a subgroup of G in which N is normal,
H ∩ N is normal in H and H/(H ∩ N ) ∼
= HN/N .
1.3. Quotient Groups and Cyclic Groups 15

Proof. Since N is normal in G, hN = N h for all h ∈ H, so HN ⊆ N H and N H ⊆ HN . Thus,

N H = HN . It is routine to show that N H is a subgroup of G. Since N E G, N E N H. The
theorem follows from exactness of the sequence

ι ϕ
1 /H ∩N /H / HN/N /1,

where the homomorphism ϕ : h 7→ hN for all h ∈ H and ker ϕ = {h ∈ H : hN = N } = {h ∈ H :

h ∈ N} = H ∩ N.

Remark. If H and N are not normal in G, then HN may not be a subgroup of G. E.g.,
in S3 , the subgroups H = {(1), (12)} and N = {(1), (13)} are not normal in S3 and HN =
{(1), (12), (13), (132)} is not a subgroup of S3 .

Theorem 1.3.4. [Third Isomorphism Theorem] Suppose G is a group and N is a normal sub-
group of G. Then the map
θ : H 7→ H/N
gives a 1-1 correspondence

{ subgroups of G containing N } ←→ { subgroups of G/N }.

This correspondence carries normal subgroups to normal subgroups. Moreover, if H is normal in G

containing a subgroup N , then
G/H ∼= (G/N )/(H/N ).

Proof. Let H1 and H2 be subgroups of G containing N and assume that H1 /N = H2 /N . Let

x ∈ H1 . Then N x ∈ H1 /N = H2 /N , so N x = N y for some y ∈ H2 . Thus, xy −1 ∈ N ⊆ H2 . Since
y ∈ H2 , x ∈ H2 . Hence, H1 ⊆ H2 . By symmetry, S H2 ⊆ H1 . Therefore, H1 = H2 and θ is 1-1.
Next, let H ≤ G/N . Then {N } ⊆ H. Choose H = H, the union of cosets in H. Thus, N ⊆ H.
Let x, y ∈ H. Then N x, N y ∈ H, so N xy −1 ∈ H which implies xy −1 ∈ H. Thus, H is a subgroup
of G containing N and H = H/N . Hence, θ is onto.
Assume that H is a normal subgroup of G containing N . Let g ∈ G and x ∈ H. Then
gxg −1 ∈ H, so gN xN g −1 N = gxg −1 N ∈ H/N . Hence, H/N is normal subgroup of G/N .
The final isomorphism follows from exactness of the sequence

ι ϕ
1 / H/N / G/N / G/H /1,

where the homomorphism ϕ : gN 7→ gH for all g ∈ G which is well defined because N ⊆ H, and
ker ϕ = {gN : g ∈ G and gH = H} = {gN : g ∈ H} = H/N .

Remark. The above theorem is useful for obtaining subgroups and normal subgroups of a quo-
tient group.

1.3.2 Cyclic Groups

We first recall some properties of integers.

Lemma 1.3.5. Let a and n be integers not both zero.

1. If d = min{ax + ny > 0 : x, y ∈ Z}, then d = gcd(a, n).
2. If gcd(a, n) = d, then ∃x, y ∈ Z, ax + ny = d.
3. gcd(a, n) = 1 ⇔ ∃x, y ∈ Z, ax + ny = 1.
16 1. Groups

Proof. (1) The given set contains a2 + n2 , so it is not empty and d exists by the well-ordering
principle. Then d = ax + ny > 0 for some x, y ∈ Z. We shall prove that d = gcd(a, n). By Division
Algorithm, ∃q, r ∈ Z, a = dq + r with 0 ≤ r ≤ d. If r > 0, then

0 < r = a − dq = a − (ax + ny)q = a(1 − xq) − nyq < d

which contradicts the minimality of d. Hence, r = 0 and d | n. Similarly, d | n. Since d = ax + ny,

gcd(a, n) | d, so gcd(a, n) ≤ d. But d | a and d | n, so d ≤ gcd(a, n). Hence, d = gcd(a, n). (2)
follows from (1) and (3) follows from (2). The converse of (3) is immediate.

Theorem 1.3.6. Let n ≥ 2 and Z× ×

n = {ā : gcd(a, n) = 1}. Then (Zn , ·) is an abelian group of
order φ(n), the Euler φ-function.

Proof. It follows from Lemma 1.3.5 (3).

Now we study cyclic subgroups of a group G. Recall that if G is a group and a ∈ G, then
hai = {am : m ∈ Z} and the order of a is |a| = |hai|.

Theorem 1.3.7. Let G be a group and a ∈ G. Then

1. ∀n ∈ N, an = e ⇒ hai = {e, a, a2 , . . . , an−1 }.
2. |a| is finite ⇔ ∃i, j ∈ Z(i 6= j ∧ ai = aj ) ⇔ ∃n ∈ N, an = e.
3. |a| is infinite ⇔ ∀i, j ∈ Z(i 6= j → ai 6= aj ) ⇔ hai ∼
= Z.
4. If G = hai is infinite, then a and a−1 are only two generators of G.
5. If G is finite, then |a| = min{n ∈ N : an = e} and hai = {e, a, a2 , . . . , a|a|−1 } ∼
= Z|a| .
n
6. ∀n ∈ Z, a = e ⇒ |a| divides n.
7. If G is finite, then a|G| = e.

Proof. (1)–(3) are clear.

(4) Assume that G = hai is infinite and am is a generator of G for some m ∈ Z. Then ham i = hai,
so a = (am )k for some k ∈ Z. Since |a| is infinite, mk = 1. Thus, m | 1, so m = ±1.
(5) Assume that G is finite. Then an = e for some n ∈ N. Choose n0 to be the smallest such n.
Thus, an0 = e. We shall show that hai = {e, a, a2 , . . . , an0 −1 }. Clearly, {e, a, a2 , . . . , an0 −1 } ⊆ hai.
Let j ∈ Z. Then j = n0 q + r for some q, r ∈ Z and 0 ≤ r < n0 , so aj = an0 q+r = ar ∈
{e, a, a2 , . . . , an0 −1 }. Hence, |a| = n0 = min{n ∈ N : an = e} and a|a| = e. Finally, an isomorphism
is given by aj 7→ j for all j ∈ Z.
(6) Let n ∈ Z and an = e. By Division Algorithm, n = |a|q + r for some q, r ∈ Z and 0 ≤ r < |a|.
If r > 0, then e = an = a|a|q+r = ar which contradicts the minimality of |a|. Hence, r = 0 and so
|a| divides n.
(7) By Lagrange, |a| divides |G|, so |G| = |a|q for some q ∈ Z. Then a|G| = a|a|q = e.

The above results for the group Z×

n yield famous results below.

Corollary 1.3.8. 1. [Euler] If a ∈ Z and gcd(a, n) = 1, then aφ(n) ≡ 1 (mod n).

2. [Fermat] If p is a prime, then ap ≡ a (mod p) for all a ∈ Z.

Proof. (1) Apply the above theorem to G = Z× n.

(2) If gcd(a, p) = 1, then by (1), a p−1 ≡ 1 (mod p), so ap ≡ a (mod p). If gcd(a, p) > 1, then
p p
p | a, so p | (a − a). Hence, a ≡ a (mod p) for all a ∈ Z.

Theorem 1.3.9. Any two cyclic groups of the same orders (finite or infinite) are isomorphic.

Proof. Assume that G is cyclic. Then G = hai for some a ∈ G. By Theorem 1.3.7, if G is infinite,
then G ∼
= Z, and if G is finite, then |G| = |a| and G = {e, a, . . . , a|a|−1 } ∼
= Z|a| .
1.3. Quotient Groups and Cyclic Groups 17

Next, we study subgroups of a cyclic group.

Theorem 1.3.10. Let G be a cyclic group generated by a, and let H be a subgroup of G. Then H is
also a cyclic group generated by ak where k = min{m ∈ N : am ∈ H} or H = {e}. Consequently,
every subgroup of a cyclic group is cyclic.

Proof. Since ak ∈ H, hak i ⊆ H. Let x ∈ H. Then x ∈ G, so x = at for some t ∈ Z. By Division

Algorithm, t = kq + r for some q, r ∈ Z and 0 ≤ r < k. Thus,

ar = at−kq = at a−kq = x(ak )−q ∈ H.

But r < k, so r = 0. Hence, x = akq = (ak )q ∈ hak i.

Corollary 1.3.11. All distinct subgroups of Z are kZ = {kq : q ∈ Z} where k ∈ N ∪ {0}.

Theorem 1.3.12. Let G be a finite cyclic group of order n. Then G has exactly one subgroup H of
order d for each divisor d of n, and no other subgroups. Moreover, if G is generated by a, then H is
generated by an/d .

Proof. Let d | n. Since (an/d )d = e, |an/d | ≤ d. If |an/d | = r < d, then anr/d = e and nr/d < n
which contradicts |a| = n. Thus, |an/d | = d. Let H be a subgroup of G of order d. If d = 1, then
H = {e}. Assume that d > 1. By Theorem 1.3.10, H = hak i, where k = min{m ∈ N : am ∈ H}.
Since |H| = d, (ak )d = e, so n | kd which implies nd | k. Thus, k = nd q for some q ∈ Z. Hence,
ak = (an/d )q ∈ han/d i. It follows that H ⊆ han/d i. However, |H| = d = |han/d i|, so H = han/d i.

Example 1.3.2. All subgroups of the cyclic group G = hai of order 12 are shown in the following
diagram.
hai
② ❉❉
②② ❉❉
②② ❉❉
② ❉❉
②②
ha2 i ha3 i
❊❊
②② ❊❊ ③③
②②② ❊❊ ③③③
② ❊❊ ③
②② ③③
ha4 i ha6 i
❊❊
❊❊ ②②
❊❊ ②②②
❊❊ ②
②②
ha12 i

The order of an element in a cyclic group and its generators are studied in the next theorem.

Theorem 1.3.13. Let G be a finite cyclic group of order n generated by a and m ∈ Z. Then
1. ham i = had i, where d = gcd(m, n).
n
2. |am | = .
gcd(m, n)
3. am is a generator of G ⇔ gcd(m, n) = 1, and so G contains precisely φ(n) elements of
order n.

Proof. (1) Since d | m, ham i ⊆ had i. Since d = gcd(m, n), d = mx + ny for some x, y ∈ Z, so

ad = amx+ny = amx any = amx ∈ ham i.

(2) |am | = |ham i| = |had i| = |han/(n/d) i| = nd from Theorem 1.3.12.

(3) ham i = G ⇔ |am | = n ⇔ nd = n ⇔ d = 1.
18 1. Groups

Remark. Since Zn = h1i and m · 1 = m, we have hmi = Zn ⇔ gcd(m, n) = 1 ⇔ m ∈ Z×

n.

Theorem 1.3.14. Let G be a group and a ∈ G. Then |a| = n ⇔ (∀k ∈ N, ak = e ⇔ n|k).

Proof. Assume that ∀k ∈ N, ak = e ⇔ n | k. Since n | n, an = e. Let k ∈ N be such that ak = e.

Then n | k, so n ≤ k. Hence, |a| = n. Another direction follows from Theorem 1.3.7 (6).

Recall that an automorphism of a group G is an isomorphism on G.

Definition. The set of all automorphisms of a group G is denoted by Aut G and is called the
automorphism group of G.

Theorem 1.3.15. 1. With group operation composition of functions, Aut G is a group.

2. Each g ∈ G determines an automorphism φg : G → G defined by

φg (x) = gxg −1 for all x ∈ G,

and φg is called an inner automorphism. The subgroup of Aut G consisting of the {φg : g ∈
G} is called the inner automorphism group of G and is denoted by Inn G.
3. The map θ : g 7→ φg is a group homomorphism from G into Aut G.
4. The kernel of θ is Z(G), the center of G, and the image of θ is Inn G. Consequently,

G/Z(G) ∼
= Inn G ≤ Aut G.

= Z2 and Aut Zn ∼
Example 1.3.3. Aut Z ∼ = Z×
n.

Proof. Let ϕ ∈ Aut Z. Note that for each k ∈ N, ϕ(k) = ϕ(k · 1) = ϕ(1 · · + 1}) = k · ϕ(1)
| + ·{z
k
and ϕ(−k) = −ϕ(k) = −(k · ϕ(1)), so ϕ is completely determined by ϕ(1). Since ϕ is onto,
im ϕ = ϕ(1)Z = Z. Thus, ϕ(1) | 1, so ϕ(1) = ±1. Hence, Aut Z = {±id} ∼
= Z2 .
Let ϕ ∈ Aut Zn . Similarly, ϕ is completely determined by ϕ(1). Since ϕ is onto, im ϕ =
hϕ(1)i = Zn . By Remark after Theorem 1.3.13, ϕ(1) ∈ Z× ∼ ×
n . Hence, Aut Zn = Zn with isomor-
phism ϕ 7→ ϕ(1).

Exercises 1.3. 1. Prove that if G is a group for which G/Z(G) is cyclic, then G is abelian.
2. Let G be a group of order 2k where k is odd. Show that G contains S a subgroup of index 2.
3. Let H be a proper subgroup of a finite group G. Show that G 6= g∈G gHg −1 .
4. Let G be a group and a ∈ G. If hai ⊳ G and H < hai, prove that H is normal in G.
5. Let G be a group and N a subgroup contained in the center of G. Suppose that G/N is cyclic. Prove
that G is necessarily abelian.
6. Let G be a group. If a, b ∈ G are of finite order and ab = ba, prove that |ab| = lcm(|a|, |b|).
7. Let m and n be integers. Prove the following statements.
(a) mZ + nZ = dZ and mZ ∩ nZ = lZ where d = gcd(m, n) and l = lcm(m, n).
(b) If gcd(m, n) = 1, then Zmn ∼ = Zm × Zn . This is called the “Chinese remainder theorem”. Is the
converse true?
8. Let G be a group, K a normal subgroup of G of index r, and let g ∈ G be an element of order n.
Prove that if r and n are relatively prime, then g ∈ K.
9. Prove the following statements.
(a) If gcd(m, n) = 1, then Aut(Zm × Zn ) ∼ = Z×m × Zn .
×
∼
(b) Aut(Zp × Zp ) = GL2 (Zp ).
10. Prove Theorem 1.3.15.
11. Let H < G. Prove that CG (H) ⊳ NG (H) and NG (H)/CG (H) is isomorphic to a subgroup of Aut H.
12. If G is a group for which Aut(G) = {1}, prove that |G| ≤ 2.
1.4. The Symmetric Group 19

1.4 The Symmetric Group

In this section, we study the symmetric group on n letters, Sn . Recall that Sn is the group of
permutations (1-1 and onto maps) on {1, 2, . . . , n} under composition. Its order is n!.

Definition. A permutation γ of {1, 2, . . . , n} which permutes a sequence of distinct elements

i1 , i2 , . . . , ir , r > 1, cyclically in the sense that

γ(i1 ) = i2 , γ(i2 ) = i3 , . . . , γ(ir−1 ) = ir , and γ(ir ) = i1

and fixed (that is, leaves unchanged) the other numbers in {1, 2, . . . , n} is called a cycle or an
r-cycle. We denote this as
γ = (i1 i2 . . . ir ).
It is clear that we can equally well write

γ = (i2 i3 . . . ir i1 ) = (i3 i4 . . . ir i1 i2 ), etc.

Definition. Two cycles γ and γ ′ are said to be disjoint if their symbols contain no common
letters.

In this case, it is clear that any number moved by one of these transformations is fixed by the
other, i.e., ∀i, γ(i) 6= i ⇒ γ ′ (i) = i. Hence, if i is any number such that γ(i) 6= i, then γγ ′ (i) = γ(i),
and since also γ 2 (i) 6= γ ′ (i), γ ′ γ(i). Similarly, if γ ′ (i) 6= i, then γ ′ γ(i) = γ ′ (i) = γγ ′ (i). Also if
γ(i) = i = γ ′ (i), then γγ ′ (i) = γ ′ γ(i). Thus γγ ′ = γ ′ γ, that is, we have proved (1) of the following
theorem.

Theorem 1.4.1. 1. Any two disjoint cycles commute.

2. If γ = (i1 i2 . . . ir ) is an r-cycle, then the order of γ is r.
3. If α = (i1 i2 . . . ir1 )(j1 j2 . . . jr2 ) . . . (k1 k2 . . . krs ) is a product of disjoint cycles, then the order
of α is the least common multiple of r1 , r2 , . . . , rs .

Proof. For (2), clearly, γ r = (1). Let 1 ≤ s < r. Then γ s (i1 ) = is+1 6= i1 , so γ s 6= (1). (3) follows
from (2) and the fact that |ab| = lcm(|a|, |b|) for all a, b ∈ G with ab = ba (see Exercises 1.3).

It is convenient to extend the definition of cycles and the cycle notation to 1-cycles where we
adopt the convention that for any i, (i) is the identity mapping. With this convention, we can see
that:

Theorem 1.4.2. Every permutation is a product of disjoint cycles. Moreover, the product is unique
up to rearranging its cycles and cyclically permuting the numbers within each cycle.

Proof. Let σ ∈ Sn . If σ = (1), we are done. Assume that σ 6= 1. Let G = hσi act on {1, 2, . . . , n
naturally as in Example 1.2.1 (1). Let B1 , B2 , . . . , Br be distinct orbits of {1, 2, . . . , n} under this
action. For each j ∈ {1, 2, . . . , r}, we define the cycle µi by
(
σ(x), if x ∈ Bi ;
µi (x) =
x, if x ∈ {1, 2, . . . , n} r Bi .

Since Bi , i = 1, 2, . . . , r, are disjoint, µi are disjoint cycles, and clearly, σ = µ1 µ2 . . . µr .

Remark. The above two theorems tell us how to find the order of an element in Sn .
Next, we shall discuss the cycle structure and the conjugacy class of a permutation.
20 1. Groups

Lemma 1.4.3. If α ∈ Sn is a permutation, then

α(i1 i2 . . . ir )α−1 = (α(i1 )α(i2 ) . . . α(ir )).

Proof. For x ∈ {1, 2, . . . , n},

(
α(im+1 mod r ), if x = im mod r ;
α(i1 i2 . . . ir )(x) =
α(x), if x ∈
/ {i1 , i2 , . . . , ir }
(
α(im+1 mod r ), if α(x) = α(im mod r );
=
α(x), if α(x) ∈
/ {α(i1 ), α(i2 ), . . . , α(ir )}
= (α(i1 )α(i2 ) . . . α(ir ))(α(x)).

Hence, α(i1 i2 . . . ir ) = (α(i1 )α(i2 ) . . . α(ir ))α.

Definition. If σ ∈ Sn is the product of disjoint cycles of lengths r1 , r2 , . . . , rs with r1 ≤ r2 ≤

. . . ≤ rs (including its 1-cycles) then the integers r1 , r2 , . . . , rs are called the cycle structure
of σ.

Definition. A partition of a positive integer n is any nondecreasing sequence of positive inte-

gers whose sum is n.

For example, 5 has seven partitions, namely, 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1, 1 + 1 + 1 + 2, 1 + 2 + 2, 1 + 1 + 3,

1 + 4, 2 + 3 and 5.

Theorem 1.4.4. Two elements of Sn are conjugate if and only if they have the same cycle structure.
The number of conjugacy classes of Sn equals the number of partitions of n.

Proof. Assume that σ and τ are conjugate. Then τ = ασα−1 for some τ ∈ Sn . Write

σ = (i1 i2 . . . ir1 )(j1 j2 . . . jr2 ) . . . (k1 k2 . . . krs )

as a product of disjoint cycles. Thus,

τ = ασα−1 = α(i1 i2 . . . ir1 )α−1 α(j1 j2 . . . jr2 )α−1 α(k1 k2 . . . krs )α−1
= (α(i1 )α(i2 ) . . . α(ir1 ))(α(j1 )α(j2 ) . . . α(jr2 ))(α(k1 )α(k2 ) . . . α(krs )).

Hence, σ and τ have the same cycle structure.

Conversely, suppose that σ and τ have the same cycle structure written as a product of s
disjoint cycles (including 1-cycles) as

σ = (a1 a2 . . . ar1 )(ar1 +1 ar1 +2 . . . ar1 +r2 ) . . . (ar1 +r2 +···+rs−1 +1 . . . an−1 an )

and
τ = (b1 b2 . . . br1 )(br1 +1 br1 +2 . . . br1 +r2 ) . . . (br1 +r2 +···+rs−1 +1 . . . bn−1 bn ).
Define α ∈ Sn by α(ai ) = bi for all i ∈ {1, 2, . . . , n}. Then ασα−1 = τ .

Example 1.4.1. The number of
conjugacy classes of S5 is 7 and

|{α(12)(345)α−1 : α ∈ S5 }| = 52 (3 − 1)! = 20.
Example 1.4.2. The Klein group V4 = {(1), (12)(34), (13)(24), (14)(23)} is normal in S4 because
V4 contains of all products of disjoint 2-cycles and so ∀α ∈ S4 , αV4 α−1 = V4 by Theorem 1.4.4.
Moreover, since the group {(1), (12)(34)} is of index two in V4 , it is normal in V4 by Theorem
1.2.3. However, {(1), (12)(34)} is not normal in S4 . Thus, normality of subgroups is not transitive.
1.4. The Symmetric Group 21

Corollary 1.4.5. If n ≥ 3, then the center of Sn is trivial, i.e., Z(Sn ) = {(1)}.

Proof. We wish to prove that ∀α ∈ Sn [∀β ∈ Sn , βαβ −1 = α ⇒ α = (1)]. By Theorem 1.4.4,

∀α ∈ Sn [α 6= (1) ⇒ |{βαβ −1 : β ∈ Sn }| > 1]. By Corollary 1.2.8,∀α ∈ Sn [|{βαβ −1 : β ∈ Sn }| >
1⇒α∈ / Z(Sn )]. Hence, let α ∈ Z(Sn ). Then |{βαβ −1 : α ∈ Sn }| = 1, so α = (1).

To define an important subgroup of Sn , namely the alternating group, we shall need some
results on 2-cycles.

Definition. A cycle of the form (ab), where a 6= b, is called a transposition.

It is easy to verify that

(i1 i2 . . . ir ) = (i1 ir ) . . . (i1 i3 )(i1 i2 ),
a product of r − 1 transpositions. It follows that any α ∈ Sn is a product of transpositions. Also, a
transposition (ab) has order two in Sn .

Theorem 1.4.6. 1. (1) is always a product of even number of transpositions.

2. If α ∈ Sn is written as a product of transpositions, then either the number of transpositions
in any product is always odd or always even.

Proof. (1) Assume

(1) = (x1 y1 )(x2 y2 ) . . . (xk yk ) = (1x1 )(1y1 )(1x1 )(1x2 )(1y2 )(1x2 ) . . . (1xk )(1yk )(1xk )

with xi < yi for all i ∈ {1, 2, . . . , k}. Consider any (1u), u > 1, in the right hand side. Since
the opposite side is (1), (1u) must occur twice (or even number of times) in the right hand side.
Note that (1 7→ u and u 7→ 1) will give u 7→ u. Thus each transposition in the right hand side
occurs even numbers of times, which implies that the right hand side should have even number
of transpositions. Hence, k is even.
(2) Assume
α = (x1 y1 )(x2 y2 ) . . . (xk yk ) = (w1 z1 )(w2 z2 ) . . . (wl zl )
for some xi 6= yi , wj 6= zj and k, l ∈ N. Since |(wi zi )| = 2 for all i,

(x1 y1 )(x2 y2 ) . . . (xk yk )(wl zl )−1 (wl−1 zl−1 )−1 . . . (w1 z1 )−1 = (1)
(x1 y1 )(x2 y2 ) . . . (xk yk )(wl zl )(wl−1 zl−1 ) . . . (w1 z1 ) = (1),

so k + l is even. Hence, k and l have the same parity.

The previous theorem leads to the following definition.

Definition. We call α even or odd according as α factors as a product of an even or an odd

number of transpositions.

Remarks. Let α, β ∈ Sn .
1. αβ is even ⇔ α and β have the same parity.
2. Since αα−1 = (1) which is even, α and α−1 have the same parity.

Theorem 1.4.7. Let n > 1. The set An of all even permutations forms a normal subgroup of Sn of
index two. It is called the alternating group of degree n and |An | = n!/2.
22 1. Groups

Proof. By Theorem 1.4.6, (1) is even. It is clear that the product of even permutations is even.
Since a transposition has order two, the inverse of an even permutation is even. Hence, An is a
subgroup of Sn . Since n > 1, let (ab) be a transposition in Sn . Clearly, (ab) is an odd permutation.
We will show that Sn = An ∪ (ab)An . Let α ∈ Sn . If α is even, then α ∈ An . On the other hand,
assume that α is odd. Then (ab)α is even, so (ab)α ∈ An , i.e., α ∈ (ab)An . Thus, [Sn : An ] = 2. In
addition, since α and α−1 have the same parity, αAn α−1 ⊆ An . Hence, An is normal in Sn .

Corollary 1.4.8. Let a group G act on a finite set X, and assume that some element h ∈ G induces
an odd permutation on X. Then there exists a normal subgroup N of G with [G : N ] = 2 and
h∈/ N.

Proof. Consider the diagram

θ π
G / S(X) / S(X)/A(X) ,

where A(X) is the alternating group of even permutations on X, θ : g → φg and π is the canonical
map. Since φh is an odd permutation, π ◦ θ is onto. Choose N = ker π ◦ π. Then N ⊳ G and
G/N ∼= S(X)/A(X). Thus, [G : N ] = [S(X) : A(X)] = 2. Since (π ◦ θ)(h) = φh A(X) 6= A(X), we
have g ∈
/ N.

Finally, we talk about the simplicity of An .

Definition. A group is simple if it has no nontrivial normal subgroup.

For example, Zp is simple for all primes p.

Corollary 1.4.9. Let |G| = 2m, where m is odd. Then G has a normal subgroup of order m. In
particular, if m > 1, then G is not simple.

Proof. Since |G| is even, let g be an element of order two in G. Let G act on G by left multiplication
θ
and onsider G → S(G). Since the action is faithful, θ is 1-1, so |θ(g)| = 2. Thus, θ(g) = φg is
an odd permutation. By the previous corollary, there exists a normal subgroup N of G such that
[G : N ] = 2. Hence, G is not simple.

Example 1.4.3. Since the Klein group V4 = {(1), (12)(34), (13)(24), (14)(23)} is normal in A4 , it
follows that A4 is not simple.

In general, we have the next theorem.

Theorem 1.4.10. An is simple for all n 6= 4.

Proof. Clearly, A2 and A3 are simple. For n ≥ 5, we give a step-by-step guideline in the last
question of Exercises 1.4.

Corollary 1.4.11. If n 6= 4, then the only normal subgroups of Sn are {(1)}, An and Sn .

Exercises 1.4. 1. Prove that A4 is the only subgroup of S4 of order 12.

2. Prove that A4 has no subgroup of order six.
3. Determine all normal subgroups of S4 .
4. Find the largest positive integer n such that S10 has a permutation of order n.
1.5. Sylow Theorems 23

5. The exponent of a finite group G is the smallest positive integer n such that g n = 1 for all g ∈ G.
Find the exponent of S30 , the symmetric group on 30 letters.
6. Show that if H is any subgroup of Sn , n ≥ 2, then either all permutations in H are even or exactly
half are even.
7. Let G be a group of order 360 having a maximal subgroup isomorphic to A5 . Prove that G ∼ = A6 .
8. Prove that An is simple for n ≥ 5, following the steps and hints given.
(a) Show An contains every 3-cycle if n ≥ 3.
(b) Show An is generated by the 3-cycles for n ≥ 3. [Hint. Note that (a, c)(a, b) = (a, b, c) and
(a, b)(c, d) = (a, c, b)(a, c, d).]
(c) Let r and s be fixed elements of {1, 2, . . . , n} for n ≥ 3. Show that An is generated by the n
“special” 3-cycles of the form (r, s, i) for 1 ≤ i ≤ n. [Hint. Show every 3-cycle is the product of
“special” 3-cycles by computing

(r, s, i)2 , (r, s, j)(r, s, i)2 , (r, s, j)2 (r, s, i) and (r, s, i)2 (r, s, k)(r, s, j)2 (r, s, i).

Observe that these products give all possible types of 3-cycles.]

(d) Let N be a normal subgroup of An for n ≥ 3. Show that if N contains a 3-cycle, then N = An .
[Hint. Show that (r, s, i) ∈ N implies that (r, s, j) ∈ N for j = 1, 2, . . . , n by computing

((r, s)(i, j))(r, s, i)2 ((r, s)(i, j))−1 .]

(e) Let N be a nontrivial normal subgroup of An for n ≥ 5. Show that one of the following cases
must hold, and conclude in each case that N = An .
Case 1. N contains a 3-cycle.
Case 2. N contains a product of disjoint cycles, at least one of which has length greater
than 3. [Hint. Suppose N contains the disjoint product σ = µ(a1 , a2 , . . . , ar ). Show that
σ −1 (a1 , a2 , a3 )σ(a1 , a2 , a3 )−1 is in N , and compute it.]
Case 3. N contains a disjoint product of the form σ = µ(a4 , a5 , a6 )(a1 , a2 , a3 ). [Hint. Show that
σ −1 (a1 , a2 , a4 )σ(a1 , a2 , a4 )−1 is in N , and compute it.]
Case 4. N contains a disjoint product of the form σ = µ(a1 , a2 , a3 ) where µ is a product of
disjoint 2−cycles. [Hint. Show σ 2 ∈ N and compute it.]
Case 5. N contains a disjoint product σ of the form σ = µ(a3 , a4 )(a1 , a2 ), where µ is a product
of an even number of disjoint 2−cycles.
[Hint. Show that σ −1 (a1 , a2 , a3 )σ(a1 , a2 , a3 )−1 is in N , and compute it to deduce that α =
(a2 , a4 )(a1 , a3 ) is in N . Using n ≥ 5 for the first time, find i ∈ {1, 2, . . . , n}, where i 6=
a1 , a2 , a3 , a4 . Let β = (a1 , a3 , i). Show that β −1 αβα ∈ N , and compute it.]

1.5 Sylow Theorems

We know the order of a subgroup of a finite group G must divide |G|. If |G| is cyclic (even only
abelian), then there exist subgroups of every order dividing |G|. A natural question is: If k divides
|G| is there always a subgroup of G of order k? A little experimenting shows that this is not so. For
example, the alternating group A4 , whose order is 12, contain no subgroup of order six. Moreover,
An for n ≥ 5 is simple, that is, contains no normal subgroup 6= 1, An . Since any subgroup of index
two is normal, it follows that An , n ≥ 5, contains no subgroup of order n!/4.

1.5.1 Sylow p-subgroups

The main positive result of the type we are discussing was discovered by Sylow. Its proof provides
us another application of action of a group on a set. Unless specified otherwise, p denotes a prime.

Definition. A group G is said to be a p-group if |a| is a power of p for all a ∈ G.

Corollary 1.5.1. Let G be a finite group. Then G is a p-group ⇔ |G| is a power of p.

24 1. Groups

Proof. It follows from Lagrange theorem and Cauchy theorem.

Remark. Let P and Q be subgroups of G. If P is a p-group and Q is a q-group, where p and q are
distinct primes, then P ∩ Q = {e}.

Theorem 1.5.2. Let G be a finite p-group and |G| > 1. Then the following statements hold.
1. |Z(G)| > 1.
2. If |G| = p2 , then G is abelian.

Proof. By Corollary 1.5.1, |G| = pl for some l ∈ N. Recall from Corollary 1.2.8 that
s
X s
X
−1
|G| = |Z(G)| + |{gxi g : g ∈ G}| = |Z(G)| + [G : CG (xi )],
i=1 i=1

where x1 , . . . , xs represent the conjugacy classes of G which contains more than one element.
Since [G : CG (xi )] = |G|/|CG (xi )| > 1 for all i and |G| = pl , p divides |{gxi g −1 : g ∈ G}| for all
i ∈ {1, 2, . . . , s}. Hence, p | |Z(G)|, so |Z(G)| > 1. This proves (1). For the second part, assume
that |G| = p2 . We know that Z(G) is a normal subgroup of G and |Z(G)| > 1. By Lagrange
Theorem, |Z(G)| = p or |Z(G)| = p2 . If |Z(G)| = p2 , we have Z(G) = G and so G is abelian.
Suppose that |Z(G)| = p. Then G/Z(G) is of order p and so a cyclic group. This implies that G is
abelian.

Lemma 1.5.3. Let G be a group of order pn , n ∈ N.

If G acts on a finite set X and X0 = {x ∈ X : gx = x for all g ∈ G}, then |X0 | ≡ |X| mod p.

Proof. We observe first that X0 = {x ∈ X : |G · x| = 1}. Let x1 , . . . , xs represent the orbits of X

which contains more than one element. Then
s
X
|X| = |X0 | + |G · xi |.
i=1

By Orbit-Stabilizer Theorem, for each i ∈ {1, 2, . . . , s}, 1 < |G · xi | = [G : StabG xi ] which is

divisible by p. Hence, |X0 | ≡ |X| mod p as desired.

Lemma 1.5.4. Let G be a finite group and H, P ≤ G. If H is a p-group, then

1. |{xP : x ∈ G and H ⊆ xP x−1 }| ≡ [G : P ] mod p,
2. [NG (H) : H] ≡ [G : H] mod p, and
3. if p | [G : H], then p | [NG (H) : H] and NG (H) 6= H.

Proof. Let X = {xP : x ∈ G} and let H act on X by h · xP = hxP for all x ∈ G and h ∈ H.
Clearly, |X| = [G : P ] and

X0 = {xP : x ∈ G and hxP = xP for all h ∈ H}

= {xP : x ∈ G and x−1 hx ∈ P for all h ∈ H}
= {xP : x ∈ G and x−1 Hx ⊆ P } = {xP : x ∈ G and H ⊆ xP x−1 },

so |{xP : x ∈ G and H ⊆ xP x−1 }| ≡ [G : P ] mod p by Lemma 1.5.3. Furthermore, if P = H, we

have
X0 = {xH : x ∈ G and H ⊆ xHx−1 }.
Since ∀x ∈ G, |xHx−1 | = |H| and H is finite, we have

|X0 | = |{xH : x ∈ G and x−1 Hx = H}| = |{xH : x ∈ NG (H)}| = [NG (H) : H],

so [NG (H) : H] ≡ [G : H] mod p . The final result clearly follows from (2).
1.5. Sylow Theorems 25

Theorem 1.5.5. [First Sylow Theorem] Let G be a group of order pn m where n ≥ 1 and p does
not divide m. Then the following statements hold.
1. G contains a subgroup of order pi for all 1 ≤ i ≤ n.
2. For each i, where 1 ≤ i < n, every subgroup H of G of order pi is a normal subgroup of a
subgroup of order pi+1 .

Proof. Since p divides |G|, by Cauchy theorem, G has a subgroup H1 of order p. Assume that
k ∈ {1, 2, . . . , n − 1} and G has a subgroup Hk of order pk . Then the index [G : Hk ] = pn−k m and
n − k ≥ 1. By Lemma 1.5.4, p divides [NG (Hk ) : Hk ] = |NG (Hk )/Hk |. Again, by Cauchy theorem,
NG (Hk )/Hk has a subgroup H of order p. By the third isomorphism theorem, H = Hk+1 /Hk for
some subgroup Hk+1 of NG (Hk ) containing Hk . Moreover, Hk ⊳ Hk+1 and |Hk+1 | = |H||Hk | =
p pk = pk+1 . Hence, there are subgroups H1 , H2 , . . . , Hn of G such that |Hi | = pi for i = 1, 2, . . . , n
and H1 ⊳ H2 ⊳ · · · ⊳ Hn .

Definition. A maximal p-subgroup of a group G is called a Sylow p-subgroup of G.

By Zorn’s lemma, we have the following statements.

1. A Sylow p-subgroup of a group G always exists and it may be trivial.
2. Every p-subgroup of a group G is contained in a Sylow p-subgroup of G.
By Corollary 1.5.1 and Theorem 1.5.5, if G is a finite group and p is a prime such that p divides
|G|, then G has a Sylow p-subgroup of order pn k|G|. (Here, pn k|G| means n is the highest power
of p dividing |G|.) That is, [G : P ] is not divisible by p. Moreover, we have:

Corollary 1.5.6. Let G be a group of order pn m where n ≥ 1 and p does not divide m.
1. G has a Sylow p-subgroup of order pn .
2. For H < G, H is a Sylow p-subgroup of G ⇔ |H| = pn .
3. Every conjugate of a Sylow p-subgroup of G is a Sylow p-subgroup of G.
4. If P is the only one Sylow p-subgroup of G, then P is normal in G.

Proof. (1) and (2) follow from the definition and the above discussion. Since a conjugate of a
subgroup of G is of the same order as the subgroup, (2) implies (3). Finally, (4) follows from
(3).

The second and third Sylow theorems determine all Sylow p-subgroups and possible numbers
of Sylow p-subgroups. Also, they give the converse of the above results.

Theorem 1.5.7. [Second Sylow Theorem] Let G be a finite group.

1. If P is a Sylow p-subgroup of G and H is a p-subgroup of G, then H ⊆ xP x−1 for some
x ∈ G.
2. Any two Sylow p-subgroups of G are conjugate.

Proof. By Lemma 1.5.4 |{xP : x ∈ G and H ⊆ xP x−1 }| ≡ [G : P ] mod p. Since P is a Sylow

p-subgroup of G, p ∤ [G : P ], so {xP : x ∈ G and H ⊆ xP x−1 } = 6 ∅. Thus, there exists an x ∈ G
such that H ⊆ xP x−1 .
Next, we let P1 and P2 be Sylow p-subgroups of G. Then there exists an x ∈ G such that
P1 ⊆ xP2 x−1 . But |P1 | = |P2 | = |xP2 x−1 | and G is finite, P1 = xP2 x−1 .

Corollary 1.5.8. Let G be a finite group and let P be a Sylow p-subgroup of G.

1. {xP x−1 : x ∈ G} is the set of all Sylow p-subgroups of G.
2. The number of Sylow p-subgroups of G is [G : NG (P )] and it divides [G : P ] and |G|.
3. P is normal in G ⇔ P is the only one Sylow p-subgroup of G.
26 1. Groups

For a finite group G and a prime p divides |G|, we write np (G) for the number of Sylow
p-subgroups of G.

Theorem 1.5.9. [Third Sylow Theorem] If G is a finite group and a prime p divides |G|, then
np (G) ≡ 1 mod p.

Proof. Let P be a Sylow p-subgroup of G. Then the set X = {xP x−1 : x ∈ G} consists of all
Sylow p-subgroups of G. Let P act on X by conjugation, namely, (g, xP x−1 ) 7→ gxP x−1 g −1 for
all g ∈ P and x ∈ G. Since gP g −1 = P for all g ∈ P , P ∈ X0 . Let Q ∈ X0 . Then gQg −1 = Q
for all g ∈ P , so P ⊆ NG (Q). Since P and Q are Sylow p-subgroups of NG (Q) and Q is normal
in NG (Q), P = Q by the uniqueness of normal Sylow p-subgroup. This proves X0 = {P }. By
Lemma 1.5.3, we have np (G) = |X| ≡ |X0 | = 1 mod p as desired.

1.5.2 Applications of Sylow Theorems

Here, we present some applications of Sylow theorems on a finite group.

Theorem 1.5.10. Let G be a finite group. If P is a Sylow p-subgroup of G, then

NG (NG (P )) = NG (P ).

Proof. Since P ⊳ NG (P ), P is the only Sylow p-subgroup of NG (P ). Let x ∈ NG (NG (P )). Then
xNG (P )x−1 = NG (P ). Since P ⊆ NG (P ), xP x−1 ⊆ NG (P ). Thus, xP x−1 = P since xP x−1 is a
Sylow p-subgroup of G. Hence, x ∈ NG (P ).

Theorem 1.5.11. Let G be a group of order pq where p and q are primes and p < q. Then G is a
cyclic group, or G has q Sylow p-subgroups and p | (q − 1).

Proof. Since the number of Sylow p-subgroups divides |G| = pq, it is 1, p, q or pq. But this number
is ≡ 1 mod p, so it is 1 or q. If G has q Sylow p-subgroups, then we are done. Assume that G
has only one Sylow p-subgroup, say P . Then P is normal in G. Consider the number of Sylow
q-subgroups of G. It is again 1, p, q or pq, and ≡ 1 mod q, so the only possibility is 1 since p < q.
Thus, G also has a unique Sylow q-subgroup, say Q, and so Q is normal in G. Since the orders of
P and Q are prime, both P and Q are cyclic. Let a and b be generators of P and Q, respectively.
Note that aba−1 b−1 ∈ P ∩ Q = {e}. Thus, ab = ba, so |ab| = pq = |G|. Hence, G = habi.

Example 1.5.1. There can be no simple groups of order 200 and of order 280.

Proof. Let H be a group of order 200. Let P be a Sylow 5-subgroup of H. Then n5 (H) divides
[H : P ] = 8 and n5 (H) ≡ 1 (mod 5), so n5 (H) = 1. Hence, P is normal in H.
Next, let G be a group of order 280. By Corollary 1.5.8 and Theorem 1.5.9, we have n2 (G) =
1, 5, 7 or 35, n5 (G) = 1 or 56 and n7 (G) = 1 or 8. If n5 (G) = 1 or n7 (G) = 1, we are done. Assume
that n5 (G) = 56 and n7 (G) = 8. Then we have 56 · 4 = 224 elements of order 5, and 8 · 6 = 48
elements of order 7. Hence, G has a unique Sylow 2-subgroup.

Example 1.5.2. Every group G of order 12 that is not isomorphic with A4 contains an element of
order 6.
1.5. Sylow Theorems 27

Proof. If A is a Sylow 3-subgroup, then A = hai and |a| = 3. Let G act on {A, x2 A, x3 A, x4 A} by
(g, xA) 7→ gxA. This action induces a homomorphism θ : G → S4 whose kernel K is a subgroup
of A. Then K = {e} or K = A. If K = {e}, then G is isomorphic to a subgroup of S4 of order 12,
so G ∼= A4 which is excluded by hypothesis. Thus, A = K is normal in G which implies that A is
a unique Sylow 3-subgroup of G. Hence, a and a2 are only two elements of order 3 in G. Since
[G : CG (a)] is the number of conjugates of a which is 1 or 2, |CG (a)| = 12 or 6, so there is a b ∈ G
of order 2. Since ab = ba, |ab| = 6.

Example 1.5.3. Recall that V4 = {(1), (12)(34), (13)(24), (14)(23)} is a normal subgroup of A4 .
Since |A4 | = 12 = 22 · 3, V4 is the unique Sylow 2-subgroup of A4 . Moreover V4 has three
subgroups of order two, namely h(12)(34)i, h(13)(24)i and h(14)(23)i. Next, we analyze the Sylow
3-subgroups of A4 . They are cyclic subgroups of order three generated by a 3-cycle. Note that
there are eight 3-cycles in A4 , so we have four subgroups of order three, which are h(123)i, h(124)i,
h(134)i and h(234)i. By Exercises 1.4, A4 has no subgroup of order six. Hence, the diagram below
shows all subgroups of A4 .

❤❤❤ A4 ❳ ❯
❑❑❯❳❯❳❯❳❯❳❯❳❳❳❳
❤ ❤❤❤❤❤❤ ❑❑ ❯❯❯ ❳❳❳❳❳
❑❑ ❯
❤❤❤❤❤❤❤❤ ❑❑ ❯❯❯❯❯❳❯❳❳❳❳❳❳❳❳❳
❤❤ ❑❑ ❯❯❯❯ ❳❳❳❳❳
❤❤❤ ❯ ❳❳❳❳
❤❤❤❤
V 4 ◆◆◆◆ h(123)i h(124)i h(134)i h(234)i
♣♣♣♣♣ ◆ ◆ ✝✝ tt t
♠♠♠♠
♣♣♣
♣ ◆◆◆ ✝ tt
t ♠♠♠
♣♣♣
◆◆◆
✝✝✝ ttt ♠♠♠♠♠
✝ tt ♠♠
h(12)(34)i ❨❨❨❨ h(13)(24)i ❱ h(14)(23)i ✝✝✝ ttt ♠♠♠♠♠
❨❨❨❨❨❨ ▲▲▲ t ♠
❨❨❨❨❨❨ ❱❱❱❱❱❱❱❱ ✝ tt
✝✝ tttt ♠♠♠♠♠
♠♠
❨❨❨❨❨❨ ❱❱❱❱ ▲▲▲▲ ✝ ♠
❨❨❨❨❨❨ ❱❱❱❱ ▲▲ ✝ tt ♠♠
❨❨❨❨❨❨❱❱❱❱ ▲
❨❨❨❨❱ ✝✝t♠t♠♠♠
{(1)}

We shall see more applications of Sylow theorems in Section 3.3. It turns out that any finite
nilpotent group is the direct product of its Sylow p-subgroups.

Exercises 1.5. 1. If G is a finite p-group where p is a prime, N is normal in G and N 6= {e}, prove that
N ∩ Z(G) 6= {e}.
2. Prove that if |G| = pn with p > n, p is a prime, and H is a subgroup of G of order p, then H ⊳ G.
3. Let p be the smallest prime dividing the order of a finite group G. Show that any subgroup H of G
of index p is normal.
4. Let G be a group of order pn where p is a prime and n ∈ N. Prove that there exist normal subgroups
N1 , . . . , Nn of G such that N1 < N2 < · · · < Nn with |Ni | = pi for all i ∈ {1, 2, . . . , n}.
5. Let G be a group, M ⊳ G and N ⊳ G. Prove the following statements.
(a) If M ∩ N = {e}, then xy = yx for all x ∈ M and y ∈ N .
(b) If M and N are finite cyclic subgroups of G and gcd(|M |, |N |) = 1, then M N is a cyclic subgroup
of G of order |M ||N |.
6. Let P be a Sylow p-subgroup of a finite group G and N a normal subgroup of G. Show that:
(a) P ∩ N is a Sylow p-subgroup of N ,
(b) P N/N is a Sylow p-subgroup of G/N .
7. Show that there are no simple groups of order 148 or of order 56.
8. How many elements of order 7 are there in a simple group of order 168?
9. Let G be a group of order 153. Prove that G is abelian.
10. Let G be a group of order 231. Show that n11 (G) = 1 and the Sylow 11-subgroup of G is contained
in Z(G).
11. Show that there is no non-abelian finite simple group of order less than 60. (Hint. We may focus on
groups of the following orders: 24, 30, 40, 48, 54 and 56.)
12. Let G be a group of order 385. Show that a Sylow 11-subgroup of G is normal and a Sylow 7-subgroup
of G is contained in Z(G).
13. Let p be a prime and P a Sylow p-subgroup of a finite group G. Suppose that, for all g ∈ G, if
P 6= gP g −1 , then P ∩ gP g −1 = {e}. Show that np (G) ≡ 1 mod |P |.
28 1. Groups

14. Let G be a group of order 2013. Prove that G has a proper normal subgroup N such that G/N is
cyclic.
15. (a) Let G be a finite group and N a normal subgroup of G. If N contains a Sylow p-subgroup of
G, prove that the number of Sylow p-subgroups of N is the same as that of G (i.e., np (N ) =
np (G)).
(b) Show that if G is a group of order 130, then G has a normal subgroup of order 5.

1.6 Finite Abelian Groups

The study of finite nonabelian groups is complicated as we have learned that the Sylow theorems
give us some important information about them. This section gives us complete information
about all finite abelian groups. We start with formal definitions of the direct product of groups.
All proofs are straight forward and left as exercises.

Definition. Let A and B be groups. The direct product of A and B is defined as follows:
1. as a set A × B = {(a, b) : a ∈ A and b ∈ B} is the Cartesian product of A and B
2. multiplication is coordinatewise, namely, (a, b)(c, d) Q= (ac, bd).
More generally, if {Ai : i ∈ I} is a family of groups, then i∈I Ai is a group with coordinatewise
multiplication. It is called the direct product of the groups Ai . The subgroup
Yw n Y o
Ai = (ai ) ∈ Ai : ai = e for all but finitely many i
i∈I i∈I
Q
of Qi∈I Ai is called the external weak direct product of the groups A Pi . Note thatQ
it is normal
in A
Pw i∈I i Qw . In case A i are all additive abelian groups, we may write A
i∈I i for i∈I Ai and
i∈I Ai for i∈I Ai .

Let G be a group. It is easy to show that

1. If N1 , . . . , Nm are normal subgroups of G, then

N1 N2 · · · Nm = hN1 ∪ N2 ∪ · · · ∪ Nm i.

2. If {Ni : i ∈ I} is a family of normal subgroups of G, then

D[ E [
Ni = N i1 · · · N im .
i∈I i1 ,...,im ∈I,
m∈N

Theorem 1.6.1. Let {Ni : i ∈ I} be a familyD of normal subgroups

E of G such that
S S
1. G = i∈I Ni and 2. ∀k ∈ I, Nk ∩ i∈Ir{k} Ni = {e}.
Q
Then G ∼
=
w
Ni .
i∈I

Definition. The group G satisfies conditions of Theorem

Q 1.6.1 is called the internal weak
direct product of {Ni : i ∈ I} and we write G = w i∈I i If GL
N . is additive abelian, then G is
called the internal direct sum of {Ni : i ∈ I} and we write G = i∈I Ni .

Corollary 1.6.2. Let N1 , N2 , . . . , Nm be normal subgroups of G. If G = N1 . . . Nm and

Nk ∩ (N1 . . . Nk−1 Nk+1 . . . Nm ) = {e} for all k ∈ {1, . . . , m}, then G ∼
= N1 × · · · × Nm .
1.6. Finite Abelian Groups 29

Theorem 1.6.3. Let N1 , N2 , . . . , Nm be normal subgroups of G. Then the following statements are
equivalent.
(i) G is the internal weak direct product of N1 , . . . , Nm .
(ii) ∀x ∈ G, ∃!a1 ∈ N1 , . . . , am ∈ Nm , x = a1 . . . am .

Corollary 1.6.4. Let G be a group. Suppose that A and B are normal subgroups of G such that
1. A ∩ B = {e} 2. AB = G and 3. ∀a ∈ A, b ∈ B, ab = ba.
Then G ∼= A × B. In this case, we say that G is the internal direct product of A and B.

Theorem 1.6.5. Let {Ni : i ∈ I} be a family of normal subgroups of a group G. Then the following
statements are equivalent.
(i) G is the internal weak direct product of {Ni : i ∈ I}.
(ii) ∀x ∈ G r {e}, ∃!i1 , . . . , im ∈ I, ∃!ai1 ∈ Ni1 r {e}, . . . , aim ∈ Nim r {e}, x = ai1 . . . aim .

Q 1.6.6. Let {Gi : Q

Theorem i ∈ I} be a family
Q of groups,
Q andQfor i ∈ I, let Ni be normal
∼ Qw in Gi .
Then i∈IQ in i∈I G
Ni is normalQ i
Qw and i∈I
QwG i / i∈I N i = i∈I (G i /N i ). Similarly, i∈I Ni is
normal in w G and w
G / N ∼
= (G /N ).
i∈I i i∈I i i∈I i i∈I i i

Corollary 1.6.7. Let G1 , . . . , Gm be abelian groups, and for 1 ≤ j ≤ m, let Hj be a subgroup

of Gj . Then (G1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ Gn )/(H1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ Hn ) ∼
= (G1 /H1 ) ⊕ · · · ⊕ (Gn /Hn ).

Next, we study the structure of a finite abelian group. Results on elements of finite order are
presented in the next theorem and we recall the Chinese Remainder Theorem in a group theoretic
language. Their proof are routine and left as exercises.

Theorem 1.6.8. Let A be an abelian group and n ∈ N. Then the following statements hold.
1. The mapping ϕn : A → A defined by ϕn (a) = an is a group homomorphism.
2. An = {an : a ∈ A} = im ϕn is a subgroup of A.
3. A(n) = {a ∈ A : an = e} = ker ϕn is a [
subgroup of A.
4. τ (A) = {a ∈ A : ∃k ∈ N, ak = e} = A(n) is a subgroup of A. It is called the torsion
n∈N
subgroup of A.

Theorem 1.6.9. [Chinese Remainder Theorem] Suppose m1 , . . . , mk are pairwise relatively

prime (i.e., if i 6= j, then gcd(mi , mj ) = 1), and let n1 , . . . , nk be any integers. Then there
exists a unique integer v modulo m = m1 . . . mk such that

v ≡ ni mod mi

for all i = 1, . . . , k.

Remark. The Chinese Remainder Theorem may be restated as: If m1 , . . . , mk are pairwise rela-
tively primes and m = m1 . . . mk , then

Zm ∼
= Z m1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ Z mk .

Corollary 1.6.10. If m = pn1 1 . . . pnk k where n1 , . . . , nk ∈ N and p1 , . . . , pk are distinct primes, then

Zm ∼
= Zpn1 1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ Zpnk .
k
30 1. Groups

Lemma 1.6.11. Let g ∈ G be an element such that g m = 1 where m = m1 . . . mk and mi are

pairwise relatively prime. Then there exist unique elements g1 , . . . , gk of G satisfying the following
conditions:
(a) gimi = e for all i ∈ {1, . . . , k}
(b) g1 , . . . , gk commute pairwise and
(c) g = g1 . . . gk .

Proof. First we show existence, then uniqueness. The gi are in fact powers of g.
Existence: By the Chinese Remainder Theorem, choose v1 , . . . , vk satisfying

vi ≡ 1 mod mi and vi ≡ 0 mod m/mi .

For each i, let vi = λi (m/mi ) for some λi ∈ Z and set gi = g vi . Then we have
(i) gimi = g vi mi = g λi (m/mi )mi = g λi m and
(ii) g1 , . . . , gk are powers of g and hence commute pairwise.
(iii) Note that v1 + · · · + vk − 1 ≡ 0 mod mi for i = 1, 2, . . . , k, that is, mi |(v1 + · · · + vk − 1). Since
m1 , . . . , mk are pairwise relatively prime, v1 + · · · + vk ≡ 1 mod m1 . . . mk , so

g1 . . . gk = g v1 . . . g vk = g v1 +···+vk = g.

Uniqueness: Suppose g = g1 . . . gk where g = g1 . . . gk where g1 , . . . , gk satisfy (i), (ii) and (iii).

Then for each i,
g vi = g1vi . . . gkvi = gi ,
that is, gi = g vi is the only possibility.

Example 1.6.1. Consider g ∈ G with g 60 = e. Then m = 3 · 4 · 5, so v1 = 45, v2 = 40 and v3 = 36.

Thus, g = g 45 g 40 g 36 = g1 g2 g3 .

In case g has order m = pa11 . . . pakk where mi = pai i and p1 , . . . , pk are distinct primes, gi is
called the pi -primary part of g.

Theorem 1.6.12. Let A be a finite abelian group of order m = m1 . . . mk where m1 , . . . , mk

are pairwise relatively prime. For each i ∈ {1, 2, . . . , k}, let Ai = {g ∈ A : g mi = e}. Then
A1 × · · · × Ak ∼
= A. Moreover, |Ai | = mi for all i.

Proof. Define φ : A1 × · · · × Ak → A by φ(g1 , . . . , gk ) = g1 . . . gk . Clearly, φ is a group homo-

morphism. By Lemma 1.6.11, φ is 1-1 and onto. Finally, m1 . . . mk = |A| = |A1 × · · · × Ak | =
|A1 | . . . |Ak |. Let
u1r
m1 = pu1111 . . . p1r11
u2r
m2 = pu2121 . . . p2r22
..
.
ukr
mk = puk1k1 . . . pkrkk .

Here, the pij are distinct primes and uij ≥ 1. Since every element of Ai satisfies g mi = e, |Ai |
involves only those primes occuring in mi by Cauchy theorem. This forces |Ai | = mi for all i.

Remark. If m = pa11 . . . pakk , then Ai in Theorem 1.6.12 is just the Sylow pi -subgroup of A.

Definition. The positive integer n is an exponent for a group G if for each g ∈ G, g n = 1. In

this case, G is said to have finite exponent and the least such n is called the exponent of G.
1.6. Finite Abelian Groups 31

For example, 12 is an exponent of Z6 but 6 is the exponent of Z6 . We denote the exponent of

a group G (if exists) by exp G. Note that Z has no exponent and exp G divides |G|.

Theorem 1.6.13. Let A be an abelian group with |A| = pu where p is a prime. Suppose A has
exponent p, (that is, ap = e for all a ∈ A). Then

A∼
= Zp × · · · × Zp = (Zp )u .
| {z }
u copies

Proof. Note that if a ∈ A r {e}, hai ∼

= Zp . For any subset {a1 , . . . , ak } ⊆ A r {e}, we can define a
group homomorphism θ : ha1 i × · · · × hak i → A by
θ(ai11 , . . . , aikk ) = ai11 . . . aikk .
We shall say that a1 , . . . , ak are “linearly independent” if θ is 1-1. This is equivalent to saying:
If θ(ai11 , . . . , aikk ) = ai11 . . . aikk = e, then i1 ≡ . . . ≡ ik ≡ 0 mod p.
Now there exists subsets of A r {e} for which θ is 1-1, e.g., the empty set, a singleton set.
Choose a subset {a1 , . . . , ak } for which θ is 1-1 and k is as large as possible. We claim that in this
case
θ
ha1 i × · · · × hak i → A
is onto, and hence is an isomorphism.
To see that θ is onto, let b ∈ A. If b = e, clearly b ∈ im θ. If b 6= e, consider
θ̄
ha1 i × · · · × hak i × hbi → A.
By the maximal choice of {a1 , . . . , ak }, θ̄ is not 1-1. Thus,
e = θ̄(ai11 , . . . , aikk , bj ) = ai11 . . . aikk bj
and j 6≡ 0 mod p since θ is not 1-1. Hence, there is a λ such that jλ ≡ 1 mod p, so
λik jλ λik
e = aλi 1
1 . . . ak b = aλi 1
1 . . . ak b

which implies b = a1−λi1 . . . ak−λik ∈ im θ. Therefore, θ is onto as claimed, and we have an isomor-
phism
θ
ha1 i × · · · × hak i ∼
/A.
=

Thus, pk = |ha1 i| . . . |hak i| = |ha1 i×· · ·×hak i| = |A| = pu , so k = u and the theorem is proved.
Remark. If we write A in Theorem 1.6.13 additively, we see that it is just a vector space over the
field Zp . Since A is finite, it is a finite dimensional vector space over Zp . All we were doing in
Theorem 1.6.13 is finding a basis for A as a vector space over Zp .

Theorem 1.6.14. [Burnside basis theorem for abelian p-groups] Suppose A is an abelian group
of exponent pk where p is a prime. Let Ap = {ap : a ∈ A}. If H is a subgroup of A and HAp = A,
then H = A. Equivalently, if the cosets Ap a1 , . . . , Ap ak of A/Ap generate A/Ap , then a1 , . . . , ak
generate A.
2
Proof. Observe that HAp = A implies H p Ap = Ap , so
2 2
A = HAp = H(H p Ap ) = HAp .
2 3
Also, HAp = A implies H p Ap = Ap , so
3 3
A = HAp = H(H p Ap ) = HAp .
r k k
Continue inductively, we have A = HAp for all r. But Ap = {e}, so A = HAp = H. This
completes the proof.
32 1. Groups

Theorem 1.6.15. Let A be a finite abelian group of exponent p where p is a prime, and let H be
a subgroup of A. Then there exists a subgroup K of A such that H ∩ K = {e} and HK = A. In
other words, A is the internal direct product of H and K.

Proof. Let K be a subgroup of A satisfying H ∩K = {e} and among all subgroups K of A satisfying
H ∩ K = {e}, K is as large as possible. We claim that HK = A which proves the theorem.
For, suppose conversely that a ∈ A and a ∈ / HK. Then H ∩ hK, ai = 6 {e} by the maximal
choice of K, so there is a nontrivial element

e 6= h = kai ∈ H ∩ hK, ai where h ∈ H ∈ and k ∈ K.

If p|i, ai = e and h = k ∈ H ∩ K = {e}, a contradiction. If p ∤ i, there is a λ with aiλ = a (iλ ≡ 1

mod p) and then a = aiλ = (hk −1 )λ ∈ HK, a contradiction. Hence, HK = A as required.

Remark. As with Theorem 1.6.13, the above theorem can be regarded as a statement about
vector spaces over Zp as follows: If V is a finite dimensional vector space over Zp and U is a
subspace, then there is a subspace W such that V = U ⊕ W .

Theorem 1.6.16. Let A be a finite abelian p-group. Then A is (isomorphic to) a direct product of
cyclic groups.

Proof. We use induction on |A|. If |A| = 1, the result is clear. Now suppose |A| = pu > 1.
We assume inductively that any p-group where order is less than pu is a direct product of cyclic
groups. Consider the group
Ap = {ap : a ∈ A}.
Claim A 6= Ap . For, suppose A = Ap . Then
2 u
A = Ap = Ap = · · · = Ap = {e}

since |A| = pu . As |A| > 1, we must have A 6= Ap .

Thus, A > Ap , so |A| > |Ap | and by the inductive hypothesis, Ap is the (internal) direct
product of cyclic subgroup. But every element of Ap has the form ap . Hence, so do the generators
of these cyclic factors, so there exist ap1 , . . . , apk ∈ Ap such that

Ap = hap1 i × · · · × hapk i.

θ
More precisely, the map (a1pi1 , . . . , api 0 pi1 pik
k ) 7−→ a1 . . . ak is an isomorphism.
k

Now let H = ha1 , . . . , ak i be the subgroup of A generated by a1 , . . . , ak . We claim that it is the

(internal) direct product of the groups ha1 i, . . . , hak i, or that

θ
ha1 i × · · · × hak i → H
(ai11 , . . . , aikk ) 7→ ai11 . . . aikk

is an isomorphism. Since H = ha1 , . . . , ak i, θ is onto. To see that θ is 1-1, suppose

e = θ(ai11 , . . . , aikk ) = ai11 . . . aikk . (1.6.1)

Then e = (ai11 . . . aikk )p = api 1 pik

1 . . . ak , so

api 1 pik
1 = · · · = ak = e
1.6. Finite Abelian Groups 33

since the map θ0 above is 1-1. Consider the integers i1 , . . . , ik . If p ∤ it for some of these integers,
then api t
t
= e implies apt = e. For, (api t λ
t )t = (at ) = apt , where λt it ≡ 1 mod |at |. Thus,
λ t it p

p | i1 , . . . , ik , so i1 = pj1 , . . . , ik = pjk . But then (1.6.1) becomes

e = θ(apj 1 pjk pj1 pjk

1 , . . . , ak ) = a1 . . . ak ,

so apj 1 pjk
1 = · · · = ak = e since θ0 is 1-1. Hence, θ is 1-1.

A ■■
✇✇ ■■
✇✇✇ ■■
■■
✇
✇✇ ■■
✇✇
H Ap
✈ ❋❋❋ ✈ ❆❆
✈✈✈ ❋❋ ✈✈ ❆❆
✈✈
✈ ❋❋ ✈✈✈ ❆❆
✈ ❋❋ ✈ ❆❆
✈✈ ✈✈
Ap = H p H ∩ Ap K
❍❍ ⑥⑥
❍❍ ⑥⑥
❍❍ ⑥⑥
❍❍
⑥⑥
{e}
Next, let Ap = {a ∈ A : ap = e}. Then Ap is a finite group of exponent p and contains H ∩ Ap
as a subgroup. Therefore, H ∩ Ap has a component in Ap by Theorem 1.6.15. More precisely,
there is a subgroup K of Ap such that
(a) (H ∩ Ap ) ∩ K = {e} and (b) (H ∩ Ap )K = Ap .
Note that since K is a group of exponent p, K is a direct product of copies of Zp by Theorem
1.6.13. Finally, we claim that
(I) H ∩ K = {e} and (II) HK = A.
They implies that A is a direct product of H and K which are both direct products of cyclic groups.
(I) Suppose H ∩ K 6= {e}. Thus, there is some x ∈ H ∩ K with x 6= e and xp = e. But then
x ∈ Ap , so (H ∩ Ap ) ∩ K = (H ∩ K) ∩ Ap 6= {e}, contradicting (i) above.
(II) Suppose a ∈ A. Then ap ∈ Ap = hap1 i × · · · × hapk i, so ap = api 1 pik i1 ik p
1 . . . ak = (a1 . . . ak ) = b
p
i1 ik −1
where b = a1 . . . ak ∈ H = ha1 , . . . , ak i. Thus, b a ∈ Ap = (H ∩ Ap )K ⊆ HK by (ii)
above. Hence, a = b(b−1 a) ∈ HK and A = HK as required.
This completes the proof.

Theorem 1.6.17. Suppose

A = Zp × . . . Zp × Zp 2 × · · · × Zp 2 × · · · × Zp m × · · · × Zp m
| {z } | {z } | {z }
u1 copies u2 copies um copies

is isomorphic to

B = Zp × . . . Zp × Zp 2 × · · · × Zp 2 × · · · × Zp m × · · · × Zp m
| {z } | {z } | {z }
v1 copies v2 copies vm copies

where ui , vi ≥ 1. Then ui = vi for all i = 1, . . . , m. In other words, the orders and multiplicities
of the factors in a decomposition of a finite abelian p-group uniquely determine the group up to
isomorphism.

Proof. Since A ∼
= B, it follows that for any positive integer n,

# of solutions of xn = e in A = # of solutions of xn = e in B.

Consider the following table.

34 1. Groups

n # of solutions of xn = e in A # of solutions of xn = e in B
p pu1 +u2 +u3 +···+um pv1 +v2 +v3 +···+vm
p2 pu1 +2u2 +2u3 +···+2um pv1 +2v2 +2v3 +···+2vm
p3 pu1 +2u2 +3u3 +···+3um pv1 +2v2 +3v3 +···+3vm
.. .. ..
. . .
pm−1 pu1 +2u2 +3u3 +···+(m−1)um−1 +(m−1)um pv1 +v2 +···+(m−1)vm−1 +(m−1)vm
pm pu1 +2u2 +3u3 +···+(m−1)um−1 +mum pv1 +v2 +···+(m−1)vm−1 +mvm
Then we have
u1 + u2 + u3 + · · · + um = v 1 + v 2 + v 3 + · · · + v m
u1 + 2u2 + 2u3 + · · · + 2um = v1 + 2v2 + 2v3 + · · · + 2vm
u1 + 2u2 + 3u3 + · · · + 3um = v1 + 2v2 + 3v3 + · · · + 3vm
..
.
u1 + 2u2 + 3u3 + · · · + (m − 1)um−1 +(m − 1)um =
v1 + 2v2 + 3v3 + · · · + (m − 1)vm−1 + (m − 1)vm
u1 + 2u2 + 3u3 + · · · + (m − 1)um−1 +mum =
v1 + 2v2 + 3v3 + · · · + (m − 1)vm−1 + mvm .

It is easy to see that the above equations force u1 = v1 , u2 = v2 , . . . , um = vm as required.

Theorem 1.6.18. Let p be any prime and n a positive integer. Then

{r1 ≤ r2 ≤ · · · ≤ rk } ←→ Zpr1 × Zpr2 × · · · × Zprk

defines a 1-1 correspondence between partitions of n and isomorphism classes of abelian groups
of order pn . In particular, the number of isomorphism classes of abelian groups of order pn is the
number of partitions of n.

Examples 1.6.2. 1. Abelian groups of order p3 .

partitions of 3 corresponding abelian groups
{1, 1, 1} Zp × Zp × Zp
{1, 2} Zp × Zp 2
{3} Zp 3
2. Abelian groups of order p5 .
partitions of 5 corresponding abelian groups
{1, 1, 1, 1, 1} Zp × Zp × Zp × Zp × Zp
{1, 1, 1, 2} Zp × Zp × Zp × Zp 2
{1, 2, 2} Zp × Zp 2 × Zp 2
{1, 1, 3} Zp × Zp × Zp 3
{2, 3} Zp 2 × Zp 3
{1, 4} Zp × Zp 4
{5} Zp 5
Remark. Suppose A is a finite abelian group of order pa11 . . . pakk where p1 , . . . , pk are distinct
primes. Let
ai
Ai = {g ∈ A : g pi = e}.
By Theorem 1.6.12, A ∼ a
= A1 × · · · × Ak where |Ai | = p i . Since each Ai is a direct product of cyclic
i
group by Theorem 1.6.17, this yields the following theorem.
1.6. Finite Abelian Groups 35

Theorem 1.6.19. A finite abelian group is (isomorphic to) a direct product of cyclic groups.

Corollary 1.6.20. If m is a square free integer, then every abelian group of order m is cyclic.

Proof. Assume that an abelian group A is of order m = p1 . . . pr where pi are distinct primes.
Then
A∼= Zp 1 × · · · × Zp r ∼
= Zm
by Theorem 1.6.12 and the Chinese remainder theorem, respectively.

Let A ∼= A1 × · · · × Ak as above. It is clear that Ai is the unique largest pi -subgroup of A.

Moreover, if B is finite abelian, and B ∼
= B1 × · · · × Bk where Bi is a pi -group, then

= B1 ∧ . . . ∧ Ak ∼
= B ⇔ (A1 ∼
A∼ = Bk ).

Recall that if m and n are relatively prime then Zm ×Zn ∼ u

= Zmn . It follows that if n = pu1 1 · · · pk k
where p1 , . . . , pk are distinct primes, then

Z p u1 × · · · × Z p uk ∼
= Zn . (1.6.2)
1 k

This gives rise to a second way of writing a finite abelian group A as a direct product of cyclic
groups. Namely, let p1 , . . . , pk be the primes dividing |A|, and let

A = A1 × · · · × Ak ,

where Ai is the pi -primary part of A. Express each Ai as a direct product of cyclic factors and
assume that t is the largest number of factors occurring in any Ai . Write

A1 = Zpv11 × Zpv12 × · · · × Zpv1t

1 1 1

A2 = Zpv21 × Zpv22 × · · · × Zpv2t

2 2 2
..
.
Ak = Zpvk1 × Zpvk2 × · · · × Zpvkt
k k k

where
0 ≤ vi1 ≤ vi2 ≤ · · · ≤ vit (1.6.3)
and we have allowed (for notational convenience) some vij to be zero. Let

n1 = pv111 pv221 · · · pvkk1

n2 = pv112 pv222 · · · pvkk2
..
.
ni = pv11i pv22i · · · pvkki
..
.
nt = pv11t pv22t · · · pvkkt .

Condition (1.6.3) guarantees that n1 | n2 , n2 | n3 , . . . , nt−1 | nt . Then, using (1.6.2) gives

A = A1 × · · · × Ak
= (Zpv11 × · · · × Zpv1t ) × (Zpv12 × · · · × Zpvk2 ) × · · · × (Zpv1t × · · · × Zpvkt )
1 1 1 k 1 k
∼
= Zn1 × Zn2 × · · · × Znt .
36 1. Groups

The integers nj are completely determined by the decomposition of A into a direct of cyclic
pi -groups. Conversely, given that

A = Zn1 × Zn2 × · · · × Znt .

where n1 | n2 , n2 | n3 , . . . , nt−1 | nt , the decomposition of A into a direct product of cyclic pi -

groups is completely determined. Thus, we have:

Theorem 1.6.21. Let A be a finite abelian group. Then there exist integers n1 , . . . , nt > 1 such
that n1 | n2 , n2 | n3 , . . . , nt−1 | nt and

A∼
= Zn1 × Zn2 × · · · × Znt ,

where these integers are uniquely defined by A. More precisely, if m1 , . . . , ms are positive integers
greater than 1 such that m1 | m2 , m2 | m3 , . . . , ms−1 | ms , and

= Zn1 × Zn2 × · · · × Znt ∼

A∼ = Z m1 × Z m2 × · · · × Z ms ,

then t = s, and n1 = m1 , . . . , nt = mt .

Example 1.6.3. Find all non-isomorphic abelian groups of order:

1. 6 2. 12 3. 27 4. 500.

Solution. By Example 1.6.2 and Theorem 1.6.21. We have the following answers.
6 = 2 · 3: Z2 × Z3 ∼= Z6 ,
12 = 22 · 3: Z2 × Z2 × Z3 ∼= Z2 × Z6 and Z22 × Z3 ∼
= Z12 ,
3
27 = 3 : Z3 × Z3 × Z3 , Z3 × Z32 and Z33 ,
500 = 22 · 53 : Z2 × Z2 × Z5 × Z5 × Z5 ∼ = Z2 × Z10 × Z10 , Z2 × Z2 × Z5 × Z52 ∼= Z10 × Z50 ,
∼ ∼ ∼
Z2 × Z2 × Z53 = Z2 × Z250 , Z22 × Z5 × Z5 × Z5 = Z5 × Z5 × Z20 , Z22 × Z5 × Z52 = Z5 × Z100 and
Z22 × Z53 ∼= Z500 .

By Cauchy’s theorem, if p is a divisor of the order of a group G, then G has a subgroup of

order p. We also see that A4 is a group of order 12 but it has no subgroup of order six. Hence, it
may not hold that G will have a subgroup of order m when m is a divisor of |G|. However, if G is
an abelian group, we have our final result.

Corollary 1.6.22. Let A be a finite abelian group. If m divides the order of A, then A has a
subgroup of order m.

Proof. Write A = Zn1 × Zn2 × · · · × Znt as in the above theorem. Then |A| = n1 n2 . . . nt . Since m
divides |A|, m = l1 l2 . . . lt with li | ni for all i ∈ {1, 2, . . . , t}. Then Zni /li is a subgroup of Zni of
order li for all i. Thus,
Zn1 /l1 × Zn2 /l2 × · · · × Znt /lt
is a subgroup of A of order l1 l2 . . . lt = m as desired.

Exercises 1.6. 1. Suppose G1 and G2 are finite groups of relatively prime orders. Show that every
subgroup of G1 ×G2 is of the form H1 ×H2 for some subgroups H1 and H2 of G1 and G2 , respectively.
2. Let G1 and G2 be simple groups. Show that every nontrivial normal subgroup of G = G1 × G2 is
isomorphic to either G1 or G2 .
3. Proof Theorem 1.6.8.
4. Find the order of torsion subgroup of Z4 × Z × Z and of Z12 × Z × Z12 .
5. Find the torsion subgroup of the multiplicative group R∗ .
1.6. Finite Abelian Groups 37

6. Let G be an abelian group of order 72.

(a) Can you say how many subgroups of order eight G has? Why?
(b) Can you say how many subgroups of order four G has? Why?
7. Show that a finite abelian group is not cyclic if and only if it contains a subgroup isomorphic to
Zp × Zp for some prime p.
8. Find the exponent of the following groups (a) Z6 × Z9 (b) Z5 × S4 .
9. Find all non-isomorphic abelian groups of order (a) 35 (b) 48 (c) 360.
10. List (up to isomorphism) all abelian groups of order 108 and express each in the following two ways:
(a) As a direct sum of cyclic groups of prime power order.
(b) As a direct sum of cyclic groups of order d1 , d2 , . . . , dk where di | di+1 for i = 1, 2, . . . , k − 1.
11. List all groups of order 99 and of order 1225 up to isomorphism. (Hint. Show that they must be
abelian.)
12. Let G be a finite group. Prove the following statements.
(a) The exponent of G divides its order |G|.
(b) If H is a subgroup of G, then the exponent of H divides the exponent of G.
13. Let G be a finite abelian group. Prove that there exists g ∈ G such that the order of g is the exponent
of G. Is it still true if G is non-abelian? Justify your answer.
14. Let G = S3 × Z4 .
(a) Find exp G. (b) Determine all Sylow 2-subgroups and Sylow 3-subgroups of G.
15. Let G be a group of order 2156 = 22 · 72 · 11.
(a) If G is abelian, list all G up to isomorphism. (b) Prove that G cannot be simple.
16. List all finite groups G which have the following property:

∀g, h ∈ G, g is a power of h or h is a power of g.

This concludes the basic theory of groups. More advanced group theory will be studied in
Chapter 3.
38 1. Groups
2 | Rings and Fields

Rings and fields are the most common algebraic structures for students. They have learned addi-
tion together with multiplication since elementary schools. The abstract treatments using groups
are presented in the first section. Ideals and factorizations are discussed in details. Finally, we
talk about polynomials over a ring and which will be used in a construction of field extensions.

2.1 Basic Concepts

2.1.1 Rings
The definition of a ring is as follows.

Definition. A ring is a triple (R, +, ·) where

(R1) (R, +) is an abelian group,
(R2) (R, ·) is a semigroup, and
(R3) + and · satisfy the distributive laws, namely,
∀a, b, c ∈ R, a · (b + c) = (a · b) + (a · c) and ∀a, b, c ∈ R, (b + c) · a = (b · a) + (c · a).
The binary operations + and · are called the addition and the multiplication of the ring
(R, +, ·), respectively, 0, the identity of (R, +) is called the zero of R, for a, b ∈ R, ab (jux-
taposition) may denote a · b and (R, +, ·) may be denoted by R. For a ∈ R, −a is called the
additive inverse of a in R.

Definition. Let (R, +, ·) be a ring. R is said to be commutative if ∀a, b ∈ R, ab = ba. If 1 is the

identity of (R, ·), then 1 is called the identity or unity of the ring R. If R contains an identity,
i.e., (R, ·) is a multiplicative monoid, then R is called a ring with identity.

Unless the contrary is explicitly stated “ring” will mean “ring with identity”.

Definition. A subset S of a ring R is a subring if S is a subgroup of the additive group and also
a submonoid of the multiplicative monoid of R.

Clearly the intersection of any set of subrings of R is a subring. Hence, we may define:

Definition. If A is a subset of R one can define the subring generated by A to be the intersec-
tion of all subrings of R which contain A.

Examples 2.1.1. 1. Z, Q, R and C are commutative rings under usual addition and multipli-
cation.
2. For n ∈ N, (Zn , +, ·) is a commutative ring.
3. Recall that for a nonempty set X and P (X) the power set of X, we define A△B = (A r
B) ∪ (B r A) for all subsets A and B of X. Then (P (X), △, ∩) is a commutative ring with
identity X.

39
40 2. Rings and Fields

4. If A is an abelian group, then End(A), the set of all homomorphisms on A, is a ring with
the addition and multiplication are given by

(f + g)(a) = f (a) + g(a) and (f · g)(a) = f (g(a))

for all f, g ∈ End(A) and a ∈ A. Its identity is the identity map.

5. If X is a topological space, then C(X), the set of all continuous functions from X to R, is a
commutative ring with pairwise operations. That is,

(f + g)(x) = f (x) + g(x) and (f · g)(x) = f (x)g(x)

for all f, g ∈ C(X) and x ∈ X. √ √

6. Let d be a square free integer. The set Z[ d] = {a + b d : a, b ∈ Z} is a subring of C.
A number of elementary properties of rings are consequences of the fact that a ring is an
abelian group relative to addition and a monoid relative to multiplication. For example, we have
−(a + b) = −a − b := (−a) + (−b) and if na is defined for n ∈ Z as before, then the rules for
multiples (or powers) in an abelian group,

n(a + b) = na + nb, (n + m)a = na + ma, and (nm)a = n(ma)

hold. There are also a number of simple consequences of the distributive laws which we now
note. In the first place, induction on m and n give the generalization
m
! n  m Xn
X X X
ai  bj  = a i bj .
i=1 j=1 i=1 j=1

We note next that

a0 = 0a = 0
for all a ∈ R; for we have a0 = a(0 + 0) = a0 + a0. Addition of −a0 gives a0 = 0. Similarly,
0a = 0. We have the equation

0 = 0b = (a + (−a))b = ab + (−a)b,

which shows that (−a)b = −ab. Similarly, a(−b) = −ab; consequently

(−a)(−b) = −a(−b) = −(−ab) = ab.

If a and b commute, that is, ab = ba, then am bn = bn am . Also, by induction we can prove the
binomial theorem
     
n n n n−1 n n−2 2 n
(a + b) = a + a b+ a b + ··· + abn−1 + bn
1 2 n−1
for all n ∈ N.
Remark. In the case 1 = 0 in a ring R, we have that

ab = (a · 1)b = a(1 · b) = a(0 · b) = a · 0 = 0 for all a, b ∈ R.

A ring with this property is called a zero ring.

If R and S are rings, so is R × S, with coordinatewise operations:

(r, s) + (r′ , s′ ) = (r + r′ , s + s′ ) and (r, s)(r′ , s′ ) = (rr′ , ss′ ).

Q
Note that (1R , 1S ) is the identity of R × S. More generally, if Rα is a family of rings, then α Rα
is a ring with coordinatewise operations.
2.1. Basic Concepts 41

Definition. Let R be a ring. An element x ∈ R is said to be invertible or a unit if there is a

y ∈ R such that xy = yx = 1. In this case, y is called the inverse of x.

Remarks. 1. If x is invertible, its inverse is unique.

2. The invertible elements of R form a group under multiplication, called the group of units
of R and denoted by U (R) or R× .

Definition. A ring D is a division ring or skew field if every nonzero element of D is invertible.
A commutative division ring is called a field.

Examples 2.1.2. 1. Q, R and C are fields. Z is not a field.

2. By Example 1.1.1 (5), we have ∀n ∈ N, Zn is a field ⇔ n is a prime.

Example 2.1.3. Let n ∈ N, R a ring and Mn (R) the set of all n × n matrices over R. Then
(Mn (R), +, ·) is a ring under the usual addition and multiplication of matrices with unity In , the
identity matrix. If n > 1, then Mn (R) is not commutative. The group of invertible elements of
Mn (R) is called the general linear group and denoted by GLn (R). For the case R is commutative,
we can derive the determinant criterion for a matrix A to be invertible. We have the following
results.

Theorem 2.1.1. Let R be a commutative ring and A ∈ Mn (R). Then

A(adj A) = (det A)In = (adj A)A.

In particular, A is invertible if and only if its determinant is invertible in R.

A noteworthy special case of the theorem is the next corollary.

Corollary 2.1.2. If F is a field, A ∈ Mn (F ) is invertible if and only if det A 6= 0.

Some rings do not have the property that the product of two nonzero elements is always
nonzero. If so, it leads to the cancellation property in the rings.

Definition. Let R be a ring and 0 6= a ∈ R. a is called a left [right] zero divisor if ∃b ∈

R r {0}, ab = 0 [ba = 0], and it is called a zero divisor if it is both a left and a right zero divisor.
R is entire if it possesses no zero divisors. A commutative entire ring is called an integral
domain.

Examples 2.1.4. 1. Z is an integral domain which is not a field.

2. Every field is an integral domain.
3. C([0, 1]) is not an integral domain.

Remark. Let R be a ring. Then we have

R is entire ⇔ ∀a, b ∈ R [ab = 0 ⇒ (a = 0 or b = 0)] ⇔ (R r {0}, ·) is a cancellative semigroup.

Theorem 2.1.3. Every finite integral domain is a field.

Proof. Let D be a finite integral domain. Then (D r {0}, ·) is a finite cancellative semigroup. By
Theorem 1.1.2, (D r {0}, ·) is a group. Hence, if a ∈ D and a 6= 0, then a has an inverse under ·.
Since D is commutative, D is a field.
42 2. Rings and Fields

2.1.2 Quaternions
In 1843, W. R. Hamilton constructed the first example of a division ring in which the commutative
law of multiplication does not hold. This was an extension of the field of complex numbers,
whose elements were quadruples of real numbers (α, β, γ, δ) for which the usual addition and a
multiplication were defined so that 1 = (1, 0, 0, 0) is the unit and i = (0, 1, 0, 0), j = (0, 0, 1, 0),
and k = (0, 0, 0, 1) satisfy i2 = j 2 = k 2 = −1 = ijk. Hamilton called his quadruples, quaternions.
Previously, he had defined complex numbers as pairs of real numbers (α, β) with the product
(α, β)(γ, δ) = (αγ − βδ, αδ + βγ). Hamilton’s discovery of quaternions led to a good deal of
experimentation with other such “hypercomplex” number systems and eventually to a structure
theory whose goal was to classify such systems. A good deal of important algebra thus evolved
from the discovery of quaternions.
We shall not follow Hamilton’s way of introducing quaternions. Instead we shall define this
system as a certain subring of the ring M2 (C) of 2 × 2 matrices with complex number entries. This
will have the advantage of reducing the calculations to a single simple verification.
We consider the subset H of the ring M2 (C) of complex 2 × 2 matrices that have the form
   √ √ 
a b α0 + α1 √−1 α2 + α3 √−1
x= = , αi real. (2.1.1)
−b̄ ā −α2 + α3 −1 α0 − α1 −1
We claim that H is a subring of M2 (C). Since a1 − a2 = ā1 − ā2 for complex numbers, it is
clear that H is closed under subtraction; hence H is a subgroup of the additive group of M2 (C).
We obtain the unit matrix by taking a = 1, b = 0 in (2.1.1). Hence, 1 ∈ H. Since
    
a b c d ac − bd¯ ad + bc̄
=
−b̄ ā −d¯ c̄ −b̄c − ād¯ −b̄d + āc̄
and a1 a2 = ā1 ā2 , the right-hand side has the form
 
u v
−v̄ ū
¯ v = ad + bc̄. Therefore, H is closed under multiplication and so H is a subring
where u = ac − bd,
of M2 (C).
We now show that H is a division ring. We note first that
 √ √ 
α0 + α1 √−1 α2 + α3 √−1
∆ := det = α02 + α12 + α22 + α32 .
−α2 + α3 −1 α0 − α1 −1
Since the αi are real numbers, this is real, and is 0 only if every αi = 0, that is, if the matrix
is 0. Hence, every non-zero element of H has an inverse in M2 (C). Moreover, we have, by the
definition of the adjoint, that    
a b ā −b
adj = .
−b̄ ā b̄ a
¯ = a, this is obtained from the x in (2.1.1) by replacing a by ā and b by −b, and so it is
Since ā
contained in H. Thus, if the matrix x is 6= 0 then its inverse is
 −1 
ā∆ −b∆−1
b̄∆−1 a∆−1
and this is contained in H. Hence, H is a division ring.
 H contains
The ring  in its center the field R of real numbers identified with the set of diagonal
α 0
matrices , α ∈ R. H also contains the matrices
0 α
√     √ 
−1 √0 0 1 √0 −1
i= ,j = ,k = .
0 − −1 −1 0 −1 0
2.1. Basic Concepts 43

We verify that
x = α0 + α1 i + α2 j + α3 k (2.1.2)
and if α0 + α1 i + α2 j + α3 k = β0 + β1 i + β2 j + β3 k, βi ∈ R, then
 √ √   √ √ 
α0 + α1 √−1 α2 + α3 √−1 β0 + β1 √−1 β2 + β3 √−1
=
−α2 + α3 −1 α0 − α1 −1 −β2 + β3 −1 β0 − β1 −1

so αl = βl , 0 ≤ l ≤ 3. Thus, any x in H can be written in one and only one way in the from
(2.1.2). The product of two elements in H

(α0 + α1 i + α2 j + α3 k)(β0 + β1 i + β2 j + β3 k)

is determined by the product and sum in R, the distributive laws and the multiplication table

i2 = j 2 = k 2 = −1

ij = −ji = k, jk = −kj = i, ki = −ik = j.

Incidentally, because these show that H is not commutative we have constructed an infinite divi-
sion ring that is not a field. The ring H is called the division ring of real quaternions. Recall
that Q8 = {±1, ±i, ±j, ±k} is called the quaternion group (see Exercise 1.1).
Algebra is not as rich in division ring as it is in fields. For example, there are no finite division
rings. This is the content of a famous theorem of Wedderburn. Its proof can be found in Section
5.7.

Theorem 2.1.4. [Wedderburn, 1909] A finite division ring is a field.

2.1.3 Characteristic, Ring Homomorphisms and Group Rings

The characteristic of a ring gives some information on its additive group structure.

Definition. Let R be a ring. If there is a smallest positive integer n such that na = 0 for all a ∈ R,
then R is said to have characteristic n. If no such n exists, R is said to have characteristic
zero. We denote the characteristic of R by char R.

Remark. It is easy to see that char R = n if and only if n is the smallest positive integer such that
n1R = 0.

Example 2.1.5. The rings Z, Q, R, C and H are of characteristic zero, char Zn = n and char(Zm ×
Zn ) = lcm(m, n).

Theorem 2.1.5. If R is an integral domain, then R is of characteristic zero or a prime p. In

particular, every field is of characteristic zero or a prime p.

Proof. Let R be an integral domain of characteristic n > 0. Assume that n = ab for some a, b ∈ N.
It follows that 0 = n1R = (ab)1R = (a1R )(b1R ). Since R has no zero divisor, a1R = 0 or b1R = 0.
Then a = n or b = n. Hence, n is a prime.

Theorem 2.1.6. Let R be a ring of characteristic a prime p and a, b ∈ R. If a and b commute, then
k k k
(a + b)p = ap + bp and (a + b)p = ap + bp for all k ∈ N.
44 2. Rings and Fields

Proof. Note that if 1 ≤ r ≤ p − 1, then the binomial coefficient pr is a multiple of p, so it is 0 in
R. Hence,    
p p−1 p
(a + b)p = ap + a b + ··· + abp−1 + bp = ap + bp .
1 p−1
A simple induction on k gives the second equation. The inductive step is
k k−1 k−1 k−1 k k
(a + b)p = ((a + b)p )p = (ap − bp ) p = a p + bp

and the proof is complete.

Like in groups, a ring homomorphism is a function between two rings that preserves both
addition and multiplication.

Definition. Let R and S be rings. A map ϕ : R → S is called a homomorphism if

ϕ(a + b) = ϕ(a) + ϕ(b) and ϕ(ab) = ϕ(a)ϕ(b)

for all a, b ∈ R. The definitions of monomorphisms, epimorphisms, endomorphisms, isomor-

phisms and automorphisms of rings are given as in groups.

Remarks. Let ϕ : R → S be a ring homomorphism.

1. ϕ : (R, +) → (S, +) is an additive group homomorphism.
2. ϕ(1R ) may not be the identity of S.
3. If ϕ(1R ) = 0, then ϕ(x) = 0 for all x ∈ R.
4. If R has an identity and ϕ is onto, then ϕ(1R ) is the identity of S.
Proof. Let s ∈ S. Since ϕ is onto, ∃x ∈ R, ϕ(x) = s. Then sϕ(1R ) = ϕ(x)ϕ(1R ) = ϕ(x1R ) = ϕ(x) =
s. Similarly, ϕ(1R )s = s. Hence, ϕ(1R ) is the identity of S.

Examples 2.1.6. 1. If ϕ : Z → Z is a ring homomorphism, then ϕ is the zero or the identity

map.
2. If ϕ : Q → Q is a ring homomorphism, then ϕ is the zero or the identity map.
3. If ϕ : R → R is a ring homomorphism, then ϕ is the zero or the identity map.
4. If p is a prime and ϕ : Zp → Zp is a ring homomorphism, then ϕ is the zero or the identity
map.

Proof. (1) Observe that ϕ(1) = ϕ(1 · 1) = ϕ(1)ϕ(1), so ϕ(1) = 0 or ϕ(1) = 1. Moreover, ϕ(n) =
nϕ(1) for all n ∈ Z. Thus, ϕ(n) = 0 for all n ∈ Z or ϕ(n) = n for all n ∈ Z as desired.
(2) Similar to Z, ϕ(1) = 0 or ϕ(1) = 1 and ϕ(n) = nϕ(1) for all n ∈ Z. For m ∈ Z and n ∈ N,
we have ϕ(m(1/n)) = mϕ(1/n) and ϕ(1) = ϕ(n(1/n)) = nϕ(n). If ϕ(1) = 0, then ϕ(1/n) = 0 for
all n ∈ N, so ϕ is the zero map. On the other hand, if ϕ(1) = 1, then ϕ(1/n) = 1/n for all n ∈ N
which implies ϕ(m/n) = m/n for all m ∈ Z and n ∈ N.
(3) Assume that ϕ(x) is not the zero map. We can show that ϕ(x) = x for all x ∈ Q. Moreover, for
√ √
x ∈ R+ , ϕ(x) = ϕ(( x)2 ) = (ϕ( x))2 > 0. This implies ∀a, b ∈ R, a < b ⇒ ϕ(a) < ϕ(b). Now, let
x ∈ R. Suppose that ϕ(x) 6= x. Then ϕ(x) < x or x < ϕ(x). By the density theorem, ∃q1 , q2 ∈ Q
such that ϕ(x) < q1 < x or x < q2 < ϕ(x). Thus, ϕ(x) < q1 < ϕ(x) or ϕ(x) < q2 < ϕ(x) yields a
contradiction. Hence, ϕ(x) = x for all x ∈ R.
(4) is proved in the next section.
2.1. Basic Concepts 45

Let G = {gi : i ∈ I} be any multiplicative group, and let R be any commutative ring. Let RG
be the set of all formal sums X
ai gi
i∈I

for ai ∈ R and gi ∈ G, where all but finite number of the ai are 0. Define the sum of two elements
of RG by    
X X X
 ai gi  +  bi gi  = (ai + bi )gi .
i∈I i∈I i∈I

Observe that (ai + bi ) = 0 except for a finite number of indices i, so the above
P sum is again in RG.
It is immediate that (RG, +) is an abelian group with additive identity i∈I 0gi .
Multiplication of two elements of RG is defined by the use of the multiplications in G and R
as follows:     
X X X X
 ai gi   bi gi  =  a j bk  g i .
i∈I i∈I i∈I gj gk =gi
P P
Naively, we formally distribute the sum i∈I ai gi over the sum i∈I bi gi and rename a term
a j g j bk g k P
by aj bk gk where gj gk = gi in G. Since ai and bi are 0 for all but a finite number of i,
the sum gj gk =gi aj bk contains only a finite number of nonzero summands aj bk ∈ R and may
P
thus be viewed as an element of R. Again at most a finite number of such sums gj gk =gi aj bk are
nonzero. Thus, multiplication is closed on RG. We can proceed to show that

Theorem 2.1.7. If G is a multiplicative group and R is a commutative ring, then (RG, +, ·) is a

ring with unity 1R e.
P
If we rename the element i∈I ai gi of RG, where ai = 0 for i 6= j and aj = 1, by gj , we
see that (RG, ·) can be considered to contain G naturally. Thus, if G is not abelian, RG is not
commutative. Clearly, char RG = char R, for any group G.

Definition. The ring RG defined above is the group ring of G over R. If F is a field, then F G
is the group algebra of G over F .

Exercises 2.1. 1. Define an addition and a multiplication on Z by

a⊕b=a+b−1 and a ⊙ b = ab − (a + b) + 2 for all a, b ∈ Z.

Prove that (Z, ⊕, ⊙) is an integral domain. √

2. Let S be the set of complex numbers of the form m + n −3 where either m, n ∈ Z or both m and n
are halves of odd integers. Show that S is a subring of C.
3. Show that if 1 − ab is invertible in a ring, then so is 1 − ba.
4. Let a and b be elements of a ring such that a, b and ab − 1 are units. Show that a − b−1 and
(a − b−1 )−1 − a−1 are units and the following identity holds:

((a − b−1 )−1 − a−1 )−1 = aba − a.

5. A ring R is called a Boolean ring is x2 = x for all x ∈ R. Prove that every Boolean ring is commuta-
tive.
6. (a) Show that ϕ : Z12 → Z30 given by ϕ([a]12 ) = [10a]30 is a ring homomorphism.
(b) Show that ϕ : Z12 → Z30 given by ϕ([a]12 ) = [5a]30 is a additive group homomorphism. Is it a
ring homomorphism?
7. Consider (S, +, ·), where S is a set and + and · are binary operations on S which satisfy the distribu-
tive laws such that (S, +) and (S r {0}, ·) are groups. Show that (S, +, ·) is a division ring.
46 2. Rings and Fields

8. Let R be a ring. Define C(R) = {x ∈ R : ∀y ∈ R, xy = yx}, called the center of R.

(a) Prove that C(R) is a commutative subring of R.
(b) Determine the centers of H and Mn (F ) where F is a field.
(c) If R is a division ring, show that C(R) is a field.
9. If p is a prime and ϕ : Zp → Zp is a ring homomorphism, show that ϕ is the zero or the identity map.
10. Show that if F is a field, A ∈ Mn (F ) is a zero divisor in this ring if and only if A is not invertible.
Does this hold for arbitrary commutative ring R? Explain.
11. Let m and n be non-zero integers and let R be the subset of M2 (C) consisting of the matrices of the
form  √ √ 
a + b √m c + d√m
n(c + d m) a − b m
where a, b, c, d ∈ Q. Show that R is a subring of M2 (C) and that R is a division ring if and only if
the only rational numbers x, y, z, t satisfying the equation x2 − my 2 − nz 2 + mnt2 = 0 are x = y =
z = t = 0. Give a choice of m, n that R is a division ring and a choice of m, n that R is not a division
ring.
12. Let R be a ring which may not contain the unity 1. Define two binary operations on R × Z by

(r, k) + (s, m) = (r + s, k + m) and (r, k) · (s, m) = (rs + ks + mr, km).

Prove that (R × Z, +, ·) is a ring with unity (0, 1) and of characteristic zero. Ditto the set R × Zn and
prove that it is a ring of characteristic n.
13. A ring R is simple if R and {0} are the only ideals in R. Show that the characteristic of a simple ring
is either 0 or a prime p.
14. If R is a finite integral domain, prove that |R| is a prime power.

2.2 Ideals, Quotient Rings and the Field of Fractions

Ideals play an important role in ring theory. They are used to construct quotient rings like normal
subgroups.

Definition. Let R be a ring. A subset I of R is called a left [right] ideal of R if

1. I is a subgroup of (R, +) and 2. ∀r ∈ R∀a ∈ I, ra ∈ I [ar ∈ I].
It is called a two-sided ideal or an ideal of R if I is both a left and a right ideal.

E.g., {0} and R are two-sided ideals of R.

Theorem 2.2.1. Let ϕ : R → S be a homomorphism of rings. Then the kernel of ϕ given by

ker ϕ = {x ∈ R : ϕ(x) = 0S }

is an ideal of R.

Proof. It is immediate that ker ϕ is a subgroup of (R, +). If a ∈ R and x ∈ ker ϕ, then ϕ(ax) =
ϕ(a)ϕ(x) = ϕ(a)0 = 0 and ϕ(xa) = ϕ(x)ϕ(a) = 0ϕ(a) = 0. Hence, ax and xa are in ker ϕ.

Remark. Similar to a group homomorphism, for a ring homomorphism, we have ϕ is one-to-one

if and only if ker ϕ = {0}.
For subsets X and Y of R, let XY denote the set of all finite sums in the form
n
X
x i yi , where xi ∈ X, yi ∈ Y and n ∈ N.
i=1

For a ∈ R, we have Ra = {ra : r ∈ R} and aR = {ar : r ∈ R}.

2.2. Ideals, Quotient Rings and the Field of Fractions 47

Examples 2.2.1. 1. All distinct ideals of Zn are dZn , where d = 0 or (d ∈ N and d | n).
2. All distinct ideals of Z are mZ, where m ∈ N ∪ {0}.

Remarks. Let R be a ring.

1. If I is an ideal of R, then IR = I = RI.
2. If a left [right, two-sided] ideal I of R contains a unit, then I = R.
3. If R is a division ring, then {0} and R are the only left [right, two-sided] ideals of R.
4. An arbitrary intersection of left [right, two-sided] ideals of R is a left [right, two-sided]
ideal of R.
5. If S is a subring of R and I is an ideal of R, then S + I is a subring of R, I is an ideal of
S + I and S ∩ I is an ideal of S.
6. If I and J are left [right, two-sided] ideals of R, then I + J and IJ are left [right, two-sided]
ideals of R.
  
a b
Example 2.2.2. Let R be a ring and S = : a, b, c ∈ R a subring of M2 (R).
0 c
     
a 0 0 0
Then : a ∈ R is a left ideal of S and : a ∈ R is a right ideal of S.
0 0 0 a
They are not ideals of S.

Definition. Let R be a ring. If X ⊂ R, then the ideal of R generated by X is the intersection of

all ideals containing X and it is denoted by (X), so (X) is the smallest ideal of R containing X.
For a1 , . . . , an ∈ R, let (a1 , . . . , an ) denote ({a1 , . . . , an }). An ideal I of R is called a principal
ideal if I = (a) for some a ∈ R.

Observe that for a ∈ R,

( m
)
X
(a) = ri asi : ri , si ∈ R and m ∈ N .
i=1

If R is a commutative ring, then ∀a ∈ R, (a) = aR = Ra.

Definition. A ring R is a principal ideal ring if every ideal of R is principal. A principal ideal
domain (PID) is a principal ideal ring which is an integral domain.

Hence, an integral domain R is a PID if {Ra : a ∈ R} is the set of all ideals of R.

Examples 2.2.3. 1. Zn is a principal ideal ring.

2. Z is a PID.
3. Every field has only two ideals, namely (0) and (1) = F , so it is a PID.

Remark. Let F be a field, R a ring and ϕ : F → R a ring homomorphism. Then ker ϕ is either
{0} or F which implies ϕ is 1-1 or is the zero map, respectively. Hence, every nonzero ring
homomorphism of fields must be 1-1. In particular, one can readily verify that the only ring
endomorphisms of Zp are the zero map and the identity map. This finishes the proof of Example
2.1.6.

Theorem 2.2.2. Let R be a commutative ring whose only ideals are {0} and R itself. Then R is a
field.

Proof. Let a ∈ R r {0}. Then (a) = R, so 1 ∈ (a). Since R is commutative, there is a b ∈ R such
that ab = 1 = ba.
48 2. Rings and Fields

Suppose I is an ideal of R. Then I is a subgroup of R, considered as an abelian group, and so

we can form the abelian group R/I. The elements of R/I are cosets

r + I = {r + a : a ∈ I}.

The addition in R/I is given by (r + I) + (s + I) = (r + s) + I.

Now let us define a multiplication on R/I, namely

(r + I)(s + I) = rs + I.

Note that if r + I = r′ + I and s + I = s′ + I, then r − r′ and s − s′ are in I, so

rs − r′ s′ = (r − r′ )s + r′ (s − s′ ) ∈ I.

Thus, the above multiplication is well-defined, it is easy to see that R/I is a ring. Hence, we have
the next theorem.

Theorem 2.2.3. Let R be a ring and I an ideal of R. Then the operators

(r + I) + (s + I) = (r + s) + I and (r + I)(s + I) = rs + I

make R/I into a ring with unity 1 + I, called the factor or quotient ring of R by I. The map
ϕ : R → R/I defined by ϕ(r) = r + I is an onto ring homomorphism which has kernel I. It is
called the canonical projection of R onto R/I.

There also are three isomorphism theorems for rings. Their proofs are similar to isomorphism
theorems for groups. Hence, we shall just sketch them.

Theorem 2.2.4. [First Isomorphism Theorem] If ϕ : R → S is an onto ring homomorphism, then

R/ ker ϕ ∼
= im S.

Proof. Define ϕ̄ : R/ ker ϕ → S by ϕ̄(r + ker ϕ)ϕ(r) for all r ∈ R. Clearly, ϕ̄ is onto and it is easy
to check that ϕ̄ is a ring homomorphism. Moreover, for r, s ∈ R, we have

ϕ(r) = ϕ(s) ⇔ ϕ(r − s) = 0 ⇔ r − s ∈ ker ϕ ⇔ r + ker ϕ = s + ker ϕ.

Hence, ϕ̄ is an isomorphism.

Theorem 2.2.5. [Second Isomorphism Theorem] If S is a subring and I is an ideal of R, then

S/(S ∩ I) ∼
= (S + I)/I.

Proof. Define ϕ : S → (S + I)/I by ϕ(s) = s + I for all s ∈ S. It is easy to verify that ϕ is

a ring homomorphism with kernel S ∩ I and the theorem follows from the first isomorphism
theorem.

Theorem 2.2.6. [Third Isomorphism Theorem] If I and J are ideals of a ring R such that I ⊆ J,
then J/I is an ideal of R/I and
(R/I)/(J/I) ∼= R/J.

Proof. Define ϕ : R/I → R/J by ϕ(r + I) = r + J for all r ∈ R. It can be verified that ϕ is a ring
homomorphism with kernel J/I and the theorem follows from the first isomorphism theorem.
2.2. Ideals, Quotient Rings and the Field of Fractions 49

Remark. As for groups, the third isomorphism theorem gives a 1-1 correspondence between the
set of ideals of R containing I and the set of ideals of R/I.

We end this section by embedding an integral domain into a field.

Definition. We say that a ring R can be embedded in a ring R′ if there exists a monomorphism
(i.e., 1-1 homomorphism) of R into R′ .

Example 2.2.4. A ring R can be embedded in the ring Mn (R) by the diagonal map a 7→ aIn .

Theorem 2.2.7. Any ring R without identity can be embedded in a ring R′ with identity. Moreover,
R′ can be chosen to be either of characteristic zero or of same characteristic as R.

Proof. Consider the rings R×Z and R×Zn defined in the last question of Ring Exercise Set I. They
are rings with unity (0, 1) and (0, 1̄), and of characteristic 0 and n, respectively. If char R = 0, we
define ϕ : R → R × Z by ϕ(x) = (x, 0) and if char R = n, we define ϕ : R → R × Zn by
ϕ(x) = (x, 0̄). It is easy to show that both functions are monomorphisms. This finishes the
proof.

We now wish to show that every integral domain can be embedded in a field, called its field
of fractions such that every element of the field is a fraction a/b where a and b lie in the integral
domain and b 6= 0. There is only one problem to overcome: we might wish to define the field
to be the set of all “fraction” a/b, with b 6= 0. But this is not quite right because two different
fractions may be the same number. E.g., 1/2 = 2/4 = 3/6. We overcome this problem by defining
an equivalence relation on certain pairs of elements in the integral domain. The results are
presented in the next theorem. Its proof is routine and omitted.

Theorem 2.2.8. Suppose D is an integral domain, and let S be the set of pairs

{(r, s) : r, s ∈ D and s 6= 0}.

1. (r, s) ∼ (r′ , s′ ) ⇔ rs′ = r′ s defines an equivalence relation on S.

2. Let [r, s] denote the equivalence class of (r, s) and let Q(D) denote the set of all equivalence
classes. Then

[r, s] + [r′ , s′ ] = [rs′ + r′ s, ss′ ] and [r, s][r′ , s′ ] = [rr′ , ss′ ]

are well-defined binary operations on Q(D).

3. The set Q(D) is a field with these operations and D is embedded in Q(D) by the monomor-
phism r 7→ [r, 1]. The field Q(D) is called the field of fractions or quotient field of D. The
equivalence class [r, s] is denoted by r/s.

Remark. If R is an entire ring which is not commutative, the construction Q(R) above does not
exist in general.
Example 2.2.5. Let D be an integral domain and a, b ∈ D. If am = bm and an = bn , for m and n
relatively prime positive integers, prove that a = b.
Proof. If a = 0, then b = 0 since D has no zero divisor. Assume that a 6= 0. Then b 6= 0. Let F be
the field of fraction of D. Since (m, n) = 1, ∃x, y ∈ Z, mx + ny = 1. Thus, in F , we have
a = a1 = amx+ny = (am )x (an )y = (bm )x (bn )y = bmx+ny = b1 = b,
so a = b in D.
50 2. Rings and Fields

Exercises 2.2. 1. An element a of a ring R is nilpotent if an = 0 for some n ∈ N. Show that the set of
all nilpotent elements N in a commutative ring R is an ideal, called the nilradical of R. Moreover,
prove that R/N has no nonzero nilpotent.
2. Show that a ring R has no nonzero nilpotent element if and only if 0 is the only solution of x2 = 0
in R.
3. Let ϕ : R → S be a homomorphisms of rings. Prove the following statements.
(a) If I is an ideal of R and ϕ is onto, then ϕ(I) is an ideal of S.
(b) If J is an ideal of S, then ϕ−1 (J) is an ideal of R containing ker ϕ.
4. Let R be a commutative ring and I an ideal of R. Show that
√
I = {x ∈ R : ∃n ∈ N, xn ∈ I}

is anpideal of R which contains I, called the radical of I. In addition, prove that

√ √ √
(a) I= I and (b) if I = R, then I = R.
5. Let R and S be rings and ϕ : R → S be such that
(i) ∀r, s ∈ R, ϕ(r + s) = ϕ(r) + ϕ(s) and
(ii) ∀r, s ∈ R [ϕ(rs) = ϕ(r)ϕ(s) ∨ ϕ(rs) = ϕ(s)ϕ(r)].
Prove that ∀r, s ∈ R, ϕ(rs) = ϕ(r)ϕ(s) or ∀r, s ∈ R, ϕ(rs) = ϕ(s)ϕ(r).
6. [Chinese Remainder Theorem] If I and J are ideals of a ring R such that I + J = R, prove that
R/(I ∩ J) ∼ = R/I × R/J.
7. Let R be a division ring. Prove that any nonzero ring homomorphism ϕ : R → R is 1-1.
8. Let I be an ideal of a ring R and let Mn (I) be the set of n × n matrices with entries in I. Prove that
(a) Mn (I) is an ideal of Mn (R) and Mn (R)/Mn (I) ∼ = Mn (R/I), and
(b) every ideal of Mn (R) is of the form Mn (I) for some ideal I of R. In particular, if R is a division
ring, then the ring Mn (R) has only two ideals.

2.3 Maximal Ideals and Prime Ideals

We have learned that a ring R has two trivial ideals, namely {0} and R itself. In this section, we
shall discover properties of maximal ideals and prime ideals. These are two kinds of important
ideals in commutative algebra and algebraic geometry.

Definition. An ideal M of R is maximal if M 6= R and for every ideal J of R,

M ⊆ J ⊆ R ⇒ J = M or J = R.

Example 2.3.1. In the ring Z, for n ∈ N, nZ is maximal if and only if n is a prime.

Proof. Let n be a prime and let J be an ideal of Z such that nZ ⊆ J ⊆ Z. Then J = dZ for some
d ∈ N and d | n, so d = 1 or d = n. Hence, J = nZ or J = Z. On the other hand, assume
that n = ab for some 1 < a, b < n. Then nZ ⊆ aZ ⊆ Z, aZ 6= nZ and aZ 6= Z, so nZ is not
maximal.
Remarks. 1. Every ideal I 6= R is contained in some maximal ideal M .
Proof. Let I = {J : J 6= R and J is an ideal of R containing I}. Let C = {Jα }α∈Λ be a chain in I .
Then ∪C is an ideal of R. If ∪C = R, then 1 ∈ Jα for some α ∈ Λ, so Jα = R, a contradiction.
Hence, ∪C is an upper bound of C in I . By, Zorn’s lemma, we have I has a maximal element
which turns out to be our desired maximal ideal containing I.
2. If M is a maximal ideal and I is an ideal of R such that I * M , then M + I = R.
Proof. Let x ∈ I, ∈
/ M . Consider the ideal J = M + Rx which is larger than M . Since M is maximal,
J = R. Thus, R = M + Rx ⊆ M + I.
2.3. Maximal Ideals and Prime Ideals 51

3. If M1 and M2 are distinct maximal ideals, then M1 + M2 = R. In addition, if R is commu-

tative, then M1 M2 = M1 ∩ M2 .
4. If R is commutative, then Ru = R if and only if u is a unit.

Theorem 2.3.1. Let R be a commutative ring and M an ideal of R.

Then M is a maximal ideal of R if and only if R/M is a field.

Proof. Clearly, R/M is a commutative ring with unity 1 + M . Assume that M is a maximal ideal.
Let a ∈
/ M . Then M + Ra = R, so ∃b ∈ R, 1 = m + ba. Thus, 1 + M = ba + M = (b + M )(a + M ),
and hence R/M is a field. Conversely, suppose that R/M is a field. Let M ⊆ J ⊆ R and J 6= M .
Then ∃a ∈ J r M . Since R/M is a field and a ∈
/ M , ∃b ∈ R, 1 + M = (a + M )(b + M ) = ab + M ,
so 1 − ab ∈ M ⊆ J. Since a ∈ J, ab ∈ J which implies 1 ∈ J. Hence, J = R.

Definition. An ideal P of R is prime of R if P 6= R and for any ideals A, B of R,

AB ⊆ P ⇒ A ⊆ P or B ⊆ P.

Theorem 2.3.2. Let P be an ideal of R such that P 6= R.

1. If ∀a, b ∈ R, ab ∈ P ⇒ a ∈ P or b ∈ P , then P is prime.
2. If R is commutative and P is prime, then ∀a, b ∈ R, ab ∈ P ⇒ a ∈ P or b ∈ P .

Proof. (1) Assume that AB ⊆ P and A * P . Choose a ∈ A, ∈ / P . Let b ∈ B. Thus, ab ∈ AB ⊆ P ,

so a ∈ P or b ∈ P . But a ∈
/ P , hence B ⊆ P .
(2) Let a, b ∈ R be such that ab ∈ P . Since R is commutative, Rab = RaRb ⊆ P , so Ra ⊆ P or
Rb ⊆ P . Hence, a ∈ P or b ∈ P .

Theorem 2.3.3. Let R be a commutative ring and P an ideal of R.

Then P is a prime ideal of R if and only if R/P is an integral domain.

Proof. This follows from Theorem 2.3.2 as follows. For an ideal P ,

P is prime ⇔ ∀a, b ∈ R, ab ∈ P ⇒ a ∈ P or b ∈ P
⇔ ∀a, b ∈ R, (a + P )(b + P ) = 0 + P ⇒ a + P = 0 + P or b + P = 0 + P
⇔ R/P is an integral domain

as desired.

Theorems 2.3.1 and 2.3.3 are the most useful for characterizing maximal ideals and prime
ideals in commutative rings.

Corollary 2.3.4. Let R be a commutative ring.

1. Every maximal ideal of R is prime.
2. If R is finite, then every prime ideal of R is maximal.

Example 2.3.2. In Z, nZ is prime if and only if n = 0 or n is a prime.

Remark. In the ring Z, {0} is a prime ideal which is not maximal.

Definition. The set of all prime ideals of a commutative ring R is denoted by Spec R, called the
spectrum of R.

E.g., Spec Z = {pZ : p is a prime} ∪ {{0}}.

52 2. Rings and Fields

Definition. A local ring is a commutative ring which has a unique maximal ideal.

Examples 2.3.3. 1. Z is not a local ring.

2. Every field is a local ring.
3. Zpn is a local ring with the maximal ideal pZpn for all primes p and n ∈ N.

Theorem 2.3.5. Let R be a commutative ring.

Then R is a local ring if and only if the nonunits of R form an ideal.

Proof. Assume R is a local ring with the maximal ideal M . Let a ∈ R r M . If aR 6= R, then aR is
contained in some maximal ideal, so aR ⊆ M which yields a contradiction. Thus, aR = R, so a
is a unit. Hence, M is the set of nonunits of R. Conversely, suppose that the nonunits of R form
an ideal M of R. Clearly, M is maximal. Let M ′ be another maximal ideal of R. If ∃a ∈ M ′ r M ,
then a is a unit, so M ′ = R, a contradiction. Thus, M ′ ⊆ M . Since M ′ is maximal, M ′ = M .

This implies the following corollary.

Corollary 2.3.6. In a finite local ring R, every element is either a unit or a nilpotent element.
Moreover, |R| is a prime power.

Example 2.3.4. Fix a prime p and let

Rp = {m/n : m, n ∈ Z and p does not divide n}.

Then Rp is a subring of Q and is local. Its unique maximal ideal is {pk/n : k, n ∈ Z and p ∤ n}.

Exercises 2.3. 1. Let R be a ring and I an ideal of R. Prove that the map J 7→ J/I gives a 1-1
correspondence
{ideals of R containing I} ←→ {ideals of R/I}.
Moreover, this correspondence carries maximal ideals to maximal ideals.
2. Prove Corollary 2.3.6 and Example 2.3.4.
3. Find all ideals, all prime ideals and all maximal ideals of
(a) Z12 (b) Z2 × Z4 (c) Q × Q (d) Q × Z (e) Z × Z4 × Z5 .
4. Let R be a commutative ring. If every ideal proper of R is prime, show that R is a field.
5. Show that in a Boolean ring R, every prime ideal P 6= R is maximal.

2.4 Factorizations
From elementary number theory, we know that every positive integer can be decomposed uniquely
into a product of prime numbers. It is a unique factorization property of the ring Z. In this section,
we shall learn about factorizations in any other integral domains.

2.4.1 Irreducible Elements and Prime Elements

Definition. Let R be a commutative ring and suppose that a, b ∈ R. We say that a divides b
and write a | b, if there is an r ∈ R such that ra = b.

Remarks. Let R be a commutative ring and a, b ∈ R.

1. a divides b ⇔ b ∈ Ra ⇔ Rb ⊆ Ra.
2.4. Factorizations 53

2. a divides 0 (R0 ⊆ Ra).

3. a ∈ R, 1 divides a (Ra ⊆ R · 1 = R).
4. a divides 1 ⇔ R = Ra ⇔ a is a unit.
5. 0 divides a ⇔ Ra ⊆ R0 ⇔ a = 0.

Definition. Let R be an integral domain and suppose a, b ∈ R. We say that a and b are asso-
ciates if a | b and b | a.

Theorem 2.4.1. Let R be an integral domain, a, b ∈ R. The following statements are equivalent.
(i) a and b are associates. (ii) Ra = Rb. (iii) a = ub for some unit u ∈ R.

Proof. (i) ⇒ (iii) If a = 0, then b = 0 and (3) is clear. Suppose then that a 6= 0. Since a | b and
b | a, we can write a = ub and b = va. Thus, a = ub = uva, so (uv − 1)a = 0, so uv = 1. Hence,
a = ub and u is a unit of R.
(iii) ⇒ (ii) If a = ub where u is a unit, then Ra = Rub = (Ru)b = Rb.
(ii) ⇒ (i) If Ra = Rb, then a = rb, b = sa, so b | a and a | b. Hence, a and b are associates.

Definition. Let R be an integral domain. We say that a nonzero nonunit element a in R is an

irreducible element or atom if a cannot be expressed as a product a = bc where b and c are
nonunits.

Theorem 2.4.2. Let R be an integral domain and a a nonzero nonunit in R.

1. a is irreducible ⇔ (∀b, c ∈ R, a = bc ⇒ b or c is a unit).
2. If Ra is maximal, then a is irreducible. The converse holds if R is a PID.

Proof. (1) It follows directly from the definition.

(2) Assume that Ra is maximal. Let b, c ∈ R be such that a = bc. Then Ra ⊆ Rb ⊆ R. Since Ra
is maximal, Ra = Rb or Rb = R. If Rb = R, then b is a unit. Let Ra = Rb. Then a = bu for some
unit u ∈ R, so bc = bu which implies c = u is a unit since R has no zero divisor.
Finally, we assume that R is a PID and a ∈ R is irreducible. Let J be an ideal of R such that
Ra ⊆ J ⊆ R. Since R is a PID, J = Rb for some b in R, and so a ∈ Rb. Thus, a = cb for some
c ∈ R, so b or c is a unit. Hence, Rb = R or Ra = Rb.

Definition. A nonzero nonunit element p in R is a prime element if

∀a, b ∈ R, p | ab ⇒ p | a or p | b.

Theorem 2.4.3. Let R be an integral domain.

(1) For a nonzero nonunit p in R, p is prime ⇔ Rp is a prime ideal.
(2) Every prime element is irreducible. The converse holds if R is a PID.

Proof. (1) It follows directly from the definition and Theorem 2.3.2.
(2) Let p be a prime element. Assume that p = ab for some a, b ∈ R. Then Rab = Rp, so Ra ⊆ Rp
or Rb ⊆ Rp. Since Rp = Rab ⊆ (Ra ∩ Rb), Ra = Rp or Rb = Rp, so au = p or bv = p for some
units u and v in R. Hence, b = u or a = v is a unit in R. Finally, suppose that R is a PID and p is
irreducible. Then Rp is maximal, so it is a prime ideal. Hence, p is prime.
54 2. Rings and Fields

2.4.2 Unique Factorization Domains

Definition. A unique factorization domain (UFD) is an integral domain R which satisfies:

1. Every nonzero nonunit of R is a product of atoms.
2. If a is a nonzero nonunit of R, then the expression of a as a product of atoms is unique in
the following sense: “If a = a1 . . . ar = b1 . . . bs where a1 , . . . , ar , b1 , . . . , bs are atoms, then
r = s and there is a reordering bi1 , . . . , bir of b1 , . . . , bs such that a1 and bi1 are associates,
a2 and bi2 are associates, . . . , ar and bir are associates”.

Examples 2.4.1. 1. The ring of rational integers Z is a UFD by the fundamental theorem of
arithmetic. Since U (Z) = {±1}, the atoms of Z are ±p where p is a prime. Note that p and
−p are associates (e.g., 12 = 2 · 2 · 3 = (−2)(−3) · 2).
2. Let F be a field. Every element of F except 0 is a unit. Hence, every nonzero nonunit of F
is uniquely a product of atoms (vacuously!). That is, F has no nonzero nonunits.

Theorem 2.4.4. Let R be an integral domain. Then R is a UFD if and only if

1. every nonzero nonunit of R is a product of atoms and
2. every irreducible element is prime.

Proof. Suppose R is a UFD. Then (1) holds, by the definition of a UFD. It remains to show that if
x is irreducible, then x is prime. Suppose x | bc, and let ax = bc. Write a, b and c as products of
atoms, so that
a . . . a x = b1 . . . bl c1 . . . cm .
| 1 {z k} | {z } | {z }
a b c

Since these are two factorizations of ax = bc into products of atoms and x is an atom, x must be
an associate of some bi or some cj . Hence, x | b or x | c. Thus, x is prime.
Conversely, suppose (1) and (2) are given. Then to show R is a UFD, it suffices to show that if

a1 . . . ar = b1 . . . bs

where the ai and bi are atoms, then r = s and the bi may be arranged so the ai and bi are
associates for i = 1, . . . , r. The proof proceeds by induction on r.
When r = 1, a1 = b1 . . . bs . Since a1 is prime, a1 divides bi for some i. Assume that a1 | b1 ,
and let b1 = ua1 . Since b1 is an atom, u must be a unit, so a1 and b1 are associates. Furthermore,
a1 = b1 . . . bs = ua1 b2 . . . bs , so 1 = (ub2 ) . . . bs . That is, s = 1 and a1 = b1 . For the inductive step,
write a1 . . . ar = b1 . . . bs . Since a1 is prime, a1 divides bi for some i. As above, let b1 = ua1 where
u is a unit and a1 and b1 are associates. Then a1 . . . ar = b1 . . . bs = ua1 b2 . . . bs , so a2 . . . ar =
ub2 . . . bs . Now the inductive hypothesis applies since we have r − 1 factors on the left. It follows
that r = s and after reordering the bi , ai and bi are associates for i = 2, . . . , r. This completes the
induction.

To obtain more examples of a UFD and an integral domain which is not a UFD, we introduce:

Definition. Let d be a square free integer. The set

√ √
Z[ d] = {x + y d : x, y ∈ Z}

is a subring of C. It is called the ring of quadratic integers.

√ √
Note that if x1 , x2 , y1 , y2 ∈ Z are such that x1 + y1 d = x2 + y2 d, then x1 = x2 and y1 = y2
because d is non-square.
2.4. Factorizations 55

√
Definition. Define a function N : Z[ d] → Z by
√
N (x + y d) = x2 − dy 2 for all x, y ∈ Z.
√
It is called the norm map on Z[ d].

√ √
Theorem 2.4.5.√ 1. If α ∈ Z[ d] and N (α) = 0, then α = 0 = 0 + 0 d.
Z[ d], N (αβ) = N (α)N (β) and (α | β ⇒ N (α) | N (β)).
2. ∀α, β ∈ √
3. ∀α ∈ Z[ √d], α is a unit ⇔ N (α) = ±1. √
4. If α ∈ Z[ d] and N (α) = p is a prime number, then α is irreducible in Z[ d].

Proof.
√ Let x, y ∈ Z be such that x2 − dy 2 = 0. Then x2 = dy 2 . If y 6= 0, then d = x2 /y 2 , so
d = |x/y| ∈ Q, which is a contradiction. Thus, we must have y√= 0 which also forces x = 0.
This proves (1). A direct calculation
√ gives (2). For (3), let α ∈ Z[ d]. Suppose that α is a unit.
Then αβ = 1 for some β ∈ Z[ d]. Thus, 1 = N (1) = N (αβ) = N (α)N (β), so N (α)√divides 1
in Z. This gives √ N (1) 2= ±1. Conversely,
√ assume √ that N (α) = ±1. Write α√= x + y d. Then
2
±1 = N (x + y d) = x − y d = (x + y d)(x − y d) which implies that x + y d is a unit. Finally,
(4) follows from (3).
√
Example 2.4.2. The unit group of the ring Z[i] is {1, −1, i, −i} where i denotes −1.
√
Remark. The equation x2 − dy 2 = 1 is called the Pell’s equation. Every unit in Z[ d] is a
solution of Pell’s equation, or else of x2 − dy 2 = −1, the negative Pell’s equation. If d < 0, then
x2 − dy 2 ≥ 0. In this case the negative Pell’s equation has no solutions. In fact, Pell’s equation only
has very few solutions in this case, namely two, unless d = −1 when there are four solutions. If
d > 0, there are infinitely many solutions to Pell’s equation. The negative Pell’s equation may or
may not have solutions.
√
Example √ 2.4.3. Consider
√ the ring Z[ −5].
1. 1 − √−5, 1 + −5, 2 and 3 are irreducible elements. √
2. 1 + −5 and 2 are not prime elements. Hence, Z[ −5] is not a UFD by Theorem 2.4.4.
√ √ √
Solution. (1) Assume that 1 − −5 = (a + b −5)(c + d −5) for some a, b, c, d ∈ Z. By taking
norms, we have
6 = (a2 + 5b2 )(c2 + 5d2 ),
√
which implies that a2 + 5b2 = 1, 2, 3 or 6. Observe that b = 0 implies a2 = 1, so a + b 5 is√ a unit.
2
If b 6= 0, then a + 5b 2 2 2 2 2
√ ≥ 5, so a + 5b = 6. This forces that c + 5d √= 1 and thus √ c + d −5 is
a unit. Hence, 1 − −5 is irreducible. Next, assume that 2 = (a + b −5)(c + d −5) for some
a, b, c, d ∈ Z. By taking norms, we have

4 = (a2 + 5b2 )(c2 + 5d2 ),

which implies that a2 + 5b2 = 1, 2 or 4. If a2 + 5b2 = 2, then 2√is a square √ modulo 5 which is a
contradiction. Thus, a2 + 5b2 = √ 1 or c 2 + 5d2 = 1. Hence, a + b −5 or c + d −5 is a unit and so

2 is irreducible. Similarly, 1 + −5 and 3 are irreducible.

(2) Note that √ √
(1 + −5)(1 − −5) = 6 = 2 · 3.
√ √ √
Then (1 + √−5) | 2 · 3. But, if (1 + −5) | 2 or (1 + −5) | 3,√then 6 | 4√or 6 | 9, which are√absurd.
Thus, 1 √+ −5 is not a prime element. Similarly, 2 | (1 + −5)(1 − −5). If 2 | (1 + −5) or
2 | (1 − −5), then 4 | 6, a contradiction. Hence, 2 is not a prime element.

Next, we talk about common factors, gcd and lcm of elements in an integral domain.
56 2. Rings and Fields

Definition. Let R be an integral domain and suppose a, b ∈ R. A greatest common divisor of

a and b, gcd(a, b), is an element d ∈ R which satisfies
1. d | a and d | b and 2. ∀c ∈ R, (c | a ∧ c | b) ⇒ c | d.
A least common multiple of a and b, lcm(a, b), is an element m ∈ R which satisfies
1. a | m and b | m and 2. ∀c ∈ R, (a | c ∧ b | c) ⇒ m | c.

Remark. +3 and −3 are greatest common divisors of 12 and 15. 60 and −60 are least common
multiples of 12 and 15. Thus, the gcd or lcm of two elements is not unique, (however we adopt
the above notation anyway, e.g., gcd(12, 15) = 3 and gcd(12, 15) = −3 are both correct!). By their
definitions, they are unique up to associates as recorded in the next theorem.

Theorem 2.4.6. Let R be an integral domain and let a, b ∈ R.

1. If d and d′ are gcd’s of a and b, then d and d′ are associates.
2. If m and m′ are lcm’s of a and b, then m and m′ are associates.

Let R be an integral domain and let Q(R) be the set of atoms of R. Define an equivalence
relation on Q(R) by a ∼ b if a and b are associates. Then a set of representative atoms for R is a
set P = P(R) which contains exactly one atom from each equivalence class.
Example 2.4.4. Q(Z) = {±p | p is a prime} is the set of all atoms in Z.
P(Z) = {p | p is a positive prime} is a set of representative atoms.
P(Z) = {+2, −3, +5, −7, . . .} is another set of representative atoms.

Theorem 2.4.7. Let R be an integral domain and let P be a set of representative atoms for R.
Then the following statements are equivalent.
(i) R is a UFD.
(ii) Every nonzero element of R can be expressed uniquely (up to order of factors) as a =
ubi11 · · · bikk , where u is a unit of R, k ≥ 0, i1 , . . . , ik > 0 and b1 , . . . , bk are distinct elements
of P.

Theorem 2.4.8. Let R be a UFD and suppose a, b ∈ R r {0}.

1. a and b have a gcd and an lcm.
2. Let P be a set of representative atoms for R. Then among the gcd’s of a and b there is exactly
one which is a product of elements of P. The same is true for the lcm’s of a and b.
3. If a and b are nonzero, gcd(a, b) = r, and lcm(a, b) = s, then ab and rs are associates. In
other words,
ab
lcm(a, b) = .
gcd(a, b)

Proof. Let P be a set of representative atoms of R, and let b1 , . . . , bk ∈ P be all the atoms of P
which occur in either a or b when they are factored as in Theorem 2.4.7. Write
a = ubi11 · · · bikk and b = vbj11 · · · bjkk
where u and v are units and is , js ≥ 0. Then we derive:
min(i ,j ) min(i ,j )
(a) r = b1 1 1 · · · br r r is a gcd for a and b.
max(i1 ,j1 ) max(ir ,jr )
(b) s = b1 · · · br is a lcm for a and b.
(c) r is the only gcd of a and b which is a product of elements of P, and s is the only lcm of a and
b which is a product of elements of P.
(d) Since i + j = min(i, j) + max(i, j) for any integers i and j,
ab = uvb1i1 +j1 · · · bikk +jk = uvrs.
Hence, ab and rs are associates.
2.4. Factorizations 57

Remark. Suppose R is an integral domain and Ra + Rb = Rc. Then c = gcd(a, b). The converse
does not hold. E.g., Q[s, t], where s and t are indeterminates. Then gcd(s, t) = 1 and Q[s, t] 6=
Qs + Qt.

Proof. Since Rc ⊇ Ra and Rc ⊇ Rb, c | a and c | b. Suppose d | a and d | b. Then Rd ⊇ Ra + Rb = Rc, so

d | c. Hence, c = gcd(a, b).

Lemma 2.4.9. [Ascending Chain Condition (ACC) for a PIR] Let R be a principal ideal ring. If
I1 ⊆ I2 ⊆ . . . is a chain of ideals in R, then ∃m ∈ N, In = Im for all n ≥ m.

S
Proof.
S∞ Let I = ∞ n=1 In . Then I is an ideal of R. Since R is a PIR, ∃a ∈ R, (a) = I. Then
a ∈ n=1 In , so ∃m ∈ N, a ∈ Im . Thus, I = (a) ⊆ Im ⊆ I which implies that Im = I. Hence,
∀n ≥ m, In = Im .

Lemma 2.4.10. If R is a PID and a is nonzero nonunit, then ∃ an atom p ∈ R such that p | a.

Proof. Since a is nonunit, Ra $ R. Then ∃ a maximal ideal M of R such that Ra ⊆ M . Since R

is a PID, M = Rp for some atom p by Theorem 2.4.2. Since Ra ⊆ Rp, p | a.

Theorem 2.4.11. Every PID is a UFD.

Proof. Let R be a PID. By Theorems 2.4.3 and 2.4.4, it suffices to show that every nonzero nonunit
of R is a product of atoms. Let a ∈ R be nonzero nonunit. By Lemma 2.4.10, there exists an atom
p1 dividing a. Write a = p1 b1 for some b1 ∈ R. If b1 is a unit, then a is an atom. If b1 is nonunit,
then there exists an atom p2 dividing b1 , so we write a = p1 b1 = p1 p2 b2 . Continuing, we get a
strictly ascending chain of ideals

(a) ⊂ (b1 ) ⊂ (b2 ) ⊂ · · · .

Since R is a PID, this chain must terminate, by the ACC in Lemma 2.4.9, with some br = pr ur
where ur is a unit and pr is an atom. Hence, a = p1 p2 . . . pr ur , and so R is a UFD as desired.

Finally, we study a generalization of the division algorithm which leads to an algorithm to find
a gcd of two integers, called the Euclidean algorithm.

Definition. An integral domain D is called Euclidean if there exists a map

d : D r {0} → N ∪ {0},

called a valuation map, such that

1. ∀a, b ∈ D r {0}, d(a) ≤ d(ab) and
2. ∀a ∈ D, b ∈ D r {0}, ∃q, r ∈ D, a = bq + r with r = 0 or d(r) < d(b).

Examples 2.4.5. 1. Z is a Euclidean domain if we define d(a) = |a| for all a 6= 0.

2. Any field F is a Euclidean domain with valuation d(a) = 1 for all a 6= 0.
3. The ring Z[i] = {m + ni : m, n ∈ Z} is called the ring of Gaussian integer. This is a
subring of C, hence an integral domain. Its elements can be identified with the set of “lattice
points”, that is, points with integral coordinates in the complex plane. If a = m + ni, we put
d(a) = aā = |a|2 = m2 + n2 , the norm map. Then d(a) ∈ N and d(ab) = d(a)d(b) ≥ d(a) for
all a, b ∈ Z[i] r {0}. To prove that d satisfies the condition of the definition of a Euclidean
domain, we note that if b 6= 0, then ab−1 = µ+νi, where µ and ν are rational numbers. Now
58 2. Rings and Fields

we can find integers u and v such that |u − µ| ≤ 1/2, |v − ν| ≤ 1/2. Set ε = µ − u, η = ν − v,

so that |ε| ≤ 1/2 and |η| ≤ 1/2. Then

a = b[(u + ε) + (v + η)i] = bq + r

where q = u + vi is in Z[i]. Since r = a − bq, r ∈ Z[i]. Moreover if r 6= 0, then

d(r) = |r|2 = |b|2 (ε2 + η 2 ) ≤ |b|2 (1/4 + 1/4) = d(b)/2.

Thus, d(r) < d(b). Hence, Z[i] is Euclidean.

Theorem 2.4.12. A Euclidean domian is a PID, and hence is a UFD.

Proof. Let I be an ideal in a Euclidean domain D. If I = {0}, we have I = (0). Otherwise, let
b 6= 0 be an element of I for which d(b) is minimal for the nonzero elements of I. Let a be any
element of I. Then a = bq + r for some q, r ∈ D with r = 0 or d(r) < d(b). Since r = a − bq ∈ I
and d(r) < d(b), we must have r = 0 by the choice of b in I. Hence, a = bq, so I = (b).
√
Example 2.4.6. Let θ = 21 (1 + −19) and Z[θ] = {a + bθ : a, b ∈ Z}. Assume that u = a + bθ is a
unit in Z[θ]. Then (a + bθ)(c + dθ) = 1 for some c, d ∈ Z. The squares of absolute value on both
sides give
((2a + b)2 + 19b2 )((2c + d)2 + 19d2 ) = 16
which implies b = d = 0 and so ac = 1. Hence, the unit group of Z[θ] = {±1}. By a similar
technique, we can show that 2 and 3 are irreducible in Z[θ]. Now, suppose that d is a valuation
map on Z[θ]. Choose m ∈ Z[θ] which is nonzero nonunit such that d(m) is minimal. First, we
divide 2 by m and get q, r ∈ Z[θ] and

2 = mq + r with d(r) < d(m) or r = 0.

This means r = 0, 1 or −1. If r = 0, then m | 2 which forces m = ±2 since 2 is irreducible and m

is not a unit. Similarly, if r = −1, then m = ±3. The case r = 1 cannot happen, for if it did, then
m | 1, so m is a unit. Next, we divide θ by m in the same way, we obtain q ′ , r′ ∈ Z[θ] and

θ = mq ′ + r′ with d(r′ ) < d(m) or r′ = 0.

Again, we have r′ = 0, 1 or −1. Thus, one of θ, θ + 1 or θ − 1 is divisible by m. But m = ±2 or ±3

and it is easy to see that none of these quotients is in R. This contradiction tell us that Z[θ] is not
a Euclidean domain.
Next, we shall show that Z[θ] is a PID. Let I be a nonzero ideal of Z[θ]. Choose b ∈ I so
that |b| is as small as possible. We aim to show that I = Z[θ]b. Suppose not. Then there is
an element a ∈ I r Z[θ]b. Note that ap − bq ∈ I for all p, q ∈ Z[θ], so if we can find p, q with
|ap − bq| < |b| (or equivalently |(a/b)p − q| < 1), then we shall be done. Since we may replace
a by any element a′ = a − bq, we can subtract any desired element of R from √ a/b. In particular,
we can assume that the imaginary part y of √ a/b = x + iy lies between ± 19/4. Now, if the
imaginary part of a/b lies strictly between ± 3/2, then a/b lies at distance less than 1 from some
rational integer
√ √ and we are done. Thus, we may assume the imaginary part of a/b lies between
3/2 and 19/4 (or the √ negative of this, where
√ the √ argument is similar).
√ Hence, √ the imaginary
√
part
√ of 2(a/b)
√ − (1
√ + −19)/2 lies between 3 − 19/2 and 0. But 19
√ < 27 = 3 3, so
3/2 > 19/2 − 3 > 0. Therefore, the imaginary part of 2(a/b) − (1 + −19)/2 is sufficient
small that the complex number lies at a distance less than 1 for some rational integer. In both
cases, we have found elements p, q ∈ Z[θ] such that |ap−bq| < |b| which is a contradiction. Hence,
Z[θ] is a PID.
2.5. Polynomial Rings 59

√
Remark. In conclusion, recall that Z is an integral domain which
√ is not a field and Z[ −5] is not
a UFD. Besides, Z[θ] = {a + bθ : a, b ∈ Z}, where θ = (1 + −19)/2, is a PID which is not a
Euclidean domain as shown above. Finally, Z[x] (in the next section) is a UFD which is not a PID.

Exercises 2.4. 1. If p and q are prime elements in an integral domain R such that p | q, prove that p
and q are associates.
2. Let R be a UFD and c a nonzero element in R. Prove that R/Rc contains a nonzero nilpotent element
if and only if there is a prime element p ∈ R with p2 | c.
3. Let R be a UFD. If a ∈ R is a nonzero nonunit element, prove that Ra is the product of a finite
number of prime ideals.
4. If R is a PID and gcd(a, b) = 1, show that Ra + Rb = R, so 1 = ax + by for some x, y ∈ R.
5. Let R be a PID and suppose that a, b and c are nonzero elements of R such that Ra + Rb = Rc. Show
that there exist√u, v ∈ R such that ua + vb = c and Ru + Rv = R. √ √
6. Prove that 4 + 10 is irreducible but not prime in the ring {a + b 10 : a, b ∈ Z}. Deduce that Z[ 10]
is not a UFD. √
7. Show that the ring Z[ 2] has infinitely many units. (Hint. If u is a unit, so is un for all n ∈ Z.)
8. (a) Let D be a Euclidean domain. Prove that u is a unit in D if and only if d(u) = d(1).
(b) Show that ±1 and ±i are units in Z[i] and prove that if a+bi is not a unit in Z[i], then a2 +b2 > 1.
9. Let R be a Euclidean ring and a, b ∈ R, b 6= 0. Prove that there exist q0 , q1 . . . , qn and r1 , . . . , rn in R
such that
a = q0 b + r1 , d(r1 ) < d(b),
b = q1 r1 + r2 , d(r2 ) < d(r1 ),
r1 = q2 r2 + r3 , d(r3 ) < d(r2 ),
··· ··· ···
rn−2 = qn−1 rn−1 + rn , d(rn ) < d(rn−1 ),
rn−1 = qn rn
and if a and b satisfy the above conditions, then rn is a gcd of a and b. This algorithm is called the
Euclidean algorithm. Find a gcd of 8 + 6i and 5 − 15i in Z[i] by using the Euclidean algorithm.
10. Let D be a UFD with field of fractions F and suppose α ∈ F . Show that it is possible to write α = a/b
with a, b ∈ D and gcd(a, b) = 1.
11. Let R be a PID with field of fractions F , and let S be a ring with R ⊆ S ⊆ F .
(a) If α ∈ S, show that α = a/b with a, b ∈ R and 1/b ∈ S. (b) Prove that S is a PID.
12. Let R = {m/2n : m, n ∈ Z and n ≥ 0}.
(a) Prove that R is a subring of Q and determine all units of R.
(b) Show that 3 is an irreducible element in R.
(c) Prove that R is a PID.

2.5 Polynomial Rings

Another familiar topic in elementary algebra is “polynomials”. Algebraic equations usually involve
factorization of polynomials. Here, we treat them in a more abstract way with the things that we
have studied from the previous section. There will be many important results in this section.

2.5.1 Polynomials and Their Roots

Definition. Let R be a ring with identity 1 and let x be a symbol called an indeterminate, not
representing any element in R. Let R[x] denote the set of all symbols a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn
where n ∈ N ∪ {0}, ai ∈ R, x0 = 1, x1 = x. For i ∈ N, let xi denote 1 · xi . In the symbol
a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn , we may drop ai xi if ai = 0. Each element a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn is called a
polynomial and ai is called the coefficient of xi for i ∈ {1, . . . , n} and a0 is called the constant
term.
60 2. Rings and Fields

For p(x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn and q(x) = b0 + b1 x + · · · + bm xm in R[x], we can write

p(x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + ak xk and q(x) = b0 + b1 x + · · · + bk xk where k ≥ max{m, n}, ai = 0 if
i > n and bj = 0 if j > m and we define
1. p(x) = q(x) ⇔ ai = bi for all i ∈ {0, 1, . . . , k}
2. p(x) + q(x) = (a0 + b0 ) + (a1 + b1 )x + · · · + (ak + bP k
k )x and
n+m l
3. p(x)q(x) = c0 + c1 x + · · · + cn+m x , where cl = i=0 ai bl−i (= a0 bl + a1 bl−1 + · · · + al b0 )
for all l ∈ {0, 1, . . . , n + m}.
Hence, under the operation defined above R[x] is a ring which has 1 as its identity and contains
R as a subring (considered elements as constant polynomials). The ring R[x] is called the ring of
polynomials over R. If R is commutative, so is R[x].
Set R[x1 , x2 ] = R[x1 ][x2 ] and R[x1 , . . . , xn ] = R[x1 , . . . , xn−1 ][xn ] if n > 2.

Definition. If p(x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn ∈ R[x] and an 6= 0, then the degree of p(x),

denoted by deg p(x), is defined to be n. For technical reasons, we define the degree of the zero
polynomial to be −∞ and adopt the following conventions: (−∞) < n and (−∞) + n = −∞ =
n + (−∞) for every integer n; (−∞) + (−∞) = −∞.

Definition. Let f (x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn . If an 6= 0, an is called the leading coefficient of

f (x) and f (x) is a monic polynomial if an = 1. If R is commutative and c ∈ R, then

f (x) 7→ f (c) := a0 + a1 c + · · · + an cn

gives a homomorphism from R[x] to R, called the evaluation at c. In addition, if f (c) = 0, then
c is called a root of f (x).

The following statements are clearly true.

1. Every unit in R is a unit in R[x].
2. If f (x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + am xm , g(x) = b0 + b1 x + · · · + bn xn ∈ R[x] and am bn 6= 0, then
deg(f (x)g(x)) = m + n.

Theorem 2.5.1. Let R be an integral domain.

1. R[x] is an integral domain.
2. ∀p(x), q(x) ∈ R[x] r {0}, deg p(x)q(x) = deg p(x) + deg q(x).
3. The set of all units of R[x] is the set of all units of R. In particular, U (Z[x]) = {±1} and
U (F [x]) = F r {0}, where F is a field.
4. ∀a ∈ R, a is irreducible in R ⇔ a is irreducible in R[x].
5. ∀a, b ∈ R, b is a unit ⇒ a + bx is irreducible in R[x].

Theorem 2.5.2. [Division Algorithm] Let R be a ring, f (x), g(x) ∈ R[x] and g(x) 6= 0. Assume
that the leading coefficient of g(x) is a unit in R. Then ∃ unique q(x), r(x) ∈ R[x] such that
f (x) = q(x)g(x) + r(x) where r(x) = 0 or deg r(x) < deg g(x).

Proof. If there exists an h(x) ∈ R[x] such that f (x) = h(x)g(x), let q(x) = h(x) and r(x) = 0.
Assume that f (x) 6= h(x)g(x) for all h(x) ∈ R[x]. Let

S = {deg(f (x) − h(x)g(x)) : h(x) ∈ R[x]} ⊆ N ∪ {0}.

Then S 6= ∅. By the Well-Ordering Principle, there exists a polynomial q(x) in R[x] such that
deg(f (x) − q(x)g(x)) has the least degree and we may write r(x) for f (x) − q(x)g(x). Then
r(x) 6= 0. Assume that deg r(x) ≥ deg g(x). Write r(x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn , an 6= 0, and
2.5. Polynomial Rings 61

g(x) = b0 + b1 x + · · · + bm xm with bm a unit. Since deg r(x) ≥ deg g(x), n − m ≥ 0. Let

s(x) = r(x) − an b−1
m x
n−m g(x). Thus, deg s(x) < n and

s(x) = f (x) − q(x)g(x) − an b−1

m x
n−m
g(x) = f (x) − (q(x) − an b−1
m x
n−m
)g(x),

so s(x) ∈ S and deg s(x) < deg r(x), a contradiction.

To prove that q(x) and r(x) are unique, suppose that q2 (x) and r2 (x) are polynomials such
that
f (x) = g(x)q2 (x) + r2 (x) where r2 (x) = 0 or deg r2 (x) < deg g(x).
Then g(x)q(x) + r(x) = f (x) = g(x)q2 (x) + r2 (x). Subtracting yields

g(x)[q(x) − q2 (x)] = r2 (x) − r(x).

Since the leading coefficient of g(x) is assumed to be a unit, we have

deg(g(x)[q(x) − q2 (x)]) = deg g(x) + deg(q(x) − q2 (x)).

Since deg(r2 (x) − r(x)) < deg g(x), this relation can hold only if q(x) − q2 (x) is zero, i.e., q(x) =
q2 (x), and hence finally r(x) = r2 (x).

Corollary 2.5.3. If F is a field, then F [x] is a Euclidean domain with valuation d(p(x)) = deg p(x)
for all p(x) ∈ F [x] r {0}. Moreover, F [x] is a PID and a UFD.

Theorem 2.5.4. [Remainder Theorem] Let R be a ring and f (x) ∈ R[x]. Then for all c ∈ R, the
remainder when x − c divides f (x) is f (c).

Proof. Let c ∈ R. By Theorem 2.5.2, there exist unique q(x) ∈ R[x] and r ∈ R such that f (x) =
q(x)(x − c) + r. Then f (c) = q(c)(c − c) + r = r.

Corollary 2.5.5. Let R be a ring.

1. If f (x) ∈ R[x], c ∈ R and f (c) = 0, then f (x) = q(x)(x − c) for some q(x) ∈ R[x].
2. If R is commutative, f (x) ∈ R[x] and c ∈ R, then f (c) = 0 ⇔ (x − c) | f (x) in R[x].
3. Let R be an integral domain, f (x) ∈ R[x], deg f (x) = 2 or 3 and the leading coefficient of
f (x) is a unit in R. Then f (x) has a root in R ⇔ f (x) is reducible in R[x].

Proof. (1) and (2) are clear. For (3), assume that c is a root of f (x). Then f (x) = q(x)(x − c)
for some q(x) ∈ R[x]. Since deg f (x) is 2 or 3, deg q(x) is 1 or 2, so f (x) is reducible. Conversely,
suppose that f (x) = g(x)h(x), where g(x), h(x) ∈ R[x] of degree ≥ 1. Since deg f (x) = 2 or 3,
deg g(x) = 1 or deg h(x) = 1. Hence, f (x) has a root in R.

Examples 2.5.1. 1. x2 − 3 is irreducible over Q but not over R.

2. x + 1 is irreducible over R but not over C since x2 + 1 = (x − i)(x + i).
2

3. x3 − x + 1 is irreducible over Z3 but reducible over R by the intermediate value theorem. In

general, every polynomial of odd degree over R has a root in R (Theorem 5.5.3).
4. x4 + 4 has no roots in R but it can be factored as (x2 − 2x2 + 2)(x2 + 2x2 + 2) in R[x].

Corollary 2.5.6. Let F be a field.

1. If f (x) is a polynomial over F of degree n, then f (x) has at most n roots in F .
2. If f (x) and g(x) are polynomials over F of degree ≤ n such that f (α1 ) =
g(α1 ), . . . , f (αn+1 ) = g(αn+1 ) where α1 , . . . , αn+1 are distinct elements of F , then f (x) =
g(x).
3. If F is infinite and f (x) and g(x) are polynomials over F such that f (α) = g(α) for all
α ∈ F , then f (x) = g(x).
62 2. Rings and Fields

Proof. We shall prove (1) by induction on k = deg f (x). It is clear when f (x) is linear. Assume
that k > 1 and any polynomials of degree k have at most k roots in F . Suppose that f (x)
is of degree k + 1. The statement is true when f (x) has no root in F . Otherwise, let α be a
root of f (x) in F . Then f (x) = (x − α)q(x) for some polynomial q(x) ∈ F [x] of degree k. By the
inductive hypothesis, q(x) has at most k roots. Hence, f (x) has at most k +1 roots. The remaining
statements follow from the first one.
Remarks. 1. f (x) = x2 − 1 has four roots in Z12 , namely 1, −1, 5, −5.
2. Corollary 2.5.6 says that two polynomials over an infinite field F which defined the same
function on F are identical. This is NOT true if F is finite. Let F = Zp , f (x) = x and
g(x) = xp . Then f (α) = g(α) for all α ∈ Zp but f (x) 6= g(x).
Let F be a field and f (x) a polynomial over F of degree n ∈ N. Then
F [x]/(f (x)) = {g(x) + (f (x)) : g(x) ∈ F [x]}
= {g(x) + (f (x)) : g(x) ∈ F [x] and g(x) = 0 or deg g(x) < n}
= {a0 + a1 x + · · · + an−1 xn−1 + (f (x)) : ai ∈ F }
by the division algorithm. Thus, if F is finite, then F [x]/(f (x)) is a commutative ring of |F |n
elements. In addition, if f (x) is irreducible, then (f (x)) is a maximal ideal, so F [x]/(f (x)) is a
field. Note that F is isomorphic to {c + (f (x)) : c ∈ F }, so we may embed F into F [x]/(f (x)) by
using the inclusion map.
Examples 2.5.2. 1. R[x]/(x2 + 1) is a field isomorphic to C (with the map f (x) 7→ f (i)).
2
2. Z11 [x]/(x + 3) is a field of 121 elements.

Theorem 2.5.7. Let F be a field and F [x] the polynomial ring over F . Then linear polynomials
are the only atoms in F [x] if and only if each polynomial f (x) ∈ F [x] of positive degree has a root
in F .
Proof. Suppose that linear polynomials are the only atoms in F [x]. Let f (x) be a polynomial of
positive degree over F . Since F [x] is a UFD, f (x) = α1 (x) · · · αk (x), a product of atoms. Each
αi (x) is linear, so αi (x) = bi (x − ci ) (bi , ci ∈ F with bi 6= 0). Then (x − ci ) | f (x), so c1 , . . . , ck are
roots of f (x) in F . Conversely, assume that every f (x) ∈ F [x] of positive degree has a root in F .
Let α(x) be an atom in F [x]. We claim that α(x) is linear. For, let b ∈ F be a root of α(x). Then
(x − b) | α(x) so α(x) = (x − b)β(x) for some β(x) ∈ F [x]. Since α(x) is an atom, β(x) must be a
unit. That is, β(x) is a constant lying in F r {0}. Thus, α(x) is a linear polynomial.

Definition. A field F is an algebraically closed field if every non-constant polynomial has a

root in F .
Example 2.5.3. By the fundamental theorem of algebra (Theorem 5.5.6), the only atoms in C[x]
are linear polynomials. Thus, C is an algebraically closed field.

Theorem 2.5.8. Let R be an integral domain and f (x) ∈ R[x] a nonzero polynomial. If α1 , . . . , αk
are distinct roots of f (x), then (x − α1 ) . . . (x − αk ) divides f (x).

Proof. We shall prove this result by induction of k. Corollary 2.5.5 (1) gives the basis step.
Assume k > 1. By the inductive hypothesis (x − α1 ) . . . (x − αk−1 ) divides f (x), so let f (x) =
(x − α1 ) . . . (x − αk−1 )g(x) for some g(x) ∈ R[x]. Then
0 = f (αk ) = (αk − α1 ) . . . (αk − αk−1 )g(αk ).
Thus, g(αk ) = 0 since R is an integral domain, so (x−αk ) | g(x). It follows that (x−α1 ) . . . (x−αk )
divides f (x).
2.5. Polynomial Rings 63

2.5.2 Factorizations in Polynomial Rings

When factor a polynomial, we first look for some common factors on its coefficients. For example,
2x3 + 4 = 2(x3 + 2). Taking the gcd of the coefficients out allows us to concentrate on polynomials
with no common factor on their coefficients and leads to the following definitions.

Definition. Let R be a UFD and suppose that f (x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn is a nonzero

polynomial in R[x]. The content of f (x) is the gcd of a0 , . . . , an . We say that f (x) is primitive
if the content of f (x) is unit in R, i.e., a0 , . . . , an have no common factor except units.

Theorem 2.5.9. [Gauss’ lemma] Let R be a UFD and f (x), g(x) ∈ R[x]. If f (x) and g(x) are
primitive, so is f (x)g(x).

Proof. Let

f (x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + am xm
g(x) = b0 + b1 x + · · · + bn xn
f (x)g(x) = c0 + c1 x + · · · + cm+n xm+n .

We shall suppose that f (x)g(x) is not primitive and obtain a contradiction. Let a ∈ R be an atom
of R which divides all of c0 , . . . , cm+n . Since R is a UFD, every atom is a prime, so Ra is a prime
ideal. Then (R/Ra)[x] is an integral domain. Since R[x]/R[x]a ∼ = (R/Ra)[x], R[x]a is a prime
ideal. Let
−
: R[x] → R[x]/R[x]a
be the canonical map. Since a divides c0 , . . . , cm+n , f¯(x)ḡ(x) = 0. But a does not divide all of
a0 , . . . , am or all of b0 , . . . , bn , since f and g are primitive. Thus, f¯(x) 6= 0, ḡ(x) 6= 0. This is a
contradiction since f¯(x)ḡ(x) = 0 and f¯(x), ḡ(x) lie in R[x]/P which is an integral domain. Hence,
f (x)g(x) is primitive, as claimed.

Theorem 2.5.10. Let R be a UFD and f (x), g(x) nonzero polynomials of R[x]. Then:
1. f (x) is primitive ⇔ the content of f (x) is 1.
2. If a is the content of f , then f (x) = af1 (x) where f1 (x) is primitive.
3. If f (x) = af1 (x) and f1 (x) is primitive, then a is the content of f (x).
4. If a and b are the contents of f (x) and g(x), respectively, then ab is the content of f (x)g(x).

Proof. (1), (2) and (3) are immediate from the definition of gcd. For the last statement, by (2),
we write f (x) = af1 (x) and g(x) = bg1 (x) where f1 (x) and g1 (x) are primitive. By Gauss’ lemma,
f1 (x)g1 (x) is primitive, and

f (x)g(x) = af1 (x)bg1 (x) = (ab)(f1 (x)g1 (x)).

Hence, ab is the content of f (x)g(x), by (3).

Theorem 2.5.11. Let R be a UFD and let F = Q(R) = {r/s : r, s ∈ R, s 6= 0} be its field
of quotients. Suppose f (x) is an irreducible polynomial in R[x]. Then f (x), considered as a
polynomial in F [x], is irreducible in F [x]. In particular, if f (x) ∈ Z[x] is irreducible over Z, it is
irreducible over Q.

Proof. Suppose f (x) = g(x)h(x) where g(x) and h(x) are polynomials of positive degree in F [x].
Let g(x) = a0 /b0 + (a1 /b1 )x + · · · + (am /bm )xm and h(x) = c0 /d0 + (c1 /d1 )x + · · · + (cn /dn )xn .
Let b be a least common multiple of the bi and d a least common multiple of the dj so that

g1 (x) = bg(x) and h1 (x) = dh(x)

64 2. Rings and Fields

lie in R[x]. Then

bdf (x) = bg(x)dh(x) = g1 (x)h1 (x).
By Theorem 2.5.10, let g1 (x) = ug2 (x) and h1 (x) = vh2 (x) where u is the content of g1 (x) and v
is the content of h1 (x), and g2 (x) and h2 (x) are primitive polynomials in R[x]. Thus,

bdf (x) = g1 (x)h1 (x) = uvg2 (x)h2 (x).

Since g2 (x) and h2 (x) are primitive, so is g2 (x)h2 (x) and hence the equation above implies that
bd | uv in R. Canceling, we obtain
uv
f (x) = wg2 (x)h2 (x) where w = ∈ R.
bd
Therefore, f (x) is reducible in R[x], which proves the theorem.

Let R be a UFD and F = Q(R) its field of quotients. Suppose

h(x) = a0 /b0 + (a1 /b1 )x + · · · + (an /bn )xn ∈ F [x],

where a0 /b0 , a1 /b1 , . . . , an /bn are in “lowest terms”. That is, ai and bi have no common factor. Let
b = lcm(b0 , . . . , bn ). Then

bh(x) = a0 (b/b0 ) + a1 (b/b1 )x + · · · + an (b/bn )xn

is in R[x]. Let a be the content of bh(x). It happens that a = gcd(a0 , . . . , an ), although knowing
this is not essential. The main point is that

h1 (x) = (b/a)h(x)

is a primitive polynomial in R[x]. Moreover, the proof of Theorem 2.5.11 shows that if f (x) ∈
R[x], then h(x) | f (x) in F [x] ⇔ h1 (x) | f (x) in R[x]. In particular, suppose f (x) ∈ R[x], and
r/s ∈ F is a root of f (x) where r and s are relatively prime. Then h(x) = x − (r/s) divides f (x)
in F [x], so h1 (x) = sx − r divides f (x) in R[x]. Thus, we have:

Theorem 2.5.12. Let R be a UFD and F its field of quotients. Suppose f (x) ∈ R[x] where
f (x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn and r/s ∈ F is a root of f (x) where r and s are relatively prime.
Then s | an and r | a0 if r 6= 0.

Proof. The remarks above show that (sx − r) | (a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn ) in R[x]. It is easy to see
that this implies our results.

Remarks. 1. Suppose f (x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn ∈ Z[x], where a0 6= 0. Then there are only

finitely many rationals which can possibly be roots of f (x), namely the fractions r/s where
r | a0 and s | an .
2. Note that if an = 1 above, then s = ±1 and r/s ∈ Z. In other words, if an = 1, then every
rational root of f (x) is an integer.

Another important criterion on irreduciblity in Q[x] is the next theorem.

Theorem 2.5.13. [Eisenstein’s criterion] Let f (x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn lies in Z[x], and

suppose that there is a prime number p such that
1. p ∤ an , 2. p | a0 , . . . , an−1 , and 3. p2 ∤ a0 .
Then f (x) is irreducible in Q[x]. Moreover, if f (x) is primitive, then f (x) is irreducible in Z[x].
2.5. Polynomial Rings 65

Proof. We shall suppose that f (x) is reducible in Q[x] and obtain a contradiction. By dividing f (x)
by its content, we may assume that f (x) is primitive, this does not affect either the hypothesis
or the reducibility of f (x) in Q[x]. By Theorem 2.5.11, f (x) is reducible in Z[x], so let f (x) =
g(x)h(x) where g(x) = b0 + b1 x + · · · + bm xm and h(x) = c0 + c1 x + · · · + cn−m xn−m are in Z[x].
Note that since f (x) is primitive, neither g(x) nor h(x) is constant. That is, m ≥ 1 and n − m ≥ 1.
Let − : Z[x] → Zp [x] be the canonical projection. Then f¯(x) = ān xn where ān 6= 0̄ since p ∤ an ,
so ḡ(x)h̄(x) = f¯(x) = ān xn . Since Zp [x] is a UFD, this forms ḡ(x) = b̄m xm , h̄(x) = c̄n−m xn−m , so
that b̄0 = c̄0 = 0̄ (i.e., p divides b0 and c0 ). But then p2 | a0 since a0 = b0 c0 , which contradicts part
(3) of the hypotheses. Hence, f (x) is irreducible in Q[x] as claimed.

Example 2.5.4. f (x) = 2x5 − 6x3 + 9x2 − 15 is irreducible in Q[x] and in Z[x].

Corollary 2.5.14. The pth cyclotomic polynomial

xp − 1
Φp (x) = = xp−1 + xp−2 + · · · + x + 1
x−1
is irreducible in Q[x] for any prime p.

Proof. The polynomial

 
(x + 1)p − 1 p−1 p p−2
g(x) = Φp (x + 1) = =x + x + ··· + p
(x + 1) − 1 1

satisfies the Eisenstein criterion for the prime p and is thus irreducible in Q[x]. But clearly if
Φp (x) = h(x)r(x) were a nontrivial factorization of Φp (x) in Z[x], then

Φp (x + 1) = g(x) = h(x + 1)r(x + 1)

would give a nontrivial factorization of g(x) in Z[x]. Thus, Φp (x) must also be irreducible in
Q[x].

We next wish to prove a famous theorem of Gauss: If R is a UFD, so is R[x]. Recall the criteria
given in Theorem 2.4.4:

an integral domain is a UFD ⇔

1. every nonzero nonunit is a product of atoms and
2. every atom is prime.

Suppose R is a UFD. We first observe that R[x] is an integral domain, so this presents no
problem. We shall establish the criteria above for R[x] (and these show that R[x] is a UFD) by
doing three things:
(a) We determine all atoms of R[x] (Theorem 2.5.15).
(b) We show that they are primes (Theorem 2.5.16).
(c) We show that every nonzero nonunit of R[x] is a product of atoms and conclude that R[x]
is a UFD (Theorem 2.5.17).

Theorem 2.5.15. Let R be a UFD, F its field of quotients and f (x) ∈ F [x]. Then f (x) is an atom
of R[x] ⇔ either
(1) f (x) ∈ R and f (x) is an atom of R or
(2) f (x) is a primitive polynomial of degree n ≥ 1 and f (x) is irreducible in F [x].
66 2. Rings and Fields

Proof. Assume that f (x) is an atom of R[x]. If deg f (x) = 0, then f (x) ∈ R, and clearly f (x) must
be an atoms of R. Otherwise, suppose that deg f (x) = n ≥ 1, and let a be the content of f (x).
Then f (x) = af1 (x) where f1 (x) is primitive. Since f (x) is irreducible in R[x], a must be a unit
in R, so f (x) is primitive. Again, since f (x) is irreducible in R[x], it is also irreducible in F [x] by
Theorem 2.5.11.
Conversely, assume that (1) and (2) hold. If f (x) is an atom of R, it is clearly an atom of R[x]
(Theorem 2.5.1). Suppose f (x) is a primitive polynomial of degree n ≥ 1 and f (x) is irreducible
in F [x]. We claim that f (x) is an atom of R[x]. For, suppose not, and let

f (x) = g(x)h(x),

where g(x) and h(x) are nonunits of R[x].

(a) If g(x) or h(x) lies in R, then f (x) is not primitive, a contradiction.
(b) If g(x) and h(x) both have positive degree, then f (x) is reducible in F [x], again a contradic-
tion.
Hence, if f (x) is an atom of R[x], it has the form (1) or (2), as required.

Theorem 2.5.16. Let R be a UFD and f (x) an atom of R[x]. Then R[x]f (x) is a prime ideal of
R[x]. That is, f (x) is a prime element.

Proof. We consider separately the two types of atoms in R[x] given in Theorem 2.5.15.
Case 1. a ∈ R is an atom of R. Since R is a UFD, every atom is a prime, so Ra is a prime ideal.
Then (R/Ra)[x] is an integral domain. Since R[x]/R[x]a ∼ = (R/Ra)[x], R[x]a is a prime ideal, so
a is prime.
Case 2. f (x) is a primitive polynomial of degree n ≥ 1 and f (x) is irreducible in F [x] where F is
the quotient field of R. First we claim that F [x]f (x) ∩ R[x] = R[x]f (x). Clearly, f (x) ∈ F [x]f (x) ∩
R[x]. Conversely, we suppose g(x)f (x) ∈ R[x] with g(x) = a0 /b0 + (a1 /b1 )x + · · · + (an /bn )xn ∈
F [x]. We can find relatively prime a, b ∈ R such that (b/a)g(x) = g1 (x) where g1 (x) is a primitive
polynomial in R[x]. (In fact, a = gcd(a0 , a1 , . . . , an ) and b = lcm(b0 , b1 , . . . , bn ) will do, provided
each ai and bi are relatively prime.) Thus, (b/a)g(x)f (x) = g1 (x)f (x) ∈ R[x]. By Gauss’ lemma,
g1 (x)f (x) is a primitive polynomial. In connection with the above equation, this forces b to be a
unit of R, so g(x) = (a/b)g1 (x) ∈ R[x]. Hence, g(x)f (x) ∈ R[x]f (x) which proves our claim.
By the second isomorphism theorem, we have

R[x]/R[x]f (x) = R[x]/(R[x] ∩ F [x]f (x)) ∼

= (R[x] + F [x]f (x))/F [x]f (x).

Since (R[x] + F [x]f (x))/F [x]f (x) ⊆ F [x]/F [x]f (x) which is a field because f (x) is irreducible in
F [x], R[x]+F [x]f (x))/F [x]f (x) is an integral domain. Thus, R[x]/R[x]f (x) is an integral domain,
so R[x]f (x) is a prime ideal. Therefore, f (x) is prime and this proves the theorem.

Theorem 2.5.17. [Gauss] If R is a UFD, so is R[x]. Hence, if R is a UFD, so is R[x1 , . . . , xn ] for

all n ∈ N.

Proof. We know all the atoms of R[x] by Theorem 2.5.15 and Theorem 2.5.16 tells us that each
atom of R[x] is prime. Hence, (by Theorem 2.4.4) to verify that R[x] is a UFD, it remains to show
that each nonzero nonunit f (x) ∈ R[x] is a product of atoms.
Case 1. deg f (x) = 0, i.e., f (x) ∈ R. Since R is a UFD and every atom of R is an atom of R[x], we
can express f (x) as a product of atoms in R, and so in R[x].
Case 2. deg f (x) = n ≥ 1. Let f (x) = f1 (x) . . . fk (x) where (a) each fi (x) has degree ≥ 1 and
(b) k is as large as possible. Such a factorization exists because any factorization which satisfies
(a) has at most n terms since n = deg f (x) = deg f1 (x) + · · · + deg fk (x) ≥ k. Now, let ai be the
content of fi (x), and let fi (x) = ai gi (x) where gi (x) is a primitive polynomial.
2.6. Field Extensions 67

We claim that gi (x) is an atom in R[x] because if gi (x) = r(x)s(x) where r(x) and s(x) are
nonunits, then r(x) and s(x) cannot lie in R, since gi (x) is primitive. In addition, r(x) and
s(x) cannot both have positive degree because then we could write f (x) as a product of k + 1
polynomials of positive degree, which violates (b). Thus, each gi (x) is an atom as desired. Hence,

f (x) = f1 (x) . . . fk (x)

= a1 g1 (x) . . . ak gk (x)
= a1 . . . ak g1 (x) . . . gk (x)
= ag1 (x) . . . gk (x), where a ∈ R.

By Case 1, a can be written as a product of atoms in R[x] and therefore shows that f (x) is a
product of atoms in R[x], which proves R[x] is a UFD.

Exercises 2.5. 1. Let R be a ring.

(a) Show that Mn (R[x]) ∼ = Mn (R)[x] for all n ∈ N, where x is an indeterminate in both cases.
(b) If I is an ideal of R, prove that I[x], the set of all polynomials with coefficients in I, is an ideal
of R[x] and R[x]/I[x] ∼ = (R/I)[x].
2. Prove the following statements.
(a) If R is an integral domain, then x is a prime element in R[x].
(b) In Z[x], (x) is a prime ideal but not a maximal ideal.
(c) If F is a field, then (x) is a maximal  F [x].
ideal in 
2 ∼ a b
3. Let F be a field. Show that F [x]/(x ) = : a, b ∈ F , a subring of M2 (F ).
0 a
4. Let F be a field. Find a ring isomorphism F [x]/(x2 − x) → F × F .
5. Prove that the ideal I = (x, 2) is not a principal ideal of Z[x]. Hence Z[x] is not a PID. In addition,
show that I is a maximal ideal in Z[x].
6. Construct a field of: (a) 125 elements (b) 81 elements.
7. Find all odd prime numbers p such that x + 2 is a factor of x4 + x3 + x2 − x + 1 in Zp [x].
8. Let p(x) ∈ R[x]. Prove that if p(a + bi) = 0, then p(a − bi) = 0 for all a, b ∈ R. Deduce by the
fundamental theorem of algebra that there exist real numbers c, r1 , . . . , rk , a1 , b1 , . . . , am , bm such
that

p(x) = c(x − r1 ) . . . (x − rk )(x2 − (2a1 )x + (a21 + b21 )) . . . (x2 − (2am )x + (a2m + b2m )).

In addition, if p(x) ∈ R[x] is irreducible over R, then deg p(x) = 1 or 2, namely, p(x) = bx + c or
p(x) = ax2 + bx + c with b2 − 4ac < 0.
9. Let R be a UFD and F its field of quotients. Let f (x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn lies in R[x], and suppose
that there is an irreducible element p ∈ R such that
(i) p ∤ an , (ii) p | a0 , . . . , an−1 , and (iii) p2 ∤ a0 .
Prove that f (x) is irreducible in F [x]. Moreover, if f (x) is primitive, then f (x) is irreducible in R[x].
10. Let P (x) = an xn + an−1 xn−1 + · · · + a1 x + a0 be a polynomial with integer coefficients. If there exist
a prime number p and an integer k ∈ {0, 1, . . . , n − 1} such that p | a0 , a1 , . . . , ak , p ∤ ak+1 and p2 ∤ a0 ,
then P (x) has an irreducible factor in Z[x] of degree greater than k.
11. If R is an intergral domain for which every ideal of R[x] is principal, show that R must be a field.
12. Let D be an integral domain. If ϕ : D[x] → D[x] is an automorphism such that ϕ(a) = a for all
a ∈ D, prove that there exist c, d ∈ D with c a unit in D such that ϕ(x) = cx + d. Here x stands for
the indeterminate of D[x].

2.6 Field Extensions

In this section, we require some background in vector spaces. When a polynomial over a field
does not possess a a root in its own field, we shall create a bigger field where we can find a root
of it.
68 2. Rings and Fields

2.6.1 Algebraic and Transcendental Extensions

Before we extend a field, we first determine the smallest one possible according to its character-
istic.

Definition. Let F be a field. The intersection of all subfields of F is the smallest subfield of F ,
called the prime field of F .

Theorem 2.6.1. Let F be a field with the prime subfield P and 1F denote the identity of F .
1. If char F = p, a prime, then P = {n · 1F : n = 0, 1, . . . , p − 1} ∼
= Z/pZ.
2. If char F = 0, then P = {(m · 1F )(n · 1F )−1 : m, n ∈ Z, n 6= 0} ∼ = Q.

Proof. Since P is a field, 1F ∈ P , so {n · 1F : n ∈ Z} ⊆ P . Define ϕ : Z → P by ϕ(n) = n · 1F for

all n ∈ Z. Then ϕ is a ring homomorphism and im ϕ = {n · 1F : n ∈ Z}, so Z/ ker ϕ ∼ = im ϕ.
(1) Assume that char F = p is a prime. Then im ϕ = {n · 1F : n = 0, 1, . . . , p − 1} and p is the
smallest positive integer such that p ∈ ker ϕ, so ker ϕ = pZ. Hence, im ϕ ∼ = Z/pZ which is a field,
so P = im ϕ ∼= Z/pZ.
(2) Assume that char F = 0. Then ϕ is a monomorphism. Since {n · 1F : n ∈ Z} ⊆ P and
P is a subfield of F , {(m · 1F )(n · 1F )−1 : m, n ∈ Z, n 6= 0} ⊆ P . Define ϕ̄ : Q → P by
ϕ̄(m/n) = ϕ(m)ϕ(n)−1 for all m, n ∈ Z, n 6= 0. Then ϕ̄ is a monomorphism and ϕ̄|Z = ϕ. Thus,
Q∼ = im ϕ̄ = {(m · 1F )(n · 1F )−1 : m, n ∈ Z, n 6= 0} which is a subfield of P , and hence they are
equal.

Definition. A field K is said to be an extension of a field F if F is a subring of K.

Remark. By Theorem 2.6.1, any field can be considered as an extension field of the field Q or Zp
for some prime p.

Definition. Let K be an extension field of F . The degree of K over F , [K : F ], is the dimension

of K as a vector space over F . More generally, if a field F is a subring of a ring R, then [R : F ]
is the dimension of R as a vector space over F .

For example, [C : R] = 2 and [R : Q] is infinite (in fact [R : Q] = |R|).

Theorem 2.6.2. If [L : K] and [K : F ] are finite, then [L : F ] is finite and

[L : F ] = [L : K][K : F ].

In fact, [L : F ] = [L : K][K : F ] whenever F ⊆ K ⊆ L.

Proof. With F ⊆ K ⊆ L, let {βj }j∈J be a basis of K over F and {αi }i∈I a basis of L over K.
Every element of L can be written uniquely as a finite linear combination of the elements of
{αi }i∈I with coefficients in K, and every such coefficient can be written uniquely as a finite linear
combination of the elements of {βj }j∈J with coefficients in F . Hence, every element of L can be
written uniquely as a finite linear combination of the elements of {αi βj }i∈I,j∈J with coefficients
in K: {αi βj }i∈I,j∈J is a basis of L over F , and [L : F ] = |I × J| = [L : K][K : F ].

Notation. Let K be an extension field of F .

1. If t1 , . . . , tn are indeterminates over F , then F (t1 , . . . , tn ) denotes the field of quotients of
the polynomial ring F [t1 , . . . , tn ].
2. If u1 , . . . , un ∈ K (or S ⊆ K), then F [u1 , . . . , un ] (or F [S]) denotes the subring of K
generated by F and u1 , . . . , un (or S), and F (u1 , . . . , un ) (or F (S)) denotes its field of
quotients.
2.6. Field Extensions 69

Theorem 2.6.3. Let K be a field extension of a field F and let u ∈ K. Then EITHER
(a) [F (u) : F ] = ∞ and F [u] ∼ = F [t], so F (u) ∼
= F (t) where t is an indeterminate OR
(b) [F (u) : F ] is finite and F [u] = F (u).

Proof. Let t be an indeterminate and consider the ring homomorphism

ϕ
F [t] → K

defined by ϕ(t) = u (or ϕ(f (t)) = f (u)). Note that the kernel of ϕ is a prime ideal, since the
image of ϕ has no zero divisors. There are two possibilities.
(1) ker ϕ = {0}. Then we have (a).
(2) ker ϕ 6= {0}. Then ker ϕ = F [t]g(t) where g(t) is a monic prime (i.e., irreducible) polynomial.
Since F [t] is a PID, F [t]g(t) is a maximal ideal. Thus,

F [u] ∼
= F [t]/F [t]g(t)

is a field, so F [u] = F (u).

Remarks. 1. If g(t) = g0 + g1 t + · · · + gn−1 tn−1 + tn , then [F (u) : F ] = n and {1, u, . . . , un−1 }

is a basis for F (u) over F .
2. Consider R ⊂ C and g(t) = g0 + g1 t + t2 ∈ R[t]. We distinguish three cases.
(a) If g12 − 4g0 > 0, then g(t) = (t − a)(t − b) where a, b ∈ R, a 6= b and R[t]/R[t]g(t) is a
ring without nonzero nilpotent elements.
(b) If g12 − 4g0 = 0, then g(t) = (t − a)2 and R[t]/R[t]g(t) is a ring with nonzero nilpotent
elements.
(c) If g12 − 4g0 < 0, then R[t]/R[t]g(t) ∼ = C.
√
3. If p is a prime, then t − p is irreducible over Q and the fields Q( p) ∼
2
= Q[t]/(t2 − p) are all
distinct.
√ √
Proof. Let p and q be distinct primes. Assume that ϕ : Q[ p] → Q[ q] is an isomorphism. Then
√ √
ϕ(1) = 1, and so ϕ(r) = r for all r in Q. Let ϕ( p) = a + b q for some a, b ∈ Q. Thus, p = ϕ(p) =
√ √ √ √
(ϕ( p))2 = (a + b q)2 = (a + bq) + 2ab q. Since q is not rational, ab = 0. However, if a = 0, then
√ √
p = bq which implies q | p. If b = 0, then ϕ( p) = a = ϕ(a), so p = a is rational. Hence, both cases
√ √
lead to a contradiction. Therefore, Q[ p] and Q[ q] are not isomorphic.

An element in an extension field can be classified according to Theorem 2.6.3 as follows.

Definition. Let K be an extension field of a field F . An element u ∈ K is algebraic over F

in case there exists a nonzero polynomial f (t) ∈ F [t] such that f (u) = 0 and transcendental
element over F otherwise.
√ √
For example, every complex number is algebraic over R; 3 2 and 1 + 5 ∈ R are algebraic
over Q. It has been proved that e and π ∈ R are transcendental over Q (by the Lindemann-
Weierstrass theorem). We show the existence of real numbers transcendental over Q in Corollary
5.2.3. Moreover, most of real numbers are in fact transcendental over Q (see Exercises 2.6).
Theorem 2.6.3 yields characterizations of algebraic and transcendental elements:

Corollary 2.6.4. Let K be an extension field of a field F and u ∈ K. The following conditions
on u are equivalent:
(i) u is transcendental over F (if f (t) ∈ F [t] and f (u) = 0, then f = 0);
(ii) F (u) ∼
= F (t);
(iii) [F (u) : F ] is infinite.
70 2. Rings and Fields

Corollary 2.6.5. Let K be an extension field of a field F and u ∈ K. The following conditions
on u are equivalent:
(i) u is algebraic over F (there exists a polynomial 0 6= f (t) ∈ F [t] such that f (u) = 0);
(ii) there exists a monic irreducible polynomial g(t) ∈ F [t] such that g(u) = 0;
(iii) [F (u) : F ] is finite.
Moreover, in part (ii), we have g(t) is unique; f (u) = 0 if and only if g(t) | f (t); F (u) ∼=
F [t]/(g(t)); and [F (u) : F ] = deg g(t).

Definition. When u is algebraic over F , the unique monic irreducible polynomial g(t) ∈ F [t] in
part (ii) is the minimal polynomial of u. The degree of u over F is deg g(t).

Definition. An extension field K of a field F is algebraic in case every element of K is algebraic

over F .

For example, C is an algebraic extension of R, but R is not algebraic over Q. Note that if
[K : F ] is finite, then K is an algebraic extension because [F (u) : F ] ≤ [K : F ] < ∞ for all u ∈ K.

Definition. An extension field E of a field F is said to be a simple extension of F if E = F (α)

for some α ∈ E.
√ √ √ √
Example 2.6.1. Prove that Q( 2, 3) = Q( 2 + 3) is a simple extension.
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Solution. Let K = Q( 2 + √3). Since
√ 2 + 3
√ √∈ Q( 2,
√ √3), we have K ⊆ Q( 2, 3). For
another inclusion, note that ( 2 + 3)2 = 5 + 2 2 3, so 2 3 ∈ K. Thus,
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
2 = ( 2 + 3) 2 3 − 2( 2 + 3) and 3 = 3( 2 + 3) − ( 2 + 3) 2 3
√ √
are in K. Hence, Q( 2, 3) = K.

Theorem 2.6.6. If L is an algebraic extension of K and K is an algebraic extension of F , then L

is algebraic extension over F .

Proof. Let u ∈ L. Since L is algebraic over K, there exists f (x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn ∈

K[x] such that f (u) = 0. Since K is algebraic over F , a0 , a1 , . . . , an are algebraic over F , so
[F (a0 , a1 , . . . , an ) : F ] is finite. For, let E = F (a0 , a1 , . . . , an ). Then
n
Y
[E : F ] = [F (a0 ) : F ] [F (a0 , a1 , . . . , ai ) : F (a0 , a1 , . . . , ai−1 )],
i=1

a0 is algebraic over F and ai is algebraic over F (a0 , . . . , ai−1 ) for all i ∈ {1, . . . , n}. Since f (x) ∈
E[x], u is algebraic over E, so [E(u) : E] is finite by Corollary 2.6.5. Thus,

[F (u) : F ] ≤ [E(u) : F ] = [E(u) : E][E : F ] < ∞.

Hence, u is algebraic over F .

Corollary 2.6.7. For a, b ∈ K, if a and b are algebraic over F of degree m and n, respectively, then
a ± b, ab and a/b (if b 6= 0) are all algebraic over F of degree ≤ mn. Hence, the set of all algebraic
elements of K over F is a subfield of K and is an algebraic extension over F .
2.6. Field Extensions 71

Proof. By Corollary 2.6.5, [F (a) : F ] = m and [F (b) : F ] = n. Since b is algebraic over F , b is

algebraic over F (a), so [F (a)(b) : F (a)] ≤ n. Thus, by Theorem 2.6.2, [F (a, b) : F ] = [F (a)(b) :
F ] = [F (a)(b) : F (a)][F (a) : F ] ≤ mn. Since a ± b, ab, ab−1 (if b 6= 0) are in F (a, b) which is a
finite extension, they are all algebraic over F of degree ≤ mn.

Example 2.6.2. Consider Q ⊂ C. Let A = {z ∈ C : z is algebraic over Q}. By Corollary 2.6.7, A

is algebraic over Q. Assume that [A : Q] = n is finite. Let f (x) = xn+1 − 3. It is irreducible over Q
by Eisenstien’s criterion. Let α ∈ C be such that f (α) = 0. Then α ∈ A ans so Q ⊂ Q[α] ⊂ A. But
[Q[α] : Q] = n + 1 > [A : Q], which is a contradiction. Hence, [A : Q] is infinite. This provides an
example of infinite algebraic field extensions.

2.6.2 More on Roots of Polynomials

We conclude this chapter by working more on roots of polynomials. The theorem of Kronecker
assures us that we may obtain an extension field of F in which the polynomial p(x) ∈ F [x] has a
root.

Theorem 2.6.8. If F is a field and G is a finite subgroup of the multiplicative group of nonzero
elements of F , then G is a cyclic group. In particular, the multiplicative group of all nonzero
elements of a finite field is cyclic.

Proof. If G = {1}, then G is cyclic. Assume that G 6= {1}. Since G is a finite abelian group,

G∼
= Z/(m1 ) ⊕ · · · ⊕ Z/(mk )
k
X
where k ≥ 1, m1 > 1 and m1 | · · · | mk . Since mk Z/(mi ) = 0, u is a root of the polynomial
i=1
xmk − 1 ∈ F [x] for all u ∈ G. By Corollary 2.5.6, this polynomial has at most mk distinct roots
in F , so |G| ≤ mk . Hence, we must have k = 1 and G ∼= Z/(m1 ) which is a cyclic group.

Remark. The finite multiplicative subgroup of a division ring may not be cyclic. E.g., Q8 =
{±1, ±i, ±j, ±k} is a subgroup of the ring of real quaternions H and Q8 is not cyclic.

Definition. Let R be an integral domain and f (x) ∈ R[x]. If α is a root of f (x), then there
exist m ∈ N and g(x) ∈ R[x] such that f (x) = (x − α)m g(x) and g(α) 6= 0. m is called the
multiplicity of the root α of f (x) and if m > 1, α is called a multiple root of f (x).

Definition. If f (x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn ∈ R[x], we define f ′ (x) ∈ R[x], the derivative of

f (x), to be the polynomial

f ′ (x) = a1 + a2 x + · · · + nan xn−1 .

We record the immediate properties of the derivative of polynomials in the next lemma

Lemma 2.6.9. If f (x) and g(x) are polynomials over an integral domain R and c ∈ R, then
1. (cf (x))′ = cf ′ (x),
2. (f (x) + g(x))′ = f ′ (x) + g ′ (x),
3. (f (x)g(x))′ = f (x)g ′ (x) + f ′ (x)g(x),
4. ((f (x))n )′ = n(f (x))n−1 f ′ (x) where n ∈ N.

Characterizations of polynomials with multiple roots using derivatives are as follows.

72 2. Rings and Fields

Theorem 2.6.10. Let E be an extension of a field F and f (x) ∈ F [x].

1. For α ∈ E, α is a multiple root of f (x) if and only if α is a root of both f (x) and f ′ (x).
2. If f (x) and f ′ (x) are relatively prime, then f (x) has no multiple root.
3. If f (x) is irreducible over F having a root in E, then
f (x) has no multiple root in E if and only if f ′ (x) 6= 0.

Proof. (1) is clear.

(2) Since f (x) and f ′ (x) are relatively prime, there exist h(x) and k(x) in F [x] such that 1 =
f (x)h(x) + f ′ (x)k(x). If α ∈ E is a multiple root of f (x), by (1), f (α) = 0 = f ′ (α), so 1 = 0, a
contradiction.
(3) Since f (x) is irreducible, f ′ (x) 6= 0 and deg f ′ (x) < deg f (x), we have f (x) and f ′ (x) are
relatively prime, so f (x) has no multiple roots. Conversely, if f ′ (x) = 0, then f (α) = 0 = f ′ (α)
for some α ∈ E since f (x) has a root in E. Hence, by (1), α is a multiple root of f (x).

Theorem 2.6.11. If f (x) ∈ F [x] and deg f (x) = n 6= 1, then f (x) can have at most n roots
counting multiplicities in any extension field of F .

Proof. We shall prove the theorem by induction on the degree of f (x). If deg f (x) = 1, then
f (x) = ax + b for some a, b ∈ F and a 6= 0. Then −b/a is the unique root of f (x) and −b/a ∈ F ,
so we are done.
Let deg f (x) = n > 1 and assume that the result is true for all polynomials of degree < n. Let
E be an extension field of F . If f (x) has no roots in E, then we are done. Let r ∈ E be a root
of f (x) of multiplicity m ≥ 1. Then there exists q(x) ∈ E[x] such that f (x) = (x − r)m q(x) and
q(r) 6= 0. Then deg q(x) = n − m. By the inductive hypothesis q(x) has at most n − m roots in E
counting multiplicities. Hence, f (x) has at most m+(n−m) roots in E counting multiplicities.

Theorem 2.6.12. [Kronocker] If p(t) ∈ F [t] is irreducible in F [t], then there exists an extension
field E of F such that [E : F ] = deg p(t) and p(t) has a root in E.

Proof. Let E = F [x]/(p(x)) where x is an indeterminate. Then E is a field containing {a +

(p(x)) : a ∈ F } as a subfield. But F ∼ = {a + (p(x)) : a ∈ F } by ϕ : a 7→ a + (p(x)), so E
can be considered as an extension field of F by considering a as a + (p(x)) for all a ∈ F . Then
E = F [x]/(p(x)) = F (t̄) where t̄ = x + (p(x)) is a root of p(t). Since E = F (t̄) and p(t) is
irreducible over F , [E : F ] = [F (t̄) : F ] = deg p(t) by Corollary 2.6.5.

Corollary 2.6.13. If p(t) ∈ F [t] is a nonconstant polynomial, then there exists a finite extension
field E of F containing a root of p(t) and [E : F ] ≤ deg p(t).

Proof. Since F [t] is a UFD, p(t) has an irreducible factor in F [t], say p1 (t). By Theorem 2.6.12,
there exists an extension field E of F such that E contains a root of p1 (t) and [E : F ] = deg p1 (t).
Hence, [E : F ] ≤ deg p(t) and E contains a root of p(t).

Exercises 2.6. 1. If u ∈ K is algebraic of odd degree over F , prove that F (u2 ) = F (u).
2. Let a, b ∈ K be algebraic over F of degree m and n, respectively. Prove that if m and n are relatively
prime, then [F (a, b) : F ] =
√ mn.√ √ √
3. Show that the degree of 2 + 3 over Q is 4 and the degree of 2 + 3 5 is 6.
4. Let p be a prime and let v ∈ C satisfy v 6= 1, v p = 1 (e.g., v = cos(2π/p) + i sin(2π/p)).
Show that [Q(v) : Q] = p − 1.
5. Let E = Q(u) where u3 − u2 + u + 2 = 0. Express (u2 + u + 1)(u2 − u) and (u − 1)−1 in the form
au2 + bu + c where a, b, c ∈ Q.
2.6. Field Extensions 73

6. Let E be an algebraic extension of a field F . Show that any subring of E/F is a subfield. Hence
prove that any subring of a finite dimensional extension field E/F is a subfield.
7. Let E = F (u), u transcendental and let K 6= F be a subfield of E/F . Show that u is algebraic
over K.
8. Let u and v be positive irrational numbers such that u is algebraic over Q and v is transcendental
over Q.
(a) Show that v is transcendental over Q[u].
(b) Classify whether the following elements are algebraic or transcendental over Q.
1 √ √
(i) (ii) u (iii) v
u+v
9. (a) Show that there are countably many irreducible polynomials in Q[x].
(b) Let A be the set of all real numbers that are algebraic over Q. Show that A is countable, so that
R r A is uncountable.
10. Let R be an integral domain and f (x) a nonconstant polynomial. Prove that:
(a) If char R = 0, then f ′ (x) 6= 0.
(b) If char R = p, a prime, then f ′ (x) = 0 ⇔ ∃a0 , a1 , . . . , an ∈ R, f (x) = a0 + a1 xp + · · · + an xnp .
11. Suppose that F is a finite field and f (x) ∈ F [x] a nonconstant. If f ′ (x) = 0, prove that f (x) is
reducible over F .
12. Let F be a finite field with q elements. Prove that if K is an extension field of F and b ∈ K is
m
algebraic over F , then bq = b for some m ∈ N.
13. A complex number α is called an algebraic integer if it is a root of a monic polynomial

f (x) = xn + an−1 xn−1 + · · · + a1 x + a0

whose coefficients are in Z. Let A = {α ∈ C : α is an algebraic integer}. Prove that A ∩ Q = Z.

14. Let f (x) = x2 + x + 2 be a polynomial in Z3 [x] and E = Z3 [x]/(f (x)).
(a) Show that f (x) is irreducible in Z3 [x], and so E is a field of 9 elements extending Z3 .
(b) Find the characteristic of E and [E : Z3 ].
(c) Find the multiplicative inverse of 1 + x + (f (x)).
(d) How many generators of the cyclic multiplicative group E r {0}?
15. Let E1 and E2 be subfields of a field K. The composite field of E1 and E2 , denoted by E1 E2 , is the
smallest subfield of K containing both E1 and E2 . Prove that if [K : F ] is finite, then [E1 E2 : F ] ≤
[E1 : F ][E2 : F ].
16. Let α be an irrational number. If α is a common root of f (x) = x3 + ax + b and g(x) = x2 + cx + d
for some a, b, c, d ∈ Q, prove that:
(a) g(x) is a factor of f (x) (b) c is a root of f (x).

More ring theory will be in terms of modules in Chapter 4. We shall classify extension fields
and talk about the fundamental theorem of Galois theory in Chapter 5.
74 2. Rings and Fields
3 | Advanced Group Theory

Deeper results of groups are presented in this chapter. Various kinds of series of a group are
studied in the first three sections. A solvable group gets its name from the Galois group of a
polynomial p(x) and solvability by radicals of the equation p(x) = 0. A nilpotent group can be
considered as a generalization of an abelian group. A linear group gives an example of an infinite
simple group. Finally, we discuss how to construct a group from a set of objects and presentations.

3.1 Jordan-Hölder Theorem

The ideas of normal series of a group and solvability that arose in Galois theory yield invariants of
groups (the Jordan-Höder theorem), showing that simple groups are, in a certain sense, building
towers of finite groups.

Definition. A subnormal series of a group G is a finite sequence H0 , H1 , . . . , Hn of subgroups

of G such that Hi ⊳ Hi+1 (although not necessarily normal in G) for all i with H0 = {e} and
Hn = G. The groups Hi+1 /Hi are called the factors associated with the series. A subnormal
series is called a normal series of G if Hi ⊳ G for all i.

Examples 3.1.1. 1. {0} < 8Z < 4Z < Z and {0} < 9Z < Z are normal series of Z.
2. {(1)} < A3 < S3 is a normal series of S3 .
3. {(1)} < A4 < S4 , {(1)} < V4 < S4 and {(1)} < V4 < A4 < S4 are normal series of S4 . Here
V4 = {(1), (12)(34), (13)(24), (14)(23)}.
4. {(1)} < {(1), (12)(34)} < V4 < A4 < S4 is a subnormal series of S4 which is not a normal
series.

Definition. A subnormal [normal] series {Kj } is a refinement of a subnormal [normal] series

{Hi } of a group G if {Hi } ⊆ {Kj }.

Example 3.1.2. The series {0} < 72Z < 9Z < 3Z < Z is a refinement of the series {0} < 9Z < Z.

Definition. Two subnormal [normal] series {Hi } and {Kj } of the same group G are isomorphic
if there is a one-to-one correspondence between the collections of factor groups {Hi+1 /Hi } and
{Kj+1 /Kj } such that corresponding factor groups are isomorphic.

Clearly, two isomorphic subnormal [normal] series must have the same number of groups.
Example 3.1.3. The two series of Z15 , {0} < h5i < Z15 and {0} < h3i < Z15 are isomorphic.
The following theorem is fundamental to the theory of series.

Theorem 3.1.1. [Schreier] Two subnormal [normal] series of a group G have isomorphic refine-
ments.

75
76 3. Advanced Group Theory

Example 3.1.4. Find isomorphic refinements of the normal series

{0} < 8Z < 4Z < Z and {0} < 9Z < Z.

Consider the refinement

{0} < 72Z < 8Z < 4Z < Z
of {0} < 8Z < 4Z < Z and the refinement

{0} < 72Z < 18Z < 9Z < Z

of {0} < 9Z < Z. In both cases the refinements have four factor groups isomorphic to Z4 , Z2 , Z9 ,
and 72Z or Z. The order in which the factor groups occurs is different to be sure.
Recall the following fact.

Theorem 3.1.2. If N is a normal subgroup of G, and if H is any subgroup of G, then HN = N H

is a subgroup of G. Furthermore, if H ⊳ G, then HN ⊳ G.

To prove Schreier’s theorem, we shall need the following lemma developed by Zassenhaus.
This lemma is also called the butterfly lemma since the diagram which accompanies the lemma
has a butterfly shape.

Lemma 3.1.3. [Zassenhaus] Let H and K be subgroups of a group G and let H ∗ and K ∗ be
normal subgroups of H and K respectively. Then
1. H ∗ (H ∩ K ∗ ) is a normal subgroup of H ∗ (H ∩ K).
2. K ∗ (H ∗ ∩ K) is a normal subgroup of K ∗ (H ∩ K).
3. H ∗ (H ∩ K)/H ∗ (H ∩ K ∗ ) ∼= K ∗ (H ∩ K)/K ∗ (H ∗ ∩ K) ∼
= (H ∩ K)/[(H ∗ ∩ K)(H ∩ K ∗ )].

H ◆◆ ♣ K✭
◆◆◆ ♣♣♣ ✭✭
✖✖✖ ◆◆◆ ♣ ♣
◆◆◆ ♣♣♣ ✭✭
✖✖✖ ◆ ♣♣♣ ✭✭
✖✖✖ H ∗ (H ∩ K) K ∗ (H ∩ K) ✭✭
❘❘❘ ❧❧ ✭✭
✖✖ ❘❘❘ ❧❧
❘❘❘
❘ ❧ ❧ ❧❧❧ ✭✭
✖ ❘❘❘ ❧
✖✖✖ ❧❧❧ ✭✭
H ∩ K ✭✭
✖✖✖ ✭✭
✖✖✖ ✭✭
✖ ✭✭
H ∗ (H ∩ K ∗ ) K ∗ (H ∗ ∩ K) ✭✭
✖✖✖ s ☛ ❘ ❘❘❘ ❧❧ ✸ ❑
✸✸ ❑❑❑ ✭✭
s s ☛ ❘❘ ❧ ❧
✖✖✖ s ss ☛☛ ❘❘❘
❘ ❧ ❧❧❧❧ ✸✸ ❑❑❑ ✭✭
ss ❘❘❘ ❧ ❑❑
✖✖✖ s ss ☛☛☛ ❧❧❧ ✸✸
✸
❑❑
❑
✭✭
s ∗ ∗ ❑❑
ss ☛☛ (H ∩ K)(H ∩ K ) ✸✸ ❑ ✭✭
✖✖✖ s ss ☛☛ ♠♠ ♠ ◗◗◗
◗ ✸✸ ❑❑
❑ ✭✭
ss ☛ ♠♠♠ ◗◗◗ ✸✸ ❑❑
✭
✖✖✖ ssss ☛☛☛
♠♠♠ ♠♠ ◗◗ ◗◗◗ ✸✸ ❑ ❑ ❑❑ ✭
s ♠ ◗ ✸✸
H∗ ■ ☛☛
☛ ♠♠♠ ◗◗◗
K∗
■■ ☛ ♠♠ ♠♠♠ ◗◗◗
◗ ◗
✸✸
✉ ✉
■■ ☛ ♠♠ ◗◗◗ ✸ ✉
■■ ☛☛ ♠♠♠♠♠ ◗◗◗ ✸✸ ✉✉
■■ ☛ ♠ ◗◗ ✸ ✉ ✉✉
☛ ♠ ✉
H∗ ∩ K H ∩ K∗

Proof. We first note that

H ∗ (H ∩ K), H ∗ (H ∩ K ∗ ), K ∗ (H ∩ K) and K ∗ (H ∗ ∩ K)

are groups. It is easy to show that H ∗ ∩ K are H ∩ K ∗ are normal subgroups of H ∩ K. Apply
Theorem 3.1.2 to H ∗ ∩K and H∩K ∗ as normal subgroups of H∩K, we have L = (H ∗ ∩K)(H∩K ∗ )
is a normal subgroup of H ∩ K. Thus we have the lattice of subgroups shown above.
3.1. Jordan-Hölder Theorem 77

Let φ : H ∗ (H ∩ K) → (H ∩ K)/L be defined as follows. For h ∈ H ∗ and x ∈ H ∩ K, let

φ(hx) = xL. We show φ is well-defined and a homomorphism. Let h1 , h2 ∈ H ∗ and x1 , x2 ∈ H∩K.
If h1 x1 = h2 x2 , then h−1 −1 ∗ ∗
2 h1 = x2 x1 ∈ H ∩ (H ∩ K) = H ∩ K ⊆ L, so x1 L = x2 L. Thus φ is
∗ ∗
well-defined. Since H is normal in H, there is h3 in H such that x1 h2 = h3 x1 . Then
φ((h1 x1 )(h2 x2 )) = φ((h1 h3 )(x1 x2 )) = (x1 x2 )L
= (x1 L)(x2 L) = φ(h1 x1 )φ(h2 x2 )
Thus, φ is a homomorphism.
Obviously φ is onto (H ∩ K)/L. Finally if h ∈ H ∗ and x ∈ H ∩ K, then φ(hx) = xL = L if
and only if x ∈ L, or if and only if hx ∈ H ∗ L = H ∗ (H ∗ ∩ K)(H ∩ K ∗ ) = H ∗ (H ∩ K ∗ ). Hence,
ker φ = H ∗ (H ∩ K ∗ ). Another similar result follows by symmetry.
Proof of Schreier’s theorem. Let G be a group and let
{e} = H0 < H1 < H2 < · · · < Hn = G
and
{e} = K0 < K1 < K2 < · · · < Km = G
be two subnormal series for G. For i where 0 ≤ i ≤ n − 1, we form the chain of (not necessarily
distinct) groups
Hi = Hi (Hi+1 ∩ K0 ) ≤ Hi (Hi+1 ∩ K1 ) ≤ · · · ≤ Hi (Hi+1 ∩ Km ) = Hi+1 .
We refine the first subnormal series by inserting the above chain between Hi and Hi+1 . In a
symmetric fashion, for 0 ≤ j ≤ m − 1, we insert the chain
Kj = Kj (Kj+1 ∩ H0 ) ≤ Kj (Kj+1 ∩ H1 ) ≤ · · · ≤ Kj (Kj+1 ∩ Hn ) = Kj+1
between Kj and Kj+1 . Thus we get two refinement having mn terms. By Zassenhaus’s Lemma,
we have
Hi (Hi+1 ∩ Kj+1 )/Hi (Hi+1 ∩ Kj ) ∼
= Kj (Kj+1 ∩ Hi+1 )/Kj (Kj+1 ∩ Hi )
for 0 ≤ i ≤ n − 1 and 0 ≤ j ≤ m − 1. Hence, this two refinements are isomorphic.
For normal series, where all Hi and Kj are normal in G, we merely observe that all the groups
Hi (Hi+1 ∩ Kj ) and Kj (Kj+1 ∩ Hi ) are normal in G, so the same proof applies.

Definition. A normal subgroup M (6= G) is called a maximal normal subgroup of G if there

exists no normal subgroup N , other than G or M , such that M ⊳ N ⊳ G.

Definition. A group G is simple if G and {e} are the only normal subgroups of G.

For example, Zp , p prime, and An , n 6= 4, are simple. We also have an obvious fact.

Theorem 3.1.4. G is a simple abelian group if and only if G is cyclic of prime order.

Recall the third isomorphism theorem that

Theorem 3.1.5. [Third Isomorphism Theorem] Suppose G is a group and N is a normal sub-
group of G. Then the map
H 7→ H/N
gives a 1-1 correspondence

{ subgroups of G containing N } ↔ { subgroups of G/N }.

This correspondence carries normal subgroups to normal subgroups. Moreover, if H is normal in

G, N < H < G, then
G/H ∼= (G/N )/(H/N ).
78 3. Advanced Group Theory

We have the following criterion.

Theorem 3.1.6. M is a maximal normal subgroup of a group G if and only if G/M is simple.

Proof. It follows directly from the third isomorphism theorem.

Definition. A subnormal series {Hi } of a group G is a composition series if all the factor
groups Hi+1 /Hi are simple. A normal series {Hi } of G is a principal or chief series if all the
factor groups Hi+1 /Hi are simple.

Observe that by Theorem 3.1.6 Hi+1 /Hi is simple if and only if Hi is a maximal normal
subgroup of Hi+1 . Thus for a composition series, each Hi must be a maximal normal subgroup of
Hi+1 . To form a composition series of a group G, we just look for a maximal normal subgroup Hn−1
of G, then for a maximal normal subgroup of Hn−1 , and so on. If this process terminates in finite
number of steps, we have a composition series. Hence, we have first shown:

Theorem 3.1.7. If G is a finite group, then G has a composition series.

Note that by Theorem 3.1.6 a composition series cannot have any further refinement. To form
a principal series, we have to hunt for a maximal normal subgroup Hn−1 of G, then for a maximal
normal subgroup of Hn−1 that is also normal in G, and so on. The main theorem is as follows.

Theorem 3.1.8. [Jordan-Hölder] Any two composition [principal] series of a group G are iso-
morphic.

Proof. Let {Hi } and {Ki } be two composition [principal] series of G. By Schreier’s theorem,
they have isomorphic refinements. But since all factor groups are already simple, Theorem 3.1.6
shows that neither series has any further refinement. Hence, {Hi } and {Ki } must already be
isomorphic.

Examples 3.1.5. 1. If G is simple, then {e} ⊳ G is the only normal series of G. It is a compo-
sition series for G and its associated factor is G = G/{e}.
2. If n 6= 4, then {(1)} < An < Sn is a composition series of Sn .
3. Z has many normal series. For example, let m1 , . . . , mn be positive integers. Then

Z > m1 Z > m1 m2 Z > · · · > m1 m2 . . . mn Z > {0}

is a normal series for Z whose associated factors are Zm1 , Zm2 , . . . , Zmn , Z. Note that since
any nontrivial subgroup of Z is isomorphic to Z, any normal series for Z must have one
associated factor isomorphic to Z. Hence, Z has no composition series.
4. Let p be prime and G = Zp × Zp . If (x, y) 6= (0, 0) in G, then h(x, y)i ∼ = Zp and {(0, 0)} <
h(x, y)i < G is a composition series for G. The composition factors are G/h(x, y)i ∼ = Zp and
∼ 2
h(x, y)i/(0, 0) = Zp , i.e., Zp with multiplicity 2. Note that G has (p − 1)/(p − 1) = p + 1
subgroups of order p, so G has p + 1 distinct composition series. But in all cases they have
the same composition factors: Zp with multiplicity 2.
5. Let p and q be prime and G = Zp × Zq = hai × hbi. Then the only proper subgroup of G are
hai = Zp and hbi = Zq . Thus G has two composition series

{e} < hai < G and {e} < hbi < G

In both cases, the associated composition factors are Zp and Zq both with multiplicity one.
6. Consider Zp3 , Zp2 × Zp and Zp × Zp × Zp . In any composition series for these groups the
same composition factors, namely Zp with multiplicity 3, occur.
3.2. Solvable Groups 79

Exercises 3.1. 1. Suppose G has precisely two subgroups. Show that G has prime order.
2. A proper subgroup M of G is maximal if whenever M ⊆ H ⊆ G, we have H = M or H = G.
Suppose G is finite and has only one maximal subgroup. Show that |G| is a power of prime.
3. Let G = Z36 . Consider two normal series {0} < h12i < h3i < Z36 and {0} < h18i < Z36 . Find two
isomorphic chains and exhibit the isomorphic factor groups as described in the proof of Schreier’s
Theorem.
4. Find a composition series for the dihedral group D4 = {σ, ρ : σ 4 = ρ2 = e and ρσρ−1 = σ −1 } and
for the quaternion group Q = {±1, ±i, ±j, ±k}. Determine the composition factor in each case.
5. Prove that if G has a composition [resp. principal] series and if N is a proper normal subgroup of G,
then there exists a composition [resp. principal] series containing N . Hence, show that N and G/N
have composition [principal] series.
6. Show that if H0 = {e} < H1 < H2 < · · · < Hn = G is a subnormal [normal] series of G, and if
Hi+1 /Hi is of finite order si+1 , then G is of finite order s1 s2 . . . sn .
7. Show that an infinite abelian group can have no composition series.

3.2 Solvable Groups

Solvable groups arise from the study of the Galois group of a polynomial in order to obtain a
criterion to determine whether it is solvable by radicals. We shall see this in Section 5.7.

Definition. Let G be a group. For g, h ∈ G, [g, h] = ghg −1 h−1 is called a commutator of G. The
derived subgroup of G, denoted by G′ , is the group generated by all commutators of elements
of G, i.e.,
G′ = hghg −1 h−1 : g, h ∈ Gi.
The n-th derived subgroup of G, denoted by G(n) is defined inductively by G(0) = G and
G(n) = (G(n−1) )′ for all n ≥ 1.

Theorem 3.2.1. Let G be a group.

1. If N is a subgroup, then (N is normal and G/N is abelian) if and only if G′ ⊆ N .
2. G′ is a normal subgroup of G and G/G′ is abelian.
3. Every homomorphism θ : G → A, where A is an abelian group, factors through G/G′ . More
precisely, there is a map θ̄ : G/G′ → A such that θ = θ̄ ◦ π, where π : G → G/G′ is the
canonical projection.

Proof. (1) Assume that N is normal and G/N is abelian. Let x, y ∈ G. Then xyN = yxN , so
xyx−1 y −1 ∈ N . Thus G′ ⊆ N . Conversely, suppose that G′ ⊆ N . Let x, y ∈ G and n ∈ N . Then
xnx−1 n−1 ∈ G′ ⊆ N which implies that xnx−1 ∈ N n = N . Hence, N ⊳ G. Since (xy)(yx)−1 =
xyx−1 y −1 ∈ G′ ⊆ N , xyN = yxN , so G/N is abelian.
(2) follows from 1 by taking N = G′ .
(3) Define θ̄(xG′ ) = θ(x) for all x ∈ G. Clearly, θ = θ̄ ◦ π and is a homomorphism. Since
θ(G′ ) = {e}, θ̄ is well-defined.

Remark. The quotient G/G′ is the largest abelian homomorphic image of G.

Definition. The derived series of a group G is the sequence of groups

G = G(0) ≥ G(1) ≥ G(2) ≥ · · · ≥ G(n) ≥ . . . .

A group G is said to be solvable (of derived length ≤ n) if G(n) = {e} for some n.
80 3. Advanced Group Theory

Definition. A subgroup H of a group G which is invariant under all automorphisms, that is,
ϕ(H) ≤ H for all ϕ ∈ Aut G, is called a characteristic subgroup of G.

Using the inner automorphisms ϕa (x) = axa−1 for all a ∈ G, we deduce that every character-
istic subgroup is normal in G.

Lemma 3.2.2. Let ϕ : G → H be a surjective homomorphism. Then ϕ(G(i) ) = H (i) for every
i ≥ 0. Also, G(i) is a characteristic subgroup for all i, and is thus normal in G.

Proof. We have ϕ([x, y]) = [ϕ(x), ϕ(y)], and since ϕ is onto, we see that ϕ maps the set of commu-
tators in G onto those in H. It follows that ϕ(G′ ) = H ′ , and repeated application of this argument
yields that ϕ(G(i) ) = H (i) , as required. That the terms of the derived series of G are characteristic
follows from the first part of the lemma when we take H = G and ϕ ∈ Aut G.

Theorem 3.2.3. Let G be a group. Then G is solvable if and only if G has a subnormal series with
abelian factors.

Proof. If G is solvable, G = G(0) > G(1) > · · · > G(n) = {e} is a subnormal series with abelian
factors. Conversely, suppose G = G0 > G1 > · · · > Gm = {e} is a subnormal series for G with
abelian factors. Since Gi /Gi+1 is abelian, Gi+1 ≥ G′i . We claim Gi ≥ G(i) for i = 0, 1, . . . , m by
induction on i. For i = 0, G0 = G = G(0) . Assume Gi ≥ G(i) . Then Gi+1 ≥ G′i ≥ (G(i) )′ = G(i+1) ,
which completes the induction. Hence, {e} = Gm ≥ G(m) , so G(m) = 1 and G is solvable.

Remark. From Lemma 3.2.2, we know that G(i) ⊳ G for all i. Then the above derived series

G = G(0) > G(1) > · · · > G(n) = {e}

is indeed a normal series with abelian factors for G. Also, if G is solvable, its derived length,
dl(G), is the smallest positive integer n such that G(n) = {e}.

Examples 3.2.1. 1. Abelian groups are solvable of derived length 1 because G′ = {e}. In
addition, the groups with derived length 1 are exactly the abelian groups. Therefore, a
group G is abelian if and only if G is solvable of derived length 1.
2. Let Dn be the dihedral group of order 2n, i.e.,

Dn = {σ, ρ : σ n = ρ2 = e and ρσρ−1 = σ −1 }.

Here, σ is the 2π/n rotation and ρ is the reflection of the regular n-gon. For example,
(2)
D1 = Z2 , D2 = Z2 × Z2 and D3 = S3 . Then Dn′ = hσ 2 i, an abelian group. Thus, Dn = {e}.
For n = 1 or 2, Dn is abelian and hence has derived length one. For n ≥ 3, Dn is solvable of
derived length two.
Proof. Observe that Dn = {e, σ, σ 2 , . . . , σ n−1 , ρ, ρσ, ρσ 2 , . . . , ρσ n−1 }. For x, y ∈ Dn , we distinguish
four cases



 σ k σ l σ −k σ −l = e

(ρσ k )(ρσ l )(σ −k ρ−1 )(σ −l ρ−1 ) = ρσ k σ k σ −l σ −l ρ−1 = σ −2k σ 2l
xyx−1 y −1 =


 (ρσ k )σ l (σ −k ρ−1 )σ −l = σ −l σ −l = σ −2l

σ k (ρσ l )σ −k (σ −l ρ−1 ) = σ k σ k = σ 2k .

This implies that Dn′ ⊆ hσ 2 i. On the other hand, we have σ 2 = ρσ −1 ρ−1 σ. Thus, Dn′ = hσ 2 i.
3.2. Solvable Groups 81

3. The groups S1 = {(1)} and S2 = Z2 are abelian groups. The group S3 = D3 is solvable of
(3)
derived length two. Since S4′ = A4 , A′4 = V4 and V4′ = {(1)} = S4 , we can conclude that
(2)
the group S4 is solvable of derived length 3. For n ≥ 5, Sn′ = An and A′n = Sn = An since
An is simple and non-abelian. Therefore Sn ≥ An ≥ An ≥ . . . is the derived series of Sn
and Sn is not solvable.
Proof. It is easy to see that any group of order two in A4 are not normal. Since A4 has more than one
Sylow 3-subgroup, any subgroups of A4 of order three are not normal. Moreover, A4 has no subgroup
of order six (see Exercises 1.4). Hence, the normal subgroups of A4 are A4 , V4 and {(1)}. Note that
S4′ is a subgroup of A4 . Moreover, it is normal in A4 . Since S4 and S4 /V4 are not abelian, S4′ must
be A4 . Since A4 is not abelian and A4 /V4 is abelian, we have A′4 = V4 . Hence, S4 ⊲ A4 ⊲ V4 ⊲ {(1)} is
the derived series of S4 . Next, let n ≥ 5 and K = Sn′ ⊳ Sn . Then K ∩ An ⊳ Sn , so K ∩ An ⊳ An . Since
An is simple, K ∩ An = {(1)} or K ∩ An = An . But K ⊆ An and K 6= {(1)} (since Sn is non-abelian),
we get K = An . Hence, Sn′ = An .

Theorem 3.2.4. 1. If G is solvable and H is a subgroup of G, then H is solvable.

2. If G is solvable and N is a normal subgroup G, then G/N is solvable.
3. A homomorphic image of a solvable group is solvable.
4. If N ⊳ G and N and G/N are solvable, then G is solvable and dl(G) ≤ dl(N ) + dl(G/N ).
5. If G and H are solvable, then G × H is solvable.

Proof. (1) Since H (i) ≤ G(i) for all i, H (n) = {e} if G(n) = {e}.
(2) The application of Lemma 3.2.2 to the canonical homomorphism π : G → G/N yields that
(G/N )(i) = π(G(i) ) for all i, and hence if G(n) = {e}, we have (G/N )(n) = {N }.
(3) follows from (2).
(4) Let dl(N ) = n and dl(G/N ) = m. Since the canonical homomorphism ϕ : G → G/N maps
G(m) to (G/N )(m) = {N }, we see that G(m) ⊆ N . Thus G(m+n) = (G(m) )(n) ⊆ N (n) = {e}, and
hence G is solvable.
(5) follows from (4).

Some additional conditions under which finite groups are solvable are the following.

Theorem 3.2.5. Let G be a finite group.

1. [Burnside] If |G| = pa q b for some primes p and q, then G is solvable.
2. [Philip Hall] If for every prime p dividing |G| we factor the order of G as |G| = pa m where
(p, m) = 1, and G has a subgroup of order m, then G is solvable, i.e., if for all primes p, G
has a subgroup whose index equals the order of a Sylow p-subgroup, then G is solvable—such
subgroups are called Sylow p-complements.
3. [Feit-Thompson] If G is odd, then G is solvable.
4. [Thompson] If for every pair of elements x, y ∈ G, hx, yi is a solvable groups, then G is
solvable.

Burnside’s and Philip Hall’s Theorems were proved by using Character Theory. The proof of
the Feit-Thompson Theorem takes 255 pages of hard mathematics (Solvability of groups of odd
order, Pacific Journal of Mathematics, 13 (1963), pp. 775–1029). Thompson’s Theorem was first
proved as a consequence of 475-page paper (that in turn relies ultimately on the Feit-Thompson
Theorem).

Exercises 3.2. 1. (a) Give an example of a normal subgroup of G which is not characteristic.
(b) Prove that Z(G) is a characteristic subgroup of G.
(c) If H is a characteristic subgroup of N and N ⊳ G, show that H ⊳ G.
2. Show that if G is a solvable simple group, then G is abelian.
82 3. Advanced Group Theory

3. Let {e} = H0 < H1 < H2 < · · · < Hn−1 < Hn = G be a composition for G. Prove that G is solvable
if and only if the composition factors Hi+1 /Hi all have prime order. Deduce that if G is solvable with
a composition series, then G is finite.
4. Find a composition series of S3 × S3 . Is S3 × S3 solvable?
5. Show that a group of order 1995 is solvable.
6. Let p < q < r be primes and let G1 be a group of order pq and let G2 be a group of order pqr. Prove
that both of them are solvable. [Hint: G1 has a unique subgroup of order q.]
7. Let G be a group of order 495 = 32 · 5 · 11.
(a) Prove that a Sylow 5-subgroup or a Sylow 11-subgroup of G is normal in G.
(b) Let P be a Sylow 5-subgroup and Q a Sylow 11-subgroup of G. Prove that P Q is normal in G.
(c) Prove that G is solvable.
8. Prove (without using the Feit-Thompson Theorem) that the following statements are equivalent:
(i) every group of odd order is solvable
(ii) the only simple groups of odd order are those of prime order.

3.3 Nilpotent Groups

If A and B are subsets of G, [A, B] is the subgroup of G generated by all commutators [a, b] =
aba−1 b−1 where a ∈ A and b ∈ B, that is,

[A, B] = h[a, b] : a ∈ A and b ∈ Bi.

Note that [A, B] = [B, A].

Example 3.3.1. G′ = [G, G], G(2) = [G′ , G′ ], . . . , G(n+1) = [G(n) , G(n) ].

The lower central series of a group G is defined inductively by Γ1 (G) = G and Γn+1 (G) =
[G, Γn (G)] for all n ≥ 1, so we get

G = Γ1 (G) ≥ Γ2 (G) ≥ . . .

and Γn (G) is called the n-th term of the lower central series of G.
A group G is said to be nilpotent of class ≤ n if Γn+1 = {e}.

Remarks. 1. Since Γ2 (G) = [G, G] = G′ , G is abelian if and only if G is nilpotent of class ≤ 1.

2. Note that the derived series commences

G = G(0) ≥ G(1) ≥ . . .

while the lower central series commences

G = Γ1 (G) ≥ Γ2 (G) ≥ . . . .

Note however that G is abelian if and only if {e} = [G, G] = G′ = Γ2 (G), so

G is abelian ⇔ G is solvable of length ≤ 1 ⇔ G is nilpotent of class ≤ 1.

Examples 3.3.2. 1. S3 has the derived series S3 > A3 > {(1)} and has the lower central series
S3 > A3 ≥ A3 ≥ . . . , so S3 is solvable (of length 2) but not nilpotent.
2. S4 has the derived series S4 > A4 > V4 > {(1)} and has the lower central series S4 > A4 ≥
A4 ≥ . . . , so S4 is solvable (of length 3) but not nilpotent.
3. Dn = hρ, τ : ρn = τ 2 = e and τ ρτ −1 = ρ−1 i has the derived series Dn > hρ2 i > {e} and has
a lower central series Dn ≥ hρ2 i ≥ hρ4 i ≥ hρ8 i ≥ . . . . Hence, Dn is solvable (of length 2)
r
unless D1 or D2 which is abelian. But Dn is nilpotent if and only if ρ2 = e for some r if and
only if n is a power of 2.
3.3. Nilpotent Groups 83

Theorem 3.3.1. Let G be a group. Then Γn+1 (G) ≥ G(n) for all n ≥ 0. Hence, a nilpotent group
is solvable. Therefore, Sn is not nilpotent for all n ≥ 5.

Proof. We shall use induction on n. For n = 0, Γ1 (G) = G = G(0) . For the inductive step, we
suppose Γn+1 (G) ≥ G(n) . Thus

Γn+2 (G) = [G, Γn+1 (G)] ≥ [G(n) , G(n) ] = G(n+1) .

Finally, assume that G is nilpotent. Then Γn+1 (G) = {e} for some n, so G(n) = {e}. Hence, G is
solvable.

Remark. In fact, we have Γ1 (G) ≥ G(0) , Γ2 (G) ≥ G(1) , Γ4 (G) ≥ G(2) , Γ8 (G) ≥ G(3) , . . . ,
Γ2n (G) ≥ G(n) , . . . but this is more difficult to prove.

Recall that if N is a normal subgroup of G, then H ↔ H/N gives a 1-1 correspondence

between subgroups of G containing N and subgroups of G/N . Moreover, this correspondence
carries normal subgroups to normal subgroups.
Now let Z(G) denote the center of a group G. Then Z(G) is a normal subgroup of G and
Z(G/Z(G)) is a normal subgroup of G/Z(G). Hence,

Z(G/Z(G)) = Z2 (G)/Z(G)

where Z2 (G) is a normal subgroup of G containing Z(G). We generalize this construction to make
the following definition.

Definition. The upper central series of a group G is defined inductively by Z0 (G) = {e} and
Zn+1 (G)/Zn (G) = Z(G/Zn (G)) for all n ≥ 1, so we get

{e} = Z0 (G) ≤ Z1 (G) ≤ Z2 (G) ≤ . . .

and Zn (G) is called the n-th term of the upper series of G.

Remarks. 1. Z1 (G) is the center of G and Zi+1 (G)/Zi (G) is the center of G/Zi (G).
2. Zi+1 (G)/Zi (G) = Z(G/Zi (G)) is equivalent to Zi+1 (G) = {g ∈ G : [G, g] ≤ Zi (G)} because

Zi+1 (G)/Zi (G) =Z(G/Zi (G))

⇐⇒ ∀g ∈ G, [g ∈ Zi+1 (G) ⇔ ∀x ∈ G, gxZi (G) = xgZi (G)]
⇐⇒ ∀g ∈ G, [g ∈ Zi+1 (G) ⇔ ∀x ∈ G, xgx−1 g −1 ∈ Zi (G)]
⇐⇒ ∀g ∈ G, [g ∈ Zi+1 (G) ⇔ [G, g] ⊆ Zi (G)]
⇐⇒ Zi+1 (G) = {g ∈ G : [G, g] ≤ Zi (G)}.

3. We can show by induction that Zi (G) is a characteristic subgroup of G for all i ∈ N.

Definition. A subnormal series G = G1 ≥ G2 ≥ . . . is called a central series for G if [G, Gi ] ≤

Gi+1 for all i.

Remarks. 1. Since [G, Γi (G)] = Γi+1 (G), the lower central series is a central series for G.
2. If Zn (G) = G for some n, then the upper central series (in reverse order) is a central series
for G:
G = Zn (G) ≥ Zn−1 (G) ≥ · · · ≥ Z1 (G) ≥ Z0 (G) = {e}.
For, the condition Zi+1 (G)/Zi (G) = Z(G/Zi (G)) implies that [G, Zi+1 (G)] ≤ Zi (G).
84 3. Advanced Group Theory

Theorem 3.3.2. Let G be a group.

1. If G = G1 ≥ G2 ≥ G3 ≥ . . . is a central series for G, then Gn ≥ Γn (G) for all n.
2. G has a central series G = G1 > G2 > · · · > Gn+1 = {e} if and only if G is nilpotent of
class ≤ n.

Proof. (1) We shall use induction on n. For n = 1, G1 = G = Γ1 (G). For the inductive step, we
suppose Gn ≥ Γn (G). Then

Gn+1 ≥ [G, Gn ] ≥ [G, Γn (G)] = Γn+1 (G).

(2) If G = G1 ≤ G2 ≤ . . . ≤ Gn+1 = {e} is a central series for G, then {e} = Gn+1 ≥ Γn+1 (G),
so G is nilpotent of class ≤ n. Conversely, if G is nilpotent of class ≤ n, then G = Γ1 (G) ≥ . . . ≥
Γn+1 (G) = {e} is a central series of the required length.

Theorem 3.3.3. Let G be a group.

1. Suppose G = G1 ≥ G2 ≥ . . . ≥ Gn+1 = {e} is a central series for G. Then Zk (G) ≥ Gn−k+1
for all k ∈ {0, 1, . . . , n}.
2. If Zn (G) = G, then G = Zn (G) ≥ Zn−1 (G) ≥ . . . ≥ Z1 (G) ≥ Z0 (G) = {e} is a central
series for G.
3. G is nilpotent of class ≤ n if and only if Zn (G) = G.

Proof. (1) We shall show that Zk (G) ≥ Gn−k+1 by induction on k. For k = 0, Z0 (G) = {e} =
Gn+1 . Suppose Zk (G) ≥ Gn−k+1 . Let g ∈ Gn−(k+1)+1 = Gn−k , then [G, g] ≤ Gn−k+1 ≤ Zk (G), so
g ∈ Zk+1 (G). Hence, Zk+1 (G) ≥ Gn−(k+1)+1 .
(2) Since Zi+1 (G)/Zi (G) = Z(G/Zi (G)), [G, Zi+1 (G)] ≤ Zi (G). Hence, the given series is a
central series.
(3) follows from (1) and (2) using Theorem 3.3.2.

Suppose that G is nilpotent of class ≤ n and that G = G1 ≥ G2 ≥ . . . ≥ Gn+1 = {e} is any

central series for G. Theorems 3.3.2 and 3.3.3 show that we have the following inclusions
G= ZnS(G) ≥ Zn−1
S (G) ≥ ··· ≥ ZkS(G) ≥ ··· ≥ Z0S(G) = {e}
| | | |
G= G
S 1 ≥ G
S 2 ≥ ··· ≥ Gn−k+1
S ≥ ··· ≥ GS n+1 = {e}
| | | |
G= Γ1 (G) ≥ Γ2 (G) ≥ ··· ≥ Γn−k+1 (G) ≥ ··· ≥ Γn+1 (G) = {e}

In other words, of all central series for G, the upper central series has the largest groups
and the lower central series has the smallest groups. We can restate some of the conclusions of
Theorems 3.3.2 and 3.3.3 as follows.

Theorem 3.3.4. Let G be a group. Then the following statements are equivalent.
(i) G is nilpotent of class ≤ n.
(ii) Γn+1 (G) = {e}.
(iii) G has a central series G = G1 ≥ G2 ≥ . . . ≥ Gn+1 = {e}.
(iv) Zn (G) = G.

Next, we shall see that a finite nilpotent group behaves like a finite abelian group (Remark
after Theorem 1.6.12). We show that it is a direct product of its Sylow p-subgroups. We recall
Theorem 1.5.2.

Theorem 3.3.5. Let p be a prime. If G 6= {e} is a finite p-group, then Z(G) 6= {e}.

We can thus prove another important fact.

3.3. Nilpotent Groups 85

Theorem 3.3.6. Let G be a finite p-group. Then G is nilpotent, and hence G is solvable.

Proof. Consider the upper central series {e} = Z0 (G) ≤ Z1 (G) ≤ Z2 (G) ≤ Z3 (G) ≤ . . . . If
Zi (G) 6= G, then G/Zi (G) is a p-group, so Zi+1 (G)/Zi (G) = Z(G/Zi (G)) 6= {Zi (G)}. That is,
Zi+1 (G)
Zi (G). Since G is finite, the central series cannot increase for all i. Hence, Zn (G) = G
for some n, so G is nilpotent.

Theorem 3.3.7. Let G be a nilpotent group and let {e} < Z1 (G) < · · · < Zn (G) = G be the
upper central series of G. Suppose H is a subgroup of G and define inductively N0 (H) = H,
N1 (H) = N (H) = {g ∈ G : gHg −1 ⊆ H}, the normalizer of H and Nk+1 = N (Nk (H)) for all
k ≥ 0. Then Nn (H) = G.

Proof. We shall prove by induction on i that Ni (H) ≥ Zi (G). For i = 0, N0 (H) = H ≥ {e} =
Z0 (G). Suppose Ni (H) ≥ Zi (G). Let g ∈ Zi+1 (G). Then [g, G] ⊆ Zi (G). To show that g ∈
N (Ni (H)), let x ∈ Ni (H). Then gxg −1 x−1 ∈ Zi (G) ≤ Ni (H), so gxg −1 ∈ Ni (H)x = Ni (H).
Hence, g ∈ Ni+1 (H).

From the above theorem, we can deduce the following:

Theorem 3.3.8. Suppose G is nilpotent and H is a proper subgroup of G. Then N (H)
H.

Theorem 3.3.9. 1. If G is nilpotent and H is a subgroup of G, then H is nilpotent.

2. If G is nilpotent and N is a normal subgroup G, then G/N is nilpotent.
3. If G and H are nilpotent, then G × H is nilpotent.

Proof. (1) and (2) are analogous to the proofs of 3.2.4 for G is solvable.
(3) Suppose that G and H are nilpotent. Then there exist r, s > 0 so that Γr (G) = {eG } and
Γs (H) = {eH }. Thus Γk (G × H) = Γk (G) × Γk (H) = {(eG , eH )} where k = max{r, s}. Hence,
G × H is nilpotent.

Theorem 3.3.10. Let G be a finite group. Then the following statements are equivalent.
(i) G is nilpotent.
(ii) All Sylow p-subgroups of G are normal in G.
(iii) G is the direct product of its Sylow p-subgroups.

Proof. (i) ⇒ (ii). Assume that G is nilpotent. Recall Theorem 1.5.10 that if P is a Sylow p-
subgroup, then N (N (P )) = N (P ). But Theorem 3.3.8 asserts that if H is a proper subgroup of
G, then N (H)
H. Thus we must have N (P ) = G, that is, P is normal in G since P ⊳ N (P ).
(ii) ⇒ (iii). Note that if a Sylow p-subgroup P of G is normal in G, then it is the unique Sylow
p-subgroup of G. Let p1 , p2 , . . . , pk be the distinct prime divisors of |G| and let Pi be the Sylow
pi -subgroup of G. Suppose x ∈ Pi and y ∈ Pj where i 6= j. Then xyx−1 y −1 ∈ Pi ∩ Pj = {e}, so
x and y commute. It follows that φ : P1 × · · · × Pk → G defined by φ(x1 , . . . , xk ) = x1 . . . xk is a
homomorphism. It is easy to show that φ is 1-1 and onto. Hence, G is the direct product of its
Sylow p-subgroups.
(iii) ⇒ (i). A finite p-group is nilpotent (Theorem 3.3.6) and a finite direct product of nilpotent
groups is nilpotent (Theorem 3.3.9). Hence, if G is the direct product of its Sylow p-subgroups,
then G is nilpotent.

Corollary 3.3.11. A finite abelian group is the direct product of its Sylow subgroups.
86 3. Advanced Group Theory

Exercises 3.3. 1. (a) [P. Hall] Let G be a group and x, y, z ∈ G. Write [x, y, z] for [[x, y], z]. Prove that
[x, y −1 , z]y [y, z −1 , x]z [z, x−1 , y]x = e.
(b) Let X, Y, Z ⊆ G and assume [X, Y, Z] = {e} = [Y, Z, X]. Prove that [Z, X, Y ] = {e}.
2. Prove that if N ≤ Z(G) and N and G/N are nilpotent, then G is nilpotent. Give an example of a
group G with a normal subgroup N such that N and G/N are nilpotent but G is not nilpotent.
3. Let G be nilpotent of class 3. Show that if v ∈ G′ and x ∈ G, then v −1 xv = cx where c ∈ Z(G).
Deduce that G′ is abelian.
4. Show that if G is a nilpotent group and N is a normal subgroup of G where N 6= {e}, then N ∩Z(G) 6=
{e}.
5. Prove that if M is a maximal subgroup of a nilpotent group G, then M is normal and |G/M | = p
where p is a prime. (A maximal subgroup is a proper subgroup which is not contained in any other
proper subgroup. Infinite groups needs not possess maximal subgroups.)
6. Prove that if G is a nilpotent group and N is a minimal normal subgroup of G ({e} = 6 N is normal
and simple), then N ≤ Z(G) and |N | = p for some p.

3.4 Linear Groups

In this section, we talk about linear groups over a field. They have many interesting properties
and provide us an example of an infinite simple group (Jordan-Moore’s theorem).

Definition. Let K be a field and Mn (K) be the set of n × n matrices with entries in K. Then
Mn (K) is a ring. Let GLn (K) denote the set of multiplicatively invertible elements in Mn (K),
called the general linear group of degree n, that is,

GLn (K) = Mn (K)× = {A ∈ Mn (K) : det(A) 6= 0}.

Since det(AB) = det A det B, det : GLn (K) → K × is a homomorphism (of two groups).
Its kernel consists of determinant one matrices, denoted by SLn (K) and called the special
linear group of degree n. It is a normal subgroup of GLn (K) with quotient GLn (K)/SLn (K)
isomorphic to K × = K r {0}.

Geometrically, let V be a vector space over K of dimension n. Upon choosing a basis of V , we

can represent all linear transformations from V to V via n × n matrices with entries in K. Then
GLn (K) represents the invertible linear transformations on V , i.e., those which are one-to-one or
equivalently those which are onto.

Theorem 3.4.1. Let K be a field. Then

Z(GLn (K)) = {λIn : λ ∈ K × } and Z(SLn (K)) = {λIn : λ ∈ K and λn = 1},

where In is the n × n identity matrix.

Proof. For M to be in the center of G = GLn (K), it must commute with every N in G. In
particular, M commutes with the elementary matrices. Recall that multiplying M on the left by
an elementary matrix corresponds to performing an elementary row operation; multiplying M on
the right by an elementary matrix corresponds to performing an elementary column operation.
Thus, multiplying the ith row of M by a nonzero a gives you the same matrix as multiplying the
ith column of M by a. This implies that the matrix is diagonal. Then, since interchanging the ith
and jth row of M gives us the same matrix as swapping the ith and jth column of M , the ith
entry along the diagonal must equal the jth entry along the diagonal, for all i and j. Therefore,
M must be a multiple of In . Finally, it is easy to see that all nonzero multiples of In do commute
with all N ∈ G. Hence, the theorem is proved for GLn (K).
3.4. Linear Groups 87

For the center of SLn (K), we need to use the elementary matrices Xij (a), i 6= j, whose entries
are the same as that of the identity matrix In except for an a ∈ K in the (i, j) location. It is
obtained by performing the row operation Ri + aRj , i 6= j or the column operation Cj + aCi on
In . Clearly, Xij (a) ∈ SLn (K) for all a ∈ K and i 6= j.
If M is in the center of SLn (K), then M must commute with Xij (1) for all i 6= j, so the ith
and jth columns and rows must be all zeros except for the (i, i) and (j, j) entries which must be
equal. Moreover, the product of the diagonal entries is the determinant which is equal to 1.

From the above theorem, the center of GLn (K) consists of scalar matrices λIn with λ ∈ K ×
and the center of SLn (K) consists of scalar matrices λIn with λ ∈ K and λn = 1. They are normal
and lead to the next definitions.

Definition. The quotient group GLn (K)/Z(GLn (K)) = PGLn (K), called the projective linear
group of degree n. The quotient SLn (K)/Z(SLn (K)) = PSLn (K) is called the projective
special linear group of degree n.

If K is finite, we may determine the cardinality of each linear group as follows.

Theorem 3.4.2. If |K| = q < ∞, then

|GLn (K)| = (q n − 1)(q n − q)(q n − q 2 ) . . . (q n − q n−1 ).

Proof. Let A ∈ GLn (K). Then the columns of A are linearly independent vectors in K n . Thus
the first column of A can be any nonzero vectors in K n . The second column must not be multiple
of the first column, and the jth column must not be a linear combination of the previous j − 1
columns for all j = 2, . . . , n. By the product rule, we obtain the theorem.

Corollary 3.4.3. Let K be a finite field with q elements. Then

|SLn (K)| = |PGLn (K)| = (q n − 1)(q n − q)(q n − q 2 ) . . . (q n − q n−2 )q n−1

and |PSL2 (K)| = |SL2 (K)| if charK = 2 and |PSL2 (K)| = |SL2 (K)|/2 if charK 6= 2.

Proof. They follow from their definitions and Theorem 3.4.2.

Lemma3.4.4. Let
  K bea field. The groupSL2 (K) is generated by the union of the two subgroups
1 λ 1 0
: λ ∈ K and : µ ∈ K . Hence, every matrix, in SL2 (K) is a finite product of
0 1 µ 1
matrices which either upper triangular or lower triangular and which have 1’s along the diagonal.
These matrices are called unipotent matrices or transvections.
 
a b
Proof. Let ∈ SL2 (K). Assume that c 6= 0. Perform the following row/column transforma-
c d
tions:
   d−1
  d−1
  
a b R1 + 1−a C2 + 1−d
/ 1 0 .
R2 C1
c / 1 c R2 −cR1
/ 1 c c

c d because ad − bc = 1 c d 0 1 0 1

Thus,       
1−a 1−d
1 0 1 c a b 1 c 1 0
= .
−c 1 0 1 c d 0 1 0 1
 
a b
Hence, is a product of transvections.
c d
88 3. Advanced Group Theory


a+b b
If c = 0, then d 6= 0 and the matrix ∈ SL2 (K) can be treated as in the first case.
d d
However,     
a b a+b b 1 0
=
0 d d d −1 1
and the result follows.

Theorem 3.4.5. Let K be a field. The elementary matrices Xij (a), defined in the proof of Theorem
3.4.1, generate SLn (K).

Proof. If n = 1, then SL1 (K) = {1} is trivial. Lemma 3.4.4 gives the case n = 2. For n > 2, the
theorem follows from the mathematical induction in a similar manner.

Lemma 3.4.6. The elementary matrices Xij (a), defined in the proof of Theorem 3.4.1, are com-
mutators in SLn (K) except in the case n = 2 and (|K| = 2 or 3).

Proof. If n ≥ 3, this is easy since there is a third index k and [Xik (a), Xkj (a)] = Xij (a). If n = 2,
we use the commutator relation
     
α 0 1 β 1 (α2 − 1)β
, = .
0 α−1 0 1 0 1

However, given any λ ∈ K, the equation λ = (α2 − 1)β can be solved for β if and only if there
exists a nonzero α ∈ K so that α2 6= 1 (i.e., α 6= ±1). This works as long as K × has at least three
elements.

Corollary 3.4.7. Let K be a field. If n ≥ 2, then SLn (K) is not solvable except in the cases SL2 (F2 )
and SL2 (F3 ).

Remark. SL2 (F2 ) ∼

= PSL2 (F2 ) ∼
= S3 , SL2 (F3 ) ∼
= S4 and PSL2 (F3 ) ∼
= A4 . They are solvable groups.
Moreover, PSL2 (F2 ) and PSL2 (F3 ) are not simple.

The following result was proved by Jordan in 1861.

Theorem 3.4.8. [Jordan-Moore] Let K be a field with |K| ≥ 4. Then PSL2 (K) is a simple group.

Proof. Using the third isomorphism theorem, it suffices to prove that a normal subgroup N of
SL2 (K) containing a matrix other than ±I2 must be all of SL2 (K). Let A 6= ±I2 be a matrix in N .
Then there is a vector ~v in K 2 so that ~v and A~v are linearly independent over K. This  means
 that
0 b
{~v , A~v } is a basis of K 2 . The matrix representation of A with respect to this basis is (since
1 d
A~v = 0 · ~v + 1 · A~v and A(A~v ) = b · ~v + d · A~vfor some b, d ∈ K). Since
 det
 A = 1, we actually
0 −1 0 −1
have b = −1. That is, A is conjugate to . Since N is normal, is also in N .
1 d 1 d
Our strategy is to show that N contains all unipotent elements in SL2 (K) by repeatedly using
−1 −1 CB ∈ N for all C ∈ SL (K) and B ∈ N ”. First, apply this trick with B = A
the fact that  “C B  2
α 0
and C = (α ∈ K × ) to get
0 α−1
 
−1 −1 α−2 d(α−2 − 1)
C A CA = ∈ N.
0 α2
3.4. Linear Groups 89
   
α−2 d(α−2 − 1) 1 µ
Next, repeat the fact with B′ = ′
and C = (µ ∈ K), we get
0 α2 0 1
 
′−1 ′−1 ′ ′ 1 µ(α4 − 1)
C B CB = ∈ N.
0 1

We get all upper triangular unipotent elements in N as long as there exists an α ∈ K × such that
α4 6= 1. This happens if |K| ≥ 6 since the polynomial x4 − 1 has at most four distinct roots in K ×
or if |K| = 4 since F× 4 ×
4 is cyclic of order 3 and α = α for all α ∈ F4 . Observe that
   −1  
0 −1 1 µ 0 −1 1 0
=
1 0 0 1 1 0 µ 1

for all µ ∈ K × . This proves that N = SL2 (K) if |K| ≥ 4 and −2|K| 6= 5. 
α d(α−2 − 1)
It remains to deal with the case K = F5 . We still have ∈ N for all α ∈ K × .
0 α2
   2  
−1 −2d −1 −2d 1 −d
Take α = 2 to get ∈ N , and hence = ∈ N . Two cases are
0 −1 0 −1 0 1
possible:  
1 −d
(a) d 6= 0. The powers of give all upper triangular unipotent elements. By conjugating
0 1
 
0 −1
with , the lower triangular ones appear. Thus, N = SL2 (K).
1 0
   
0 −1 ′′ δ 1
(b) d = 0, so A = . We then perform the standard trick with B = A and C =
1 0 −1 0
×
(δ ∈ F5 ), so that  
′′−1 −1 1 −δ
Aδ = C A CA = ∈ N.
−δ δ 2 + 1
Since δ 6= 0, this element is not in the center. Note that itstrace is δ 2 + 2 is never zero. Choose
0 −1
δ = 1, say. Then A1 ∈ N and A is conjugate to A′ = (as at the beginning of the
1 3
proof and the trace remains the same under conjugation). Apply Case (a), to A′ , and the proof is
complete.

Exercises 3.4. 1. (a) Prove that for any integer N , the map SL2 (Z) → SL2 (Z/N Z) obtained by
reducing the matrix entries modulo N is a surjective group homomorphism.
(b) Prove that for positive integers M and N , the maps (“reduction modulo N ”) from SL2 (Z/M N Z)
to SL2 (Z/N Z) and from GL2 (Z/M N Z) to GL2 (Z/N Z) are surjective group homomorphisms.
(c) What is the kernel of the homomorphism GL2 (Z/pe Z) → GL2 (Z/pZ)?
(d) What are the order of the groups GL2 (Z/pe Z) and SL2 (Z/pe Z)?
(e) Let N = pe11 . . . prer be the prime factorization of the positive integer N . Show that the reduc-
e
tions modulo pj j , j = 1, . . . , r, give isomorphisms
Y e
Y e
GL2 (Z/N Z) ∼
= GL2 (Z/pj j ) and SL2 (Z/N Z) ∼
= SL2 (Z/pj j ).
j j

(f) What are the order of the groups GL2 (Z/N Z) and SL2 (Z/N Z)?
2. Show that there is no non-abelian finite simple group of order less than 60. (Hint. We may focus on
groups of the following orders: 24, 30, 40, 48, 54 and 56.)
3. Suppose G is a simple group of order 60. Show that:
(a) G has a subgroup A of order 12
(b) A has exactly five different conjugates
(c) there is an injective homomorphism from G to S5
90 3. Advanced Group Theory

(d) both A5 and H contain every element of S5 of the form g 2 and therefore every 5-cycle and
every 3-cycle
(e) H = A5 .
Deduce that any simple group of order 60 must be isomorphic to A5 and hence PSL2 (F4 ) and
PSL2 (F5 ) are isomorphic to A5 .

3.5 Free Groups and Presentations

There is a basic method of defining a group G, called a presentation of G by generators and
defining relations. We have used this method without defining it precisely. For example, hai
means the cyclic group generated by a. If a happened to be an element of some larger group G,
then hai means the subgroup of G generated by hai. It could be infinite cyclic or finite cyclic. More
generally, if we were working a particular group G, and a1 , . . . , ak ∈ G, then ha1 , . . . ak i denoted
the subgroup of G generated by a1 , . . . ak .
However, when we were not talking about subgroups of a particular group G, then the brackets
h i had a different meaning as shown by the following examples.

Examples 3.5.1. 1. hai ∼ = Z and ha : an = ei ∼ = Zn .

2. ha, b : a = e, b = e, ab = bai = ha, b : a = e, b = e, aba−1 b−1 = ei ∼
n m n m
= Zn × Zm .
3. ha1 , . . . , ak : an1 1 = · · · = ank k = e, ai aj a−1 a −1
= e if i 6
= ji ∼
= Z n1 × · · · × Znk .
i j
−1 −1 ∼
4. ha1 , . . . , ak : ai aj ai aj = e if i 6= ji = Z × · · · × Z (k copies).
5. Dn = ha, b : an = b2 = e, bab−1 = a−1 i = ha, b : an = b2 = e, bab−1 a = ei is the dihedral
group of order 2n.
6. D∞ = ha, b : b2 = e, bab−1 = a−1 i = ha, b(" : b2 = e, bab −1
# a = ei is)the infinite dihedral group.
1 p q
7. ha, b : a[a, b] = [a, b]a, b[a, b] = [a, b]bi ∼
= 0 1 r : p, q, r ∈ Z . An isomorphism is given
0 0 1
by " # " #
1 1 0 1 0 0
a 7→ 0 1 0 and b 7→ 0 1 1 .
0 0 1 0 0 1
" #
1 0 1
Observe that c = a−1 b−1 ab = 0 1 0 .
0 0 1

In each of the above examples the data inside the brackets h i is sufficient to describe a group,
that is, it gives the multiplication table for a groups. We call such an expression a presentation for
the group. It turns out that every group has a presentation and every presentation defines a group.
However, it is generally difficult to decide if a group defined by a presentation is isomorphic to an
explicitly given group.

Definition. Let A be any (not necessarily finite) set of elements ai for i ∈ I. We think of A as
an alphabet set and of the ai as letters in the alphabet set. Any symbol of the form ani with
n ∈ Z is a syllable and a finite string w of syllables written in juxtaposition is a word. We also
introduce the empty word 1, which has no syllables. A word on A is reduced if w = 1 or the
string ai a−i or a−i ai does not appear in w for all a ∈ A and i ∈ N.

Definition. Let A be a set. Write F [A] for the set of all reduced words formed from our alpha-
bet A. For convenience, we may let F [∅] = {1}. We make F [A] into a group by the juxtaposition
w1 w2 of two words w1 and w2 with reduction of strings ai a−i or a−i ai (if any) for all a ∈ A and
i ∈ N. It is called the free group generated by A.
3.5. Free Groups and Presentations 91

Example 3.5.2. The only example of a free group that has occurred before is Z, which is free on
one generators. Clearly, every free group is infinite.

Example 3.5.3. F2 = hx, yi. The element of F2 are all words in x and y. More precisely, F2 is the
disjoint union of the following seven sets.
1. {1} 4. {xi1 y j1 . . . xik y jk : k > 0, ir , jr ∈ Z r {0}}
i
2. {x : i ∈ Z r {0}} 5. {xi1 y j1 . . . xik y jk xik+1 : k > 0, ir , jr ∈ Z r {0}}
3. {y i : i ∈ Z r {0}} 6. {y j1 xi1 . . . y jk xik : k > 0, ir , jr ∈ Z r {0}}
7. {y j1 xi1 . . . y jk xik y jk+1 : k > 0, ir , jr ∈ Z r {0}}

Let G be a group and let A be a subset of G such that hAi = G. If G is isomorphic to F [A]
under the map ϕ : G → F [A] such that ϕ(a) = a for all a ∈ A, then G is said to be free on A. A
group is free if it is free on some nonempty set A.

Theorem 3.5.1. [Universal Mapping Property of a Free Group] Let A be a nonempty set. Suppose
H is any group and there is a function φ : A → H.
1. There is a unique homomorphism Φ : F [A] → H extending φ.
2. If im φ generates H, then Φ : F [A] → H is a surjection.
3. If G is a group and θ : G → F [A] is an onto homomorphism, then there is a homomorphism
Φ : F [A] → G such that θ ◦ Φ = id F [A] , the identity map on F [A].

Proof. (1) is clear and (2) follows immediately from (1).

(3) Since θ is onto, for each a ∈ A, there is a ga ∈ G such that θ(ga ) = a. By (1), there is a unique
homomorphism Φ : F [A] → H with Φ(a) = ga for all a ∈ A. Then θ ◦ Φ : F [A] → F [A] is the
identity map.

Similarly, we can show that

Corollary 3.5.2. Let S be a set. Then there is a unique free group on S.

Proof. Let G1 and G2 be free groups on S. Then S is a subset of both G1 and G2 . Consider the
inclusion maps ι1 : S → G1 and ι2 : S → G2 and the result follows from the uniqueness of the
universal mapping property.

Corollary 3.5.3. Every group H is a homomorphic image of a free group.

Proof. Let A be a set for which there exists a bijection φ : A → H (e.g., take A = H and φ = id H ),
and let G = F [A]. By the universal mapping property, there is an onto homomorphism Φ : G → H
extending φ. Therefore, G/(ker Φ) ∼ = H.

We refer the reader to reference textbooks for proofs of the next three theorems. They are
stated simply to inform us of these interesting facts.

Theorem 3.5.4. If a group G is free on A and also on B (not necessarily finite), then the sets A
and B have the same number of elements; that is, any two sets of generators of a free group have
the same cardinality.

We shall prove this theorem for the finite basis case with some result on finitely generated free
abelian group (Corollary 4.2.7) in the next chapter.

Definition. If G is free on a set A, the number of elements in A is called the rank of G.

92 3. Advanced Group Theory

Theorem 3.5.5. Two free groups are isomorphic if and only if they have the same rank.

Theorem 3.5.6. [Schreier] A nontrivial proper subgroup of a free group is free.

This is not trivial to prove. There is a nice proof of this result using covering spaces (cf. J.-P.
Serre, Trees, Springer-Verlag, 1980).

Example 3.5.4. Let yl = xl yx−l for l ≥ 0. Then yl , l ≥ 0, are free generators for the subgroup of
F2 = hx, yi that they generate. This illustrates that although a subgroup of a free group is free,
the rank of the subgroup may be much greater than the rank of the whole group!

θ / φ
Definition. Let G H / K be a sequence of groups homomorphisms. We say that it
is exact at H if im θ = ker φ. A short exact sequence of groups is a sequence of groups and
homomorphisms
θ φ
1 /G /H /K /1

which is exact at G, H and K. In other words, if θ is 1-1, φ is onto and im θ = ker φ.

Remark. If N is a normal subgroup of G, then 1 → N → G → G/N → 1 is exact. Conversely, if

ι
1 → N → G → H → 1 is exact, then N is normal in G and H ∼ = G/N . Thus short exact sequences
are just another notation for normal subgroups and factor groups.

Definition. A presentation for a group G is an expression

G = hg1 , . . . , gr : w1 = · · · = wt = 1i

where w1 , . . . , wt are words in g1 , . . . , gr such that the following two properties are satisfied: (1)
g1 , . . . , gr generate G and (2) the conditions that w1 = w2 = · · · = wt = 1 are sufficient to define
the multiplication table of G. Here, g1 , . . . , gr are called generators of G in the presentation
and w1 , w2 , . . . , wt are called defining relations.

Note that the free group of rank n is the group Fn = hx1 , . . . , xn : i given by a presentation
with n generators and zero defining relation.

Remark. The elements of hx1 , . . . , xn i are words in x1 , . . . , xn . Suppose w = w(x1 , . . . , xn ) is

any such word. Then if G is any group, we can think of w as a function G × · · · × G → G
such that (g1 , . . . , gn ) 7→ w(g1 , . . . , gn ). For example, if w(x1 , x2 ) = [x1 , x2 ] = x1 x2 x−1 −1
1 x2 , then
w(g1 , g2 ) = g1 g2 g1−1 g2−1 .

Remark. If we have Fn = hx1 , . . . , xn i is a free group and G = hy1 , . . . , yn : w1 = · · · = wt =

1i, then the universal mapping property of a free group says that φ(xi ) = yi defines an onto
homomorphism φ : Fn → G. This means we have a short exact sequence

ι φ
1 / ker φ / Fn /G / 1.

What is the kernel of φ? ker φ is a normal subgroup of Fn and contains wi (x1 , . . . , xn ) for i =
1, . . . , t. In fact, ker φ is the smallest normal subgroup of Fn which contains wi (x1 , . . . , xn ) for
i = 1, . . . , t.

Definition. Let G be a group and S a subset of G. The normal closure of S in G, denoted by

hSiG , is the smallest normal subgroup of G containing S.
3.5. Free Groups and Presentations 93

It is the subgroup of G generated by all conjugates of elements of S by elements of G. That is,

hSiG = hxyx−1 : x ∈ G and y ∈ Si

and so

Theorem 3.5.7. Let G = hx1 , . . . , xn : w1 = · · · = wt = 1i. Then G ∼ = F/N where N is the

normal closure of {w1 , . . . , wt } in the free group F = F [{x1 , . . . , xn }].

Example 3.5.5. Consider the free group F2 = hx, yi. Let G = hx, y : xyx−1 y −1 = 1i ∼= F2 /N .
Since G is abelian, F2′ ⊆ N . But xyx−1 y −1 ∈ N and N is the smallest, so N = F2′ .

Example 3.5.6. Consider the quaternion group Q8 = ha, b : a4 = 1, a2 = b2 , ba = a3 bi of order

eight. We shall determine the structure of Q8 /Q′8 . Since |a| = 4 and ba = a3 b, hai ⊳ Q8 and b ∈
/ hai,
so Q8 /hai = {hai, bhai}. Then Q′8 ⊆ hai. Since a2 = a− 1bab−1 ∈ Q′8 , ha2 i ⊆ Q′8 ⊆ hai. In addition,
ba2 b−1 = a−2 . Thus, ha2 i is normal in Q8 . Since |Q8 /ha2 i| = 4, it is abelian. Hence, Q′8 = ha2 i.
Note that a2 Q′8 = b2 Q′8 = Q′8 . Therefore, Q8 /Q′8 ∼
= Z2 × Z2 .

Theorem 3.5.8. [von Dyck’s Theorem /fon dike/] Let G be given by a presentation

G = hx1 , . . . , xn : w1 = · · · = wt = 1i.

Suppose H is any group which satisfies:

1. H is generated by h1 , . . . , hn and 2. wi (h1 , . . . , hn ) = 1 for i = 1, . . . , t.
Then there is a unique onto homomorphism φ : G → H for which φ(xi ) = hi .

Proof. By Theorem 3.5.7, G ∼ = F/N , where F is a free group on {x1 , . . . , xn } and N is the
normal closure of {w1 , . . . , wt }. By the assumption N ⊆ ker φ, so φ induces a (well-defined)
homomorphism xi = xi N 7→ hi for all i ∈ {1, . . . , n}.

Example 3.5.7. Classify all groups G of order six.

Solution. Since 6 = 2 · 3, G contains elements a and b such that |a| = 2 and |b| = 3 and G = ha, bi.
Since hbi is normal in G, aba−1 ∈ hbi. Thus, aba−1 = b or aba−1 = b−1 . If aba−1 = b, then G is
abelian, so G ∼= Z6 . Assume that aba−1 = b−1 . Then G = ha, b : a2 , b3 , aba−1 = b−1 i. Note that
S3 = h(12), (123)i and (12)(123)(12)−1 = (132) = (123)−1 . By von Dyck’s theorem, there is an
onto homomorphism from G to S3 . But |G| = 6 = |S3 |, G ∼ = S3 .

Exercises 3.5. 1. (a) Prove that the derived group of a free group consists of those words in which the
sum of the exponents for each generator is equal to zero (e.g., x1 x−1 −2
2 x1 x2 x1 ).
(b) Let F be a free group generated by x1 , x2 , . . . , xr . Show that each element of F/F ′ is of the form
′ ∼
(xm 1 m2 mr ′ r
1 x2 . . . xr )F . Now use (a) to show that F/F = Z , i.e., F/F is the free abelian group of
′

rank r.
2. Determine the structure of G/G′ , when G is given by
(i) a6 = b2 = (ab)2 = 1; (ii) a6 = 1, b2 = (ab)2 = a3 .
3. Show that if G is generated by a and b subject to the relations a−1 ba = b2 and ab = ba2 , then
G = {1}.
4. Let G be a group. For a, b ∈ G, let [a, b] = aba−1 b−1 and ab = bab−1 .
(a) Prove that [a, bc] = [a, b][a, c]b for all a, b, c ∈ G.
(b) If H = hx, y, z ∈ G : [x, y] = y, [y, z] = z and [z, x] = xi, show that H = {e}.
5. If G is a non-abelian group of order eight, show that G is isomorphic to D4 or Q8 .
94 3. Advanced Group Theory
4 | Modules and Noetherian Rings

Modules can be considered as a generalization of vector spaces. It is like we study linear algebra
over a ring. In this chapter, we first cover basic concepts of modules. Next, we work on free
modules. Projective and injective modules are introduced. We also present the proof of the
structure theorems for modules over a PID. Finally, we talk about Noetherian and Artinion rings.
Noetherian rings have a lot of applications in algebraic geometry and algebraic number theory.
Each ring R that we consider will be assumed to contain a multiplicative identity element,
which will be denoted by 1. We shall therefore regard the possession of such an identity as one of
the defining conditions of the ring concept and also assume 1 6= 0.

4.1 Modules
The definition of a module is similar to a vector space. However, now our scalars are in a ring.

Definition. Let R be a ring. We say that M is a (left) R-module provided:

1. (M, +) is an additive abelian group
2. there is a multiplication R × M → M which satisfies for all α, β ∈ R and u, v ∈ M ,
(a) α(u + v) = αu + αv,
(b) (α + β)u = αu + βu and
(c) α(βu) = (αβ)u
3. if 1 is the unity of R, then 1 · u = u for all u ∈ M .

Remark. Note that we abuse notations by not distinguishing between the addition in M or in R
and the multiplication in R or the multiplication R × M → M . A right R-module can be defined
analogously.
Examples 4.1.1. 1. If R = F , a field, an F -module is just a vector space over F .
2. Any abelian group A is a Z-module, where the action of Z is given by for a ∈ A,
0 · a = 0A , n · a = |a + a +
{z· · · + a} if n > 0 and
n
n · a = (−a) + (−a) + · · · + (−a) if n < 0.
| {z }
−n

3. Let F be a field and R = Mn (F ) the ring of n × n matrices over F . Let V = F n be n-

dimensional vector space of n × 1 column vectors over F . Then V is an R-module where
the multiplication R × V → V is given by A · ~v = A~v (matrix multiplication).
4. Let R be a ring. Then R is an R-module with the usual multiplication R × R → R. More
generally, any left ideal A of R is a left R-module. In fact, a subset A of R is a left ideal in
R if and only if the left multiplication R × A → A makes A into a left R-module. That is,
the set of left ideals of R is the set left R-modules of R. Hence, if R is a ring, then R can
be viewed as an R-module, called a regular left [right] R-module, and is denoted by R R
[RR ].

95
96 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

We collect basic terminologies about modules in the following definitions.

Definition. Let R be a ring. We say that N is an R-submodule or submodule of an R-module

M if N is a subgroup of M as an additive group and the multiplications R × M → M and
R × N → N agree on N .

Definition. Let R be a ring. The direct sum of R-modules M and N is the abelian group direct
sum of M and N
M ⊕ N = {(m, n) : m ∈ M, n ∈ N }
with the action of R on M ⊕ N given by

r(m, n) = (rm, rn).

One often writes m + n in place of (m, n).

Definition. Let R be a ring and let M and N be R-modules.

1. A map f : M → N is an R-module homomorphism provided
(a) f : M → N is a homomorphism of abelian groups and
(b) if r ∈ R and m ∈ M , then f (rm) = rf (m).
2. We call a diagram of R-module homomorphisms

f g
M /N /P

exact if im f = ker g. More generally, a sequence of R-modules and homomorphisms

f1 f2
··· / M1 / M2 / M3 / ···

that may be finite or run to infinity in either direction is called exact if for any three con-
secutive terms the subsequence Mi / Mi+1 / Mi+2 is exact. An exact sequence of
the form
f g
0 / M′ /M / M ′′ /0

is called a short exact sequence. This means that f is a monomorphism (1-1), g is an

epimorphism (onto) and ker g = im f .
3. If N is a submodule of M , then the quotient group (M/N, +) can be made into an R-
module by defining r(x + N ) = rx + N . It is called a factor module of M by N .
4. Let f : M → N be a homomorphism of R-modules. The kernel of f is

ker f = {m ∈ M : f (m) = 0N }

and the cokernel of f is N/im f . They are clear that ker f and im f are R-submodules of
M and N , respectively. Evidently, f is surjective if and only if coker f = 0. In any case,
we have
f
0 / ker f   /M /N / coker f /0

is exact.

Remark. The isomorphism theorems also hold for R-modules and their homomorphisms. Note
however that the first isomorphism theorem will say a bit more, because coker f = N/im f is an
R-module. This is not the case with homomorphisms of groups or rings: If f : G → H is a group
homomorphism, then f (G) = im f is not in general a normal subgroup of H, hence H/im f is not
4.1. Modules 97

in general a group. And if f : R → S is a ring homomorphism, then f (R) = im f is never an ideal

in S (unless it is all of S), so S/im f is not a ring.
The isomorphism theorems can be stated as theorems about commutative diagrams and ex-
act sequences. The use of diagrams to describe module homomorphisms is very common, we
now give the isomorphism theorems in their diagram theoretic versions. Note that many ho-
momorphisms are projections or injections implicitly defined by the diagram. The proofs of the
isomorphism theorems are left as exercises.

Theorem 4.1.1. [First Isomorphism Theorem] Let M and N be R-modules. Then the following
diagram of R-modules has an exact row and a commutative square.

f
0 / ker f   /M /N
O
/ coker f /0

π i
 ∼
=
M/ ker f / im f
f¯

Theorem 4.1.2. [Second Isomorphism Theorem] Let N1 and N2 be submodules of an R-

module N . Then there is a commutative diagram with exact rows in which the vertical map of
the right is an isomorphism.

0 / N1 ∩ N2 / N2 / N2 /(N1 ∩ N2 ) /0

∼
=
  
0 / N1 / N1 + N2 / (N1 + N2 )/N1 /0

Theorem 4.1.3. [Third Isomorphism Theorem] If N2 ≤ N1 ≤ N are R-modules, then the fol-
lowing diagram is commutative and has exact rows:

0 / N1 /N / N/N1 /0

id
  
0 / N1 /N2 / N/N2 / N/N1 /0

That is, N/N1 ∼

= (N/N2 )/(N1 /N2 ).

Theorem 4.1.4. Let N1 and N2 be submodules of an R-module N . Then the following diagram is
commutative and has exact rows and columns.

0 0 0

  
0 / N1 ∩ N2 / N2 / N2 /(N1 ∩ N2 ) /0

  
0 / N1 /N / N/N1 /0

  
0 / N1 /(N1 ∩ N2 ) / N/N2 / N/(N1 + N2 ) /0

  
0 0 0
98 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

Proof. The commutativity and the exactness of the top two rows and the two left columns are
clear. The exactness of the third row and right column come, respectively, from the isomorphisms
(N1 + N2 )/N2 ∼= N1 /(N1 ∩ N2 ) and (N1 + N2 )/N1 ∼ = N2 /(N1 ∩ N2 ).

The next theorem has wide use in mathematics. It is proved by the technique called “diagram
chasing”.

Theorem 4.1.5. [5-Lemma] Suppose the following diagram is commutative and has exact rows.
α1 α2 α3 α4
A1 / A2 / A3 / A4 / A5

f1 f2 f3 f4 f5
    
B1 / B2 / B3 / B4 / B5
β1 β2 β3 β4

If f1 , f2 , f4 and f5 are isomorphisms, so is f3 . More precisely,

1. if f1 is onto and f2 and f4 are 1-1, then f3 is 1-1, and
2. if f5 is 1-1 and f2 and f4 are onto, then f3 is onto.

Proof. (1) Assume f1 is onto and f2 and f4 are 1-1. Suppose x ∈ A3 and f3 (x) = 0. We shall
show that x = 0. Since f4 (α3 (x) = β3 (f3 (x)) = β3 (0) = 0 and f4 is 1-1, α3 (x) = 0, so x ∈
ker α3 = im α2 from the exactness of the top row. Thus, x = α2 (y) for some y ∈ A2 . Then
0 = f3 (x) = f3 (α2 (y)) = β2 (f2 (y)), so f2 (y) ∈ ker β2 = im β1 from the exactness of the bottom
row. Thus, f2 (y) = β1 (z) for some z ∈ B1 . Since f1 is onto, there is a u ∈ A1 with f1 (u) = z.
Then f2 (y) = β1 (z) = β1 (f1 (u)) = f2 (α1 (u)), so y = α1 (u) since f2 is 1-1. Hence, x = α2 (y) =
α2 (α1 (u)) = 0 since α2 α1 = 0 by the exactness of the top row.
(2) Assume f5 is 1-1 and f2 and f4 are onto. Let x ∈ B3 . We must find w ∈ A3 with f3 (w) = x.
Since f4 is onto, we can choose y ∈ A4 with f4 (y) = β3 (x). Then f5 (α4 (y)) = β4 (f4 (y)) =
β4 (β3 (x)) = 0 from the bottom row is exact. But f5 is 1-1, so α4 (y) = 0. Since the top row is exact,
y = α3 (z) for some z ∈ A3 . Then β3 (x) = f4 (y) = f4 (α3 (z)) = β3 (f3 (z)), so β3 (x − f3 (z)) = 0.
Thus, there is a u ∈ B2 with β2 (u) = x − f3 (z) from the bottom row is exact. Since f2 is onto,
there is a v ∈ A2 with f2 (v) = u. Hence, x − f3 (z) = β2 (u) = β2 (f2 (v)) = f3 (α2 (v)), so
x = f3 (z + α2 (v)) = f3 (w) where w = z + α2 (v). That is, f3 is onto.

α β
Theorem 4.1.6. Let 0 /L /M /N / 0 be a short exact sequence of R-modules.
Then the following three conditions are equivalent.
(i) There exists an isomorphism M ∼ = L ⊕ N in which α : l 7→ (l, 0) and β : (l, n) 7→ n.
(ii) There exists a section of β, that is, a homomorphism s : N → M such that β ◦ s = id N .
(iiii) There exists a retraction of α, that is, a homomorphism r : M → L such that r ◦ α = id L .
If this happens, the sequence is a split exact sequence.

Proof. (i) ⇒ (ii) or (iii) is easy.

(ii) ⇒ (i). The given section s is clearly injective because it has a left inverse; we claim that
M = α(L) ⊕ s(N ). To see this, any m ∈ M is of the form

m = (m − s(β(m))) + s(β(m)),

where the second term is obviously in s(N ); since β ◦ s = id N , the first term is clearly in ker β,
and by exactness this is α(L). Furthermore, α(L) ∩ s(N ) = {0}, since if n ∈ N is such that
s(n) ∈ α(L) = ker β then n = β(s(n)) = 0.
(iii) ⇒ (i) is similar to (ii) ⇒ (i) and left as an exercise.
4.2. Free Modules and Matrices 99

For finite dimensional vector spaces over a field, every subspace has complement, so every
short exact sequence splits. Whether an exact sequence splits or not depends on what ring it is
considered over. For example,

0 / k[x]x / k[x] / k[x]/k[x]x /0

is split over k but not over k[x].

Proof. It is easy to see that k[x] ∼
= k ⊕ k[x]x as k-vector spaces. Note that k is a k[x]-module, where the
ϕ
scalar multiplication is given by (a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn )c = a0 c for all c, ai ∈ k. Assume that k[x] ∼= k ⊕ k[x]x
as k[x]-modules and ϕ : 1 7→ (a0 , a1 x + · · · + an xn ). Then for all m ∈ N ∪ {0} and b0 , b1 , . . . , bm ∈ k,
ϕ
(b0 + b1 x + · · · + bm xm ) 7→ (b0 a0 , (b0 + b1 x + · · · + bm xm )(a1 x + · · · + an xn )).

Since ϕ is 1-1, a0 6= 0. Since ϕ is onto, a2 , . . . , an = 0 and a1 6= 0. Thus, we reduce the above map to
ϕ
(b0 + b1 x + · · · + bm xm ) 7→ (b0 a0 , a1 (b0 x + b1 x2 + · · · + bm xm+1 )).

Consider (0, x) in k + k[x]x. If ϕ(b0 + b1 x + · · · + bm xm ) = (0, x), then b0 a0 = 0 and a1 b0 = 1 which is

impossible because a0 and a1 are nonzero. Hence, ϕ is not onto which is a contradiction.

Exercises 4.1. 1. Let M1 and M2 be R-submodules of an R-module M . Define φ : M1 ×M2 → M1 +M2

by φ(m1 , m2 ) = m1 + m2 . Prove that φ is an isomorphism if and only if M1 ∩ M2 = {0}.
Let R be a ring, I an ideal of R and M an R-module. Prove that
( n )
X
IM := ri xi : n ≥ 1, ri ∈ I, xi ∈ M
i=1

is an R-submodule of M and M/IM is an R/I-module by the scalar multiplication defined by (r +

I)(x + IM ) := rx + IM .
2. Complete the proof of Theorem 4.1.6.
3. (a) If φ : M → M be an R-module homomorphism such that φ ◦ φ = φ, prove that M = ker φ ⊕ im φ.
(b) If α : M → N and β : N → M are R-module homomorphisms such that β ◦ α = id M , prove that
N = im α ⊕ ker β.

4.2 Free Modules and Matrices

Like a finite dimensional vector space over a field, we shall see in this section that a free module
(i.e., a module with basis) over a commutative ring behaves in a similar way.

Definition. Let M1 , . . . , Mk be R-modules. The direct sum of M1 , . . . , Mk is the set of k-tuples

{(m1 , . . . , mk ) : mi ∈ Mi }

with the following operations:

(m1 , . . . , mk ) + (n1 , . . . , nk ) = (m1 + n1 , . . . , mk + nk )

r(m1 , . . . , mk ) = (rm1 , . . . , rmk ), r ∈ R.

k
M
The direct sum of M1 , . . . , Mk is denoted by M1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ Mk or Mi .
i=1
100 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

Definition. Let M1 , . . . , Mk be submodules of an R-module M . The sum of M1 , . . . , Mk is the

set
{m1 + · · · + mk : mi ∈ Mi for all i},
n
X
denoted by M1 + · · · + Mk or Mi . It is a submodule of M . We say that M1 , . . . , Mk are
i=1
independent if for any mi ∈ MX i with m1 + · · · + mk = 0, we have m1 = · · · = mk = 0M . This
condition is equivalent to Mi ∩ Mi = {0M } for all i.
j6=i

Theorem 4.2.1. Let M1 , . . . , Mk be submodules of an R-module M . Then

1. The map φ : M1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ Mk → M defined by φ(m1 , . . . , mk ) = m1 + · · · + mk is an R-module
homomorphism whose image is M1 + · · · + Mk .
2. φ is one-to-one if and only if M1 , . . . , Mk are independent submodules of M . In case φ is an
isomorphism, we say that M is the internal direct sum of the submodules M1 , . . . , Mk .

Definition. Let M be an R-module and X a subset of M . The submodule of M generated by

X, denoted by RX, is the set of all finite sums

{r1 x1 + · · · + rk xk : ri ∈ R and xi ∈ X}.

If RX = M , we say that X generates or spans M . If some finite subset {x1 , . . . , xk } of M

generates M , we say that M is finitely generated M and we write

M = Rx1 + · · · + Rxk .

If M is generated by a single element, i.e., if M = Rx for some x ∈ M , M is said to be cyclic.

Definition. We say that x1 , . . . , xk ∈ M are linearly independent over R if for any r1 , . . . , rk ∈

R with r1 x1 + · · · + rk xk = 0M , we have r1 = · · · = rk = 0. A subset X (possibly infinite) of M
is linearly independent if every finite subset of X is linearly independent. We say that a set X
is linearly dependent if it is not linearly independent.

Remarks. 1. By convention, the empty set is linearly independent and R∅ = {0M }.

2. If x ∈ M , {x} is a linearly independent set if and only if Rx ∼ = R as left R-modules. In
particular, if we take M = R, a left R-module, then {x} is a linearly independent set (where
x ∈ R) if and only if x is not a right zero divisor, i.e., a 6= 0 ⇒ ax 6= 0.
3. If {x1 , . . . , xk } is a linearly independent set, then Rx1 + · · · + Rxk ∼ | ⊕ ·{z
= R · · ⊕ R} as left
k
R-modules.
4. Any subset of a linearly independent set is a linearly independent set.

Definition. If an R-module M is generated by a linearly independent set X, we say that M is

the free R-module on the set X and that X is a basis for M . If X = {x1 , . . . , xk } is a finite set,
we say that M is the finitely generated free module spanned by x1 , . . . , xk .

Now let M = Rx1 + · · · + Rxn be the free R-module on the set X = {x1 , . . . , xn }. Suppose N
is any left R-module and y1 , . . . , yn are any elements of N . Let us define a map φ : M → N by

φ(r1 x1 + · · · + rn xn ) = r1 y1 + · · · + rn yn .
4.2. Free Modules and Matrices 101

Then φ is a homomorphism of left R-modules such that φ(xi ) = yi for all i. In fact, we could also
define a homomorphism even if X were infinite. The point is that any set map X → N gives rise
to an R-module homomorphism M → N . More precisely,

Theorem 4.2.2. [Universal Mapping Property of a Free Module] Let R be a ring, X a set and
M = M (X) the free R-module on the set X. Let i : X → M be defined by i(x) = 1 · x for all
x ∈ X. (i may be thought of as an inclusion map.) Suppose N is an R-module and α : X → N is
a set map. Then there exists a unique R-module homomorphism θ : M → N such that θ ◦ i = α.

i /
X❇ M
❇❇
❇❇
α ❇❇❇ θ

N

Hence, any module is a homomorphic image of a free module.

Next, let us consider homomorphism of finitely generated free R-modules. Suppose M and N
are free R-modules with bases X = {x1 , . . . , xm } and Y = {y1 , . . . , yn } where

M = Rx1 + · · · + Rxm and N = Ry1 + · · · + Ryn .

Let φ : M → N be an R-module homomorphism. Then φ will be completely defined as soon as

we specify φ(x1 ), . . . , φ(xm ). Moreover, by the above theorem, any choice of φ(x1 ), . . . , φ(xm ) is
possible. Hence,
φ ↔ (φ(x1 ), . . . , φ(xm ))
is a 1-1 correspondence between the set of R-module homomorphisms φ : M → N and N ×· · ·×N
(m-copies). We have not written N ⊕ · · · ⊕ N because so far this correspondence is only a 1-1
correspondence of sets. We do not know if any structure is preserved.
Let M and N be R-modules. The set of R-module homomorphisms from M to N is denoted
by homR (M, N ).
Remarks. 1. homR (M, N ) is an abelian group with the addition given by

(φ + θ)(m) = φ(m) + θ(m).

2. If R is commutative, then we can make homR (M, N ) into a left R-module by defining
(rφ)(m) = rφ(m). Note that rφ : M → N is really an R-module homomorphism, for if
m ∈ M, s ∈ R, then

(rφ)(sm) = r(φ(sm)) = r(sφ(m)) = (rs)φ(m) = (sr)φ(m) = s(rφ(m)) = s[(rφ)(m)].

However, this computation makes it clear that the commutativity of R is essential. If R is

not commutative, there is no natural way to make homR (M, N ) into a left R-module.
Let us restate the remarks above in the next theorem.

Theorem 4.2.3. Let M and N be left R-modules.

1. homR (M, N ) is an abelian group (or Z-module) with addition (φ + θ)(m) = φ(m) + θ(m).
2. If R is commutative, homR (M, N ) is a left R-module, where (rφ)(m) = rφ(m).
3. If M = Rx1 + . . . Rxm is the free R-module with basis x1 , . . . , xm , then

homR (M, N ) −→ N ⊕ · · · ⊕ N
φ 7−→ (φ(x1 ), . . . , φ(xm ))

is an isomorphism of abelian groups. If R is commutative, it is an isomorphism of R-modules.

102 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

For k ≥ 1 and a ring R, let Rk denote the R-module of k × 1 column vectors over R. Now
let us return to free R-modules M = Rx1 + · · · + Rxm and N = Ry1 + · · · + Ryn . As noted
earlier, if φ : M → N is an R-module homomorphism, then φ is completely determined by
φ(x1 ), . . . , φ(xm ), and φ 7→ (φ(x1 ), . . . , φ(xm )) is an isomorphism of abelian groups, and it is an
isomorphism of R-modules if R is commutative. Since N = Ry1 + · · · + Ryn is free on y1 , . . . , yn
every element of N can be uniquely expressed in the form

y = r 1 y1 + . . . r n y n .

In particular, we can write

φ(x1 ) = a11 y1 + a21 y2 + · · · + an1 yn

φ(x2 ) = a12 y1 + a22 y2 + · · · + an2 yn
..
.
φ(xm ) = a1m y1 + a2m y2 + · · · + anm yn .

In this way, we have abelian group isomorphisms

homR (M, N ) −→ N ⊕ ··· ⊕ N −→ n × m matrices over R


a11 a12 . . . a1m
 a21 a22 . . . a2m 
 
φ 7 → (φ(x1 ), . . . , φ(xm )) 7−→  .
− .. .
 .. . 
an1 an2 . . . anm

Moreover, in case R is commutative, this is an isomorphism of left R-modules.

Next, let R be a commutative ring and M = Rx1 + · · · + Rxm , N = Ry1 + · · · + Ryn and
P = Rz1 + · · · + Rzp be finitely generated free modules over R with the indicated free generators.
Let α : M → Rm , β : N → Rn and γ : P → Rp be the R-module isomorphisms
     
r1 s1 t1
 ..   ..   .. 
α(r1 x1 + · · · + rm xm ) =  .  , β(s1 y1 + · · · + sn yn ) =  .  , γ(t1 z1 + · · · + tp zp ) =  .  .
rm sn tp

Write Ruv for the R-module of u × v matrices over R. For each R-module homomorphism φ :
M → N , we define  
a11 a12 . . . a1m
 a21 a22 . . . a2m 
 
[φ] =  .
. ..  ∈ Rnm
 . . 
an1 an2 . . . anm
implicitly from the equations

φ(x1 ) = a11 y1 + a21 y2 + · · · + an1 yn

φ(x2 ) = a12 y1 + a22 y2 + · · · + an2 yn
..
.
φ(xm ) = a1m y1 + a2m y2 + · · · + anm yn .

Similarly, for R-module homomorphisms θ : N → P and τ : M → P define [θ] ∈ Rpn and

[τ ] ∈ Rpm , respectively. Then φ 7→ [φ], θ 7→ [θ] and τ 7→ [τ ] are isomorphisms of R- modules
homR (M, N ) ∼ = Rpn and homR (M, P ) ∼
= Rnm , homR (N, P ) ∼ = Rpm , respectively. Moreover, we
obtain the following theorem.
4.2. Free Modules and Matrices 103

Theorem 4.2.4. Let R be a commutative ring. Under the above set-up we have:
1. Each matrix [φ] ∈ Rnm defines a homomorphism [φ] : Rm → Rn by left multiplication of an
n × m matrix by an m × 1 matrix. The same is true for [θ] : Rn → Rp and [τ ] : Rm → Rp .
2. The following diagram is commutative

φ θ
M /N /P
α ∼
= β ∼
= γ ∼
=
 [φ]  [θ] 
Rm / Rn / Rp
:
[θφ]

In particular, [θ][φ] = [θφ] where the left product is multiplication of matrices.

Recall the following fact about matrices: Let R be a commutative ring and suppose A ∈
Mn (R). Then

A is invertible ⇔ A is left invertible ⇔ A is right invertible ⇔ det A is a unit in R.

In particular, if AC = I, then CA = I. Moreover, we have

Theorem 4.2.5. Let R be a commutative ring and let [φ] ∈ Rmn and [θ] ∈ Rnm . Suppose [φ][θ] =
Im and [θ][φ] = In are identity matrices of sizes m × m and n × n, respectively. Then m = n.

Proof. Assume that m > n. Then m = n + r for some r ∈ N. Write

 
An×n  
[φ] = and [θ] = Cn×n Dn×r ,
Br×n
so    
AC AD In 0
[φ][θ] = = .
BC BD 0 Ir
Thus, 0 = C(AD) = (CA)D = In D = D which contradicts BD = Ir . Hence, m ≤ n. Similarly,
we obtain a contradiction if m < n. Therefore, m = n.

Theorem 4.2.6. Let R be a commutative ring and suppose that M = Rx1 + · · · + Rxm and
N = Ry1 + · · · + Ryn are free R-modules with indicated generators. If M and N are isomorphic
R-modules, then m = n.

Proof. Let φ : M → N be an isomorphism with inverse θ : N → M . By Theorem 4.2.4, we can

identify M with m × 1 column vectors and N with n × 1 column vectors and obtain a commutative
diagram
φ θ
M /N /M
∼
= ∼
= ∼
=
 [φ]  [θ] 
Rm / Rn / Rm
9
[θ][φ]

In other words, [φ] is an n × m matrix and [θ] is an m × n matrix with [φ][θ] = In and [θ][φ] = Im .
Hence, m = n by Theorem 4.2.5.

If M = Rx1 + · · · + Rxm is a free R-module on x1 , . . . , xm over a commutative ring R, m is

called the rank of M . In particular, if R = Z, then M is a free abelian group on x1 , . . . , xm , and
hence we have shown:
104 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

Corollary 4.2.7. If F is a finitely generated free abelian group, then any two bases of F have the
same number of elements.

Using this corollary, we can verify that if a group G is free on A and also on B, which are finite
sets, then the sets A and B have the same number of elements. It is Theorem 3.5.4 for the finite
basis case.
Proof of Theorem 3.5.4 for the finite basis case. Assume that G is a free group on A and also on B,
where A and B are finite sets. By Exercise 1, G/G′ is a free abelian group of rank |A| and |B|,
respectively. By Corollary 4.2.7, |A| = |B|.
Remarks. 1. As we have seen that subgroups of a free (abelian) group are free. This is not
true for general R-modules. For example, let R = Z6 . Then R R is a free R-module generated
by {1}. N = {0, 2, 4} is an R-submodule of R R. Since ∅ does not span N , ∅ is not a basis.
If B 6= ∅ is a basis of N , then 0 ∈
/ B, so 2 or 4 are in B. Since 3 · 2 = 0 and 3 · 4 = 0 where
3 6= 0, where B is not linearly independent. Hence, submodules of a free module may not be
free.
2. In the case of free abelian groups and vector spaces, it is true that any two bases of have the
same cardinality. This is not true in general as shown in the following example.
Example 4.2.1. Let S be a ring and F a free S-module with infinite denumerable basis {e1 ,
e2 , e3 , . . . }. Let R = homS (F, F ). Then R is a ring with identity 1R , so {1R } is a basis for R R.
Next, we define f1 , f2 ∈ R as follows: f1 (e2n ) = en , f1 (e2n−1 ) = 0 and f2 (e2n ) = 0, f2 (e2n−1 ) =
en . To show that {f1 , f2 } spans R R, let g ∈ R. Define g1 , g2 ∈ R by g1 (en ) = g(e2n ) and
g2 (en ) = g(e2n−1 ). Then (g1 f1 + g2 f2 )(e2n−1 ) = g1 f1 (e2n−1 ) + g2 f2 (e2n−1 ) = g2 (en ) = g(e2n−1 )
and (g1 f1 + g2 f2 )(e2n ) = g1 f1 (e2n ) + g2 f2 (e2n ) = g1 (en ) = g(e2n ). Thus, g = g1 f1 + g2 f2 . Next we
shall prove that {f1 , f2 } is linearly independent over R. Let h1 , h2 ∈ R such that h1 f1 + h2 f2 = 0.
Then for any n ≥ 1, h1 (en ) = h1 (en ) + 0 = h1 f1 (e2n ) + h2 f2 (e2n ) = (h1 f1 + h2 f2 )(e2n ) = 0 and
h2 (en ) = 0 + h2 (en ) = h1 f1 (e2n−1 ) + h2 f2 (e2n−1 ) = (h1 f1 + h2 f2 )(e2n−1 ) = 0, so h1 = h2 = 0.
Hence, {f1 , f2 } is linearly independent and so it is a basis of R R.

Exercises 4.2. 1. Show that Q is not a free Z-module.

2. Show that M is a cyclic left R-module if and only if it is isomorphic to R/I (considered as a left
R-module) for some left ideal I of R. P
L that {ei }i∈I is a basis of a left R-module M if and only if (ri )i∈I 7→ i∈I ri ei is an isomorphism
3. Show
of i∈I R R onto M .
4. Prove that the module R R in Example 4.2.1 has a basis with m elements for every positive integers
m.
5. Let R be a ring and M, N and N ′ R-modules. Then homR (M, N ) and homR (M, N ′ ) are Z-modules.
For an R-module homomorphism f : N → N ′ , we define hom(M, −)(f ) : homR (M, N ) → homR (M, N ′ )
by
hom(M, −)(f )(h) = f ◦ h
for all h ∈ homR (M, N ). Show that
(a) hom(M, −)(f ) is a Z-module homomorphism from homR (M, N ) to homR (M, N ′ ).
f g
(b) If 0 → N → N ′ → N ′′ is exact, then
hom(M,−)(f ) hom(M,−)(g)
0 / homR (M, N ) / homR (M, N ′ ) / homR (M, N ′′ )

is exact.
f g
In a similar manner, one can prove that exactness of N → N ′ → N ′′ → 0 implies exactness of
hom(−,M )(g) hom(−,M )(f )
0 / homR (N ′′ , M ) / homR (N ′ , M ) / homR (N, M )

where hom(−, M )(f )(h) = h ◦ f for all h ∈ homR (N ′ , M ) and hom(−, M )(g)(h) = h ◦ g for all
h ∈ homR (N ′′ , M ).
4.3. Projective and Injective Modules 105

6. Let R be a ring, I a proper ideal of R and F a free R-module with a basis X. Then F/IF is a free
R/I-module with a basis of cardinality |X|.

4.3 Projective and Injective Modules

The concept of projective modules is a generalization of the idea of a free module. Injective
modules, introduced by Baer, are dual to that of projective modules. We follow [6] for this
section.

Definition. Let R be a ring. An R-module P is called projective if given any diagram

P
f

M p
//N

there exists a homomorphism g : P → M such that

P
g
f
~ 
M p
//N

is commutative. In other words, given an epimorphism p : M → N , then any homomorphism

f : P → N can be factored as f = pg for some g : P → M .

i p
We recall that for any module M , if 0 / N′ /N / N ′′ / 0 is exact, then

hom(M,i) hom(M,p)
0 / homR (M, N ′ ) / homR (M, N ) / homR (M, N ′′ )

is exact. Now suppose M = P is projective. Then given f ∈ hom(P, N ′′ ) there exists a g ∈

homR (P, N ) such that homR (P, p)(g) = pg = f . Thus, in this case, hom(P, p) is surjective and so
we actually have the exactness of

hom(M,i) hom(M,p)
0 / homR (M, N ′ ) / homR (M, N ) / homR (M, N ′′ ) /0

i p
as a consequence of the exactness of 0 / N′ /N / N ′′ /0.
p
The converse holds also. Suppose hom(P, −) is exact and suppose M / / N . Let K = ker p.
i p
Then we have the exact sequence 0 /K /M /N / 0 where i is the inclusion
map. Applying the exactness of hom(P, −), we obtain the property of a projective module. There-
fore,

Theorem 4.3.1. Let P be an R-module. Then P is projective if and only if for any R-modules
i p
N, N ′ and N ′′ , if 0 / N′ /N / N ′′ / 0 is a short exact sequence, then

hom(P,i) hom(P,p)
0 / homR (P, N ′ ) / homR (P, N ) / homR (P, N ′′ ) /0

is also a short exact sequence of Z-modules.

106 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

By Theorem 4.2.2, we have

Theorem 4.3.2. Every free module is projective.

Example 4.3.1. Q is not a projective Z-module.

Proof. Let F be a free Z-module with countable basis X = {x1 , x2 , . . . }. Define g : X → Q by

1
g : xn 7→ for all n ∈ N.
n
m
Then g induces a Z-module homomorphism from F to Q. Since g(mxn ) = n for all m ∈ Z and
n ∈ N, g is onto. Assume that Q is projective.

Q
h
id Q
 
F //Q
g

X
Then there exists an h : Q → F such that gh = id Q . Suppose h(1) = ai xi (with all but finite
Y X i
ai = 0). Let k = 1 + |ai | and assume that h(k −1 ) = bi xi (again, with all but finite ai = 0).
i,ai 6=0 i
Then X X X
kbi xi = k bi xi = kh(k −1 ) = h(1) = ai xi ,
i i i
X
so (ai − kbi )xi = 0. Since X is linearly independent, ai = kbi for all i which implies k | ai for
i
all i. This forces k = 1 and ai = 0 for all i. Thus, h is the zero map which contradicts gh = id Q .
Hence, Q is not projective.

How close are projective modules to being free? We shall give two important characterizations
of projective modules as follows.

Theorem 4.3.3. The following properties of a module P are equivalent:

(i) P is projective.
(ii) Any short exact sequence 0 /M /N /P / 0 splits.
(iii) P is a direct summand of a free module (that is, there exists a free module F isomorphic to
P ⊕ P ′ for some P ′ ).

f g
Proof. (i) ⇒ (ii). Let 0 /M /N /P / 0 be exact and consider the diagram

P
id P

N g
//P

By hypothesis we can fill this in with g ′ : P → N to obtain a commutative diagram. Then

gg ′ = id P and the given short exact sequence splits.
(ii) ⇒ (iii). Since any module is a homomorphic image of a free module (Theorem 4.2.2), we
i p
have a short exact sequence 0 / P′ /F /P / 0 where F is a free module. If P
satisfies property (ii), then this exact sequence splits and hence F ∼
= P ⊕ P ′.
4.3. Projective and Injective Modules 107

i p
(iii) ⇒ (i). We are given that there exists a sequence 0 / P′ /F /P / 0 with F
is free. Now suppose we have a diagram

P
f

M q
//N

Combining the two diagrams, we obtain

p
/ P′ i /
0 ❆❆ ′ P
/F o /0
❆❆i
❆❆ f
f p ❆❆ 
M //N
q

where pi′ = id P (since the top line splits). Since F is free, hence projective, we can fill in
g : F → M to obtain f p = qg. Then f = f id P = f pi′ = qgi′ and gi′ : P → M make

P
gi′
⑤
⑤⑤ f
⑤⑤⑤
~⑤
⑤ 
M q //N

commutative. Hence, P is projective.

Of particular interest are the modules that are finitely generated and projective. The theorem
gives the following characterization of these modules.

Corollary 4.3.4. A module P is finitely generated and projective if and only if P is a direct sum-
mand of a free module with a finite base.

Proof. If P is a direct summand of a free module F with finite base, then P is projective. Moreover,
P is a homomorphic image of F , so P has a finite set of generators (the images of the base under
an epimorphism of F onto P ). Conversely, suppose P is finitely generated and projective. Then
the first condition implies that we have an exact sequence 0 → P ′ → F → P → 0 where F is free
with finite base. The proof of the theorem shows that if P is projective, then F ∼= P ⊕ P ′ , so P is
a direct summand of a free module with finite base.

The concept of a projective module has a dual obtained by reversing the arrows in the defini-
tion as follows.

Definition. An R-module Q is called injective if given any diagram of homomorphisms

i
0 /N /M

f

Q

there exists a homomorphism g : M → Q such that the diagram obtained by filling in g is

commutative. In other words, given f : N → Q and a monomorphism i : N → M there exists
a g : M → Q such that f = gi.
108 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

With a slight change of notation, the definition amounts to this: Given an exact sequence
i
0 → N ′ → N , the sequence
hom(i,Q)
homR (N, Q) / homR (N ′ , Q) /0

i p
is exact. Since we know that exactness of 0 → N ′ → N → N ′′ → 0 implies exactness of
hom(p,M ) hom(i,M )
0 / homR (N ′′ , M ) / homR (N, M ) / homR (N ′ , M ) ,

it is clear that Q is injective if and only if hom(−, Q) is exact in the sense that it maps any short
exact sequence 0 → N ′ → N → N ′′ → 0 into a short exact sequence of Z-module
0 → homR (N ′′ , Q) → homR (N, Q) → homR (N ′ , Q) → 0.
It is easily seen also that the definition of injective is equivalent to the following: If N is a
submodule of a module M , then any homomorphism of N into Q can be extended to a homo-
morphism of M into Q. Another result, which is easily established by dualizing the proof of the
analogous result on projective (Theorem 4.3.3), is that if Q is injective, then any short exact se-
quence 0 → Q → M → N → 0 splits. The converse of this holds also. However, the proof requires
the dual of the easy result that any module is a homomorphic image of a projective module (in
fact, a free module). The dual statement is that any module can be embedded in an injective one.
We shall see that this is the case, but the proof will turn out to be fairly difficult.

Theorem 4.3.5. [Baer] A right module Q is injective if and only if any homomorphism of a right
ideal I of R into Q can be extended to a homomorphism of R into Q.

Proof. Obviously, the condition is necessary. Now suppose it holds and suppose M is a module
and f is a homomorphism of a submodule N of M into Q. Consider the set {(g, M ′ )} where M ′
is a submodule of M containing N and g is a homomorphism of M ′ into Q such that g|N = f .
We define a partial order in the set {(g, M ′ )} by declaring that (g1 , M1′ ) ≥ (g2 , M2′ ) if M1′ ⊃ M2′
and g1 |M2′ = g2 . It is clear that any totally ordered subset has an upper bound in this set.
Hence, by Zorn’s lemma, there exists a maximal (g, M ′ ); that is, we have an extension of f to a
homomorphism g of M ′ ⊃ N which is maximal in the sense that if g1 is a homomorphism of an
M1′ ⊃ M ′ such that g1 |M ′ = g, then necessarily M1′ = M ′ . We claim that M ′ = M . Otherwise,
/ M ′ and so xR + M ′ is a submodule of M properly containing M ′ . Now let
there is an x ∈ M, ∈
I = {s ∈ R : xs ∈ M ′ }.
Then I = ann(x + M ′ ) in M/M ′ , so I is a right ideal of R. If s ∈ I, then xs ∈ M ′ , so g(xs) ∈ Q.
It is immediate that the map h : s 7→ g(xs) is a module homomorphism of I into Q. Hence, by
hypothesis, h can be extended to a homomorphism k of R into Q. We shall use this to obtain an
extension of g to a homomorphism of xR + M ′ to Q. The elements of xR + M ′ have the form
xr + y, r ∈ R, y ∈ M ′ . If we have a relation xs + y ′ = 0, s ∈ R, y ′ ∈ M ′ , then s ∈ I. Then
k(s) = h(s) = g(xs) = −g(y ′ ).
Thus, xs + y ′ = 0 for s ∈ R, y ′ ∈ M ′ , implies that k(s) + g(y ′ ) = 0. It follows that
xr + y 7→ k(r) + g(y),
r ∈ R, y ∈ M ′ , is a well-defined map. For, if xr1 + y1 = xr2 + y2 , ri ∈ R, yi ∈ M ′ , then xs + y ′ = 0
for s = r1 − r2 , y ′ = y1 − y2 . Then k(s) + g(y ′ ) = 0 and k(r1 − r2 ) + g(y1 − y2 ) = 0. Since k and g
are homomorphisms, this implies that k(r1 ) + g(y1 ) = k(r2 ) + g(y2 ). It is immediate that the map
rx+y 7→ k(r)+g(y) is a module homomorphism of xR+M ′ into Q extending the homomorphism
g of M ′ . This contradicts the maximality of (g, M ′ ). Hence, M ′ = M and we have proved that if f
is a homomorphism of a submodule N of M into Q, then f can be extended to a homomorphism
of M into Q. Hence, Q is injective.
4.3. Projective and Injective Modules 109

For certain “nice” rings, the concept of injectivity of modules is closely related to the simpler
notion of divisibility, which we proceed to define.

Definition. If a ∈ R, then the module M is said to be divisible by a if the map x 7→ xa of M

into M is surjective. A module is called divisible if it is divisible by every a 6= 0.

It is clear that if M is divisible by a or if M is divisible, then any homomorphic image of M

has the same property. In some sense injectivity is generalization of divisibility, for we have

Theorem 4.3.6. 1. If R has no zero divisors 6= 0, then any injective R-module is divisible.
2. If R is a ring such that every right ideal of R is principal (= aR for some a ∈ R), then any
divisible R-module is injective.

Proof. (1) Suppose R has no zero-divisors 6= 0 and let Q be an injective R-module. Let x ∈ Q, r ∈
R, r 6= 0. If a, b ∈ R and ra = rb, then a = b. Hence, we have a well-defined map ra 7→ xa, a ∈ R,
of the right ideal rR into Q. Clearly this is a module homomorphism. Since Q is injective, the
map ra 7→ xa can be extended to a homomorphism of R into Q. If 1 7→ y under this extension,
then r = 1r 7→ yr. Since r = r1 7→ x1 = x, we have x = yr. Since x was arbitrary in Q and r was
any non-zero element of R, this shows that Q is divisible.
(2) Suppose R is a ring in which every right ideal is principal. Let M be a divisible R-module
and let f be a homomorphism of the right ideal rR into M . If r = 0, then f is the zero map
and this can be extended to the zero map of R. If r 6= 0 and f (r) = x ∈ M , then there exists
a y in M such that x = yr. Then a 7→ ya is a module homomorphism of R into M and since
rb 7→ yrb = xb = f (r)b = f (rb), a 7→ ya is an extension of f . Thus, any module homomorphism
of a right ideal of R into M can be extended to a homomorphism of R. Hence, M is injective by
Baer’s criterion.

If R satisfies both conditions stated in the theorem, then an R-module is injective if and only
if it is divisible. In particular, this holds if R is a PID. We can use this to construct some examples
of injective modules.

Examples 4.3.2. 1. Let R be a subring of a field F and regard F as an R-module in the natural
way. Evidently F is a divisible R-module. Hence, if K is any R-submodule of F , then F/K
is a divisible R-module. In particular, Q is an injective Z-module which is not projective.
2. Let D be a PID, F its field of fractions. If r ∈ D, then F/(r)((r) = rD) is divisible and hence
is injective by Theorem 4.3.6.

Our next objective is to prove that any module can be embedded in an injective module, that
i
is, given any M there exists an exact sequence 0 → M → Q with Q is injective. The first step in
the proof we shall give is as follows.

Lemma 4.3.7. Any abelian group can be embedded in a divisible group (= a divisible Z-module).

Proof. First let F be a free abelian group with base {xα } and F ′ the vector space over Q with {xα }
as base. Then F is embedded in F ′ and it is clear that F ′ is divisible. Now let M be an arbitrary
abelian group. Then M is isomorphic to a factor group F/K of a free abelian group F . Hence,
F ′ /K is a divisible group and F/K ∼ = M is a subgroup.

An immediate consequence of this and Theorem 4.3.6 is the next corollary.

Corollary 4.3.8. Any Z-module can be embedded in an injective Z-module.

110 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

Now for an arbitrary R-module M , we have the isomorphism of M onto homR (R, M ) which
maps an element x ∈ M into the homomorphism fx such that 1 7→ x. This is an R-isomorphism
if we make homR (R, M ) into a right R-module by defining f a, a ∈ R, by (f a)(b) = f (ab). Also
homZ (R, M ) is a right R-module using this definition of f a. Clearly homR (R, M ) is a submod-
ule of homZ (R, M ). Since M is isomorphic to homR (R, M ), we have an embedding of M in
homZ (R, M ). Now embed M in an injective Z-module Q, which can be done by the foregoing
corollary. Then we have an embedding of homZ (R, Q) as R-modules. This gives an embedding of
M in an injective R-module, since we have the following lemma.

Lemma 4.3.9. If Q is an injective Z-module, then homZ (R, Q) is an injective R-module.

f
Proof. We must show that if 0 → N ′ → N is an exact sequence of R-modules, then
f∗
homR (N, homZ (R, Q)) → homR (N ′ , homZ (R, Q)) → 0

is exact, where f ∗ = homR (f, homZ (R, Q)). We have an isomorphism

ϕN : homZ (N ⊗R R, Q) → homR (N, homZ (R, Q))

and the definition shows that this is “natural” in N . Since the isomorphism of N ⊗R R onto N
such that y ⊗ 1 7→ y is natural in N , we have an isomorphism

ψN : homZ (N, Q) → homR (N, homZ (R, Q))

which is natural in N , that is we have the commutativity of

ψN
homZ (N, Q) / homR (N, homZ (R, Q))

f¯ f∗
 
homZ (N ′ , Q) / homR (N ′ , homZ (R, Q))
ψN ′

where f¯ = hom(f, Q). Now f¯ is surjective since Q is Z-injective. Since ψN and ψN ′ are isomor-
phisms, this implies that f ∗ is surjective.

The foregoing lemma completes the proof of the embedding theorem.

Theorem 4.3.10. Any module can be embedded in an injective module.

The proof we have given is due to B. Eckmann and A. Schöpf.

We can apply the theorem to complete the following characterization of injectives, which we
idicated earlier.

Theorem 4.3.11. The following properties of a module Q are equivalent:

(i) Q is injective.
(ii) Any short exact sequence 0 → Q → M → N → 0 splits.
(iii) Q is a direct summand of every module containing it as a submodule.

Proof. We leave the proof of (i) ⇒ (ii) as an exercise. Conversely, suppose any short exact se-
quence 0 → Q → M → N → 0 splits. By the embedding theorem we have an exact sequence
i i p
0 → Q → M where M is injective. Then we have the short exact sequence 0 → Q → M →
4.4. Modules over a PID 111

M/Q → 0 where p is the canonical homomorphism of M onto M/Q. By hypothesis, we can find
a p′ : M → Q such that p′ i = id Q . Now suppose we have a diagram

j
0 / N′ /N

f

Q

Since M is injective, we can enlarge this to a commutative diagram

j
0 / N′ /N
p′ g
f
 x
QO g

i p′

M

This means that by the injectivity of M we have g : N → M such that if = gj. Then f = id Q f =
p′ if = (p′ g)j. Hence, Q is injective.

It is possible to prove a sharper result than Theorem 4.3.10, namely that there is a minimal
injective R-module H containing M in the sense that any injective map of M into an injective
R-module Q factor through H. More precisely, if M ⊆ Q for an injective R-module Q then there
is an injection i : H → Q that restricts to the identity map on M ; using i to identify H as a subset
of Q we have M ⊆ H ⊆ Q. This module H is called the injective hull or injective envelope
of M . For example, the injective hull of Z is Q, and the injective hull of any field is itself.

Exercises 4.3. 1. Let R = Z6 . Define Z6 × Z2 → Z2 by [r]6 [x]2 := [rx]2 and Z6 × Z3 → Z3 by

[r]6 [x]3 := [rx]3 . Prove that Z2 and Z3 are Z6 -modules and Z6 ∼= Z2 ⊕ Z3 as Z6 -modules.
Z2 and Z3 are not free Z6 -modules. Z6 is a free Z6 -module. Since Z2 and Z3 are direct summands
of Z6 -module, they are projective.
2. Show that if e is an idempotent (e2 = e) in a ring R, the eR is a projective right module and Re is an
projective left module.
3. Show Mthat
(a) Pα is projective if and only if every Pα is projective.
Mα
(b) Qα is injective if and only if every Qα is injective.
α
4. Prove that
(a) A direct sum of abelian groups is divisible if and only if each summand is divisible.
(b) A homomorphic image of a divisible module is divisible.
5. Prove (i) ⇒ (ii) in Theorem 4.3.11 by dualizing the proof of Theorem 4.3.3.
6. Consider the polynomial ring Z[x] as a Z-module.
(a) Is Z[x] free? (b) Is Z[x] projective?
(c) Is Z[x] injective? (d) Is Z[x] divisible?

4.4 Modules over a PID

Our main goal is to prove the structure theorem for modules over a PID.
112 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

Theorem 4.4.1. Let R be a PID and suppose that M is a finitely generated R-module. Then there
is an integer r ≥ 0 and nonzero elements d1 , . . . , dk ∈ R with d1 |d2 , . . . , dk−1 |dk such that

M∼
=R| ⊕ ·{z
· · ⊕ R} ⊕R/Rd1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/Rdk .
r copies

Moreover, if N is another finitely generated R-module and

N∼
=R · · ⊕ R} ⊕R/Rd¯1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/Rd¯k̄ ,
| ⊕ ·{z
r̄ copies

where d¯i |d¯i+1 , then M and N are isomorphic as R-modules if and only if r = r̄, k = k̄ and di and
d¯i are associates for i = 1, . . . , k.

Note that we cannot assert more than that di and d¯i are associates, for if d and d¯ are associates,
then R/Rd ∼ = R/Rd. ¯
Since abelian groups are equivalent to Z-modules, this theorem can be stated as “A finitely
generated Z-module is a direct sum of cyclic modules”. Actually, the theorem was more precise in
that it actually classified all finitely generated Z-modules up to isomorphism. That is, one has

Theorem 4.4.2. Let M be a finitely generated Z-module. Then there are nonnegative integers
r ≥ 0, d1 , . . . , dk > 0 where d1 |d2 , . . . , dk−1 |dk such that

M∼
=Z · · ⊕ Z} ⊕Z/d1 Z ⊕ · · · ⊕ Z/dk Z.
| ⊕ ·{z
r copies

Moreover, if N is another finitely generated Z-module and

N∼
=Z · · ⊕ Z} ⊕Z/d¯1 Z ⊕ · · · ⊕ Z/d¯k̄ Z,
| ⊕ ·{z
r̄ copies

where d¯i |d¯i+1 , then M and N are isomorphic if and only if r = r̄, k = k̄ and di = d¯i for
i = 1, . . . , k. r is called the rank or torsion-free rank of M and d1 , . . . , dk are called the invariant
factors of M .

Therefore, we have a major theorem on abelian groups:

Corollary 4.4.3. A finitely generated abelian group is a direct product of cyclic groups.

The strategy of our proof is the following. First we observe that even with no hypothesis on
the ring R, the following statements are equivalent:
(i) M is a finitely generated R-module and can be generated by s elements.
(ii) Let F = Rx1 + · · · + Rxs be a free R-module with s free generators. Then there is an exact
φ
sequence of R-modules 0 /K /F /M / 0 where K = ker φ.
(iii) M ∼= F/K where F is a free R-module on s free generators and K is an R-submodule of F .
Now let us suppose that R is commutative and we have a free R-module F and a submodule
K where F = Rx1 + · · · + Rxr + Ry1 + · · · + Ryk and K = d1 Ry1 + · · · + dk Ryk . Then it is easy
to see that
F/K ∼ =R| ⊕ ·{z
· · ⊕ R} ⊕R/Rd1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/Rdk
r copies

since Rxi ∼
= R and Ryi /di Ryi ∼
= R/Rdi .
4.4. Modules over a PID 113

If we have an arbitrary commutative ring R, K may not have an appropriate form. Moreover,
no change of basis may be possible which changes K to the appropriate form. However, in case
R is a PID, it is always possible to choose a basis for F and a basis for K (which will also be
free) so that the above situation exists. In addition, it will be possible to choose d1 , . . . , dk so that
d1 |d2 , . . . , dk−1 |dk . This will yield the desired structure theorem for finitely generated modules
over R.
The proof will consist of two stages.
Stage I. We prove an appropriate theorem about m × n matrices over a PID R.
Stage II. We show that theorem about m × n matrices proved in Stage I can be translated into a
theorem about modules—namely the structure theorem for modules over a PID.
We shall now prove a theorem which says that any m × n matrix [A] over a PID R can be
transformed to a diagonal matrix by a transformation

[A] → [P ][A][Q]

where [P ] and [Q] are appropriate invertible matrices over R.

Let R be a ring and GLn (R) the group of invertible n × n matrices over R. It is called the
general linear group over R. Moreover, if R is commutative, then

GLn (R) = {A ∈ Mn (R) : det A is a unit in R}.

Theorem 4.4.4. Let R be a commutative ring. 

a b
1. If Ra + Rb = R, then GL2 (R) contains a matrix of the form .
∗ ∗
2. If A = [aij ] is an m × n matrix over R, P ∈ GLm (R) and P A = [bij ], then
X X
Raij = Rbij .
i,j i,j

In other words, the entries of A and of P A generate the same ideal in R.

3. If E is the elementary matrix obtained by interchanging the i-th and j-th rows of the identity
matrix Im and A is an m × n matrix, then E ∈ GLm (R) and EA is the matrix obtained by
interchanging the i-th and j-th rows of A.
4. If E is the elementary matrix obtained by multiplying the i-th row of the identity matrix Im
by a unit c ∈ R and A is an m × n matrix, then E ∈ GLm (R) and EA is the matrix obtained
by multiplying the i-th row of A by c.
5. If E is the elementary matrix obtained by adding c times the j-th row of Im to the i-th row
of Im and A is an m × n matrix, then E ∈ GLm (R) and EA is the matrix obtained by
adding c times the j-th row of A to the i-th row of A.
6. The analogues of (1)–(5) hold for right multiplications and column transformations.

Proof. (1) If Ra + Rb = R, let ra + sb = 1. Then

    
a b r −b 1 0
= .
−s r s a 0 1
P P
(2) The entries bij of P A are R-linear combinations of the aij , so Rbij ⊆ P
P Raij . But since
P −1 (P A) = A the entries aij of A are R-linear combinations of bij , so Raij ⊆ Rbij .
(3), (4), (5) and (6) are clear.

Remark. Passing from A to EA as in (3), (4) and (5) of the above theorem are called elementary
row transformations of A. Elementary column transformations of A are defined similarly.
114 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

Recall that if R is a PID and a, b ∈ R, then Ra + Rb = Rc where c = gcd(a, b). Moreover, if we

let a = cx and b = cy, then gcd(x, y) = 1, or Rx + Ry = R. More generally, Ra1 + · · · + Ran = Rd
where d = gcd(a1 , . . . , an ) and if ai = dbi , then Rb1 + · · · + Rbn = R. In UFD, gcd(a, b) = 1 does
not imply Ra + Rb = R. For example, R = F [x, y], where F is a field, and gcd(x, y) = 1.

 
a b
Theorem 4.4.5. Let R be a PID and A = ∈ M2 (R). Then there exist P, Q ∈ GL2 (R) such
c d
that  
e 0
P AQ =
0 f
where e = gcd(a, b, c, d) and e | f .

Proof.We first
 claim
p q
(∗) if ∈ M2 (R), either p = gcd(p, q, r, s), or there exist P1 , Q1 ∈ GL2 (R) such that Rp1 ⊃
r s
Rp and
   
p q p1 q1
P1 Q = .
r s 1 r1 s 1

Case I. q, r, s ∈ Rp. Then p = gcd(p, q, r, s) and we are done.

Case II. q ∈ / Rp. Then Rp + Rq = Rp1 where p1 = gcd(p, q) and so Rp1 ⊃ Rp. Let p = p1 x
and q = p1 y. Then Rx + Ry = R, so we can choose u, v with xu + yv = 1. Then pu + qv =
(p1 x)u + (p1 y)v = p1 and
    
p q u −y p1 ∗
=
r s v x ∗ ∗
 
u −y
where Q1 = ∈ GL2 (R).
v x
Case III. r ∈/ Rp . Then we do the analogue of Case II with a transformation on the first column.
Case IV. q, r ∈ Rp and s ∈ / Rp. Then we perform a succession of elementary row and column
transformations followed by the manoeuvre of Case II: Let q = αp and r = βp:
     
p q p q − αp p 0
∼ =
r s r s − αr r s − αβp
   
p 0 p 0
∼ =
r − βp s − αβp 0 s − αβp
     
p s − αβp p s gcd(p, s) ∗
∼ ∼ ∼ (by Case II).
0 s − αβp 0 s − αβp ∗ ∗

  
p q p q
Since this succession of operators corresponds to a transformation ∼ P1 Q where
r s r s 1
P1 , Q1 ∈ GL2 (R), we are done in Case IV also. This proves (∗).
Next we claim  
e ∗
(∗∗) there exist P̄ , Q̄ ∈ GL2 (R) such that P̄ AQ̄ = where e = gcd(a, b, c, d).
∗ ∗
If a = gcd(a, b, c, d) we are done.
If not, use (∗) to choose P1 , Q1 ∈ GL2 (R) such that Ra1 ⊃ Ra and
   
a b a 1 b1
P1 Q = .
c d 1 c 1 d1
4.4. Modules over a PID 115

If a1 = gcd(a1 , b1 , c1 , d1 ), take P̄ = P, Q̄ = Q and end the process. If not, use (∗) again to choose
P2 , Q2 ∈ GL2 (R) such that Ra2 ⊃ Ra1 and
   
a1 b1 a 2 b2
P2 Q2 = .
c 1 d1 c 2 d2

Continue inductively to get

   
a m bm am+1 bm+1
Pm+1 Qm+1 =
c m dm cm+1 dm+1

where Ram+1 ⊃ Ram as long as am 6= gcd(am , bm , cm , dm ). Since Ra ⊂ Ra1 ⊂ Ra2 ⊂ . . .

is a strictly increasing chain of ideals in a PID R, the process must terminate. That is, am =
gcd(am , bm , cm , dm) for some
 m. Now let P̄ = Pm Pm−1 . . . P1 and Q̄ = Q1 . . . Qm−1 Qm . Then
a b a m bm
P̄ AQ̄ = P̄ Q̄ = where am = gcd(am , bm , cm , dm ) = gcd(a, b, c, d) because
c d c m dm
P̄ , Q̄ ∈ GL2 (R), as required. This proves (∗∗).
Finally, to prove the theorem we follow the transformation A ∼ P̄ AQ̄ by two elementary
transformations:
         
a b e αe e 0 e 0 e 0
A= ∼ P̄ AQ̄ = ∼ ∼ = .
c d βe γe βe (γ − αβ)e 0 (γ − αβ)e 0 f

Hence, we have the desired theorem.

Theorem 4.4.6. Let R be a PID and A an m × n matrix over R. Then there exist P ∈ GLm (R)
and Q ∈ GLn (R) such that
 
d1

 d2 0 

 .. 

 . 

P AQ =  dr 


 0 

 . . 
 0 . 
0

where the di 6= 0 and d1 | d2 , . . . , dr−1 | dr .

 prove this theorem by induction on (m, n).

Proof. We shall
Case I. A = a1 . . . an is a 1 × n matrix. The proof  of Theorem
 4.4.5 shows
 that for any
a, b ∈ R there is a 2 × 2 matrix Q ∈ GL2 (R) such that a b Q = gcd(a, b) 0 . Hence, for an
appropriate Q1 ∈ GL2 (R)
 
Q1
 1 
    
a1 . . . an 
 1 
 = gcd(a1 , a2 ) 0 a3 . . . an .
 .. 
 . 
1 n×n

Then a succession of such right multiplications together with elementary transformations (or a
suitable induction) show that we can obtain
 
AQ = gcd(a1 , . . . , an ) 0 . . . 0 for some Q ∈ GLn (R)
116 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

as follows:
   
a1 a2 . . . an ∼ gcd(a1 , a2 ) 0 a3 . . . an
 
∼ gcd(a1 , a2 ) a3 0 a4 . . . an
 
∼ gcd(a1 , a2 , a3 ) 0 0 a4 . . . an
 
∼ · · · ∼ gcd(a1 , . . . , an ) 0 0 . . . 0 .

Case II. A is an m × 1 matrix. This is similar to Case I.

Case III. The general case. We already know the result for m × 1 and 1 × n matrices and to proceed
the induction, we shall assume that m, n ≥ 2 and that we know the result for an (m − 1) × (n −
 matrix over R. Let A = [aij ]m×n and let Q1 ∈ GLn (R) be such that a11 . . . a1n Q1 =
1)
a 0 . . . 0 where a = gcd(a11 , . . . , a1n ) by Case I. Then
 
a 0 ... 0
 
AQ1 = 
X

Y 
m×n

where X is an (m − 1) × 1 columns matrix and Y is some (m − 1) × (n − 1) matrix. By the inductive

hypothesis there are P2 ∈ GLm−1 (R) and Q2 ∈ GLn−1 (R) such that
 
e1
 .. 

P2 Y Q2 =  . 

 es 

where e1 | e2 , . . . , es−1 | es . Then

         
1 1 1 a 0 1 a 0
AQ1 = =
P2 Q2 P2 X Y Q2 P2 X P2 Y Q2
 
a 0 ··· 0
 a 2 e1 
 
 .. 
 a3
= . .

 .. 
 . es 
am
   
a b
 a 3  0 
We next use Case II to find a P2′ ∈ GLm−1 (R) such that P2′  .  =  .  where b = gcd(a, a3 , . . . am ).
   
 ..   .. 
am 0
We now perform a pair of transformations
     
a 0 0 ··· ··· 0 a 2 e1 0 · · · ··· 0 a 2 e1 0 · · · ··· 0
 a 2 e1   a 0 0 ··· ··· 0  b 0 ∗ ··· ··· ∗
     
 a3 e2   a 3 0 e2  0 0 
     
 . .. ∼ . .. .. ∼. .. 
 .. .   .. . .   .. . Z 
     
 ..   .. ..   .. .. 
 . es   . . es  . . 
am am 0 0 0
4.4. Modules over a PID 117
 
e2
 .. 

where Z =  . 
 is a matrix all of whose entries are divisible by e1 .
 es 

Now by Theorem 4.4.5, there are P3 , Q3 ∈ GL2 (R) such that

   
a 2 e1 e 0
P3 Q3 =
b 0 0 f

where e = gcd(a2 , e1 , b) = gcd(a2 , e1 , b, entries of Z) = gcd(entries of A). Then

   
P3 a 2 e1 0 · · · 0 Q3
   b 0 ∗ · · · ∗  
   

 1  0
  

 1 

 ..   ..  .. 
 .   . Z   . 
1 0 1
 
e 0 ∗ ··· ∗    
0 f ∗ · · · e ∗ ··· ∗ e 0 ··· 0
∗ 

 0
  0 
= 0
   
 =  ..  =  .. ′

 ..  . W  . W 
. Z 
0 0
0

where W ′ is an (m − 1) × (n − 1) matrix over R and e divides every entry of W ′ . Now we use the
inductive hypothesis again to choose P4 ∈ GLm−1 (R), Q4 ∈ GLn−1 (R) such that
 
d2
 .. 
′
P4 W Q4 = 
 . 

 dr 

where d2 | d3 , . . . , dr−1 | dr . We note that since e divides all the entries of W ′ , e | d2 . Hence,
setting e = d1 , we have
   
e d1
   d2 d2
     
  
1 e 1  ..   .. 
= . = .
W′
   
P4 Q4    
 dr   dr 

where d1 | d2 , . . . , dr−1 | dr . The whole series of transformations on A amount to a transformation

A ∼ P AQ where P ∈ GLm (R) and Q ∈ GLn (R). Therefore, the theorem is proved.

Before we can use our result on matrices to show that a finitely generated module over a PID
R is a direct sum of cyclic modules, we need to show that every submodule of Rn = R | ⊕ ·{z
· · ⊕ R}
n
is finitely generated. In fact we shall show that every submodule of Rn is free of rank ≤ n.

Theorem 4.4.7. Let R be a ring and let M = Rx1 + · · · + Rxm and N = Ry1 + · · · + Ryn be free
j π
R-modules of rank m and n, respectively. Suppose 0 → M → P → N → 0 is an exact sequence of
R-modules. Then P is a free R-module of rank m + n.

Proof. It follows from Theorem 4.3.3.

118 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

Theorem 4.4.8. If R is a PID and P is a submodule of Rn = R

| ⊕ ·{z
· · ⊕ R}, then P is free of
n
rank ≤ n.

Proof. We shall use induction on n. For n = 1, we have P is a submodule of R, i.e. P is an ideal

of R, so P = Rx for some x ∈ R. If x = 0, P = 0, so P is free of rank 0; if x 6= 0, Rx ∼ = R
as a left R-module, so P is free of rank 1. Next suppose n > 1 and the theorem is true for free
R-submodules of rank < n. Let

Rn = Rx1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ Rxn = (Rx1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ Rxn−1 ) ⊕ Rxn .

Then we have an exact sequence

i π
0 → Rx1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ Rxn−1 → Rn → Rxn → 0

where i is the inclusion map and π is the projection onto the last factor. Let M = (Rx1 ⊕ · · · ⊕
Rxn−1 ) ∩ P ⊆ Rx1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ Rxn−1 and N = π(P ) ⊆ Rxn . Then
i π|P
0→M →P → N →0

is an exact sequence of R-modules. M is a submodule of Rn−1 and N is a submodule of Rxn ∼ = R,

so both are free of ranks ≤ n − 1 and 1, respectively. Hence, P is free of rank ≤ n = (n − 1) + 1
by Theorem 4.4.7.

Theorem 4.4.9. Let R be a PID and A a finitely generated R-module. Then A is a direct sum of
cyclic R-modules. More precisely,

A∼
=R| ⊕ ·{z
· · ⊕ R} ⊕R/Rd1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/Rdk
r

where r ≥ 0 and d1 , . . . , dk are nonzero elements of R and d1 | d2 , . . . , dk−1 | dk .

Proof. Since A is finitely generated, there is an exact sequence 0 → N → M → A → 0 where

M = Rx1 + . . . Rxn is free of finite rank n and N is a submodule of M . By Theorem 4.4.8, N is
finitely generated, say by

y1 = a11 x1 + a21 x2 + · · · + an1 xn

y2 = a12 x1 + a22 x2 + · · · + an2 xn
..
.
ym = a1m x1 + a2m x2 + · · · + anm xn .

Let M̄ = Rn be the space of n × 1 column vector over R and let N̄ be the R-submodule of M̄
generated by the columns of the n × m matrix
 
a11 a12 . . . a1m
 a21 a22 . . . a2m 
 
[N̄ ] =  . .. ..  .
 .. . . 
an1 an2 . . . anm

There is an obvious R-module isomorphism α : M → M̄ defined by

 
r1
 .. 
α(r1 x1 + · · · + rn xn ) =  . 
rn
4.4. Modules over a PID 119

and it is clear that α(N ) = N̄ . Hence, we have R-module isomorphisms

= M/N ∼
A∼ = α(M )/α(N ) = M̄ /N̄ .

By Theorem 4.4.6, there are matrices [P ] ∈ GLn (R) and [Q] ∈ GLm (R) such that
 
d1
 .. 
 . 0 
 
 dk 
[P ][N̄ ][Q] = 
 
 0 

 . . 
 0 . 
0 n×m

where the di 6= 0 and d1 | d2 , . . . , dk−1 | dk .

[N̄ ][Q] is an n × m matrix whose columns generate N̄ as an R-module. Further, left multipli-
cation by [P ] is an isomorphism of M̄ which carries N̄ to the R-submodule Ū of M̄ generated by
the columns of [P ][N̄ ][Q]. Then

A∼
= M̄ /N̄ ∼
= [P ]M̄ /[P ]N̄ = M̄ /Ū .

However, we can see by inspection that

M̄ /Ū ∼
= R/Rd1 ⊕ R/Rd2 ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/Rdk ⊕ R
| ⊕ ·{z
· · ⊕ R} .
n−k

Hence, A ∼
=R| ⊕ ·{z
· · ⊕ R} ⊕R/Rd1 ⊕ R/Rd2 ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/Rdk where d1 | d2 , . . . , dk−1 | dk .
n−k

Example 4.4.1. Let A be the Z-module generated by x, y and z with the relations

x + y = 0 and x − y + 2z = 0.

Express A as a direct sum of cyclic modules.

Solution. Observe that A = {(x, y, z) ∈ Z3 : x + y = 0 and x − y + 2z = 0}. Consider the exact

sequence

0 / N = Z(x + y) + Z(x − y + 2z) / Zx ⊕ Zy ⊕ Zz /A / 0.

Then y1 = x + y and y2 = x − y + 2z, so

   
1 1 1 0
[N̄ ] = 1 −1 ∼ 0 2 = [Ū ].
0 2 0 0

Thus, U = Zx ⊕ Z(2y). Hence,

= {0} ⊕ Z2 ⊕ Zz ∼
= M/U = (Zx ⊕ Zy ⊕ Zz)/(Zx ⊕ Z(2y)) ∼
A∼ = Z2 ⊕ Z

as desired.

Our next goal is to show that the direct summands which occur in the above decomposition
are unique up to isomorphism. This does NOT mean that the actual summands which occur are
unique. For example, suppose R = Z and

A = Z ⊕ Z ⊕ Z3 ⊕ Z3 ∼
= Zx1 ⊕ Zx2 ⊕ Zy1 ⊕ Zy2
120 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

where Zx1 and Zx2 are free summands and 3y1 = 3y2 = 0. Then we can also write

A = Z(x1 + 2x2 + y2 ) ⊕ Zx2 ⊕ Z(2y1 + y2 ) ⊕ Z(y1 + y2 ) ∼

= Z ⊕ Z ⊕ Z3 ⊕ Z3

In the first case, the direct summands are

Zx1 ∼
= Z, Zx2 ∼
= Z, Zy1 ∼
= Z3 , Zy2 ∼
= Z3 .

In the second case, the direct summands are

Z(x1 + 2x2 + y2 ) ∼
= Z, Zx2 ∼
= Z, Z(2y1 + y2 ) ∼
= Z3 , Z(y1 + y2 ) ∼
= Z3 .

Then the summands which occurs are distinct submodules in the two cases, but the isomorphism
classes of summands are the same, namely Z, Z, Z3 and Z3 .
As a preparation for proving uniqueness, we shall need the concept of a torsion element.

Definition. Let R be an integral domain and M an R-module. An m ∈ M is called a torsion

element of M if there is a nonzero r ∈ R such that rm = 0. Let τ (M ) denote the set of torsion
elements of R, called the torsion submodule of M . If τ (M ) = 0, M is said to be a torsion free
R-module.

Theorem 4.4.10. Let R be an integral domain and M an R-module. Then

1. τ (M ) is a submodule of M .
2. τ (M/τ (M )) = 0.

Proof. (1) The only problem in showing that τ (M ) is a submodule of M is in showing that τ (M )
is closed under addition. Suppose x, y ∈ τ (M ). Then there exist nonzero elements r, s ∈ R such
that rx = 0 and sy = 0. Since R is an integral domain, rs 6= 0. But

rs(x + y) = s(rx) + r(sy) = 0 + 0 = 0.

Hence, x + y ∈ τ (M ).
(2) Suppose x + τ (M ) ∈ τ (M/τ (M )). Then there is a nonzero r ∈ R such that

r(x + τ (M )) = rx + τ (M ) = 0 + τ (M ),

i.e., rx ∈ τ (M ). Thus, there is a nonzero s ∈ R such that s(rx) = 0, so sr 6= 0 and (sr)x = 0.

Hence, x ∈ τ (M ), so τ (M/τ (M )) = 0.

Remarks. 1. If R is not an integral domain, then the torsion elements of an R-module M may
not form a submodule, even if R is commutative. For example, let R = F × F where F is a
field and let M = R = F × F . Then the torsion elements of M are all elements of the form
(a, 0) or (0, b). But if a, b 6= 0, (a, b) = (a, 0) + (0, b) is not a torsion element.
2. If R is not commutative, then the torsion elements of an R-module M may not form a
submodule, even if R has no zero divisors. For example, there exists a non-commutative do-
main R (such as the polynomial rings over the quaternion ring) such that for some nonzero
x, y ∈ R, Rx ∩ Ry = 0. In other words, x and y have no common left multiple except 0. For
such an R, x and y, let M = R/Rx as a left R-module. Then
(a) y +Rx is not a torsion element of M , for 0 = r(y +Rx) = ry +Rx, so ry ∈ Rx∩Ry = 0.
Thus, ry = 0, so r = 0.
(b) 1 + Rx is a torsion element of M since x(1 + Rx) = x + Rx = 0. Since 1 + Rx generates
M = R/Rx as a left R-module, it follows that the torsion elements of M do not form
a submodule.
4.4. Modules over a PID 121

Theorem 4.4.11. Let R be a PID and let p be an irreducible element of R.

1. Rp is a maximal ideal of R, i.e., R/Rp is a field.
2. If d ∈ R and p ∤ d, then p(R/Rd) = R/Rd.
3. If d ∈ R and p | d, then p(R/Rd) = Rp/Rd ∼ = R/R(d/p).

Proof. (1) Suppose Rp is not a maximal ideal and let Rp ⊂ Rx ⊂ R. Then p = rx where neither r
nor x is a unit of R, which contradicts the hypothesis that p is irreducible.
(2) Since Rp is a maximal ideal and p ∤ d, Rp + Rd = R. Thus, we can choose r, s ∈ R with
rp + sd = 1. Then for any x ∈ R, x + Rd = (rp + sd)x + Rd = prx + Rd = p(rx + Rd). Hence,
p(R/Rd) = R/Rd.
(3) Since p | d, Rd ⊂ Rp. The multiplication by p defines an onto R-module homomorphism
ϕp : R → Rp/Rd where ϕp (x) = xp + Rd. It is easy to verify that ker ϕp = R(d/p). Hence, we
have the theorem.

Theorem 4.4.12. Let R be a PID and suppose d1 , . . . , dk , e1 , . . . , em are nonzero nonunits of R,

where d1 | d2 , . . . , dk−1 | dk , e1 | e2 , . . . , em−1 | em . Suppose

A = R/Rd1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/Rdk ∼
= R/Re1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/Rem = B.

Then k = m and R/Rdi ∼

= R/Rei for i = 1, . . . , m. In particular, di and ei are associate for
i = 1, . . . , m.

Proof. Let p be a prime of R which divides d1 . Then p | di for all i = 1, . . . , k, so

(R/Rdi )/p(R/Rdi ) = (R/Rdi )/(Rp/Rdi ) ∼

= R/Rp

for all i = 1, . . . , k. Thus, A/pA ∼

= R/Rp ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/Rp. In other words, A/pA is a vector space
| {z }
k
over the field R/Rp of dimension k. Note that since p(M/pM ) = pM/pM = 0 for any R-
module M , M/pM may be considered as an R/Rp module, i.e., as a vector space over R/Rp.
Since A ∼= B, A/pA ∼= B/pB since any isomorphism φ : A → B carries pA onto pB. But since
B is generated as an R/Rp-module by ≤ m elements. Thus,

m ≥ dimR/Rp (B/pB) = dimR/Rp (A/pA) = k.

By symmetry, k ≥ m. Hence, m = k.
We now show that R/Rdi ∼ = R/Rei by induction on the number n of prime divisors of d1 · · · dk .
E.g., for d1 . . . dk = pα1 1 . . . pαr r , we have n = α1 + · · · + αr . If n = 1, then k = 1 and A = R/Rd1 ∼=
R/Re1 = B. For inductive step, let p be a prime divisor of d1 and hence of d2 , . . . , dk . Then
A/pA ∼ = R/Rp ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/Rp as above. Suppose p ∤ e1 . Then p(R/Re1 ) = R/Re1 , by Theorem
| {z }
k
4.4.11, so (R/Re1 )/p(R/Re1 ) = 0. Thus,

B/pB = (R/Re1 )/p(R/Re1 ) ⊕ · · · ⊕ (R/Rek )/p(R/Rek )

∼
= (R/Re2 )/p(R/Re2 ) ⊕ · · · ⊕ (R/Rek )/p(R/Rek )

is generated by ≤ k − 1 elements. Hence, dimR/Rp (B/pB) ≤ k − 1 and dimR/Rp (A/pA) = k, a

contradiction, since A/pA ∼
= B/pB as above. Then p | e1 , so p | ei for all i = 1, . . . , k. By Theorem
4.4.11, we have isomorphisms

R/R(d1 /p) ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/R(dk /p) ∼

= p(R/Rd1 ) ⊕ · · · ⊕ p(R/Rdk )
= pB ∼
= pA ∼ = p(R/Re1 ) ⊕ · · · ⊕ p(R/Rek )
∼
= R/R(e1 /p) ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/R(ek /p).
122 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

Now the number of prime factors of (d1 /p) · · · (dk /p) is strictly less than the number of prime
factors of d1 · · · dk . Hence, the inductive hypothesis applies to the isomorphism

R/R(d1 /p) ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/R(dk /p) ∼

= R/R(e1 /p) ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/R(ek /p).

Thus, we may conclude that R/R(di /p) ∼ = R/R(ei /p) for i = 1, . . . , k.

Note that for any ideal I of R, I = ann(R/I) = {r ∈ R : r(R/I) = 0}. Hence, R/I ∼
= R/J if
and only if I = ann(R/I) ∼
= ann(R/J) = J (as submodules of R), and so

= R/R(ei /p) ⇔ R(di /p) ∼

R/R(di /p) ∼ = Rei ⇔ R/Rdi ∼
= R(ei /p) ⇔ Rdi ∼ = R/Rei .

Therefore, R/Rdi ∼
= R/Rei for i = 1, . . . , k and the theorem is proved.

Theorem 4.4.13. Let R be a PID. Suppose that

A∼
=R| ⊕ ·{z
· · ⊕ R} ⊕R/Rd1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/Rdk
r

and
∼ R ⊕ · · · ⊕ R ⊕R/Re1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/Rem
B= | {z }
s

are isomorphic R-modules where the di and ei are nonzero nonunits, d1 | d2 , . . . , dk−1 | dk and
e1 | e2 , . . . , em−1 | em . Then r = s, k = m and R/Rdi ∼
= R/Rei for all i = 1, . . . , k.

Proof. We first observe that the torsion submodules of A and B are

τ (A) = R/Rd1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/Rdk and τ (B) = R/Re1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/Rem .

Also,
| ⊕ ·{z
A/τ (A) = R | ⊕ ·{z
· · ⊕ R} and B/τ (B) = R · · ⊕ R} .
r s

Now if φ : A → B is an isomorphism, it is easy to see that φ(τ (A)) = τ (B), so φ induces

isomorphisms
φ|τ (A) : τ (A) → τ (B) and φ̂ : A/τ (A) → B/τ (B).
In particular, φ̂ is an isomorphism between a free R-module of rank r and one of rank s. Hence,
r = s by Theorem 4.2.6. Finally, Theorem 4.4.12 applies to the isomorphism between τ (A) and
τ (B) and shows that k = m and R/Rdi ∼ = R/Rei for all i = 1, . . . , k.

Exercises 4.4. 1. Let R be a commutative ring such that every submodule of a free R-module is free.
Prove that R is a PID.
2. Prove that every finitely generated subgroup of the additive group (Q, +) is cyclic.
3. Let R = Z[x] and let M = (2, x) be the ideal generated by 2 and x, considered as a submodule of R.
Show that {2, x} is not a basis of M . Show that the rank of M is 1 but that M is not free of rank 1.
4. Let R be a PID. Prove that
(a) For any a, b ∈ R, if gcd(a, b) = 1, then R/Rab ∼ = R/Ra ⊕ R/Rb.
(b) If d = pn1 1 . . . pnk k where p1 , . . . , pk are distinct primes and n1 , . . . , nk > 0, then

R/Rd ∼ n
= R/Rpn1 1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ R/Rpk k .

5. Let M be the Z-module generated by a, b and c with the relations

4a + 3b + 3c = 0 and 2a − b + 3c = 0.

Express M as a direct sum of cyclic modules. What are the orders of these modules?
4.5. Noetherian Rings 123

6. Let D be the ring of Gaussian integers Z[i] and M = D3 the free D-module of rank 3. Take K to be
the submodule generated by (1, 2, 1), (0, 0, 5) and (1, −i, 6). Prove that M/K is finite and determine
its order.
7. Let D be the ring of Gaussian integers Z[i]. Determine the structure of D3 /K where K is generated
by f1 = (1, 3, 6), f2 = (2 + 3i, −3i, 12 − 18i) and f3 = (2 − 3i, 6 + 9i, −18i). Show that M = D3 /K is
finite (of order 352512). (The order of the ring Z[i]/(a + bi) is a2 + b2 .)
8. Let D = Q[x] be the polynomial ring in one variable over the field Q of rational numbers. Let K be
the submodule of D3 generated by (2x − 1, x, x2 + 3) and (x, x, x2 ). Find polynomials g1 , . . . , gr such
that D3 /K ∼ = D/(g1 ) ⊕ · · · ⊕ D/(gr ).

4.5 Noetherian Rings

Previously, we have learned about a ring in which every ideal is √
principal. However, this condition
is too strong to hold in some important ring such as Z[x] or Z[ −5]. Sometimes in applications,
we may weaken it to every ideal is finitely generated. We shall study this kind of rings in this
section.

Definition. A partially ordered set Σ has the ascending chain condition (a.c.c.) if every chain

s1 ≤ s2 ≤ . . .

eventually breaks off, that is, sk = sk+1 = . . . for some k. This is a finiteness condition in logic
that allows arguments by induction, even when the partially ordered set Σ is infinite. It is easy
to see that a partially ordered set Σ has the a.c.c. if and only if every nonempty subset S ⊂ Σ
has a maximal element: If ∅ = 6 S ⊂ Σ does not have a maximal element, then choose s1 ∈ S,
and for each sk , an element sk+1 with sk < sk+1 , thus contradicting the a.c.c..

Theorem 4.5.1. Let R be a ring. The following three conditions are equivalent.
(i) The set Σ of left ideals of R has the a.c.c.; in other words, every increasing chain of left ideals
I1 ⊂ I2 ⊂ . . . eventually stops, that is Ik = Ik+1 = . . . for some k.
(ii) Every nonempty set S of left ideals has a maximal element.
(iii) Every left ideal I ⊂ R is finitely generated.
If one of these conditions hold, then R is Noetherian (named after E. Noether).

Proof. Here (i) ⇔ (ii) is the purely logical statement about partially ordered sets already dis-
cussed, whereas (i) or (ii) ⇔ (iii) is directly concerned with rings and ideals.
(i) ⇒ (iii). Pick f1 ∈ I, then if possible f2 ∈ I r(f1 ), and so on. At each step, if I 6= (f1 , . . . , fk ),
pick fk+1 ∈ I r (f1 , . . . , fk ). Then by the a.c.c. (i), the chain of ideals

(f1 ) ⊂ (f1 , f2 ) ⊂ · · · ⊂ (f1 , . . . , fk ) ⊂ · · ·

must break off at some stage, and this can only happen if (f1 , . . . , fk ) = I for some k. This proof
involves an implicit appeal to the axiom of choice. It is perhaps cleaner to do (i) ⇒ (ii) purely in
set theory, then argue as follows.
(ii) ⇒ (iii). Let I be a left ideal of R and consider the set S of finitely generated left ideals
contained in I. Then {0} ∈ S , so that S has a maximal element J by (ii). But then J = I,
since any element f ∈ I r J would give rise to a strictly bigger finitely generated left ideal
J ⊂ (J, f ) ⊆ I. S
(iii) ⇒ (i). Let I1 ⊂ I2 ⊂ . . . be an increasing chain of left ideals. Then J = k Ik is again an
ideal. If J is finitely generated then J = (f1 , . . . , fn ) and each fi ∈ Iki , so that setting k = max ki
gives J = Ik and the chain stops.
124 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

Remarks. 1. Every PID is Noetherian. Hence, we may consider a Noetherian ring as a gener-
alization of a PID.
2. Most rings of interest are Noetherian this is a very convenient condition to work with. At
first sight, more concrete conditions (such as R finitely generated over k or over Z) might
seem more attractive, but as a rule, the Noetherian condition is both more general and more
practical to work with.
3. The descending chain condition (d.c.c.) on a partially ordered set is defined in a similar
way. A ring whose ideals satisfy the d.c.c. is called an Artinian ring. This is also a very
important notion, but is more special: the d.c.c. for rings turns out to be very much stronger
than the a.c.c. (and implies it). We shall discuss this kind of rings in the next section.
Example 4.5.1. Z is Noetherian but not Artinian since Z ⊃ pZ ⊃ p2 Z ⊃ . . . , p prime, is a
decreasing chain which does not stop.
Examples 4.5.2. Here are three examples of non-Noetherian rings. Let k be a field.
1. The polynomial ring k[x1 , . . . , xn , . . . ] in an infinite number of indeterminates is obviously
non-Noetherian.
2. Consider the ring A1 of polynomials in x, y of the form f (x, y) = a + xg(x, y) with a a
constant and g ∈ k[x, y]; that is, f involves no pure power y j of y with j > 0. In other
words,
n X o
A1 = f (x, y) = aij xi y j : i, j ≥ 0 and i > 0 if j 6= 0
= k[x, xy, xy 2 , . . . , xy n , . . . ] ⊂ k[x, y].
It is clear that (x, xy, xy 2 , . . . ) is a maximal ideal of A1 , and is not finitely generated. (It
looks as if it should be generated by x, but, of course, y, y 2 , . . . are not elements of the ring
A1 .) Thus, A1 is not Noetherian.
3. A rather similar example is the ring A2 of polynomials in x, y, y −1 of the form g(x, y) +
xh(x, y, y −1 ); that is,
n X o
A2 = f (x, y) = aij xi y j : i ≥ 0, and j ≥ 0 if i = 0 = k[x, y, x/y, x/y 2 , . . . , x/y n , . . . ].

In this ring x = (x/y) · y, and x/y = (x/y 2 ) · y, etc., so that the element x does not have a
factorization into irreducibles and
(x) ⊂ (x/y) ⊂ (x/y 2 ) ⊂ · · ·
is an infinite ascending chain.

Definition. Let R be a ring. An R-module M is Noetherian if the submodules of M have the

a.c.c., that is, any increasing chain M1 ⊂ M2 ⊂ . . . ⊂ Mk ⊂ . . . of submodules eventually stops.

Just as before, it is equivalent to say that any nonempty set of submodules of M has a maximal
element, or that every submodule of M is finitely generated.

Theorem 4.5.2. Let 0 /L α /M β /N / 0 be an exact sequence of R-modules. Then

M is Noetherian if and only if L and N are.

Proof. Obviously, the condition is necessary. Suppose M1 ⊂ M2 ⊂ . . . is an increasing chain of

submodules of M ; then identifying α(L) with L and taking intersection gives a chain
L ∩ M1 ⊂ L ∩ M2 ⊂ . . .
of submodules of L and applying β gives a chain β(M1 ) ⊂ β(M2 ) ⊂ . . . of submodules of N . Each
of these two chains eventually stops, by the assumption on L and N , so that we need to prove the
following statement:
4.5. Noetherian Rings 125

Lemma 4.5.3. For submodules, M1 ⊂ M2 ⊂ M , if L ∩ M1 = L ∩ M2 and β(M1 ) = β(M2 ), then

M1 = M2 .

Proof. Indeed, if m ∈ M2 , then β(m) ∈ β(M2 ) = β(M1 ), so that there is an n ∈ M1 such that
β(m) = β(n). Then β(m − n) = 0, so that m − n ∈ M2 ∩ ker β = M1 ∩ ker β. Hence, m ∈ M1 .

We record consequences of this theorem in:

Corollary 4.5.4. Let M be an R-modules and N an R-submodule of M . Then M is Noetherian if

and only if N and M/N are.

r
M
Corollary 4.5.5. 1. If Mi are Noetherian modules, i = 1, . . . , r, then Mi is Noetherian.
i=1
2. If R is a Noetherian ring, then an R-module M is Noetherian if and only if it is finitely
generated over R.
3. If R is a Noetherian ring and M is a finitely generated R-module, then any submodule
N ⊂ M is again finitely generated.
4. If R is a Noetherian ring and ϕ : R → B is a ring homomorphism such that B is a finitely
generated R-module, then B is a Noetherian ring. In particular, a homomorphic image of a
Noetherian ring is a Noetherian ring.

Proof. (1) A direct sum M1 ⊕ M2 is a particular case of an exact sequence, so that the previous
proves (1) when r = 2. The case r > 2 follows by an easy induction.
(2) If M is finitely generated then there is a surjective homomorphism Rr → M → 0 for some
r, so that M is a quotient M ∼ = Rr /N for some submodule N ⊂ Rr ; now Rr is a Noetherian
module by (1), so M Noetherian follows by the implication ⇒ of the above theorem. Conversely,
M Noetherian obviously implies M is finitely generated.
(3) This just uses the previous implication: M finitely generated and R Noetherian implies that
M is Noetherian, so that N is Noetherian, which implies that N is a finitely generated R-module.
(4) B is Noetherian as an R-module; but left ideals of B are submodules of B as an R-submodule,
so that B is a Noetherian ring.

The following result provides many examples of Noetherian rings, and is the main motivation
behind the use of the a.c.c. in commutative algebra. Note that in Hilbert’s day, a “basis” of a
module meant simply a family of generators.

Theorem 4.5.6. [Hilbert Basis Theorem] If R is a commutative Noetherian ring, then so is the
polynomial ring R[x].

Proof. We shall prove that any ideal I ⊂ R[x] is finitely generated. For this, define auxiliary sets
Jn ⊂ R by

Jn = {a ∈ R : there exists f ∈ I such that f (x) = axn + bn−1 xn−1 + · · · + b1 x + b0 }.

In other words, Jn is the set of leading coefficients of elements of I of degree n ≥ 0. Then it is

easy to check that Jn is an ideal (using the fact that I is an ideal), and that Jn ⊂ Jn+1 (because
for f ∈ I, also xf ∈ I), and therefore

J0 ⊆ J1 ⊆ J2 ⊆ . . .

is an increasing chain of ideals. Using the assumption that R is Noetherian, we deduce that
Jn = Jn+1 = . . . for some n.
126 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

For each m ≤ n, the ideal Jm ⊂ R is finitely generated, say Jm = (am,1 , . . . , am,rm ); and by
definition of Jm , for each am,j with 1 ≤ j ≤ rm there is a polynomial fm,j ∈ I of degree m having
the leading coefficient am,j . This allows us to write down a finite set

S = {fm,j }0≤m≤n,1≤j≤rm

of elements of I.
We now claim that S generates I. Indeed, for any polynomial f (x) ∈ I, if f (x) has degree P m
then its leading coefficient
P a is in J m , hence if m ≥ n, then a ∈ J m = J n , so that a = b a
i n,i
withP bi ∈ R and f (x) − bi xm−n fn,i (x) P has degree < m; similarly, if m ≤ n, then a ∈ J m , so that
a= bi am,i with bi ∈ R and f (x) − bi fm,i (x) has degree < m. By induction on m, it follows
that f can be written as a linear combination of the finitely many elements in S. This proves that
any ideal of R[x] is finitely generated.

Corollary 4.5.7. If R is a commutative Noetherian ring and ϕ : R → B is a ring homomorphism

such that B is a commutative finitely generated extension ring of ϕ(R), then B is Noetherian.

Proof. The assumption is that B is a quotient of a polynomial ring, B ∼ = R[x1 , . . . , xn ]/I for
some ideal I. Now by Hilbert Basis Theorem and an obvious induction, R Noetherian implies
that so is R[x1 , . . . , xn ], and by Corollary 4.5.5, (4), R[x1 , . . . , xn ] is Noetherian implies that so is
R[x1 , . . . , xn ]/I.

Exercises 4.5. 1. Let M be a finitely generated R-module where R is Noetherian. Suppose I is an

ideal of R such that for each element a ∈ I, there exists a nonzero element m ∈ M such that
am = 0M . Show that Ix = {0M } for some nonzero element x ∈ M .
2. Let M be a Noetherian R-module. Prove that I = {r ∈ R : rm = 0M for all m ∈ M } is an ideal of R
and R/I is Noetherian.
3. Let M be a Noetherian R-module and ϕ : M → M be a surjective module homomorphism. Prove
that ϕ is an isomorphism. [Hint. consider the chain of submodules ker ϕ ⊂ ker ϕ2 ⊂ · · · .]

4.6 Artinian Rings

In this section, we study deeper commutative ring theory. Our main goal is to show that any finite
commutative ring is a direct product of a finite number of local rings. However, we present results
on more a general ring, called an “Artinian ring”.

Definition. The Jacobson radical of a ring R is the intersection of all maximal ideals of R and
is denoted by Jac R.

Note that if R is a local ring with unique maximal ideal M , then Jac R = M .

Definition. Let R be a ring. An element a ∈ R is nilpotent if an = 0 for some n ∈ N.

The set of all nilpotent elements in a commutative ring R is an ideal, called the nilradical
of R. It is also clear that every prime ideal in a commutative ring contains the nilradical.
4.6. Artinian Rings 127

Theorem 4.6.1. Let J be the Jacobson radical of a commutative ring R.

1. If I is a proper ideal of R, then so is the ideal generated by I and J.
2. The Jacobson radical contains the nilradical of R.
3. For x ∈ R, x ∈ J if and only if 1 − rx is a unit for all r ∈ R. In partucular, if R is a local
ring with unique maximal ideal M , then 1 − m is a unit in R for all m ∈ M .
4. [Nakayama’s lemma] If M is any finitely generated R-module and JM = M , then M = {0}.

5. If M is finitely generated and M = N + IM for some ideal I ⊆ J and submodule N of M ,

then M = N .
6. Let I be an ideal in the Jacobson radical of R, and suppose that M is finitely generated. If
m1 , . . . , mn have images in M/IM that generate it as an R-module, then m1 , . . . , mn also
generate M as an R-module.

Proof. (1) If I is a proper ideal of R, then I is contained in some maximal ideal M of R. Since
J ⊆ M, I ∪ J ⊆ M.
(2) Let a ∈ R be nilpotent. Then an = 0 for some n ∈ N. Since maximal ideals are prime and
an ∈ M , so a ∈ M .
(3) Suppose 1 − rx is not a unit for some r ∈ R and let M be a maximal ideal containing 1 − rx.
Since 1 ∈/ M , rx ∈ / M , so x ∈ / M . But J ⊆ M , it follows that x ∈
/ J. Conversely, assume that
x∈/ J. Then there is a maximal ideal M such that x ∈ / M . Thus, R = (x, M ), so 1 = rx + m for
some r ∈ R and m ∈ M . Hence, 1 − rx = m ∈ M which implies that 1 − rx is not a unit in R.
(4) Assume that M 6= {0} and let n be the smallest positive integer such that M is generated by
n elements, say m1 , . . . , mn . Since M = JM , we have

mn = r1 m1 + · · · + rn mn for some r1 , . . . , rn ∈ J.

Thus, (1 − rn )mn = r1 m1 + · · · + rn−1 mn−1 . By (3), 1 − rn is a unit, so mn lies in the module

generated by m1 , . . . , mn−1 which contradicts the minimality of n. Hence, M = {0}.
(5) Apply (4) to M/NP .
(6) Apply (5) to N = i Rmi .

Remark. In the special case of a finitely generated module M over a local ring R with unique
maximal ideal J, the quotient M/JM is a vector space over the field R/J. Statement (6) implies
that a basis of M/JM lifts to a minimal set of generators of M . Conversely, every minimal set
of generators of M is obtained in this way, and any two such sets of generators are related by an
invertible matrix with entries in the ring.

Definition. A ring whose ideals satisfy the descending chain condition (d.c.c.), i.e., whenever
I1 ⊇ I2 ⊇ . . . is a decreasing chain of ideals of R, then there is a positive integer m such that
Ik = Im for all k ≥ m, is called an Artinian ring (named after E. Artin).

Clearly, every finite ring is Artinian. Also, it is immediate that every quotient ring of an Artinian
ring is Artinian. Similar to Theorem 4.5.1, we have the following theorem.

Theorem 4.6.2. R is an Artinian ring if and only if every nonempty set S of ideals has a minimal
element.

Definition. An R-module M is said to be Artinian if it satisfies d.c.c. on submodules.

Similar to Theorem 4.5.2, we have:

Theorem 4.6.3. Let 0 /L /M /N / 0 be an exact sequence of R-modules. Then

M is an Artinian R-module if and only if L and N are.
128 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings

Lemma 4.6.4. Let M be a maximal ideal of the commutative ring R and suppose that M m = {0}
for some m ∈ N. Then R is Noetherian if and only if R is Artinian.

Proof. Observe that each successive quotient M i /M i+1 , i = 0, 1, . . . , m − 1, in the filtration R ⊇

M ⊇ M 2 ⊇ · · · ⊇ M m−1 ⊇ M m = {0} is a module over the field F = R/M . Consider the exact
sequence 0 /M /R / R/M / 0 of R-modules. Assume that R is Noetherian. By
Theorem 4.5.1, M and R/M is Noetherian. Thus, R/M and M are Artinian by Exercise 4.6 (2).
Hence, it follows from Theorem 4.6.3 that R is Artinian. The converse is proved in the same
way.

Lemma 4.6.5. Let R be a commutative ring and P a prime ideal of R. If I and J are ideals of R
such that P ⊇ I ∩ J, then I ⊆ P or J ⊆ P .

Proof. Assume that I * P and J * P . Let x ∈ I, ∈ / P and y ∈ J, ∈

/ P . Then xy ∈ I ∩ J. Since x
and y are not in P and P is a prime ideal, xy ∈
/ P which contradicts P ⊇ I ∩ J.

Theorem 4.6.6. Let R be a commutative Artinian ring.

1. There are only finitely many maximal ideals in R.
2. The quotient R/(Jac R) is a direct product of a finite number of fields. More precisely, if
M1 , . . . , Mn are finitely many maximal ideals in R, then

R/(Jac R) ∼
= k1 × · · · × kn ,

where ki is the field R/Mi for all i ∈ {1, . . . , n}.

3. Every prime ideal of R is maximal. The Jacobson radical of R equals the nilradical of R and
(Jac R)m = {0} for some m ∈ N.
4. The ring R is isomorphic to the direct product of a finite number of Artinian local rings.
5. Every Artinian ring is Noetherian.

Proof. (1) Let S be the set of all ideals of R that are the intersection of a finite number of maximal
ideals. By Theorem 4.6.2, S has a minimal element, say M1 ∩ · · · ∩ Mn . Then for any maximal
ideal M , we have
M ∩ M 1 ∩ · · · ∩ Mn = M1 ∩ · · · ∩ Mn ,
so M ⊇ M1 ∩ · · · ∩ Mn . By Lemma 4.6.5, Mi ⊆ M for some i. Since Mi and M are maximal,
Mi = M and hence M1 , . . . , Mn are all maximal ideals of R.
(2) Since Mi + Mj = R for all i 6= j and Jac R = M1 ∩ · · · ∩ Mn , the statement follows from the
Chinese remainder theorem applied to M1 , . . . , Mn .
(3) We first show that J = Jac R is nilpotent. By d.c.c., there is some m ∈ N such that J m = J m+i
for all i ∈ N. Assume that J m 6= {0}. Let S be the set of proper ideals I such that IJ m 6= {0}.
Then J ∈ S . Let I0 be a minimal element of S . Thus, there is some x ∈ I0 such that xJ m 6= {0}.
By minimality of I0 , we have I0 = (x). Since ((x)J)J m = xJ m+1 = xJ m , it follows that (x) = (x)J
by minimality of (x). By Nakayama’s lemma, (x) = {0}, a contradiction. Hence, J m = {0}.
Since am ∈ J m = {0} for all a ∈ J, every element of J is nilpotent. But J contains the
nilradical of R, so these two ideals are equal.
Let P be a prime ideal P of R. Then P contains the nilradical of R, so it contains J. Thus,
P/J is a prime ideal of R/J. By (2), R/J ∼ = k1 × · · · × kn and thus a prime ideal of R/J consists
of the elements that are 0 in one of the components. In particular, such a prime ideal is also a
maximal ideal. Hence, P is maximal as desired.
(4) Let M1 , M2 , . . . , Mn be all the distinct maximal ideals of R and let J = Jac R and J m = {0}
as in (3). Then !m
\n \n
Mim ⊆ Mi ⊆ J m = {0}.
i=1 i=1
4.6. Artinian Rings 129

It follows from the Chinese remainder theorem that

R∼
= R/M1m × R/M2m × · · · × R/Mnm ,

and each R/Mim is an Artinian ring (because R is) with unique maximal ideal Mi /Mim .
(5) From (4), it suffices to prove that an Artinian local ring is Noetherian. Assume that R is an
Artinian with unique maximal ideal M . Then Jac R = M and M m = {0} for some m ∈ N. Thus,
the desired result follows from Lemma 4.6.4.

Corollary 4.6.7. Any finite commutative ring is a direct product of a finite number of local rings.

Example 4.6.1. Let n > 1. If n = pa11 pa22 . . . par r , then

Z/nZ ∼
= Z/pa11 Z × Z/pa22 Z × · · · × Z/par r Z.

Each Z/pai i Z is a local ring with unique maximal ideal pi Z/pai i Z for all i ∈ {1, 2, . . . , r}.

Exercises 4.6. 1. Prove that an Artinain integral domain is a field. Hence, Z is not Artinian.
2. Suppose R = F is a field. Prove that an R-module M is Artinian if and only if it is Noetherian if and
only if M is a finite dimensional vector space over F .
130 4. Modules and Noetherian Rings
5 | Field Theory

In Section 2.6, we learn about extensions of a field. Here, we give more details on a construction
of extension fields. We prepare the readers to Galois theory which yields a connection between
field theory and group theory. Applications of Galois theory are provided in proving fundamental
theorem of algebra, finite fields, and cyclotomic fields. We discuss some results on a transcenden-
tal extension in the final section.

5.1 Splitting Fields

Let F be a field. Given a polynomial f (x) ∈ F [x] we would like to have at hand an extension
field E of F which in some sense contains all the roots of the equation f (x) = 0. We recall that
f (r) = 0 if and only if f (x) is divisible by x − r.

n
Y
Definition. We say that f (x) splits in an extension field E if f (x) = c(x − ri ), that is, it is a
i=1
product of linear factors in E[x] and c ∈ F .

We shall first study some facts about the roots of f (x) ∈ F [x] as follows.

Theorem 5.1.1. If f (x) ∈ F [x] and deg f (x) = n ≥ 1, then f (x) can have at most n roots
counting multiplicities in any extension field of F .

Proof. We shall prove the theorem by induction on the degree of f (x). If deg f (x) = 1, then
f (x) = ax + b for some a, b ∈ F and a 6= 0. Then −b/a is the unique root of f (x) and −b/a ∈ F ,
so we are done.
Let deg f (x) = n > 1 and assume that the result is true for all polynomials of degree < n. Let
E be any extension field of F . If f (x) has no roots in E, then we are done. Let r ∈ E be a root
of f (x) of multiplicity m ≥ 1. Then there exists q(x) ∈ E[x] such that f (x) = (x − r)m q(x) and
q(r) 6= 0. Thus, deg q(x) = n − m. By the inductive hypothesis q(x) has at most n − m roots in E
counting multiplicities. Hence, f (x) has at most m+(n−m) roots in E counting multiplicities.

Theorem 5.1.2. [Kronocker] If p(t) ∈ F [t] is irreducible over F , then there exists an extension
field E of F such that [E : F ] = deg p(t) and p(t) has a root in E.

Proof. Let E = F [x]/(p(x)) where x is an indeterminate. Then E is a field containing {a +

(p(x)) : a ∈ F } as a subfield. But F ∼ = {a + (p(x)) : a ∈ F } by ϕ : a 7→ a + (p(x)), so E
can be considered as an extension field of F by considering a as a + (p(x)) for all a ∈ F . Then
E = F [x]/(p(x)) = F (t̄) where t̄ = x + (p(x)) is a root of p(t). Since E = F (t̄) and p(t) is
irreducible over F , [E : F ] = [F (t̄) : F ] = deg p(t) by Corollary 2.6.5.

131
132 5. Field Theory

Corollary 5.1.3. If p(t) ∈ F [t] is a nonconstant polynomial, then there exists a finite extension
field E of F containing a root of p(t) and [E : F ] ≤ deg p(t).

Proof. Since F [t] is a UFD, p(t) has an irreducible factor in F [t] say p1 (t). By Theorem 5.1.2, there
exists an extension field E of F such that E contains a root of p1 (t) and [E : F ] = deg p1 (t).
Hence, [E : F ] ≤ deg p(t) and E contains a root of p(t).

Definition. Let F be a field and f (x) a monic polynomial in F [x]. An extension field E of F is
a splitting field of f (x) over F if

f (x) = (x − r1 ) . . . (x − rn )

in E[x] and
E = F (r1 , . . . , rn ),
that is, E is generated by the roots of f (x).

Theorem 5.1.4. Let f (x) be a nonconstant polynomial of degree n. Then there exists an extension
field E of F such that [E : F ] ≤ n! and E contains n roots of f (x) counting multiplicities.
Hence, in E[t], f (x) = c(x − r1 ) . . . (x − rn ) for some c ∈ F and r1 , . . . , rn ∈ E, so that r1 , . . . , rn
are n roots of f (x) in E.

Proof. We shall prove the theorem by induction on the degree of f (x). If deg f (x) = 1, then f (x)
has exactly one root in F and [F : F ] = 1 = 1!.
Let deg f (x) = n > 1 and assume that the theorem is true for the case of polynomials of
degree < n. By Corollary 5.1.3, there exists an extension field E0 of F such that f (x) has a root,
say r ∈ E0 and [E0 : F ] ≤ n. Since r is a root of f (x), f (x) = (x − r)q(x) for some q(x) ∈ E0 [x],
so deg q(x) = n − 1. By the inductive hypothesis, there exists an extension field E of E0 such
that [E : E0 ] ≤ (n − 1)! and E contains n − 1 roots of q(x). Then E is an extension field of F ,
[E : F ] = [E : E0 ][E0 : F ] ≤ n! and E contains n roots of f (x) counting multiplicities.

Corollary 5.1.5. Let F be a field and f (x) a nonconstant polynomial over F of degree n. Then
there exists a splitting field E of f (x) over F . Moreover, [E : F ] ≤ n!.

Proof. We have seen from Theorem 5.1.4 that there exists an extension field E of F such that
f (x) = c(x − r1 ) . . . (x − rn ), for some c ∈ F and r1 , . . . , rn ∈ E, is a product of linear factors in
E[x] and [E : F ] ≤ n!. Hence, E = F (r1 , . . . , rn ) is a desired field.

Examples 5.1.1. 1. Let f (x) = x2 + ax + b. If f (x) is reducible in F [x] (F arbitrary) then

F is a splitting field. Otherwise, put E = F [x]/(f (x)) = F (r1 ) where r1 = x + (f (x)).
Then E is a splitting field since f (r1 ) = 0, so f (x) = (x − r1 )(x − r2 ) in E[x]. Thus,
E = F (r1 ) = F (r1 , r2 ). Since f (x) is the minimal polynomial of r1 over F , [E : F ] = 2.
2. Let the base field F be Z/(2), the field of two elements, and let f (x) = x3 + x + 1. Since
1 + 1 + 1 6= 0 and 0 + 0 + 1 6= 0, f (x) has no roots in F ; hence f (x) is irreducible in F [x]. Put
r1 = x + (f (x)) in F [x]/(f (x)) so F (r1 ) is a field and x3 + x + 1 = (x + r1 )(x2 + ax + b)
in F (r1 )[x]. (Note that we can write + for − since characteristic is two.) Comparison
of coefficients shows that a = r1 , b = 1 + r12 . The elements of F (r1 ) can be listed as
c+dr1 +er12 , c, d, e ∈ F . There are eight of these: 0, 1, r1 , 1+r1 , r12 , 1+r12 , r1 +r12 and 1+r1 +r12 .
Substituting these in x2 + r1 x + 1 + r12 , we reach (r12 )2 + r1 (r12 ) + 1 + r12 = r14 + r13 + 1 + r12 = 0
since r13 = r1 + 1 and r14 = r12 + r1 . Hence, x2 + ax + b factors into linear factors in F (r1 )[x]
and E = F (r1 ) is a splitting field of x3 + x + 1 over F .
5.1. Splitting Fields 133

3. Let F = Q, f (x) = (x2 − 2)(x2 − 3). Since the rational roots of x2 − 2 and x2 − 3 must be
integral, it follows that x2 − 2 and x2 − 3 are irreducible in Q[x]. Form K = Q(r1 ), r1 =
x + (x2 − 2) in Q[x]/(x2 − 2). The elements of K have the form a + br1 , a, b ∈ Q. We
claim that x2 − 3 is irreducible in K[x]. Otherwise, we have rational numbers a, b such that
(a + br1 )2 = 3. Then (a2 + 2b2 ) + 2abr1 = 2 2
√ 3 so that ab = 0 and a + 2b =23. If b = 0 we
2
obtain a = 3 which√ is impossible since 3 is not rational, and if a = 0, b = 3/2. Then
(2b2 ) = 6 and since 6 is not rational, we again obtain an impossibility. Thus, x2 − 3 is
irreducible in K[x]. Now form E = K[x]/(x2 − 3). Then this is a splitting field over Q of
(x2 − 2)(x2 − 3) and [E : Q] = [E : K][K : Q] = 2 · 2 = 4.
4. Let F = Q, f (x) = xp − 1, p a prime. We have xp − 1 = (x − 1)(xp−1 + xp−2 + · · · + x + 1)
and we know that xp−1 + xp−2 + · · · + x + 1 is irreducible in Q[x]. Let E = Q(z) where
z = x + (xp−1 + xp−2 + · · · + x + 1) in Q[x]/(xp−1 + xp−2 + · · · + x + 1). We have 1, z, . . . , z p−1
are distinct. Also (z k )p = (z p )k = 1 so every z k is a root of xp − 1. It follows that xp − 1 =
Q p k
k=1 (x − z ) in E[x].√Thus, E √ is a splitting
√ field over Q of xp − 1 and [E : Q] =√p − 1.
5. Since x − 2 = (x − 2)(x − 2ω)(x − 2ω 2 ) where ω 6= 1 and ω 3 = 1, Q(
3 3 3 3
√
3
2) is not a
3 3
splitting field of f (x) = x − 2 over Q. √A splitting field of f (x) is√E = Q( 2, ω). Since
g(x) = √ x2 + x +√ 1 is irreducible over Q( 3 2) and g(ω) = 0, [E : Q( 3 2)] = 2, so [E : F ] =
3 3
[E : Q( 2)][Q( 2) : Q] = 2 · 3 = 6.
e
6. A splitting field over Z/(p) of xp − 1, e ∈ N, is Z/(p).

Theorem 5.1.6. [Uniqueness of Splitting Fields] Let η : F → F1 be an isomorphism of fields

and let η : F [x] → F1 [x] be the isomorphism which extends η and satisfies η(x) = x. Suppose
f (x) is a monic polynomial in F [x], let f1 (x) = η(f (x)) and suppose that E/F and E1 /F1 are
splitting fields of f (x) and f1 (x), respectively. Then there exists an isomorphism η ∗ : E → E1
which extends η.

Proof. Let fˆ(x) be an irreducible factor of f (x) and let fˆ1 (x) = η(fˆ(x)). Let r ∈ E be a root
of fˆ(x) and let r1 ∈ E1 be a root of fˆ1 (x). Then we have a commutative diagram in which the
vertical arrows are isomorphisms and the horizontal arrows are inclusion maps

F / F [r] /E
O
i

F [x]/fˆ(x)F [x]
η η̂

F1 [x]/fˆ1 (x)F1 [x]
j
 
F1 / F1 [r1 ] / E1 .

The map j η̂i−1 = η̄ is an isomorphism of fields extending η. Also, η̄(f (x)/(x − r)) = f1 (x)/(x − r)
and E/F [r], E1 /F1 [r1 ] are splitting fields of f (x)/(x − r) and f1 (x)/(x − r1 ), respectively.
Now, by induction on deg f (x), η̄ : F [r] → F1 [r1 ] has an extension to η ∗ : E → E1 and this is
the required extension of η.

Theorem 5.1.7. Assume f (x) has no multiple factors as an element of F [x]. Under the hypothesis
of Theorem 5.1.6, the number of distinct extensions of η : F → F1 to η : E → E1 is at most [E : F ].
Moreover, the number of distinct extensions is equal to [E : F ] if and only if f (x) has distinct roots
in E.
134 5. Field Theory

Proof. Proceeding as in the proof of Theorem 5.1.6, let fˆ(x) be an irreducible factor of f (x), let d
be the degree of fˆ(x), let fˆ1 (x) = η(fˆ(x)), let r1 , . . . , re be the distinct roots of fˆ(x) in E and let
r1′ , . . . , re′ be the roots of fˆ1 (x) in E1 . (Note that e ≤ d and e = d if fˆ1 (x) has no multiple roots,
but this is not always the case.)
Next fix a root r = r1 of fˆ(x). The argument of Theorem 5.1.6 shows that for each root
r1 , . . . , re′ of fˆ1 (x) there is an isomorphism η̄j : F [r] → F1 [rj′ ] extending η, where η̂j (r) = rj′ .
′

F / F [r]

η

F1 / F1 [r ′ ]  / E1

j

On the other hand, any isomorphism of F [r] into E1 must carry r into a root of fˆ1 (x), and so must
one of the η̄j . Furthermore, as noted above
the number of roots of fˆ(x) = e ≤ d = [F [r] : F ].
By induction, the number of ways each η̂j can be extended to an isomorphism E → E1 is at most
[E : F [r]]. Thus,
the number of extensions of η : F → F1 to η ∗ : E → E1
≤ e[E : F [r]] ≤ [F [r] : F ][E : F [r]] = [E : F ].
Now we want to answer the question: When is there equality – that is, the number of exten-
sions = [E : F ]?
Looking at the first step above we see that the number of roots of fˆ(x) = e = d = [F [r] : F ] if
and only if fˆ(x) has d = deg fˆ(x) roots – that is if and only if fˆ(x) has distinct roots.
To continue inductively, we now have the set up
F [r] /E

η̂j

F1 [rj′ ] / E1

The key point is that E is the splitting field over F [r] of the polynomial f (x)/(x − r). This
polynomial has no multiple factor so inductively the number of extensions of η̂j to an isomorphism
η ∗ : E → E1 is equal to [E : F [r]] if and only if f (x)/(x−r) has distinct roots. Combining this with
the result for fˆ(x) we get the number of extensions of η : F → F1 to an isomorphism η : E → E1
is equal to [E : F ] if and only if f (x) has distinct roots in E.

Remarks. (1) If f (x) is an irreducible polynomial over a field F and r is a root of f (x) in some
extension field of F , then
F [x]/f (x)F [x] ∼
= F [r].
However, if f (x) = g(x)h(x) where g(x) and h(x) are irreducible polynomials, then by Chinese
remainder theorem
F [x]/f (x)F [x] ∼
= F [x]/g(x)F [x] × F [x]/h(x)F [x]
a direct product of fields. If f (x) = g(x)2 , then F [x]/f (x)F [x] even has nilpotent elements.
In general, E/F arises from a succession of simple extensions
F ⊆ F1 ∼= F [x]/f1 (x)F [x],
∼
F1 ⊆ F2 = F1 [x]/f2 (x)F1 [x],
..
.
Fr−1 ⊆ Fr ∼
= Fr−1 [x]/fr (x)Fr−1 [x] = E.
5.2. Algebraic Closure of a Field 135

We shall see that in some important cases (but not all), the splitting field E/F of the polynomial
f (x) can be achieved as a simple extension F ⊆ F [x]/g(x)F [x] = E, but usually g(x) 6= f (x).
(2) If f (x) and g(x) have the same roots in some extension field E of F (f (x), g(x) ∈ F [x]),
then they have the same splitting field. However, one cannot guarantee that the roots of f (x) are
distinct (or simple, or one fold). The basic example is the polynomial
f (x) = xp − a ∈ F [a]
where F is a field of characteristic p > 0. If r is a root of f (x) in some extension field E of F [a],
then rp = a and the factorization of f (x) in E[x] is
f (x) = xp − a = xp − rp = (x − r)p .

Exercises 5.1. 1. Construct a splitting field over Q of x5 − 2. Find its dimension over Q.
2. Let f (x) = x + x2 + 1. Find the splitting field of f (x) over Q and determine its dimension.
4

3. Let E/F be a splitting field of over F of f (x) and let K be a subfield of E/F . Show that any
monomorphism of K/F into E/F can be extended to an automorphism of E.
4. If f (x) ∈ F [x] has degree n and K is a splitting field of f (x) over F , prove that [K : F ] divides n!.
5. Let F be a field of characteristic p > 0 and let b ∈ F . Show that either xp − b is irreducible in F [x] or
b = ap and xp − b = (x − a)p for some a ∈ F .

5.2 Algebraic Closure of a Field

We know about the prime field which is the smallest field such that every other field is an extension
of it. However, we does not know if we can algebraically extend our field F forever to obtain a
field that every polynomial in F [x] has a root in it. We shall assure it in this section.

Definition. A field F is called algebraically closed if every monic polynomial f (x) of positive
degree with coefficients in F has a root in F .

Theorem 5.2.1. Let F be a field. The following statements are equivalent.

(i) F is algebraically closed.
(ii) An irreducible polynomial in F [x] is linear, and hence every polynomial of F [x] of positive
degree is a product of linear factors.
(iii) F has no proper algebraic extension field.

Proof. Since r is a root, that is f (r) = 0, if and only if x − r is a factor of f (x) in F [x], we have
(i) ⇔ (ii). Next, we show (i) ⇔ (iii). If E is an extension field of F and a ∈ E is algebraic
over F , then [F (a) : F ] is the degree of the minimal polynomial f (x) of a over F , and f (x)
is monic and irreducible. Then a ∈ F if and only if deg f (x) = 1. Hence, E is algebraic over
F and E ⊃ F implies there exist irreducible monic polynomials in F [x] of degree ≥ 2; hence
F is not algebraically closed. Conversely, if F is not algebraically closed, then there exists a
monic irreducible f (x) ∈ F [x] with deg f (x) ≥ 2, Thus, the field F [x]/(f (x)) is a proper algebraic
extension of F .

We recall that (Corollary 2.6.7) if E is an extension field of the field F , then the set of elements
of E that are algebraic over F constitutes a subfield A of E/F (that is, a subfield of E containing
F ). Evidently E = A if and only if E is algebraic over F . At the other extreme, if A = F , then
F is said to be algebraically closed in E. In any case A is algebraically closed in E, since any
element of E that is algebraic over A is algebraic over F and so is contained in A. This result
shows that if a field F has an algebraically closed extension field, then it has one that is algebraic
over F .
136 5. Field Theory

Definition. We call an extension field E/F an algebraic closure of F if

1. E is algebraic over F and 2. E is algebraically closed.

For example, assuming the truth of the fundamental theorem of algebra (Theorem 5.5.6), that
C is algebraically closed, it follows that the field of A of algebraic numbers is an algebraic closure
of Q, and thus A is algebraically closed.
We proceed to prove the existence and uniqueness up to isomorphism of an algebraic closure
of any field F . For a countable F a straightforward argument is available to establish these results.
We begin by enumerating the monic polynomials of positive degree as f1 (x), f2 (x), . . . . Evidently
this can be done. We now define inductively a sequence of extension fields beginning with F0 = F
and letting Fi be a splitting field over Fi−1 of fi (x). The construction of such splitting fields was
given at the end of the previous section. It is clear that every Fi is countable,
S so we can realize all
of these constructions in some large set S. Then we can take E = Fi in the set. Alternatively
we can define E to be a direct limit of the fields Fi . It is easily seen that E is an algebraic closure
of F . We showed that (Theorem 5.1.6) there exists an isomorphism of K1 /F onto K2 /F . This
can be used to prove the isomorphism theorem for algebraic closures of a countable field by a
simple inductive argument.
The pattern of the proof sketched above can be carried over to the general case by using
“transfinite induction”. This is what was done by E. Steinitz, who first proved these results. There
are several alternative proofs available that are based on Zorn’s lemma. We shall give one that
makes use of the following lemma.

Lemma 5.2.2. If E is an algebraic extension of a field F , then the cardinality of E cannot exceed
the cardinality of F [x].

Proof. Let S be the set of all ordered pairs (f, α) where f (x) ∈ F [x] is nonzero and α ∈ E with
f (α) = 0. Since for each polynomial f (x), the number of α such that (f, α) lies in S is finite, we
have |S| ≤ |F [x]|ℵ0 = |F [x]|. On the other hand, E maps injectively into S via α 7→ (fα , α) where
fα is the minimal polynomial of α, and thus |E| ≤ |S|.

Recall that |F [x]| = |F |ℵ0 . If F is infinite, then |F [x]| = |F | and it follows that |E| = |F |.
When F is finite, F [x] is countable, and hence E is either finite or countably infinite.

Corollary 5.2.3. There exist real numbers transcendental over Q.

Proof. There are only countably many polynomials in Q[x]. Since R is uncountable, the above
lemma guarantees that R is not algebraic over Q.

We can now prove the existence of algebraic closures.

Theorem 5.2.4. Any field F has an algebraic closure.

Proof. We first embed F in a set S in which we have a lot of elbow room. Precisely, we assume
that |S| > |F | if F is infinite and that S is uncountable if F is finite. We now define a set Λ whose
elements are (E, +, ·) where E is a subset of S containing F and +, · are binary compositions in
E such that (E, +, ·) is an algebraic extension field of F . We partially order Λ by declaring that
(E, +, ·) > (E ′ , +′ , ·′ ) if E is an extension field of E ′ . By Zorn’s lemma there exists a maximal
element (E, +, ·). Then E is an algebraic extension of F . We claim that E is algebraically closed.
Otherwise we have a proper algebraic extension E ′ = E(a) of E. Then |E ′ | < |S|, so we can
define an injective map of E ′ into S that is the identity on E and then we can transfer the
addition and multiplication on E ′ to its image. This gives an element of Λ bigger than (E, +, ·).
This contradiction shows that E is an algebraic closure of F .
5.2. Algebraic Closure of a Field 137

Next we take up the question of uniqueness of algebraic closures. It is useful to generalize the
concept of a splitting field of a polynomial to apply to sets of polynomials.

Definition. If Γ = {fα (x)} is a set of monic polynomials with coefficients in F , then an exten-
sion field E/F is called a splitting field over F of the set Γ if
1. every fα (x) ∈ Γ is a product of linear factors in E[x] and
2. E is generated over F by the roots of the fα (x) ∈ Γ.

It is clear that if E is a splitting field over F of Γ, then no proper subfield of E/F is a splitting
field of Γ and if K is any intermediate field, then E is a splitting field of Γ. Since an algebraic
closure E of F is algebraic, it is clear that E is a splitting field over F of the complete set of
monic polynomials of positive degree in F [x]. The isomorphism theorem for algebraic closures
will therefore be a consequence of a general result on isomorphisms of splitting fields that we
shall now prove. Our starting point is the following result, which is Theorem 5.1.6.
Let η : a 7→ ã be an isomorphism of a field F onto a field F̃ , f (x) ∈ F [x] be monic of positive
degree, f˜(x) the corresponding polynomial in F̃ [x] (under the isomorphism, which is η on F and
sends x 7→ x), and let E and Ẽ be splitting fields over F and F̃ of f (x) and f˜(x), respectively.
Then η can be extended to an isomorphism of E onto Ẽ.
We shall now extend this to a set of polynomials.

Theorem 5.2.5. Let η : a 7→ ã be an isomorphism of a field F onto a field F̃ , Γ a set of monic

polynomials fα (x) ∈ F [x], Γ̃ the corresponding set of polynomials f˜(x) ∈ F̃ [x], E and Ẽ splitting
fields over F and F̃ of Γ and Γ̃, respectively. Then η can be extended to an isomorphism of E
onto Ẽ.

Proof. The proof is a straightforward application of Zorn’s lemma. We consider the set of exten-
sions of η to monomorphisms of subfields of E/F into Ẽ/F̃ and use Zorn’s lemma to obtain a
maximal one. This must be defined on the whole E, since otherwise we could get a larger one
by applying the result quoted to one of the polynomials fα (x) ∈ Γ. Now if ζ is a monomorphism
of E into Ẽ such that ζ|F = η, then it is clear that ζ(E) is a splitting field over F̃ of Γ̃. Hence,
ζ(E) = Ẽ and ζ is an isomorphism of E onto Ẽ.

As we have observed, this result applies in particular to algebraic closures. If we take F̃ = F

and η = id , we obtain

Theorem 5.2.6. Any two algebraic closures of a field F are isomorphic over F .

From now on we shall appropriate the notation F̄ for any determination of an algebraic closure
of F . If A is any algebraic extension of F , its algebraic closure Ā is an algebraic extension of A,
hence of F , and so Ā is an algebraic closure of F . Consequently, we have an isomorphism of Ā/F
into F̄ /F . This maps A/F into a subfield of F̄ /F . Thus, we see that every algebraic extension
A/F can be realized as a subfield of the algebraic closure F̄ /F .

Exercises 5.2. 1. No finite field F is algebraically closed. [Hint. If F = {0, 1, a2 , . . . , an }, consider the
polynomial 1 + x(x − 1)(x − a2 ) . . . (x − an ) ∈ F [x].]
2. Let E be an algebraic extension of a field F and A an algebraic closure of F . Show that E/F is
isomorphic to a subfield of A/F . [Hint. Consider the algebraic closure Ā of A and note that this is
an algebraic closure of F .]
138 5. Field Theory

5.3 Multiple Roots and Separability

Recall the following facts from Subsection 2.6.2 about the multiple roots.

Definition. Let R be an integral domain and f (x) ∈ R[x]. If α is a root of f (x), then there
exist m ∈ N and g(x) ∈ R[x] such that f (x) = (x − α)m g(x) and g(α) 6= 0. m is called the
multiplicity of the root α of f (x) and if m > 1, α is called a multiple root of f (x).

Definition. If f (x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + an xn ∈ R[x], we define f ′ (x) ∈ R[x], the derivative of

f (x), to be
f ′ (x) = a1 + a2 x + · · · + nan xn−1 .

We record the straightforward properties of the derivative of polynomials in the next lemma.

Lemma 5.3.1. If f (x) and g(x) are polynomials over an integral domain R and c ∈ R, then
1. (cf (x))′ = cf ′ (x),
2. (f (x) + g(x))′ = f ′ (x) + g ′ (x),
3. (f (x)g(x))′ = f (x)g ′ (x) + f ′ (x)g(x),
4. ((f (x))n )′ = n(f (x))n−1 f ′ (x) where n ∈ N.

Theorem 5.3.2. Let E be an extension of a field F and f (x) ∈ F [x].

1. For α ∈ E, α is a multiple root of f (x) if and only if α is a root of both f (x) and f ′ (x).
2. If f (x) and f ′ (x) are relatively prime, then f (x) has no multiple root.
3. If f (x) is irreducible over F having a root in E, then
f (x) has no multiple root in E if and only if f ′ (x) 6= 0.

Proof. (1) is clear.

(2) Since f (x) and f ′ (x) are relatively prime, there exist h(x) and k(x) in F [x] such that 1 =
f (x)h(x) + f ′ (x)k(x). If α ∈ E is a multiple root of f (x), by (1), f (α) = 0 = f ′ (α), so 1 = 0, a
contradiction.
(3) Since f (x) is irreducible, f ′ (x) 6= 0 and deg f ′ (x) < deg f (x), we have f (x) and f ′ (x) are
relatively prime, so f (x) has no multiple roots. Conversely, if f ′ (x) = 0, then f (α) = 0 = f ′ (α)
for some α ∈ E since f (x) has a root in E. Hence, by (1), α is a multiple root of f (x).

Definition. Let F be a field. A polynomial f (x) ∈ F [x] is separable if every root (in some
splitting field over F ) of its irreducible factor is not a multiple root. If E is an extension of F
and α ∈ E is algebraic over F , then α is separable over F if its minimal polynomial over F is
separable.

Let F ⊂ K ⊂ E be field extensions. Note that if α is separable over F , then α is separable

over K since mα,K (x) | mα,F (x). Here mα,− (x) stands for the minimal polynomial of α over the
indicated field.
Examples 5.3.1. 1. Consider f (x) = x2 +1. Over Q, we have f (x) is irreducible and separable
but over Z/(2), we have f (x) = x2 + 1 = (x + 1)2 is not irreducible but is separable since
the only irreducible factor is x + 1 which is separable over Z/(2).
2. Let K be a field of characteristic p and F = K(y) be the field of rational functions over K
with indeterminate y. Since K[y] is UFD, y is irreducible element in K[y], so the polynomial
f (x) = xp − y in F [x] is irreducible over F by Eisenstien criterion. Since f ′ (x) = 0 and f (x)
has a root, say α in some splitting field E of F , α is a multiple root of f (x), so f (x) is not
separable over F . However, if we consider f (x) = xp − y ∈ E[x], we have f (x) = (x − α)p
and its irreducible factor in E[x] is only x − α which is separable over E, so f (x) is separable
over E.
5.3. Multiple Roots and Separability 139

Suppose that F is a field of characteristic zero and f (x) is a monic irreducible polynomial over
F , say f (x) = a0 + a1 x + · · · + an−1 xn−1 + xn . Then f ′ (x) = a1 + 2a2 x + · · · + nxn−1 . The key point
is that n 6= 0, so f ′ (x) 6= 0. Since deg f ′ (x) < deg f (x) and f (x) is irreducible, f (x) and f ′ (x) are
relatively prime, so all roots of f (x) are simple. Thus, we have shown:

Theorem 5.3.3. Let F be a field of characteristic zero. Then every polynomial f (x) ∈ F [x] is
separable.

Definition. We call an algebraic extension field E of a field F a separable extension if the

minimal polynomial of every element of E is separable.

Hence, if F is of characteristic zero, then every algebraic extension is a separable extension.

Definition. A field F is perfect if every polynomial f (x) over F is separable.

Thus, all fields of characteristic zero are perfect.

Remark. Suppose F is a field (or even a commutative ring) of characteristic p > 0. Then the
identities
(ab)p = ap bp and (a + b)p = ap + bp
show that the map ϕ : F → F defined by ϕ(a) = ap is a ring homomorphism. Since F is a field,
ϕ has to be one-to-one. But ϕ does not have to be onto - for example
ϕ : (Z/pZ)(x) → (Z/pZ)(x)
n
is not onto; the image is (Z/pZ)(xp ). However, if F is finite of order pn , then ap = a for all a ∈ F ,
so ϕ is onto and ϕn is the identity map, called the Frobenius’ automorphism.

Theorem 5.3.4. Let F be a field of characteristic p > 0, and let a ∈ F .

(1) If a ∈ F p and a = rp , then xp − a = (x − r)p .
/ F p , then xp − a is irreducible.
(2) If a ∈

Proof. (1) is trivial.

(2) In a splitting field for F , xp − a = (x − r)p (r may not be in F ). Any proper factor of xp − a
(after being made monic) has the form (x − r)i where 1 ≤ i ≤ p − 1. Thus, if xp − a has a proper
factor over F , then ri ∈ F for some 1 ≤ i ≤ p − 1. But then ri and rp = a ∈ F , so r ∈ F since
(i, p) = 1. Hence, a = rp ∈ F p .

Theorem 5.3.5. Let F be a field of characteristic p > 0. Then F is perfect if and only if F = F p .

Proof. Suppose F 6= F p and choose a ∈ F r F p . By Theorem 5.3.4, xp − a is irreducible. But

xp − a does not have distinct roots in a splitting field of F . Hence, F is not perfect.
Conversely, assume that F is not perfect. Then there is an irreducible polynomial f (x) over
F which does not have simple roots. By Theorem 5.3.2, this means that f (x) and f ′ (x) are not
relatively prime. Since f (x) is irreducible and deg f ′ (x) < deg f (x), f ′ (x) = 0. Thus, f (x) is a
polynomial in xp , i.e.,
f (x) = a0 + ap xp + a2p x2p + · · · + a(m−1)p x(m−1)p + xmp .
/ F p . For if each ajp ∈ F p , say ajp = (bj )p , then f (x) = g(x)p where
We shall claim that some ajp ∈
g(x) = b0 + b1 x + · · · + bm−1 xm−1 + xm
/ Fp
which contradicts the irreducibility of f (x) over F . This establishes the claim. Hence, ajp ∈
and F 6= F p .
140 5. Field Theory

Corollary 5.3.6. Every finite field is perfect.

Proof. The characteristic of a finite field F is a prime p. The monomorphism a 7→ ap of F is an

isomorphism since F is finite. Hence, F = F p is perfect by Theorem 5.3.5.

We shall end this section by proving the “primitive element theorem” which is a classic of field
theory. We first recall that an extension field E of a field F is said to be a simple extension of F
if E = F (α) for some α ∈ E. Such an element α is called a primitive element.

Theorem 5.3.7. If F is a field and G is a finite subgroup of the multiplicative group of nonzero
elements of F , then G is a cyclic group. In particular, the multiplicative group of all nonzero
elements of a finite field is cyclic.

Proof. If G = {1}, then G is cyclic. Assume that G 6= {1}. Since G is a finite abelian group,

G∼
= Z/(m1 ) ⊕ · · · ⊕ Z/(mk )
k
X
where k ≥ 1, m1 > 1 and m1 | · · · | mk . Since mk ( Z/(mi )) = 0, u is a root of the polynomial
i=1
xmk − 1 ∈ F [x] for all u ∈ G. By Theorem 5.1.1, this polynomial has at most mk distinct roots in
F , we must have k = 1 and G ∼ = Z/(m1 ) which is a cyclic group.

Theorem 5.3.8. [Primitive Element Theorem] Let E be a finite separable extension of a field F .
Then there exists α ∈ E such that E = F (α). That is, a finite separable extension of a field is a
simple extension.

Proof. If F is a finite field, then E is also finite. Let α be a generator for the cyclic group of all
nonzero elements of E under multiplication. Clearly, E = F [α], so α is a primitive element in this
case.
We now assume that F is infinite and prove our theorem in the case that E = F (β, γ). The
induction argument from this to the general case is obvious. Let mβ,F (x) and mγ,F (x) be the
minimal polynomials over F of β and γ, respectively. Assume that mβ,F (x) has distinct roots β =
β1 , . . . , βn and mγ,F (x) has distinct roots γ = γ1 , . . . , γm in F̄ where all roots are of multiplicity 1,
since E is a separable extension of F . Since F is infinite, we can find a ∈ F such that
βi − β
a 6=
γ − γj

for all i and j, with j 6= 1. That is, a(γ − γj ) 6= βi − β. Letting α = β + aγ, we have α = β + aγ 6=
βi + aγj , so
α − aγj 6= βi
for all i and all j 6= 1. Consider h(x) = mβ,F (α − ax) ∈ F (α)[x]. Now, h(γ) = mβ,F (β) = 0.
However, h(γj ) 6= 0 for j 6= 1 by construction, since the βi were the only roots of mβ,F (x). Hence,
h(x) and mγ,F (x) have a common factor in F (α)[x], namely the minimal polynomial of γ over
F (α), which must be linear, since γ is the only common root of mγ,F (x) and h(x). Thus, γ ∈ F (α),
and therefore β = α − aγ is in F (α). Hence, F (β, γ) = F (α).

Exercises 5.3. 1. Suppose that F ⊆ K ⊆ E and that E is separable extension of F . Prove that E is
separable over K and K is separable over F .
2. Let F be of characteristic p and let a ∈ F . Show that f (x) = xp − x − a has no multiple roots and
f (x) is irreducible in F [x] if and only if a 6= cp − c for any c ∈ F .
5.4. Automorphisms of Fields and Galois Theory 141

√
3. Find a primitive element of Q(i, 3 2) over Q.
4. Let K = F25 be the field with 5 elements and let F = Z/(5) be the prime subfield of K. Determine
the cardinalities of the following two sets.
(a) The set of elements of K which generate K as a field over F .
(b) The set of elements of K which generate the group of nonzero elements of K as an abelian group
under multiplication.
5. Let F be a field and let F be its algebraic closure. If a monic polynomial p(x) ∈ F [x] is irreducible
over F and has distinct roots α1 , α2 , . . . , αk ∈ F , prove that the multiplicities of αj are equal, that is,
p(x) = (x − α1 )m (x − α2 )m . . . (x − αk )m
for some m ∈ N.

5.4 Automorphisms of Fields and Galois Theory

If F is a field, the set of automorphisms of F , Aut F , forms a group under composition of func-
tions.
Examples 5.4.1. 1. Any automorphism satisfies ϕ(1) = 1, so ϕ(n) = n for all n ∈ Z and
ϕ(n/m) = n/m if n, m ∈ Z and m 6= 0 in F . This implies that the fields Q and Fp = Z/(p)
have only the identity map as an automorphism. That is, Aut (F ) = {idF } if F = Q or Fp .
Moreover, any field E is an extension of Q or Fp (so called the prime subfield) and any
automorphism ϕ : E → E leaves the prime subfield pointwise fixed.
2. The only automorphism ϕ : R → R is the identity map. For, we have known that ϕ(q) = q
√ √
for all q ∈ Q. Note that ϕ(a) = ϕ(( a)2 ) = (ϕ( a))2 > 0 for all a > 0. Thus, if a < b,
then ϕ(a) < ϕ(b). Let x ∈ R. Suppose ϕ(x) 6= x. Then ϕ(x) < x or ϕ(x) > x. If ϕ(x) < x,
then there exists a q ∈ Q such that ϕ(x) < q < x. Thus, q = ϕ(q) < ϕ(x), a contradiction.
If x < ϕ(x), then there exists a q ∈ Q such that x < q < ϕ(x), so ϕ(x) < ϕ(q) = q, a
contradiction. Hence, ϕ = id R .
3. Complex conjugation: ϕ(z) = z̄ is an automorphism of C of order two. In fact, Aut C
is uncountable, but the other automorphisms are “indescribable” and exist only via Zorn’s
lemma. However, the group of automorphisms of C which fix all elements of R is a group
of order two.
4. Let F be a field and let E = F (t) where t is transcendental over F . As shall be indicated in
the Exercise 5.4 below, u ∈ E is a generator of E/F if and only if it has the form
αt + β
u= , αδ − βγ 6= 0.
γt + δ
Since an automorphism of E/F sends generators into generators, it follows that every au-
tomorphism ϕ : E → E is given by
αt + β
ϕ(a) = a for all a ∈ F and ϕ(t) = ,
γt + δ
where α, β, γ, δ ∈ F and αδ − βγ 6= 0. Note that if c ∈ F and c 6= 0, then
   
α β cα cβ
and
γ δ cγ cδ
give rise to the same automorphism of F (t). A computation shows composition of functions
corresponds to matrix multiplication. The net result is that

Aut F (t) ∼
= GL2 (F )/F × = PGL2 (F ),
where F × is the set of matrices aI, a 6= 0.
142 5. Field Theory

5. If F is a subfield of K, let

Aut F K = {ϕ ∈ Aut K : ϕ(a) = a for all a ∈ F }.

The group structure of Aut F F (x, y) is known, but very complicated. For n ≥ 3, almost
nothing is known about Aut F F (x1 , . . . , xn ).
The above examples show that Aut F is in general very complicated and probably impossible
to describe. Galois theory proceeds in a different direction. One takes a subgroup H of Aut F —we
shall be almost concerned with finite H—and looks the set

F H = {a ∈ F : ϕ(a) = a for all ϕ ∈ H}.

It is easy to see that F H is a subfield of F . Moreover, if K is a subgroup of H, then

1⊆K⊆H
F ⊇ F K ⊇ F H.

The fundamental result of Galois theory is that of F is separable over F H , then there is a one-
to-one correspondence between subgroups of H and subfields of F which contain F H . Such
correspondences are inclusion reversing and are called “Galois correspondences”.

Definition. Let E be an extension field of a field F . The Galois group of E over F denoted by
Gal(E/F ) is the group
{ϕ ∈ Aut E : ϕ(a) = a for all a ∈ F }.
Let G be a subgroup of Aut E where E is a field. Then the field of G-invariant of E or the
fixed field of G acting on E is the field

{a ∈ E : ϕ(a) = a for all ϕ ∈ G}.

It is denoted by E G or Inv G.

Theorem 5.4.1. (1) If Aut E ⊇ G1 ⊇ G2 , then E G1 ⊆ E G2 .

(2) If E ⊇ F1 ⊇ F2 , then Gal(E/F1 ) ⊆ Gal(E/F2 ).
(3) If G = Gal(E/F ), then E G ⊇ F .
(4) If F = E G , then Gal(E/F ) ⊇ G.

Proof. These are immediate consequences of the definitions.

We shall now apply these ideas to splitting fields. Using the present terminology, Theorem
5.1.7 can be restated as follows. If E is a splitting field over F of a polynomial f (x), then
Gal(E/F ) is finite and we have the inequality |Gal(E/F )| ≤ [E : F ]. Moreover, |Gal(E : F )| =
[E : F ] if f (x) has distinct roots. We therefore have the following important preliminary result.

Lemma 5.4.2. Let E/F be a splitting field of a separable polynomial contained in F [x]. Then

|Gal(E/F )| = [E : F ].

Our next attack will be from the group side. We begin with an arbitrary field E and any finite
group of automorphisms G acting in E. Then we have the following

Lemma 5.4.3. [Artin] Let G be a finite subgroup of Aut E and let F = E G . Then

[E : F ] ≤ |G|.
5.4. Automorphisms of Fields and Galois Theory 143

Proof. Let |G| = n and write G = {g1 = 1, g2 , . . . , gn }. We have to show that [E : F ] ≤ n, or

equivalently:
(∗) If x1 , . . . , xn+1 ∈ E, then there exist u1 , . . . , un+1 ∈ F not all zero, such that

u1 x1 + · · · + un+1 xn+1 = 0,

that is, x1 , . . . , xn+1 are linearly dependent over F .

Consider the following n × (n + 1) matrix with entries in E
 
x1 x2 ... xn+1
 g2 (x1 ) g2 (x2 ) . . . g2 (xn+1 ) 
 
M = . .
 .. 
gn (x1 ) gn (x2 ) . . . gn (xn+1 )

This matrix has rank ≤ n, so there is a nonzero (n + 1) × 1 vector ~v = (v1 , . . . , vn+1 )t with entries
in E such that M~v = ~0(n+1)×1 . We wish to find such a vector where entries lie in F . Among
all such vectors with entries in E, choose one in which the number of nonzero coordinates, r, is
minimal. By renaming the elements x1 , . . . , xn+1 , we may suppose that the nonzero coordinates
are the first r of them; by multiplying the vector by vr−1 we may suppose that the last nonzero
coordinate is equal to 1. Thus,

M~v = ~0(n+1)×1 where ~v = (v1 , . . . , vr−1 , 1, 0, . . . , 0)t .

Claim. If h ∈ G and h(~v ) = (h(v1 ), . . . , h(vr−1 ), 1, 0, . . . , 0)t , then M h(~v ) = ~0.

Proof of Claim. The inner product of the j-th row of M with h(~v ) is:

z = gj (x1 )h(v1 ) + · · · + gj (xr−1 )h(vr−1 ) + gj (xr ) · 1.

Apply the automorphism h−1 to z,

h−1 z = h−1 gj (x1 )h(v1 ) + · · · + h−1 gj (xr−1 )h(vr−1 ) + h−1 gj (xr ) · 1

= gi (x1 )v1 + · · · + gi (xr−1 )vr−1 + gi (xr ) · 1 = 0,

since h−1 gj = gi for some i. This proves the claim.

Now we consider, for any h ∈ G

~v − h(~v ) = (v1 , . . . , vr−1 , 1, 0, . . . , 0)t − (h(v1 ), . . . , h(vr−1 ), 1, 0, . . . , 0)t

r−1
z }| {
= (∗, . . . , ∗, 0, . . . , 0)t .

Since M (~v − h(~v )) = ~0 and ~v − h(~v ) has at most r − 1 nonzero entries, ~v − h(~v ) = ~0 by the minimal
choice of r. This means that for all h ∈ G and i = 1, . . . , r − 1, we have h(vi ) = vi . Thus, all the vi
lie in E G = F and (u1 , . . . , un+1 ) = (v1 , . . . , vr−1 , 0, . . . , 0) is a set of elements of F which satisfies
(∗).

Recall that an algebraic extension field E of a field F is a separable extension if the minimal
polynomial of every element of E is separable.

Definition. We call an algebraic extension field E of a field F a normal extension if every

irreducible polynomial in F [x] which has a root in E splits into linear factors in E.

This is equivalent to saying that E contains a splitting field for the minimal polynomial of
every element of E.
144 5. Field Theory

Definition. Normality plus separability, called a Galois extension, mean that every irreducible
polynomial of F [x] which has a root in E is a product of distinct linear factors in E[x].

Also, by the results of the last section, if E is algebraic over F , then E is necessarily separable
over F if the characteristic is zero or if the characteristic is p > 0 and F p = F .
We are now ready to derive our main results, the first of which gives two abstract character-
izations of splitting fields of separable polynomials and some important additional information.
We state this as

Theorem 5.4.4. Let E be an extension field of a field F . Then the following conditions on E/F
are equivalent.
(i) E is a splitting field over F of a separable polynomial f (x).
(ii) F = E G for some finite group G of automorphisms of E.
(iii) E is finite dimensional Galois (normal and separable) over F .
Moreover, if E and F are as in (i) and G = Gal(E/F ), then F = E G and if G and F are as in (ii),
then G = Gal(E/F ).

Proof. (i) ⇒ (ii). Let G = Gal(E/F ). Then E G is a subfield of E containing F . Also it is clear that
E is a splitting field over E G of f (x) as well as over F and G = Gal(E/E G ). Hence, by Lemma
5.4.2, |G| = [E : F ] and |G| = [E : E G ]. Since E ⊇ E G ⊇ F , we have [E : F ] = [E : E G ][E G : F ].
Hence, [E G : F ] = 1, and so E G = F . We have prove also that F = E G for G = Gal(E/F ), which
is the first of the two supplementary statements.
(ii) ⇒ (iii). By Artin’s lemma, [E : F ] ≤ |G|, and so E is finite dimensional over F . Let f (x)
be an irreducible polynomial in F [x] having a root r in E. Let {r = r1 , r2 , . . . , rm } be the orbit of
r under the action of G. Thus, this is the set of distinct elements of the form σ(r), σ ∈ G. Hence,
if σ ∈ G, then the set {σ(r1 ), σ(r2 ), . . . , σ(rm )} is a permutation of {r1 , r2 , . . . , rm }. We have
f (r) = 0 which implies that f (ri ) = 0. Then Qmf (x) is divisible by x − ri , and since the ri , 1 ≤ i ≤ m,
are distinct, f (x) is divisible by g(x) = i=1 (x − ri ). We now apply to g(x) Q the automorphism
m
of
Qm E[x], which sends x → x and a → σ(a) for a ∈ E. This gives σg(x) = i=1 (x − σ(ri )) =
i=1 (x − ri ) = g(x). Since this holds for every σ ∈ G we see that the coefficients of g(x)
are G-invariant.QHence, g(x) ∈ F [x]. Since we assumed f (x) irreducible in F [x] we see that
f (x) = g(x) = (x − ri ), a product of distinct linear factors in E[x]. Thus, E is separable and
normal over F and (iii) holds.
(iii) ⇒ (i). Since we are given that [E : F ] < ∞ we can write E = F (r1 , r2 , . . . , rk ) and each
ri is algebraic over F . Let fi (x) be the minimal polynomial of ri over F . Then the hypothesis Q
implies that fi (x) is a product of distinct linear factors in E[x]. It follows that f (x) = ki=1 fi (x)
is separable and E = F (r1 , r2 , . . . , rk ) is a splitting field over F of f (x). Hence, we have (i).
It remains to prove the second supplementary statement. We have seen that under the hy-
pothesis of (ii) we have [E : F ] ≤ |G|, and that since (i) holds, we have |Gal(E/F )| = [E : F ].
Since G ⊆ Gal(E/F ) and |G| ≥ [E : F ] = |Gal(E/F )|, equivalently G = Gal(E/F ).

The above proof also yields

Corollary 5.4.5. If E/F is the splitting field of f (x) ∈ F [x] and r1 , . . . , rn are distinct roots of
f (x) in E, then G = Gal(E/F ) may be identified with a subgroup of Sn , the group of permutations
of {r1 , . . . , rn }. However, it is not always the case that Gal(E/F ) is the full group of permutations
of the roots of f (x).

There are two observations underlying the above corollary.

1. Each σ ∈ G permutes r1 , . . . , rn .
2. σ ∈ G is determined by its action on r1 , . . . , rn because r1 , . . . , rn generate E as a field over
F , i.e., E = F [r1 , . . . , rn ] = F (r1 , . . . , rn ).
5.4. Automorphisms of Fields and Galois Theory 145

Example 5.4.2. If K is a field, then the polynomial ring K[x1 , . . . , xn ] is an integral domain.
The quotient field of K[x1 , . . . , xn ] is denoted by K(x1 , . . . , xn ) and is called the field of rational
functions in x1 , . . . , xn over K. In the field extension
K ⊂ K(x1 , . . . , xn )
each xi is easily seen to be transcendental over K. In fact, every element of K(x1 , . . . , xn ) not in
K itself is transcendental over K (Prove!).
Let Sn be the symmetric group on n letters. A rational function ϕ ∈ K(x1 , . . . , xn ) is said to
be symmetric in x1 , . . . , xn over K if for every σ ∈ Sn ,
ϕ(x1 , x2 , . . . , xn ) = ϕ(xσ(1) , xσ(2) , . . . , xσ(n) ).
Trivially, every constant polynomial is a symmetric function. More generally, the elementary
symmetric functions in x1 , . . . , xn over K are defined to be the polynomials:
n
X
e1 = x 1 + x 2 + · · · + x n = xi ;
i=1
X
e2 = xi xj ;
1≤i<j≤n
..
.
X
ek = x i1 x i2 . . . x ik ;
1≤i1 <···<ik ≤n
..
.
en = x 1 x 2 . . . x n .
The verification that the ei are indeed symmetric follows from the fact that they are simply the
coefficients of t in the polynomial p(t) ∈ K[x1 , . . . , xn ][t], where
p(t) = (t − x1 )(t − x2 ) . . . (t − xn ) = tn − e1 tn−1 + e2 tn−2 − · · · + (−1)n−1 en−1 t + (−1)n en .
If σ ∈ Sn , then the assignments xi 7→ xσ(i) , i = 1, 2, . . . , n and
f (x1 , . . . , xn )/g(x1 , . . . , xn ) 7→ f (xσ(1) , . . . , xσ(n) )/g(xσ(1) , . . . , xσ(n) )
define a K-automorphism of the field E = K(x1 , . . . , xn ) which will also be denoted σ. The
map Sn → Gal(E/K) given by σ 7→ σ is clearly a monomorphism of groups, whence Sn may be
consider as a subgroup of the Galois group Gal(E/K). Clearly, the fixed field F = E Sn consists
precisely of symmetric functions; that is, the set of all symmetric functions is a subfield of E
containing K. Therefore, by Theorem 5.4.4, E is a Galois extension of F with Galois group
Gal(E/F ) = Sn and dimension |Sn | = n!.
Example 5.4.3. Let K be a field and x1 , x2 , x3 be indeterminates over K, set
e1 = x 1 + x 2 + x 3 , e2 = x 1 x 2 + x 2 x 3 + x 3 x 1 , e3 = x 1 x 2 x 3
and consider the fields
F = K(e1 , e2 , e3 ) ⊆ K(x1 , x2 , x3 ) = E.
The relevant subfields of E are indicated in the diagram
F (x1 ) P
♦♦ PPP
3♦♦♦♦ PPP2
♦♦♦ PPP
♦♦♦ PP
3 2
F = K(e1 , e2 , e3 ) F (x2 ) K(x1 , x2 , x3 ) = E
PPP ♥♥
PPP3 2♥♥♥♥
PPP
PPP ♥♥♥
♥♥♥
F (x3 )
146 5. Field Theory

The fields F (x1 ), F (x2 ) and F (x3 ) are all isomorphic (over F ), but they are distinct subfields of E.
Moreover, E is a splitting field for f (t) = t3 − e1 t2 + e2 t − e3 but F (x1 ), F (x2 ) and F (x3 ) are not.
We know that G = Gal(E/F ) = S3 where S3 is identified with the group of permutations on
3 letters. We next calculate E H when H is a subgroup of G = Gal(E/F ) = S3 . The following is a
diagram of the lattice of subgroups of S3 and there indices.

S3 ❙❍❙❙
❥❥ ❥❥❥❥✈❥✈ ❍❍ ❙❙❙❙
3❥❥❥ ✈✈ ❍❍ ❙❙❙2
❥❥❥ ✈ ✈ ❍❍ ❙❙❙
❥ ✈ 3 ❍❍ ❙❙❙
❥❥❥❥
❥ ✈✈ 3 ❙❙❙
h(12)i ❚❚ h(13)i h(23)i ❦ A3
❚❚❚❚ ❍❍
❍ ✈✈ ❦❦❦❦❦
❚❚❚❚ ❍ ❦
❚❚❚❚ ❍2❍❍❍ 2 ✈✈
✈ ❦❦❦
✈✈❦❦❦❦❦❦ 3
2 ❚❚❚❚❍ ✈
✈❦❦
{(1)}

We have already calculated that E S3 = E G = F and of course E {(1)} = E. It is not hard to verify
that
E h(12)i = F [x3 ], E h(13)i = F [x2 ], E h(23)i = F [x1 ].

It is somewhat more difficult to verify that E A3 = F [∆] where

∆ = (x1 − x2 )(x2 − x3 )(x3 − x1 ).

Note that σ(∆) = ∆ if σ ∈ A3 , but σ(∆) = −∆ if σ ∈ S3 r A3 .

We already know that

[F [x1 ] : F ] = [F [x2 ] : F ] = [F [x3 ] : F ] = 3

and one can verify that [F [∆] : F ] = 2. Thus, we get the following diagrams of all (by Galois
Theory) subfields of E containing F

F = E SP3 ❳❳❳
❢❢ ❢❢ ❢❢❢❢♥♥♥ PPP ❳❳❳❳❳
PPP ❳❳
3 ❢❢❢❢ ♥
❢❢❢❢❢❢❢
♥♥ ♥♥
3
♥
3
PPP ❳❳❳2❳❳❳❳❳❳
❢ ♥♥♥ PP ❳❳❳❳❳
❢❢❢❢❢ ❳
F [x3 ] = E h(12)i h(13)i
F [x1 ] = E h(23)i A3
❳❳❳❳❳ F [x2 ] = E PPP ♥♥ ❣❣❣❣❣
F [∆] = E
❳❳❳❳❳ PPP2 ♥ ❣❣
❳❳❳❳❳ 2 ♥♥ ❣❣❣❣
❳❳❳
P
❳❳❳❳P❳PPP ♥♥♥ ❣❣❣❣❣3❣
2
❳ ♥♥❣♥❣❣❣❣❣❣
E = E {(1)}

The indices are the same as in the lattice diagram for S3 , but inclusions are reversed. Recall
that E is the splitting field of a separable polynomial

f (t) = (t − x1 )(t − x2 )(t − x3 )

for any field in the above diagram. More generally, it is clear that if M/L is a splitting field for
f (t) ∈ L[t] and M ⊇ N ⊇ L, then M/N is a splitting field for f (t), regarded as a polynomial in
N [t].
Furthermore, for each field L in the above diagram, we have L = E H for some subgroup H of
G = S3 and Gal(E/L) = H. On the other hand, things are not so nice for the extensions L/F . For
example, Gal(F [xi ]/F ) = 1 for all i = 1, 2, 3 and Gal(F [∆]/F ) ∼
= Z/(2) = hϕi where the action of
ϕ is ϕ(∆) = −∆. Here ∆2 ∈ F and F [∆] is the splitting field of the polynomial t2 − ∆2 over F , so
it is Galois. However, we may conclude that the fields F [x1 ], F [x2 ] and F [x3 ] are not the splitting
fields of any polynomials over F .
5.4. Automorphisms of Fields and Galois Theory 147

The previous example illustrates the fundamental theorem of Galois theory:

If E/F is the splitting field of a separable polynomial f (t) ∈ F [t], then the map

H ←→ E H = {a ∈ E : ϕ(a) = a for all ϕ ∈ H}

is a 1-1 correspondence between

subgroups of Gal(E/F ) ←→ subfields of E

which reverses inclusions. In addition, H is a normal subgroup of Gal(E/F ) if and only if E H is

the splitting field of some separable polynomial over F (i.e., E H is normal over F ), and if H is
normal in Gal(E/F ), then
Gal(E H /F ) ∼
= Gal(E/F )/H.
In our example, the only proper normal subgroup of S3 is A3 , and

= Z2 ∼
Gal(E A3 /F ) = Gal(F [∆]/F ) ∼ = S3 /A3 = Gal(E/F )/A3 .

We now formally establish Galois’ fundamental group-field pairing as the

Theorem 5.4.6. [Fundamental Theorem of Galois Theory] Let E be a finite dimensional Galois
extension of a field F (i.e., the conditions of Theorem 5.4.4 holds) and let G = Gal(E/F ). Let
Γ = {H}, the set of subgroups of G, and Σ, the set of intermediate fields between E and F (the
subfields of E/F ). Then the map H 7→ E H and K 7→ Gal(E/K), H ∈ Γ, K ∈ Σ, are inverses
to each other. In particular, they are one-to-one correspondences between Γ and Σ. Moreover, the
pairing Γ ↔ Σ has the following properties:
1. H1 ⊇ H2 if and only if E H1 ⊆ E H2 .
2. |H| = [E : E H ] and [G : H] = [E H : F ] = [E H : E G ].
3. H is normal in G if and only if E H is normal over F . In this case,

Gal(E H /F ) ∼
= G/H.

This is the main theorem. Most of our remaining field theory will be consequences of it.

Proof. Let H be a subgroup of G = Gal(E/F ). Since F = E G , F ⊆ E H and E H is thus a subfield

of E containing F . Also, E/E H is Galois. Applying the second supplementary result of Theorem
5.4.4 to H in place of G we see that Gal(E/E H ) = H. By Lemma 5.4.2, |H| = |Gal(E/E H )| =
[E : E H ]. Now let K be any subfield of E/F . Then Gal(E/K) ⊆ G = Gal(E/F ), so Gal(E/K)
is a subgroup of G. It is clear also that E is a splitting field over K of a separable polynomial.
Hence, the first supplementary result of Theorem 5.4.4 applied to the pair E and K shows that
K = E Gal(E/K) . We have now shown that the specified maps between Γ and Σ are inverses.
Also, we know that if H1 ⊇ H2 , then E H1 ⊆ E H2 . Moreover, if E H1 ⊆ E H2 , then we have also
that H1 = Gal(E/E H1 ) ⊇ Gal(E/E H2 ) = H2 . Hence, (1) holds. The first part of (2) was noted
before. Since |G| = [E : F ] = [E : E H ][E H : F ] = |H|[E H : F ] and |G| = |H|[G : H], evidently
[E H : F ] = [G : H]. This proves (2).
−1
If H ∈ Γ, then E ηHη = η(E H ) for all η ∈ G. This is clear since the condition σ(x) = x is
equivalent to (ηση −1 )(η(x)) = η(x). It now follows that H is normal in G if and only if η(E H ) =
E H for every η ∈ G. Suppose H is normal in G. Then every η ∈ G maps E H onto itself and so its
restriction η̄ = η|E H is an automorphism of E H /F . Thus, we have the restriction homomorphism
η → η̄ of G = Gal(E/F ) into Gal(E H /F ). The image Ḡ is a group of automorphisms in E H and
clearly (E H )Ḡ = F . Hence, Ḡ = Gal(E H /F ). The kernel of the homomorphism η → η̄ is the set of
η ∈ G such that η|E H = idE H . By the pairing, this is Gal(E/E H ) = H. Hence, the kernel is H and
Ḡ = Gal(E H /F ) ∼= G/H. Since F = (E H )Ḡ , E H is normal over F by Theorem 5.4.4. Conversely,
suppose E H is normal over F . Let a ∈ E H and let f (x) be the minimal polynomial of a over F .
148 5. Field Theory

Then f (x) = (x − a1 ) . . . (x − am ) in E H [x] where a = a1 . If η ∈ G, then f (η(a)) = 0 which implies

that η(a) = ai for some i. Thus, η(a) ∈ E H . We have therefore shown that η(E H ) = E H . Hence,
H is a normal subgroup of G. This completes the proof of (3).

√ √
Example 5.4.4. Let E = Q[ 2, 3] be a splitting field of f (x) = (x2 − √ 2)(x2 − 3). Then E is
Galois over Q. Let G = Gal(E/Q). Then |G| = [E : Q] = 4. Since Q( 2) is a splitting field
of x2√− 2, it is √ Galois over Q and its Galois group consists of 2 elements, namely σ1 = id and
σ
√2 : 2
√ →
7 − √ 2. Each √ automorphism extends to an automorphism of E √in two√different √ ways;
√
3 7→√ 3 or 3
√ √ →
7 − 3.
√ Then the√four elements
√ √ of G are
√ τ 1 = id E , τ 2 : 2 →
7 2, 3 →
7 − 3,
τ3 : 2 7→ − 2, 3 7→ 3 and τ4 : 2 7→ − 2, 3 7→ − 3. Each of these elements except τ1 has
order 2. Thus, G ∼ = Z2 × Z2 . Hence, the subgroup-intermediate subfield correspondence for the
fundamental theorem of Galois theory is shown in the lattice diagrams

{idE } ♠ E ◗◗◗◗
②②
❊❊
❊❊ ♠♠♠♠♠ ◗◗◗
②②② ❊❊ ♠♠ ♠♠ ◗◗◗
◗◗◗
②②
② ❊❊ ♠ ♠♠♠ ◗
√ √ √
hτ2 i hτ3 i hτ4 i Q[ 2] = E hτ2 i Q[ 3] = E hτ3 i Q[ 6] = E hτ4 i
❋❋ ◗◗◗
❋❋ ①① ◗◗◗ ♠♠♠
❋❋ ①①① ◗◗◗ ♠♠♠♠♠
❋❋ ①① ◗◗◗ ♠
❋ ①① ◗◗ ♠♠♠♠♠
G Q

Exercises 5.4. 1. Let E = F (t) where t is transcendental over F and write any non-zero element
of E as u = f (t)/g(t) where (f (t), g(t)) = 1. Call the maximum of degrees of f and g the degree
of u. Show that if x and y are indeterminates then f (x) − yg(x) is irreducible in F [x, y] and hence
is irreducible in F (y)[x]. Show that t is algebraic over F (u) with minimal polynomial the monic
polynomial which is a multiple in F (u) of f (x) − ug(x). Hence, conclude that [F (t) : F (u)] = 1, and
F (u) = F (t) if and only if deg u = 1. Note that this implies

at + b
u=
ct + d

where ad − bc 6= 0. Therefore, deduce that Gal(E/F ) is the set of maps h(t) 7→ h(u) where u is of
the form indicated.
2. Let F ⊆ K ⊆ E and E Galois over F . Prove that E is Galois over K.
3. Show that every element of K(x1 , . . . , xn ) which is not in K is transcendental over K.
4. Show that in the subgroup-intermediate subfield correspondence given in the fundamental theorem
of Galois theory, the subfield corresponding to the intersection of two subgroups H1 and H2 is the
subfield generated by the composite field E H1 E H2 , the smallest subfield of E generated by E H1
and E H2 , and the intersection of two intermediate fields K1 and K2 corresponds to the subgroup
generated by Gal(E/K1 ) ∪ Gal(E/K2 ).
5. Use the fact that any finite group G is isomorphic to a subgroup of Sn (Cayley’s theorem) to prove
that given any finite group G, there exist fields E and E/F such that Gal(E/F ) = G.
6. Let E = Q(r) where r3 + r2 − 2r − 1 = 0. Verify that r′ = r2 − 2 is also a root of x3 + x2 − 2x − 1 = 0.
Determinep Gal(E/Q). Show that E is normal over Q.
√
7. Let α = 2 + 2 in R, f (x) the minimal polynomial of α over Q and E is a splitting field of f (x)
over Q.
(a) Compute f (x) and [E : Q].
(b) Find G = Gal(E/Q) and draw a lattice diagram for the subgroup-intermediate subfield corre-
spondence for the fundamental theorem of Galois theory.
8. Let (Z/(p))(t) where t is transcendental over Z/(p). Let G be the group of automorphisms generated
by the automorphism of E such that t 7→ t + 1. Determine F = E G and [E : F ].
5.5. Some Consequences of Galois Theory 149

5.5 Some Consequences of Galois Theory

In this section, we shall derive some consequences of Galois theory including another proof of the
fundamental theorem of algebra.

Theorem 5.5.1. Let K be a finite dimensional separable extension of a field F . Then there are
only finitely many fields L such that K ⊇ L ⊇ F .

Proof. Since K/F is finite separable, by primitive element theorem, K = F [α] for some α ∈ K.
Let E be the splitting field of mα,F (x). Then E is Galois over F and E ⊆ K ⊆ F . By fundamental
theorem of Galois theory, the number of intermediate fields between E and F is the number of
subgroups of Gal(E/F ). Hence, the number of intermediate fields between K and F is at most
the number of subgroups of Gal(E/F ).

Remark. If G = Gal(E/F ), then K = E H for some subgroup H of G and the fields L such that
K ⊇ L ⊇ F are in 1-1 correspondence with the subgroups J of G such that G ⊇ J ⊇ H.
The primitive element theorem and the previous theorem both fail for inseparable extensions
as shown in the following example.
Example 5.5.1. Let F be an infinite field of prime characteristic p and let u and v be indetermi-
nates over F . Consider
F (u, v) ⊇ F (up , v p )
It is easy to see that [F (u, v) : F (up , v p )] = p2 . On the other hand, if z ∈ F (u, v), then z p ∈
F (up , v p ), so
[F (up , v p )(z) : F (up , v p )] ≤ p.
Hence, there is no z such that F (u, v) = F (up , v p )(z), that is, no primitive element.
On the other hand, the nonexistence of a primitive element shows that the fields

F (up , v p )(u + αv),

for α ∈ F , are all distinct. To see this, assume that F (up , v p )(u + αv) = F (up , v p )(u + βv) = E for
some α 6= β in E. Then u + αv and u + βv in E, so

α(u + βv) − β(u + αv) = (α − β)u ∈ E.

Since α − β 6= 0, u is in E which implies that v is also in E. Thus, E = F (u, v), a contradiction.

Hence, there are infinitely many fields L such that F (u, v) ⊃ L ⊃ F (up , v p ).
Let us now recall some concepts from group theory.
Suppose a group G acts on a set S. The action is transitive if for any s, t ∈ S there is a g ∈ G
such that gs = t.
Remark. The action of G being transitive simply means that the action of G on S has only one
orbit. Assuming G acts transitively on S. let s ∈ S and let

H = {g ∈ G : gs = s}

be the stabilizer of s. Then S can be identified with the set of left cosets

{gH : g ∈ G},

with G acting by left multiplication. Note that the subgroup H depends on the choice of s and
choosing a different s will give a conjugate of H. More precisely, if s ∈ S and x ∈ G, and

H = stabilizer of s = {g ∈ G : gs = s}
150 5. Field Theory

then
xHx−1 = stabilizer of xs = {g ∈ G : g(xs) = xs}.
(If gs = s, then (xgx−1 )(xs) = xs.)
A basic example of this phenomenon is the action of Sn on {1, 2, . . . , n}. The stabilizer of
i ∈ {1, 2, . . . , n} is Sym{1, . . . , i − 1, i + 1, . . . , n} which may be identified with Sn−1 , but Sn−1 has
n conjugates in Sn .

Theorem 5.5.2. Let E be the splitting field over F of a separable polynomial f (x) ∈ F [x] which is
irreducible over F . Then Gal(E/F ) acts transitively on the roots of f (x). Hence, Gal(E/F ) may
be identified with a subgroup of Sym{r1 , . . . , rn } which acts transitively on {r1 , . . . , rn }, the roots
of f (x) in E.

Proof. This is implicit in the proof of Theorem 5.1.6. For, if r and s are roots of f (x) in E, then

F (r) ∼
= F [x]/(f (x)) ∼
= F (s) with r 7→ x + (f (x)) 7→ s

by an isomorphism which fixes F pointwise. Let η : F (r) → F (s) be this isomorphism. By

Theorem 5.1.6, η extends to an isomorphism η̂ : E → E. Then η̂ ∈ Gal(E/F ) and η̂(r) = s, which
is what we need to prove.

Remarks. 1. The hypothesis that f (x) be irreducible over F is essential. For, example, if
f (x) = f1 (x) . . . fk (x) where f1 (x), . . . , fk (x) are distinct irreducible polynomials, then all
one can say is that Gal(E/F ) permutes the roots of each fi (x) among themselves. It is still
true that Gal(E/F ) can be identified with a subgroup of the group of permutations of the
roots, but not a transitive one.
2. Assume that f (x) is irreducible and separable over F of degree n, E/F is a splitting field
for f (x) over F and r is one root of f (x). Then the fundamental theorem of Galois theory
gives the following picture

E {id E }

F [r] Gal(E/F [r]) = H

n n

F Gal(E/F ).

Thus, F [r] = E H where H is a subgroup of index n in G.

The basic Theorems 5.1.4 and 5.1.6 give the existence and uniqueness of splitting fields. That
is, if F is a field and f (x) is a monic polynomial in F [x], then
1. A splitting field E for f (x) exists. E is generated over F by the roots of f (x) and f (x) splits
into linear factors in E[x].
2. The splitting field E/F is unique up to isomorphism over F . In other words, if E ′ /F is
another splitting field for f (x) over F , then there is an isomorphism

ϕ : E → E′

which is identity on F .
What does this means if we are searching for the splitting field of some f (x) ∈ Q[x]?
It means that we can realize E as a subfield of C. More precisely, f (x) is a product of linear
factors in C[x], say f (x) = (x−α1 ) . . . (x−αk ) and we can take E to be the field Q(α1 , . . . , αk ) ⊆ C.
This could be very helpful because it allows us to work in a concrete and explicit field.
5.5. Some Consequences of Galois Theory 151

The fundamental theorem of algebra (every f (x) ∈ C[x] is a product of linear factors) is usually
proved in complex analysis and there is also a topological proof. Here we present a proof based
on Galois theory and the intermediate value theorem from real analysis or calculus. We shall start
with some basic results.

Theorem 5.5.3. Let f (x) ∈ R[x] be a polynomial of odd degree. Then f (x) has a root in R.

Proof. It is enough to prove for a monic polynomial

f (x) = xn + an−1 xn−1 + · · · + a1 x + a0

with ai ∈ R and n is odd. If a = |a0 | + · · · + |an−1 |, then it is easy to see that f (a) > 0 and
f (−a) < 0. By intermediate value theorem (because f (x) is continuous), there exists r ∈ R such
that f (r) = 0.
p
Consider α + βi with α, β ∈ R. If γ = α2 + β 2 , then
p p
( (γ + α)/2 + i (γ − α)/2)2 = α + βi.

Hence, we have proved

Theorem 5.5.4. Every complex number has a square root.

Theorem 5.5.5. If K is a field containing C, then [K : C] 6= 2.

Proof. Suppose conversely that [K : C] = 2 and let K = C + Cu for some u ∈ K. Then u satisfies
a polynomial
f (x) = x2 − bx + c
of degree two over C, since 1, u, u2 are linearly dependent over C. The roots of f (x) are
√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
2
which lie in C, since every element of C has a square root in C. Thus, u ∈ C, a contradiction.

Recall that a finite p-group G is nilpotent, so by Exercise 3.3, a maximal subgroup M of G is

normal and [G : M ] = p, i.e., if G is a nontrivial finite p-group, then G has a normal subgroup of
index p.

Theorem 5.5.6. [Fundamental Theorem of Algebra] Let f (x) ∈ C[x]. Then f (x) is a product of
linear factors in C[x].

Proof. Let ¯: C → C denote the complex conjugation. Then g(x) = f (x)f (x) ∈ R[x]. Let E be a
splitting field for g(x)(x2 + 1) over R and identify C with the subfield of E generated by the roots
of x2 + 1. Since the characteristic is zero, all polynomials are separable, so E is the splitting field
of a separable polynomial. Hence, E is Galois over R by Theorem 5.4.4.
Let G = Gal(E/R), |G| = 2a m, where m is odd, and let P be a Sylow 2-subgroup of G.
Consider the diagram of fields
E❆
✈✈ ❆❆ a
❆❆2
✈✈✈ ❆❆
✈✈ ❆
✈✈
R[i] = C EP
❍❍ ⑥⑥
❍❍ ⑥⑥
❍❍ ⑥
2 ❍❍❍ ⑥⑥ m
⑥⑥
R
152 5. Field Theory

Thus, E P = {α ∈ E : ϕ(α) = α for all ϕ ∈ P } is an extension of R of odd degree m, by the

fundamental Galois correspondence. If u ∈ E P , the minimal polynomial q(x) of u over R is an
irreducible polynomial in R[x] of odd degree, so it has a root in R by Theorem 5.5.3. Since q(x)
is irreducible, it has degree one. Hence, E P = R and G = P , so |G| = 2a . By the fundamental
theorem of Galois theory, C = E H where H is a subgroup of G of index 2. If H 6= {1}, it has a
subgroup K of index 2, so

2 2
R C = EH EK E.

Thus, [E K : C] = 2 which contradicts Theorem 5.5.5. Hence, |G| = 2, H = {1} and C = E H = E.

Therefore, C is a splitting field for g(x)(x2 + 1) = f (x)f (x)(x2 + 1) over R, so g(x)(x2 + 1) (and
hence f (x)) splits into linear factors in C[x].

The fundamental theorem of algebra was first rigorously proved by Gauss in 1816 (his doctoral
dissertation in 1798 provides a proof using geometric considerations requiring some topological
justification). There was a proof due to Laplace in 1795. However, Laplace’s proof was deemed
unacceptable because he assumed the existence of a splitting field for polynomials (i.e., that the
roots existed somewhere in some field), which had not been established at that time. The elegant
above proof was given by Artin.

5.6 Finite Fields

Let k be a field of q elements. Then (k, +) is an abelian group, so q · 1 = 0. Thus, F is of
characteristic prime p > 0 and p | q, so it contains Z/pZ as a subfield and it is a finite extension
of Z/pZ. Its cardinality |k| = q = pd is a power of p, with d = [k : Z/pZ]. This also indicates that
the additive group of k is a direct sum of d copies of cyclic group of order p. We shall restate the
following fact (Theorem 5.3.7).

Theorem 5.6.1. k × is cyclic of order q − 1.

Some immediate consequences of the above theorem are as follows.

Corollary 5.6.2. The field k consists of the solutions to xq − x = 0 in an algebraic closure of Z/pZ
containing k.

Corollary 5.6.3. There is an element α ∈ k such that k = (Z/pZ)[α], that is, k is a simple
extension of the prime field Z/pZ.

Corollary 5.6.4. For each positive divisor r of q − 1(= |k × |) there are exactly φ(r) elements in k ×
of order r.

Corollary 5.6.5. Let p be a prime and d a positive integer. Then, up to isomorphism, there is
exactly one field of order q = pd .

d
Proof. Let E be a splitting field of f (t) = tp − t over Z/pZ in an algebraic closure of Z/pZ. By
d
Theorem 5.1.6, E is unique up to isomorphism. It consists of the roots of tp = t in the algebraic
d
closure of Z/pZ. Thus, |E| is the number of roots of tp − t. Since f ′ (t) = −1, f (t) is separable, so
|E| = pd . Thus, we have constructed a field of order q = pd , namely E, the splitting field of f (t)
over Z/pZ.
5.6. Finite Fields 153

For q = pd , we may write Fq for the (unique up to isomorphism) field of q elements. Also, we
may write Fp for Z/pZ.

Corollary 5.6.6. Given any positive integer d, there exists an irreducible polynomial of degree n
over Fp .

Proof. By Corollary 5.6.3, Fpd = Fp [α] for some α ∈ Fpd . Let f (t) be the minimal polynomial of α
over Fp . Then Fpd = Fp [α] ∼
= Fp [t]/(f (t)) shows deg f (t) = [Fpd : Fp ] = d.

Next, we shall study finite extensions of a finite field. For simplicity, k stands for the finite
field Fq .
Let kn be a degree n field extension of k. If km is an intermediate field of degree m over k,
then kn is a vector space over km , so m divides n. Conversely, any degree m extension of k within
an algebraic closure of k with m | n is a subfield of kn by Corollary 5.6.2 since m | n implies
(q m − 1) | (q n − 1).
Consider the map σ on kn which sends x to xq . From

σ(x + y) = (x + y)q = xq + y q = σ(x) + σ(y) and σ(xy) = (xy)q = xq y q = σ(x)σ(y),

we see that σ is an endomorphism. Furthermore, σ(x) = xq = 0 implies x = 0. So σ is one-to-one.

As kn is finite, we have shown that σ is an automorphism of kn . Finally, σ(x) = xq = x for x ∈ k,
this shows that σ ∈ Gal(kn /k), called the Frobenius’ automorphism. Let r be the order of σ.
Then
r
σ r (x) = xq = x for all x ∈ kn

implies r = n since kn× is cyclic of order q n − 1. Hence, Gal(kn /k) contains the cyclic group hσi of
order n. Since |Gal(kn /k)| ≤ [kn : k] = n, Gal(kn /k) = hσi and so the field kn is Galois over k.
We record this in

Theorem 5.6.7. The field kn is Galois over k with the Galois group Gal(kn /k) cyclic of order n,
generated by the Frobenius’ automorphism σ.

Note that an element x ∈ kn lies in k if and only if it satisfies xq = x, in other words, if and
only if it is fixed by the Frobenius’ automorphism, or equivalently, by the group Gal(kn /k). Using
G = Gal(kn /k), we define two important maps, called trace and norm, denoted by Trkn /k and
Nkn /k , respectively, from kn to k as follows:

X n
X
Trkn /k : x 7→ τ (x) = σ i (x),
τ ∈G i=1
Y n
Y
Nkn /k : x 7→ τ (x) = σ i (x).
τ ∈G i=1

One check easily that the images of trace and norm maps are in k. It is clear that Trkn /k is a
homomorphism from the additive group kn to the additive group k and Nkn /k is a homomorphism
from kn× to k × . Next we investigate their images. We shall first need

Lemma 5.6.8. If E is an extension field of a field F , then the automorphisms in Gal(E/F ) are
E-linearly independent F -linear transformations.
154 5. Field Theory

Proof. Suppose otherwise. Let a1 τ1 + · · · + ar τr = 0 be a shortest nontrivial linear relation with

a1 , . . . , ar ∈ E × and P
τ1 , . . . , τr ∈ Gal(E/F ). Then r ≥ 2 and τi are distinct. Let y ∈ E be such that
τ1 (y) 6= τ2 (y). From ri=1 ai τi = 0 we get
r
X r
X
ai τi (yx) = ai τi (y)τi (x) = 0
i=1 i=1
Pr
for all x ∈ E, so i=1 ai τi (y)τi = 0. This yields another nontrivial relation
r
X r
X r
X
ai τi (y)τi − τ1 (y) a i τi = ai (τi (y) − τ1 (y))τi = 0,
i=1 i=1 i=2

which is shorter than the relation we started with, a contradiction.

Theorem 5.6.9. [Hilbert Theorem 90]

1. The norm map Nkn /k from kn× to k × is surjective with the kernel consisting of x/σ(x), x ∈ kn× .
2. The trace map Trkn /k from kn to k is surjective with the kernel consisting of x − σ(x), x ∈ kn .

Q Q
Proof. (1) Since Nkn /k (σ(x)) = ni=1 σ i+1 (x) = ni=1 σ i (x) = Nkn /k (x), so x/σ(x) lies in the
kernel of the norm map for all x ∈ kn× . Further, x/σ(x) = y/σ(y) if and only if xy −1 ∈ k × , hence
the elements x/σ(x) with x ∈ kn× form a subgroup of kn× of order (q n − 1)/(q − 1). Thus, it is equal
to the whole kernel if and only if the norm map is surjective. To see Nkn /k is onto, observe that

n
Y 2 n−1 2 +···+q n−1 n −1)/(q−1)
Nkn /k (x) = σ i (x) = x · xq · xq · · · · · xq = x1+q+q = x(q
i=1

for all x ∈ kn× . Hence, any generator x of kn× has Nkn /k (x) of order q − 1.
(2) Since elements in Gal(kn /k) are k-linear maps, the image P of Trkn /k (kn ) is a vector space
over k, hence Trkn /k (kn ) = 0 or k. If Trkn /k = 0, then ni=1 σi = 0, which is a nontrivial
linear relation among elements of Gal(kn /k), so impossible by Lemma 5.6.8. Therefore, Trkn /k
is surjective. Then its kernel has order q n−1 . Clearly, Trkn /k (σ(x)) = Trkn /k (x) so that kernel
contains x − σ(x) for all x ∈ kn . Further, x − σ(x) = y − σ(y) if and only if x − y ∈ k, so the group
{x − σ(x) : x ∈ kn } has order q n /q, thus is equal to the kernel.

Remark. The Hilbert Theorem 90 for norm and trace maps is usually proved using first cohomol-
ogy group of the Galois group (à la Noether). When the base field is finite, we may use counting
argument, as shown above.

Definition. Given z ∈ kn , it defines a k-linear transformation Lz on kn by x 7→ zx, that is,

multiplication by z. The trace and determinant of Lz are defined as the trace and determinant
of any n × n matrix representing Lz .

They are in fact given by Trkn /k and Nkn /k of z. More precisely, we have

Theorem 5.6.10. Let z ∈ kn and define Lz as above. Then

1. Tr Lz = Trkn /k (z) and det Lz = Nkn /k (z).
2. Suppose k(z) = kn . Let f (t) = tn + a1 tn−1 + · · · + an−1 t + an be the minimal polynomial
of z over k. Then
a1 = −Trkn /k (z) and an = (−1)n Nkn /k (z).
5.7. Cyclotomic Extensions 155

Proof. We shall prove (1) and (2) under the assumption (2) and leave (1) for the case k(z) being
a proper subfield kn as an exercise. For each τ ∈ Gal(kn /k), 0 = τ (f (z)) = f (τ (z)), hence
τ (z) is also a root of f (x). Further, if τ and τ ′ are two different elements in Gal(kn /k), then
τ (z) 6= τ ′ (z) (otherwise they would agree on k(z) = kn ). This shows that z has n distinct images
under Gal(kn /k) and they are the roots of f (t). Therefore,

−a1 = the sum of roots of f (t) = Trkn /k (z)

and
(−1)n an = the product of roots of f (t) = Nkn /k (z).
This proves (2). For (1), we know that Lz satisfies f (t) = 0. As f (t) is irreducible over k and
[kn : k] = n, f (t) is the characteristic polynomial of Lz . The companion matrix attached to Lz is
 
0 −an
1 0
 −an−1 

 1 0
 −an−2 

 .. ..  ,

 . . 
 .. 
 0 . 
1 −a1

which has trace = −a1 and determinant = (−1)n an . This proves (1).

Exercises 5.6. 1. Let k6 = F56 be the field with 15625 elements and let k = F5 be its prime subfield.
(a) Determine the cardinality of the set of elements of k6 which generate k6 as a field over k.
(b) Draw a lattice diagram for the subgroup-intermediate subfield correspondence for the funda-
mental theorem of Galois theory of k6 /k.
2. Let k be a finite field with finite extensions km and kmn of degrees m and mn, respectively. Show
that
Trkmn /k = Trkm /k ◦ Trkmn /km and Nkmn /k = Nkm /k ◦ Nkmn /km .
3. Let z ∈ kn . Suppose k(z) = km is a proper subfield of kn . Prove that

Tr Lz = Trkn /k (z) = (n/m)Trkm /k (z) and det Lz = Nkm /k (z)n/m .

4. (a) (Normal Basis Theorem) There exists an element z ∈ kn such that the set {τ (z) : τ ∈ Gal(kn /k)}
is a basis of kn over k. [Hint: Consider the minimal polynomial of the Frobenius’ automorphism σ.]
(b) For z in (a), we have Trkn /k (z) 6= 0. [Hint: Express an element in kn as a k-linear combination
of {τ (z)}. Then show Trkn /k (kn ) = kTrkn /k (z).]

5.7 Cyclotomic Extensions

In this section, we shall study other important examples of Galois extension, called cyclotomic
fields, and compute their Galois groups. Note that “Cyclotomy” is Greek for the art of dividing a
circle into equal parts.

Theorem 5.7.1. Let K be a field of characteristic 0 and let E be a splitting field of xn − 1 over K.
Then Gal(E/K) is isomorphic to a subgroup of Aut Z/(n) ∼ = (Z/(n))× . In particular, Gal(E/K)
is abelian.
156 5. Field Theory

Proof. Since (xn − 1)′ = nxn−1 6= 0, the roots of xn − 1 (in E) are distinct, say

xn − 1 = (x − 1)(x − α2 ) . . . (x − αn ).

Then A = {z ∈ E : z n = 1} = {1, α2 , . . . , αn } is a finite subgroup of E × , so it is cyclic of order n by

Theorem 5.3.7. Any automorphism of E, θ : E → E induces an automorphism θ : A → A, so there
is a group homomorphism from Gal(E/K) to Aut A defined by θ 7→ θ|A . This homomorphism is
1-1 since any automorphism of E/K is completely determined by its action on the roots of xn − 1.
Hence, Gal(E/K) is isomorphic to a subgroup of Aut A = Aut Z/(n).

Definition. We call a Galois extension field E/F abelian [cyclic] over F if Gal(E/F ) is abelian
[cyclic].

Hence, the above theorem provides an example of abelian extension.

Our next objective is to show that if E is a splitting field of xn − 1 over Q, then Gal(E/Q) ∼
=
∼ ×
Aut Z/(n) = (Z/(n)) . We first recall some properties of the cyclic group of order n. Let Z/(n) =
hai. Then
1. For each divisor d of n, Z/(n) has a unique subgroup of order d, generated by an/d .
2. All subgroups of Z/(n) are as in (1). Thus, the number of subgroups of Z/(n) is equal to
the number of divisors of n.
3. If x, y ∈ Z/(n), then

hxi = hyi ⇐⇒ o(x) = o(y)

⇐⇒ θ(x) = y for some θ ∈ Aut Z/(n)
⇐⇒ x and y lie in the same orbit under the action of Aut Z/(n).

Definition. An element ω in a field K is an nth root of unity if ω n = 1, it is a primitive nth

root of unity if o(ω) = n in K × , that is, ω n = 1 and ω m 6= 1 if 1 ≤ m < n.

In the complex numbers C, the nth roots of unity are the powers of

ω = e2πi/n = cos(2π/n) + i sin(2π/n) and ω t = e2πit/n = cos(2πt/n) + i sin(2πt/n).

Thus, Q[ω] is the splitting field of xn − 1 over Q, so [Q[ω] : Q] is the degree of the minimal
polynomial of ω over Q. We know that the set U of the nth roots of unity is a cyclic group of
order n under multiplication. Hence, the number of primitive nth roots of 1, that is, the number
of generators of U , is φ(n).

Definition. For a positive integer d and x an indeterminate, the dth cyclotomic polynomial,
Φd (x) is the product
Y
Φd (x) = {(x − ε) : ε is a primitive dth root of unity}.

If η ∈ Gal(Q[ω]/Q) and z is primitive nth root of unity, then η(z) is primitive. Hence,
η(Φn (x)) = Φn (x) and so Φn (x) ∈ Q[x]. It is clear that Φn (x) | (xn − 1) and, in fact, since
any nth root of unity has an order d | n we see that
Y
xn − 1 = Φd (x). (5.7.1)
d|n
5.7. Cyclotomic Extensions 157

Remark. The formula (5.7.1) provides us with an algorithm for calculating the polynomial Φn (x).
To begin with we have
Φ1 (x) = x − 1
and assuming we already know the Φd (x) for proper divisors d of n then (5.7.1) gives us Φn (x).
For example, for a prime p, Φ1 (x)Φp (x) = xp − 1, so we get
Φp (x) = xp−1 + xp−2 + · · · + x + 1.
Then Φ2 (x) = x + 1 and Φ3 (x) = x2 + x + 1, so
x4 − 1
Φ4 (x) = = x2 + 1
Φ1 (x)Φ2 (x)
x6 − 1
Φ6 (x) = = x2 − x + 1
Φ1 (x)Φ2 (x)Φ3 (x)
x12 − 1
Φ12 (x) = = x4 − x2 + 1.
Φ1 (x)Φ2 (x)Φ3 (x)Φ4 (x)Φ6 (x)
Next, we observe that Φn (x) has integer coefficients. This holds for
Qn = 1 and assuming it
holds for every Φd (x), d < n, we have xn −1 = Φn (x)g(x) where g(x) = d|n;d<n Φd (x) is a monic
polynomial with integer coefficients. The division algorithm gives integral polynomials q(x) and
r(x) with deg r(x) < deg g(x) such that xn − 1 = q(x)g(x) + r(x). Since q(x) and r(x) are unique
in Z[x] and xn − 1 = Φn (x)g(x) in Q[x], we see that Φn (x) = q(x) ∈ Z[x].
We shall now prove

Theorem 5.7.2. The nth cyclotomic polynomial Φn (x) has integer coefficients and is an irreducible
polynomial in Q[x].

Proof. Suppose that Φn (x) = h(x)k(x), where h(x), k(x) ∈ Z[x] and h(x) is irreducible in Z[x],
hence, in Q[x] (Gauss’ lemma). We may also assume that h(x) and k(x) are monic and so
deg h(x) ≥ 1. Let p be a prime integer not dividing n and let δ be a root of h(x). Since (p, n) = 1, δ p
is a primitive nth root of unity. Assume that δ p is not a root of h(x). Then δ p is a root of k(x); con-
sequently δ is a root of k(xp ). Since h(x) is irreducible and has δ as a root also, (h(x), k(xp )) 6= 1
and thus h(x) | k(xp ). It follows (as mentioned earlier) that k(xp ) = h(x)l(x), where l(x) is monic
with integral coefficients. Since xn − 1 = Φn (x)g(x), we have xn − 1 = h(x)k(x)g(x). We now
pass to congruences modulo p or, which is the same thing, to equations in (Z/(p))[x]. This gives
xn − 1̄ = h̄(x)k̄(x)ḡ(x) (5.7.2)
where, in general, if f (x) = a0 xm + a1 xm−1 + · · · + am ∈ Z[x], then f¯(x) = ā0 xm + ā1 xm−1 + · · · +
ām , āi = ai + (p) in Z/(p). Similarly, we have k̄(xp ) = h̄(x)¯l(x). Now, using āp = ā for any a ∈ Z,
we see that
f¯(x)p = (ā0 xm + ā1 xm−1 + · · · + ām )p
= āp0 xpm + āp1 xp(m−1) + · · · + āpm
= ā0 xpm + ā1 xp(m−1) + · · · + ām
= f¯(xp )
for any f (x) ∈ Z[x]. Thus, k̄(x)p = k̄(xp ) = h̄(x)¯l(x) which implies that (h̄(x), k̄(x)) 6= 1. Then
(5.7.2) shows that xn − 1̄ has multiple roots in its splitting field over Z/(p). Since the derivative
(xn − 1̄)′ = n̄xn−1 and n̄ 6= 0, we have (xn − 1̄, (xn − 1̄)′ ) = 1̄, contrary to the derivative criterion for
multiple roots. This contradiction shows that δ p is a root of h(x) for every prime p 6 |n. A repetition
of this shows that δ r is a root of h(x) for every integer r prime to n. Since every primitive nth root
of 1 has the form δ r , (r, n) = 1, we see that h(x) is divisible by every x − δ ′ , δ ′ primitive. Hence,
h(x) = Φn (x) and Φn (x) is irreducible in Q[x].
158 5. Field Theory

As an immediate consequence of Theorem 5.7.2, we get

Theorem 5.7.3. Let ω be a primitive nth root of unity. Then

1. Φn (x) is the minimal polynomial of ω over Q.
2. [Q[ω] : Q] = deg Φn (x) = φ(n), the Euler’s φ-function.
3. Q[ω] is the splitting field of Φn (x) over Q.
4. Gal(Q[ω]/Q) ∼ = (Z/(n))× .

Proof. (1), (2) and (3) are obvious. To prove (4), recall that by Theorem 5.7.1, Gal(Q[ω]/Q)
is isomorphic to a subgroup of (Z/(n))× . Since [Q[ω] : Q] = φ(n) = |(Z/(n))× |, it must be
isomorphic to all of (Z/(n))× .

Theorem 5.7.3 implies that Gal(Q[ω]/Q) is isomorphic to the multiplicative group Un of units
of the ring Z/(n). If n is a prime then we know that this is a cyclic group of order p−1. Moreover, if
n = pe11 pe22 . . . pess , pi distinct primes, then Un is isomorphic to the direct product of the groups Upei .
In addition, we know the structures of Upe from the knowledge of primitive roots in number theory
as follows.

Theorem 5.7.4. 1. U2 and U4 are cyclic and if e > 3, then U2e is a direct product of a cyclic
group of order 2 and one of order 2e−2 .
2. If p is an odd prime, the multiplicative group Upe of units of Z/(pe ) is cyclic.

Example 5.7.1. If ω = e2πi/72 is a primitive 72nd root of unity, then

= U72 ∼
Gal(Q[ω]/Q) ∼ = Z/(2) × Z/(2) × Z/(6).

A finite-dimensional field extension of Q is called a cyclotomic field if it is a subfield of Q[ω]

for some root of unity ω.

Theorem 5.7.5. Let K be a cyclotomic field. Then K is Galois over Q and Gal(K/Q) is abelian.

Proof. Consider Q ⊂ K ⊂ Q[ω] for some nth root of unity ω. By the fundamental theorem of
Galois theory K = Q[ω]H for some subgroup H of G = Gal(Q[ω]/Q) ∼ = (Z/(n))× . Since G is
abelian, H is normal in G, so the fundamental theorem says that K is Galois over Q with Galois
group G/H, an abelian group.

Remark. A deep theorem of Kronecker and Weber says that the converse of Theorem 5.7.5 is
true, namely, “if K is Galois over Q and Gal(K/Q) is abelian, then K is a cyclotomic field, that is,
K ⊂ Q[ω] for some root of unity ω.”

Example 5.7.2. Let ω = e2πi/71 be a primitive 71st root of unity. Then

= Z/(70) ∼
= U71 ∼
G = Gal(Q[ω]/Q) ∼ = Z/(2) × Z/(5) × Z/(7).

Let H = Z/(2) × Z/(5) be the subgroup of G of order 10. Then H is normal in G and conse-
quently we have Q[ω]H is a Galois extension over Q of degree [Q[ω]H : Q] = [G : H] = 7 and
= G/H ∼
Gal(Q[ω]H /Q) ∼ = Z/(7).

We now have enough tools to find the Galois groups of splitting fields of irreducible separable
polynomials xn − a. Note that (xn − a)′ = nxn−1 , so xn − a is separable over a field F if and only
if char F 6 |n. In particular, if F contains a primitive nth root of unity, then char F 6 |n.
5.7. Cyclotomic Extensions 159

Theorem 5.7.6. Let F be a field which contains a primitive nth root of unity ω, i.e., char F not
divide n. Let a ∈ F , f (x) = xn − a, E the splitting field for E over F and r a root of f (x) in E.
Then
(1) The factorization of f (x) in E[x] is

xn − a = (x − r)(x − ωr) . . . (x − ω n−1 r)

and E = F [r].
(2) Let d be the least positive integer such that rd = b ∈ F . Then d divides n and

xd − b = (x − r)(x − εr) . . . (x − εd−1 r)

is the minimal polynomial of r over F where ε = ω n/d , a primitive dth root of unity. In addition,
[E : F ] = d and Gal(E/F ) ∼ = Z/(d). The automorphism α : E → E defined by α(r) = εr
generates Gal(E/F ).

Proof. (1) Since r, ωr, . . . , ω n−1 r are all roots of xn − a, (x − r)(x − ωr) . . . (x − ω n−1 r) must
divide xn − a. Since both polynomials are monic of degree n, they must be equal. Also, ω ∈ F
by hypothesis, so F [r] contains all the roots of xn − a and is generated over F by them. Hence,
E = F [r] by the definition of splitting field.
(2) Since d is the generator of the group {m ∈ Z : rm ∈ F } and n is in this group, d divides n.
Certainly, r is a root of xd − b ∈ F [x]. If xd − b had a proper factor of degree c, 0 < c < d, looking
at its constant term would show that rc ∈ F , contradicting the minimality of d. Thus, xd − b is
irreducible. Hence, [E : F ] = [F [r] : F ] = d, so |Gal(E/F )| = d. On the other hand, one sees that
αi (r) = εi r, so α is an element of Gal(E/F ) of order d. Therefore, Gal(E/F ) = hαi ∼ = Z/(d).

For the sake of clarity, we reformulate Theorem 5.7.6 slightly to emphasize the case where
f (x) is irreducible, which is the important one.

Theorem 5.7.7. Let F be a field which contains a primitive nth root of unity ω and let a ∈ F .
Then xn − a is irreducible if and only if no divisor d of n, d 6= 1, such that a = bd for some b ∈ F .
If xn − a is irreducible and E/F is its splitting field, then [E : F ] = n and Gal(E/F ) ∼= Z/(n).

Example 5.7.3. Let f (x) = xn − p ∈ Q[x] where p is prime. (The essential point is not that p is
prime, but that it is not a proper power.) By Eisenstein’s criterion f (x) is irreducible over Q. If
√
we let r = n p denote the positive real nth root of p and ω = e2πi/n , a primitive nth root of unity,
then the factorization of f (x) in C[x] is

xn − p = (x − r)(x − ωr) . . . (x − ω n−1 r).

Now let E = Q[r, ωr, . . . , ω n−1 r] be a splitting field for f (x), and let ϕ ∈ Gal(E/Q). Then ϕ
permutes {r, ωr, . . . , wn−1 r} and ϕ is completely defined by its action on the set {r, ωr, . . . , ω n−1 r}.
This gives rise to an embedding

Gal(E/Q) ֒→ Sn = Sym{r, ωr, . . . , ω n−1 r}.

Note that ω = (ωr)r−1 , so ω ∈ E. This makes it clear that

E = Q[r, ωr, . . . , ω n−1 r] = Q[ω, r] = Q[ω][r].

Thus, E is generated over Q by two elements ω and r. We also know that E can be generated over
Q by a primitive element. However, using such an element would not simplify the description of
Gal(E/Q).
160 5. Field Theory

Now consider ϕ ∈ Gal(E/Q). Then

ϕ(ω) = ω i and ϕ(r) = ω j r

for some 1 ≤ i ≤ n − 1 such that gcd(i, n) = 1 and 0 ≤ j ≤ n − 1. The choice of i and j completely
determines ϕ and it turns out that all of the above choices do determine automorphisms of E.
Thus,
|Gal(E/Q)| = n · φ(n).
To describe Gal(E/Q) more precisely, let Q[ω] = E H , and for 0 ≤ j ≤ n − 1, let Q[ω j r] =
E Kj . Since Q[ω] is Galois over Q, H is normal in Gal(E/Q). Moreover, by Theorem 5.7.7,
H = Gal(E/Q[ω]) = hτ i ∼= Z/(n) is cyclic of order n with generator τ defined by

τ (ω) = ω and τ (r) = ωr.

The group Kj are more difficult to describe explicitly, but they are all conjugate in Gal(E/Q)
and isomorphic as abstract groups to Gal(Q[ω]/Q) ∼ = (Z/(n))× . We have the following diagram
of subgroups of Gal(E/Q) which does not include all subgroups.

Gal(E/Q)
❡❡❡❣❡❣ ■■
n ❡❡ ❡❡❡❣❡❣❡❣❡❣❡❣❡❣❡❣❣❣ rrrr ■■ φ(n)
■■
❡❡ ❣❣ r
❡❡ ❡ ❡ ❡ ❡❡❡❣❡❣❡❣❡❣❣❣❣❣ r rrrr ■■
■■
❡❡❡❡❡ ❣❣❣❣❣
K0 ❨❡❨❨❨❨❨K
❨❨1❨❨❲❨❲❨❲❲❲❲.❲.❲.❲ Kn−1 ▼ H
❨❨❨❨❨❨❲❲❲❲❲ ▼▼▼ tt
❨❨❨❨❨❨❲❲❲❲❲ ▼ ttt
φ(n)
❨ ❨❨❨❨❨❲❨❲❲❲ ▼▼▼▼
❲ tt
tt n
❨❨❨❲❨❲❨❲❨❲❲▼▼ tt
❨❨❲
1

The corresponding invariant fields are

❣❡❣❡❣ Q ❇❇
❡❡❣❡❡
❡❡❡❣❡❣❡❣❡❣❣ ✈✈✈✈
❡❣❡❣❡❣❣❣
n❡❡❡❡❡❡❣ ❇❇ φ(n)
❡❡❡ ❣❣ ✈✈ ❇❇
❡❡❡❡❡❡❡❡❡❣❡❣❡❣❣❣❣❣❣❣ ✈✈
✈ ❇❇
❡❡❡❡❡ ❣❣❣
Q[r] ❨❡❨❨❨❨❨Q[ωr]
❨❨❨❨❨❨❲❲❲❲❲❲.❲.❲. Q[ω n−1 r] Q[ω]
❍❍
❨❨❨❨❨❨ ❲❲❲❲ ❍❍ ④④
❨❨❨❨❨❨❲❲❲❲❲
❨❨❨❨❨❲❨❲❲❲ ❍❍
❍ ④④④
φ(n) ❨❨❨❨❲❨❲❨❲❨❲❲❍❍❍
❲ ④ n
❨❨❨❲❨❲ ④④
E

As a group, Gal(E/Q) is a semi-direct product H ⋊ Ki for any i.

We conclude this section with the statement of the following theorem on the Galois group of
splitting fields of irreducible separable polynomials xn − a without proof.

Theorem 5.7.8. Let F [ω] be a splitting field for xn − 1 over F where ω is a primitive nth root of
unity. Suppose that a ∈ F and f (x) = xn − a is irreducible over F and let E be a splitting field
for f (x) over F . Let d be the largest divisor of n such that bd = a for some b ∈ F [ω] (possibly
d = 1). Let G = Gal(E/F ) and H = Gal(E/F [ω]). Then H is cyclic of order d and normal in G,
Gal(F [ω]/F ) ∼= G/H is isomorphic to a subgroup of (Z/(n))× and G is isomorphic to a semi-direct
product of H by G/H.

Using the cyclotomic polynomials, we now present the proof of Wedderburn’s theorem as
follows.

Theorem 5.7.9. [Wedderburn, 1909] A finite division ring is a field.

5.7. Cyclotomic Extensions 161

Proof. Let D be a finite division ring. Then the center of D, denoted by F , is a finite field (see
Exercises 2.1). Assume that |F | = q. Since D is a vector space over F , |D| = q n for some n ∈ N.
Also, for an element d ∈ D, the set C(d) = {r ∈ D : rd = dr} is a division ring containing F
and |C(d)| = q m for some m ≤ n, which is strictly less than if d ∈/ F . Thus, the class equation
(Corollary 1.2.8) for the multiplicative group D r {0} is
s s
X X qn − 1
q n − 1 = |F r {0}| + [D r {0} : C(di ) r {0}] = q − 1 + ,
q mi − 1
i=1 i=1

where d1 , d2 , . . . , ds represent the conjugacy classes of D r {0} which contains more than one
element and |C(di )| = q mi for some mi < n for all i. Because each (q n − 1)/(q mi − 1) = [D r {0} :
C(di ) r {0}] is an integer, mi is a proper divisor of n. Thus, the quotient
xn − 1
Φn (x)(xmi − 1)
is a polynomial in Z[x]. Substitute q for x, we see that Φn (q) divides (q n − 1)/(q mi − 1). It follows
from the class equation that Φn (q) divides q − 1 because it divides all the other terms. Then
|Φn (q)| ≤ q − 1. On the other hand, since 1 is the closest point, on the unit circle {z ∈ C : |z| = 1},
to the positive integer q, we have that for every primitive nth root of unity ω j ,

|q − ω j | ≥ q − 1 ≥ 1,

and the first inequality is strict unless ω j = 1, that is, unless 1 is a primitive nth root of unity which
means n = 1. So the product |Φn (q)| of the |q − ω j |’s is greater than or equal to q − 1, with equality
only if n = 1. Because |Φn (q)| is both at most q − 1 and at least q − 1, we get |Φn (q)| = q − 1
and hence n = 1. Therefore, |D| = q = |C(D)|, so D = C(D) which implies D is commutative as
desired.

Given a field F and a polynomial p(x) ∈ F [x], we say that p(x) is solvable by radicals over F
if we can find a finite sequence of fields F1 = F (ω1 ), F2 = F1 (ω2 ), . . . , Fk = Fk−1 (ωk ) such that
ω1r1 ∈ F , ω2r2 ∈ F1 , . . . , ωkrk ∈ Fk−1 and all roots of p(x) lie in Fk .
If K is the splitting field of p(x) over F , then p(x) is solvable by radicals over F if we can find
a finite sequence of fields as above such that K ⊆ Fk . An important remark, and one we shall use
later, in the proof of Theorem 5.7.10, is that if such an Fk can be found, we can, without loss of
generality, assume it to be a normal extension of F . We leave it proof as an exercise.

Theorem 5.7.10. [Galois] Let F be a field which contains a primitive nth root of unity for every
positive integer n. If a polynomial p(x) ∈ F [x] is solvable by radical over F , then the Galois group
over F of p(x) is solvable.

Proof. Let K be the splitting field of p(x) over F . Since p(x) is solvable by radicals, there exists a
finite sequence of fields

F = F0 ⊂ F1 = F (ω1 ) ⊂ F2 = F1 (ω2 ) ⊂ . . . ⊂ Fk = Fk−1 (ωk ),

where ω1r1 ∈ F , ω2r2 ∈ F1 , . . . , ωkrk ∈ Fk−1 and K ⊆ Fk such that Fk is normal over F . As a normal
extension of F , Fk is also a normal of any intermediate fields, hence Fk is a normal extension of
each Fi . Theorem 5.7.6 implies that Fi is a normal extension of Fi−1 and Gal(Fi /Fi−1 ) is abelian
for all i. Thus, by the Galois correspondence, Gal(Fk /Fi ) is a normal subgroup in Gal(Fk /Fi−1 ).
Consider the normal series

Gal(Fk /F0 ) ⊃ Gal(Fk /F1 ) ⊃ Gal(Fk /F2 ) ⊃ . . . ⊃ Gal(Fk /Fk−1 ) ⊃ {1}.

Since Gal(Fk /Fi−1 )/Gal(Fk /Fi ) ∼

= Gal(Fi /Fi−1 ) is abelian for all i, Gal(Fk /F ) is solvable. It
∼
follows that Gal(K/F ) = Gal(Fk /F )/Gal(Fk /K) is solvable by Theorem 3.2.4 (2).
162 5. Field Theory

We make two remarks without proof.

1. The converse of Theorem 5.7.10 is also true; that is, if the Galois group of p(x) over F is
solvable, then p(x) is solvable by radicals over F .
2. Theorem 5.7.10 and its converse are true even if F does not contain roots of unity.
Recall that for n ≥ 5, Sn is not solvable. Thus we have

Corollary 5.7.11. The general polynomial of degree n ≥ 5 over Q is not solvable by radical.

k−1
Exercises 5.7. 1. Prove the following statements. (a) If p is a prime number, then Φpk (x) = Φp (xp ).
(b) If n > 1 is odd, then Φ2n (x) = Φn (−x).
 Φn (xp )
, if p 6 |n,
(c) If p is a prime number, then Φpn (x) = Φn (x)
 p
Φn (x ), if p|n.
2πi/18
2. Let ω = e be a primitive 18th root of unity.
(a) Find the minimal polynomial of ω over Q.
(b) Draw a lattice diagram for the subgroup-intermediate subfield correspondence for the funda-
mental theorem of Galois theory of Q[ω]/Q.
3. Give an example of field E containing the field of rational numbers Q such that E is Galois over Q
and Gal(E/Q) is a cyclic group of order five.
4. Let K be a finite separable extension over F and E its normal closure (smallest normal extension
over F containing K).
(a) Prove that [E : F ] is finite. (b) If Gal(E/F ) is abelian, show that K is normal over F .
5. If p(x) is solvable by radicals over F , prove that we can find a finite sequence of fields
F ⊂ F1 = F (ω1 ) ⊂ F2 = F1 (ω2 ) ⊂ . . . ⊂ Fk = Fk−1 (ωk ),
where ω1r1 ∈ F , ω2r2 ∈ F1 , . . . , ωkrk ∈ Fk−1 containing all the roots of p(x) such that Fk is normal
over F .
6. Assume that xp − a, a ∈ Q, is irreducible in Q[x]. Show that the Galois group of xp − a over Q is
isomorphic to the group of transformations of Z/(p) of the form y 7→ ky + l where k, l ∈ Z/(p) and
k 6= 0.

5.8 Normal Bases

Let E be an extension field of a field F . We have known from Lemma 5.6.8 that the automorphism
in Gal(E/F ) are E-linearly independent F -linear transformations.

Theorem 5.8.1. If E/F is a finite Galois extension with Galois group G = {1, σ2 , . . . , σn }. Then
{u1 , u2 , . . . , un } is a basis for E/F if and only if
 
u1 u2 ... un
 σ2 (u1 ) σ2 (u2 ) . . . σ2 (un ) 
 
det  .  6= 0.
 .. 
σn (u1 ) σn (u2 ) . . . σn (un )

Proof. Call the above matrix M and suppose that det M = 0. Since M ∈ Mn (E), there are
α1 , α2 , . . . , αn ∈ E, not all zero, such that
 
α1 α2 . . . αn M = ~0.

This translates to θ(u1 ) = θ(u2 ) = · · · = θ(un ) = 0 where

θ = α1 1 + α2 σ2 + · · · + αn σn : E → E.
5.8. Normal Bases 163

But θ : E → E is a F -linear map, so θ is the zero map, since it vanishes on u1 , u2 , . . . , un .

Since 1, σ2 , . . . , σn are linearly independent over K, Lemma 5.6.8 says that θ 6= 0, so we have a
contradiction.
Conversely, if u1 , u2 , . . . , un are not a basis for E/F , then there are β1 , β2 , . . . , βn ∈ F , not all
zero, such that
u1 β1 + u2 β2 + · · · + un βn = 0.
Then for any σi ∈ G,

σi (u1 )β1 + σi (u2 )β2 + · · · + σi (un )βn = σi (u1 β1 + u2 β2 + · · · + un βn ) = 0,

 T
so M β1 β2 . . . βn = ~0. Hence, det M = 0.

Note that if |K| = q, then αq − α = 0 for all α ∈ K, so f (x) = xq − x is a nonzero polynomial

but it is a zero function. The next theorem says that such a polynomial cannot exist if K is infinite.

Theorem 5.8.2. Let F be an infinite field and F ⊆ E. If f (x1 , . . . , xn ) is a nonzero polynomial in

E[x1 , . . . , xn ], then there exist α1 , . . . , αn ∈ F such that f (α1 , . . . , αn ) 6= 0.

Proof. We shall use induction on n. For n = 1, since f (x1 ) has only finitely many roots and F is
infinite, there is αi ∈ F such that f (α1 ) 6= 0. Assume that the statement holds for n, and let

f (x1 , . . . , xn+1 ) = f0 (x1 , . . . , xn ) + f1 (x1 , . . . , xn )xn+1 + · · · + ft (x1 , . . . , xn )xtn+1 .

Since f 6= 0, at least one of f0 (x1 , . . . , xn ), . . . , ft (x1 , . . . , xn ) is nonzero, so there are α1 , . . . , αn ∈

F such that f (α1 , . . . , αn , xn+1 ) 6= 0 in E[xn+1 ]. By the one variable case, there is αn+1 ∈ F such
that f (α1 , . . . , αn , αn+1 ) 6= 0.

Theorem 5.8.3. Let F be an infinite field and E/F Galois with Galois group G = Gal(E/F ) =
{1, σ2 , . . . , σn }. Suppose that 0 6= f (x1 , . . . , xn ) ∈ F [x1 , . . . , xn ] where x1 , . . . , xn are indetermi-
nates over F . Then there exists u ∈ E such that f (u, σ2 (u), . . . , σn (u)) 6= 0.

Proof. Let {u1 , . . . , un } be a basis for E/F . By Theorem 5.8.1, the matrix
 
u1 u2 ... un
 σ2 (u1 ) σ2 (u2 ) . . . σ2 (un ) 
 
M = .  ∈ Mn (E)
 .. 
σn (u1 ) σn (u2 ) . . . σn (un )

is invertible. This means that the map on E[x1 , . . . , xn ] defined by

g(x1 , . . . , xn ) 7→ g(u1 x1 + · · · + un xn , . . . , σn (u1 )x1 + · · · + σn (un )xn )

is an isomorphism. Thus,

h(x1 , . . . , xn ) = f (u1 x1 + · · · + un xn , . . . , σn (u1 )x1 + · · · + σn (un )xn )

is a nonzero polynomial in E[x1 , . . . , xn ]. By Theorem 5.8.2, there are a1 , . . . , an in F such that

h(a1 , . . . , an ) 6= 0. Let u = u1 a1 + · · · + un an , this translates to

0 6= h(a1 , . . . , an ) = f (u1 a1 + · · · + un an , . . . , σn (u1 )a1 + · · · + σn (un )an )

= f (u, σ2 (u), . . . , σn (u)),

since σi (u1 )a1 + · · · + σi (un )an = σi (u1 a1 + · · · + un an ) = σi (u).

164 5. Field Theory

Consider E = Q[i] is a Galois extension over Q. Its Galois group is of order two and consists
of the identity map and the complex conjugation. A basis over Q for it is {1, i}. This basis is
not invariant under the Galois action, namely after acting by the complex conjugation, we obtain
{1, −i}. We are showing the existence of a basis for a finite Galois extension which forms a single
orbit under the action of the Galois group. For example, for Q[i], we may use {1 + i, 1 − i}. In the
case of finite fields, this means that each of the basis elements is related to any one of them by
applying the Frobenius’ automorphism repeatedly.

Definition. Let E/F be Galois with Galois group G = Gal(E/F ) = {σ1 , . . . , σn }. A normal
basis for E/F is a basis of the form {σ1 (u), . . . , σn (u)} for some u ∈ E.

Theorem 5.8.4. [Normal Basis Theorem] Let E/F be a Galois extension with Galois group G =
Gal(E/F ) = {σ1 , . . . , σn }. Then E/F has a normal basis.

Proof. We shall assume that F is infinite and leave the finite case as an exercise (see Exercise 5.6).
Let u ∈ E. By Theorem 5.8.1, {σ1 (u), σ2 (u), . . . , σn (u)} is a basis for E/F if and only if
 2 
σ1 (u) σ1 σ2 (u) . . . σ1 σn (u)
 σ2 σ1 (u) σ 2 (u) . . . σ2 σn (u)
 2 
det  ..  6= 0.
 . 
σn σ1 (u) σn σ2 (u) . . . σn2 (u)

Note that the entries in each row or column of the above matrix, call M , are a permutation of
the elements σ1 (u), . . . , σn (u). In other words, each σi (u) occurs exactly once in each row and
column of M . Thus,
M = σ1 (u)A1 + · · · + σn (u)An
where each Ai is a permutation matrix (a matrix with a single entry 1 in each row and column
and the remaining entries zero). Since det Ai = ±1, we see by inspection that if x1 , . . . , xn are
indeterminates over E

f (x1 , . . . , xn ) = det(x1 A1 + · · · + xn An ) = ±xn1 ± · · · ± xnn + other terms

In particular, f (x1 , . . . , xn ) is a nonzero polynomial in E[x]. By Theorem 5.8.3, there is a ū ∈ E

such that f (σ1 (ū), . . . , σn (ū)) 6= 0. This translates to

0 6= f (σ1 (ū), . . . , σn (ū)) = det(σ1 (ū)A1 + · · · + σn (ū)An ) = det M.

Hence, σ1 (ū), . . . , σn (ū) is a desired normal basis for E/F .

√ √
Exercises 5.8. 1. Determine a normal basis for the field Q( 2, 3) over Q by using the Galois group
in Example 5.4.4.
2. Determine a normal basis for the cyclotomic field Q(e2πi/p ) over Q where p is a prime number.

5.9 Transcendental Extensions

Most of extension fields seen in the previous section are algebraic. In this section, we shall present
some results on transcendental extension. The final theorem, namely Lüroth’s theorem, has many
applications in algebraic geometry and function field theory.
5.9. Transcendental Extensions 165

Definition. Let F be a subfield of a field E and let x1 , x2 , . . . be independent indeterminates

over E. An element z ∈ E is transcendental over F if the homomorphism F [x1 ] → E defined
by f (x1 ) 7→ f (z) is one-to-one. We call z ∈ E algebraic over F if it is not transcendental over
F . A finite set {z1 , . . . , zn } ⊂ E is algebraically independent over F if the homomorphism
F [x1 , . . . , xn ] → E defined by f (x1 , . . . , xn ) 7→ f (z1 , . . . , zn ) is one-to-one. (Note that the empty
set is algebraically independent since F ֒→ E is one-to-one.) An arbitrary subset Z of E is
algebraically independent over F if all of its finite subsets are algebraically independent. A
subset Z of E is algebraically dependent if it is not algebraically independent.

Remarks. 1. If z is transcendental over F , then F [z] ∼= F [x1 ], so F [z] is not a field and F [z] is
infinite dimensional over F .
2. If z is algebraic over F , then F [z] ∼
= F [x1 ]/(f (x1 )) where f (x1 ) is the minimal polynomial
of z over F . Thus, F [z] = F (z) is a field and F [z] is finite dimensional over F .

Example 5.9.1. Let F ⊂ F (y, z) ⊂ E where y and z are independent indeterminates over F . Then
{y 2 , z 2 } is an algebraically independent set but {y 2 , yz, z 2 } is not (for, if f (x1 , x2 , x3 ) = x1 x3 − x22 ,
then f (y 2 , yz, z 2 ) = 0).

Definition. Let F be a subfield of a field E. E is algebraic over F if each element of E is

algebraic over F . E is purely transcendental over F if it is isomorphic (by an isomorphism
which is the identity on F ) to F ({xα }) where {xα } is a (possibly infinite) set of independent
indeterminates.

Theorem 5.9.1. Let F be a subfield of a field E.

1. There exists a subset X of E (possibly X is empty) such that
(a) X is algebraically independent over F .
(b) X is maximal among algebraically independent sets, in the sense: If X ⊆ Y ⊆ E and
X 6= Y , then Y is not algebraically independent.
2. F (X) is purely transcendental over F and E is algebraic over F (X).
E
algebraic

F (X)
purely transcendental

Proof. (1) Let S = {X ⊆ E : X is algebraically independent}. Since the empty set S is alge-
braically independent, S is nonempty. Let {Xα }α∈Λ be a chain in S . Let {z1 , . . . , zn } ⊆ α∈Λ Xα .
Then ∀i, ∃αi ∈ Λ, zi ∈ Xαi . Since {Xα }α∈Λ is a chain, we may rearrange αi so that there exists
j ∈ Λ such that zi ∈ Xαj for all i. Since Xαi is algebraically independent, so is {z1 , . . . , zn }. Thus,
S
α∈Λ Xα is an upper bound of this chain in S . By Zorn’s Lemma, S has a maximal element, say
X. Hence, F (X) is purely transcendental over F . The maximality of X implies that E must be
algebraic over F .
(2) The definition of algebraically independent means that F (X) is purely transcendental over F .
Consider z ∈ E. If z ∈ X ⊂ F (X), then z is algebraic over F (X). If z ∈ / X, the set X ∪ {z} is alge-
braically dependent, so for some n there is a nonzero polynomial f (x1 , . . . , xn , xn+1 ) (x1 , . . . , xn+1
are indeterminates over F ) and a1 , . . . , an ∈ X such that f (a1 , . . . , an , z) = 0. The polynomial
f (x1 , . . . , xn , xn+1 ) cannot be a polynomial in only x1 , . . . , xn , since {a1 , . . . , an } is an algebraically
independent set. Write

f (x1 , . . . , xn , xn+1 ) = f0 (x1 , . . . , xn ) + f (x1 , . . . , xn )xn+1 + · · · + fr (x1 , . . . , xn )xrn+1 .

166 5. Field Theory

Thus, f (a1 , . . . , an , xn+1 ) ∈ F (X)[xn+1 ] is a nonzero polynomial having z as a root, so z is alge-

braic over F (X). Hence, E is algebraic over F (X).

Remark. There is no uniqueness for the field F (X). For example, if E = F (t) where t is an
indeterminate, then we can take X = {p(t)/q(t)} where p(t)/q(t) is any element of E which
is not in F . In this case [E : F (p(t)/q(t))] = n where n = max{deg p(t), deg q(t)} (Theorem
5.9.3). However, we shall see shortly that the number of elements in the set X is independent of
particular set X.

Definition. Let F be a subfield of E. A maximal algebraically independent (over F ) subset of

E is called a transcendence basis for E/F .

Remark. By Theorem 5.9.1, a transcendence basis for E/F exists. It may be empty, which hap-
pens precisely when E is algebraic over F . Also, E is purely transcendental over F if it has a
transcendence base B such that E = F (B).

Theorem 5.9.2. Let F be a subfield of E. Then any two transcendence bases for E/F have the
same cardinality.

Definition. We call the number of elements of transcendence bases of E the transcendence

degree of E/F .

For example, an algebraic extension has transcendence degree zero; F (x) has transcendence
degree one over F ; in general, F ((xα )α∈Λ ) has transcendence degree |Λ| over K.
The purely transcendental extension fields E/F , especially those having a finite transcendence
degree, appear to be the simplest type of extension fields. It is clear that such a field is isomor-
phic to the field of fractions F (x1 , . . . , xn ) of the polynomial ring F [x1 , . . . , xn ] in indeterminates
x1 , . . . , xn . Even though these fields look quite innocent, there are difficult and unsolved problems
particularly on the nature of the subfields of F (x1 , . . . , xn )/F . The one case where the situation
is quite simple is that in which E has transcendence degree one. We shall consider this case and
close this chapter.
Let E = F (t), t transcendental, and let u ∈ E, ∈ / F . We can write u = f (t)/g(t) where
f (t), g(t) ∈ F [t] and (f (t), g(t)) = 1. If n is the larger of the degrees of f (t) and g(t), then we can
write
f (t) = a0 + a1 t + · · · + an tn and g(t) = b0 + b1 t + · · · + bn tn ,
ai , bi ∈ F , and either an or bn 6= 0. We have f (t) − ug(t) = 0, so

(an − ubn )tn + (an−1 − ubn−1 )tn−1 + · · · + (a0 − ub0 ) = 0 (5.9.1)

and an − ubn 6= 0 since either an 6= 0 or bn 6= 0 and u ∈

/ F . Thus, (5.9.1) shows that t is algebraic
over F (u) and [F (t) : F (u)] ≤ n. We prove the following more precise result.

Theorem 5.9.3. Let E = F (t), t transcendental over F , and let u ∈ F (t), ∈ / F . Write u =
f (t)/g(t) where (f (t), g(t)) = 1, and let n = max{deg f (t), deg g(t)}. Then u is transcendental
over F , t is algebraic over F (u), and [F (t) : F (u)] = n. Moreover, the minimal polynomial of t
over F (u) is a multiple in F (u) of f (x, u) = f (x) − ug(x).

Proof. Put f (x, y) = f (x) − yg(x) ∈ F [x, y], x, y indeterminates. This polynomial in x and y
is of first degree in y and it has no factor h(x) of positive degree since (f (x), g(x)) = 1. Thus,
it is irreducible in F [x, y]. Now t is algebraic over F (u) so if u were algebraic over F , then
t would be algebraic over F , contrary to the hypothesis. Hence, u is transcendental over F .
5.9. Transcendental Extensions 167

Then F [x, u] ∼ = F [x, y] under the isomorphism over F fixing x and mapping u into y and hence
f (x, u) is irreducible in F [x, u]. It turns out that f (x, u) is irreducible in F (u)[x]. Since f (t, u) =
f (t) − ug(t) = 0, it follows that f (x, u) is a multiple in F (u)[x] of the minimal polynomial of t
over F (u). Therefore, [F (t) : F (u)] is the degree in x of f (x, u). This degree is n, so the proof is
complete.

We can determine all of the subfields E/F for E = F (t), t transcendental: These have the
form F (u) for some u. This important result is called the Lüroth’s Theorem.

Theorem 5.9.4. [Lüroth] If E = F (t), t transcendental over F , then any subfield K of E/F ,
K 6= F , has the form F (u), u transcendental over F .

Proof. Let v ∈ K, ∈/ F . Then we have seen that t is algebraic over F (v). Thus, t is algebraic
over K. Let f (x) = xn + k1 xn−1 + · · · + kn be the minimal polynomial of t over K, so the
ki ∈ K and n = [F (t) : K]. Since t is not algebraic over F , some kj ∈ / F . We shall show
that K = F (u), u = kj . We can write u = g(t)/h(t) where g(t), h(t) ∈ F [t], (g(t), h(t)) = 1 and
m = max{deg g(t), deg h(t)} > 0. Then, by Theorem 5.9.3, [E : F (u)] = m. Since K ⊃ F (u) and
[E : K] = n, we evidently have m ≥ n and equality holds if and only if K = F (u). Now t is a root
of the polynomial g(x) − uh(x) ∈ K[x]. Hence, we have a q(x) ∈ K[x] such that

g(x) − uh(x) = q(x)f (x). (5.9.2)

The coefficient ki of f (x) is in F (t), so there exists a nonzero polynomial c0 (t) of least degree such
that c0 (t)ki = ci (t) ∈ F [t] for 1 ≤ i ≤ n. Then c0 (t)f (x) = f (x, t) = c0 (t)xn + c1 (t)xn−1 + · · · +
cn (t) ∈ F [x, t], and f (x, t) is primitive as a polynomial in x, that is, the ci (t) are relatively prime.
The x-degree of f (x, t) is n. Since kj = g(t)/h(t) with (g(t), h(t)) = 1, the t-degree of f (x, t) is
≥ m. Now replace u in (5.9.2) by g(t)/h(t) and the coefficients of q(x) by their expressions in t.
There exist, therefore, ϕ(t) and q(x, t) ∈ F [x, t] such that

ϕ(t)[g(x)h(t) − g(t)h(x)] = f (x, t)q(x, t).

Since the coefficients c0 (t), c1 (t), . . . , cn (t) of f (x, t) have no common factor, we know that ϕ(t)
divides q(x, t). Hence, we may assume ϕ(t) = 1. It turns out that there exists a polynomial
q ′ (x, t) ∈ F [x, t] such that
g(x)h(t) − g(t)h(x) = f (x, t)q ′ (x, t).
Since the t-degree of the left-hand side is ≤ m and that of f (x, t) is ≥ m, it follows that this
degree is m and q ′ (x, t) = q ′ (x) ∈ F [x]. Then the right-hand side is primitive as a polynomial in x
and so is the left-hand side. By symmetry the left-hand side is primitive as a polynomial in t also.
Hence, q ′ (x) = q ′ ∈ F . Thus, f (x, t) has the same x-degree and t-degree so m = n, which implies
that K = F (u).

Exercises 5.9. 1. Prove that there is no intermediate field K with Q ⊆ K $ C with C purely transcen-
dental over K.
2. Prove that a purely transcendental proper extension of a field is never algebraically closed.
3. Let E = F (t, v), where t is transcendental over F and v 2 + t2 = 1. Show that E is purely transcen-
dental over F .
168 5. Field Theory
6 | Applications

This chapter demonstrates some aspects in doing research in algebra. In the first section, we see
some applications of module theory, especially a free R-module over commutative rings (§4.2),
to obtain a structure theorem for finite dimensional symplectic spaces over a local ring. In what
follows, we define the symplectic graphs over a commutative ring and study strong regularity,
vertex and arc transitivity and its chromatic number. Although the problems seem combinatorial,
it contains many algebraic topics discussed throughout this book such as group actions (§1.2),
local rings and the structure of a finite commutative ring (§4.6) and the finite fields (§5.6). Here,
we follow the work of the author published in Discrete Mathematics [30] and European Journal
of Combinatorics [31, 32].

6.1 Symplectic Spaces

A bilinear form and a symplectic form for an R-module are defined analogously as for a vector
space.

Definition. Let R be a commutative ring and V a left R-module. A bilinear form on V is a

map β : V × V → R which is R-linear in both variables. That is,

β(a~x + b~y , ~z) = aβ(~x, ~z) + bβ(~y , ~z) and β(~x, a~y + b~z) = aβ(~x, ~y ) + bβ(~x, ~z)

for all ~x, ~y , ~z ∈ V and a, b ∈ R.

Definition. A bilinear form β is called symplectic if ∀~x ∈ V, β(~x, ~x) = 0.

Remark. If a bilinear form β is symplectic then

0 = β(~x + ~y , ~x + ~y ) = β(~x, ~x) + β(~y , ~x) + β(~x, ~y ) + β(~y , ~y ) = β(~y , ~x) + β(~x, ~y )

for all ~x, ~y ∈ V . That is, any symplectic bilinear form is also skew-symmetric.

Definition. For an R-submodule W of V , we write W ⊥ (read “W perp”) for the submodule

{~x ∈ V : ∀w
~ ∈ W, β(~x, w)
~ = 0}, called the orthogonal complement of W .

Example 6.1.1. Consider V = Z2 as a vector space over Z2 . The bilinear form β(x, y) = xy is
skew-symmetric but not symplectic because β(1, 1) = 1 6= 0.

Definition. A bilinear form β : V ×V → R is called regular or non-degenerate or non-singular

if
1. ∀f ∈ HomR (V, R), ∃~x0 , ~y0 ∈ V, f (~x) = β(~x0 , ~x) and f (~x) = β(~x, ~y0 ).
2. If ~y ∈ V and ∀~x ∈ V, β(~x, ~y ) = 0, then ~y = ~0. Similarly, if ~y ∈ V and ∀~x ∈ V, β(~y , ~x) = 0,
then ~y = ~0.

169
170 6. Applications

Example 6.1.2. Let p be a prime number and let R be the ring of integers modulo pn , Zpn , or the
field of pn elements, Fpn , where n ∈ N. For ν ≥ 1, let V denote the set of 2ν-tuples (a1 , . . . , a2ν )
of elements in R. Define β : V × V → R by the product


β (a1 , . . . , a2ν ), (b1 , . . . , b2ν ) = (a1 , . . . , a2ν ) K (b1 , . . . , b2ν )t ,
 
0 Iν
where K = and Iν is the ν × ν identity matrix, for all vectors (a1 , . . . , a2ν ),
−Iν 0 2ν×2ν
(b1 , . . . , b2ν ) ∈ V . Then β is a non-degenerate symplectic bilinear form.

Definition. Let R be a commutative ring and V a free R-module of rank n where n ≥ 2. Let β
be a non-degenerate symplectic bilinear form. We call the pair (V, β) a symplectic space. An
R-module automorphism σ on V is an isometry on V if β(σ(~x), σ(~y )) = β (~x, ~y ) for all ~x, ~y ∈ V .
The group of isometries on V is called the symplectic group of (V, β) over R and denoted by
SpR (V ).

Definition. Let R be a commutative ring and (V, β) a symplectic space, where V is a free R-
module of rank n ≥ 2. A vector ~x in V is said to be unimodular if there is an f in HomR (V, R)
with f (~x) = 1; equivalently, if ~x = α1~b1 + · · · + αn~bn , where {~b1 , . . . , ~bn } is a basis for V , then
the ideal (α1 , . . . , αn ) = R. If ~x is unimodular, then the line Rx is a free R-direct summand of
rank one. A hyperbolic pair {~x, ~y } is a pair of unimodular vectors in V with the property that
β (~x, ~y ) = 1. The module H = R~x ⊕ R~y is called a hyperbolic plane.

Note that when R is a field, unimodular vectors coincide with nonzero vectors. When R is a
local ring, we have a criterion to determine whether a vector in V is unimodular as follows.

Theorem 6.1.1. Let R be a local ring and (V, β) a symplectic space, where V is a free R-module
of rank n ≥ 2 with basis {~e1 , . . . , ~en }. A vector ~x = a1~e1 + · · · + an~en in V is unimodular if and
only if ai is a unit of R for some i ∈ {1, . . . , n}.

Proof. If some ai is a unit in R, then (a1 , . . . , an ) = R, so ~x is unimodular. Conversely, assume

that ~x is unimodular. Then there exists an f ∈ V ∗ such that 1 = f (~x) = a1 f (~e1 ) + · · · + an f (~en ).
Suppose that ai is not a unit in R for all i. Since R is a local ring, ai ∈ M for all i, and thus
a1 f (~e1 ) + · · · + an f (~en ) ∈ M . By Theorem 4.6.1 (3), 0 = 1 − (a1 f (~e1 ) + · · · + an f (~en )) is a unit in
R, which is a contradiction. Therefore, ai is a unit of R for some i ∈ {1, . . . , n}.

In addition, if R is a local ring, we show that the rank of symplectic space (V, β) must be even.
Let {~x, ~y } be a hyperbolic pair of unimodular vectors in V and H = R~x ⊕ R~y the corresponding
hyperbolic plane. Then for ~z ∈ V , it is easy to see that the vector w
~ = ~z − β(~z, ~y )~x + β(~z, ~x)~y is in
⊥
H , and so ~z can be decomposed as the sum

~ + (β(~z, ~y )~x − β(~z, ~x)~y )

~z = w

of vectors in H ⊥ and H, respectively. Since β is non-degenerate, H ∩ H ⊥ = {~0}. Thus, V =

H ⊕ H ⊥.

Notation. If W1 and W2 are R-submodule of an R-module V and β(w

~ 1, w ~ 1 ∈ W1
~ 2 ) = 0 for all w
~ 2 ∈ W2 , we write W1 ⊥W2 .
and w

Moreover, any unimodular vector ~u may be complemented to a hyperbolic pair as follows.

First note that there is an f ∈ HomR (V, R) such that f (~u) = 1. Since β is non-degenerate, there
is a ~v ∈ V with 1 = f (~u) = β(~u, ~v ). Then {~u, ~v } is a hyperbolic pair. Combining this with the
previous observation, we have the first part of the following results.
6.2. Symplectic Graphs 171

Theorem 6.1.2. Let R be a local ring. Let (V, β) be a symplectic space over R of rank ≥ 2. Then
V splits as an orthogonal direct sum V = H⊥H ⊥ for some hyperbolic plane H. Moreover, H ⊥ is
a free R-module. Therefore, V is an orthogonal direct sum V = H1 ⊥H2 ⊥ . . . ⊥Hm of hyperbolic
planes H1 , H2 , . . . , Hm . In particular, the rank of V is even.

Note that H ⊥ is a direct summand of the free module V . By Corollary 4.3.4, it is finitely
generated and projective. Then this theorem follows directly from the next lemma.

Lemma 6.1.3. A finitely generated projective module V over a local ring R is free.

Proof. Let M be the unique maximal ideal in R. Choose ~v1 , . . . , ~vt ∈ V so that the cosets {~v1 +
M V, . . . , ~vt +M V } is a basis for the vector space V /M V over the field R/M . Here, the scalar
P action
is given by (c + M )(~x + M V ) = c~x + M V . Let ϕ : Rt → V be defined by ϕ(r1 , . . . , rt ) = ti=1 ri~vi .
By Remark after Theorem 4.6.1, ϕ is onto. Since V is projective, Rt = K ⊕ L where K = ker ϕ
and L ∼ = M . Then K is finitely generated. Since ϕ induces an isomorphism from Rt /M Rt to
V /M V , it follows that K/M K ⊕ L/M L ∼ = V /M V . These are finite dimensional vector spaces
over the field R/M . Comparing dimensions yields K/M K = 0. Thus, K = {~0} by Nakayama’s
lemma. Hence, ϕ is an isomorphism.

6.2 Symplectic Graphs

The general symplectic graph associated with nonsingular alternate matrices over a field is studied
by Tang and Wan [33] as a new family of strongly regular graphs. Meemark and Prinyasart [30]
introduced the symplectic graph GSpR (V ) for a symplectic space V over a commutative ring R.
They showed that their symplectic graph is vertex transitive and arc transitive when R = Zpn , p
is an odd prime and n ≥ 1. There are many articles influenced by this definition such as [28],
[29], [24] and [23]. Mostly, the work was on strong regularity, automorphism groups, vertex and
arc transitivities, chromatic numbers and subconstituents of symplectic graphs over a finite field,
modulo pn , and modulo pq, where p and q are primes and n ≥ 1. Recently, Meemark and Puirod
[31] studied those topics over finite local rings and obtained results parallel to [33], [30], [28],
[29] and [23].

Definition. Let R be a commutative ring and (V, β) a symplectic space, where V is a free R-
module of rank 2ν, ν ≥ 1. Define the graph GSpR (V ) with vertex set is the set of lines {R~x : ~x is
a unimodular vector in V } and with adjacency given by

R~x is adjacent to R~y ⇔ β(~x, ~y ) ∈ R× .

Here, R× denotes the group of invertible elements in R. We call GSpR (V ) , the symplectic graph
of (V, β) over R.

Let R be a local ring with unique maximal ideal M and let (V, β) be a symplectic space of
rank 2ν, where ν ≥ 1. By Theorem 6.1.2, V possesses a canonical basis {~e1 , . . . , ~e2ν } such
that {~ej , ~eν+j } is a hyperbolic pair for all 1 ≤ j ≤ ν and V is an orthogonal direct sum V =
H1 ⊥H2 ⊥ . . . ⊥Hν , where Hj = R~ej ⊕ R~eν+j is a hyperbolic plane for all 1 ≤ j ≤ ν.
Let R be a local ring. If R is finite, Theorem 6.1.1 gives the number of vertices of GSpR (V ) ,
namely,
|R|2ν − |M |2ν
|V (GSpR (V ) )| = |{R~x : ~x is a unimodular vector in V }| = .
|R× |
172 6. Applications

Write unimodular vectors ~a = a1~e1 +· · ·+a2ν ~e2ν and ~b = b1~e1 +· · ·+b2ν ~e2ν for some ai , bi ∈ R.
Then

β(~a, ~b) = β(a1~e1 + . . . + a2ν ~e2ν , b1~e1 + . . . + b2ν ~e2ν )

2ν X
X 2ν
= ai bj β(~ei , ~ej )
i=1 j=1
Xν
= (ai bν+i − aν+i bi )
i=1

because β(~ei , ~ei ) = 0, β(~ei , ~eν+i ) = 1 and β(~ei , ~ej ) = −β(~ej , ~ei ) for all i, j ∈ {1, . . . , 2ν}. Hence,
the adjacency condition becomes
ν
X
R~a is adjacent to R~b if and only if (ai bν+i − aν+i bi ) ∈ R× .
i=1

We shall use it in the next lemma.

Lemma 6.2.1. Let R be a local ring with unique maximal ideal M and let (V, β) be a symplectic
space of R-dimension 2ν, where ν ≥ 1. Let ~a = a1~e1 + · · · + a2ν ~e2ν and ~b = b1~e1 + · · · + b2ν ~e2ν be
unimodular vectors in V and assume that ai ∈ R× for some i ∈ {1, . . . , 2ν}. If R~a is adjacent to
R~b, then ai bl − al bi is a unit for some l ∈ {1, . . . , 2ν} and l 6= i.

Proof. Assume that ai bl − al bi ∈ M for all l ∈ {1, . . . , 2ν}. Then

ν
X ν
X ν
X
(ai aj bν+j − aν+j aj bi ) − (ai aν+j bj − aj aν+j bi ) = ai (aj bν+j − aν+j bj ) ∈ M,
j=1 j=1 j=1
Pν
which implies j=1 (ai bν+j − aν+j bj ) ∈ M . Thus, R~a is not adjacent to R~b.

Theorem 6.2.2. (Theorem 2.4 of [31]) Let R be a finite local ring and let (V, β) be a symplectic
space of dimension 2ν, where ν ≥ 1.
1. The symplectic graph GSpR (V ) is |R|2ν−1 -regular.
2. Every two adjacent vertices of GSpR (V ) has |R|2ν−2 R× common neighbors.
3. Every two non-adjacent vertices of GSpR (V ) has |R|2ν−2 |R× | or |R|2ν−1 common neighbors.

Proof. Let ~a = a1~e1 + · · · + a2ν ~e2ν and ~b = b1~e1 + · · · + b2ν ~e2ν be unimodular vectors in V and
assume that R~a is adjacent to R~b. Since ~a is unimodular, there exists an i ∈ {1, . . . , 2ν} such that
ai ∈ R× . If i ≤ ν, then

bν+i = a−1
i r + (aν+1 b1 − a1 bν+1 ) + (aν+2 b2 − a2 bν+2 ) + · · ·
+ (aν+i−1 bi−1 − ai−1 bν+i−1 ) + aν+i bi + (aν+i+1 bi+1 − ai+1 bν+i+1 ) + · · ·


+ (a2ν bν − aν b2ν )

for some r ∈ R× and if i > ν, then

bi−ν = a−1
i (a1 bν+1 − aν+1 b1 ) + (a2 bν+2 − aν+2 b2 ) + · · ·
+ (ai−1−ν bi−1 − ai−1 bi−1−ν ) + ai−ν bi + (ai+1−ν bi+1 − ai+1 bi+1−ν ) + · · ·


+ (aν b2ν − a2ν bν ) − s

for some s ∈ R× . Therefore, there are |R|2ν−1 classes adjacent to the vertex R~a, and hence
GSpR (V ) is |R|2ν−1 -regular. This proves (1).
6.2. Symplectic Graphs 173

Next, we let ~x = x1~e1 + · · · + x2ν ~e2ν be a unimodular vector in V such that R~x is a common
neighbor of R~a and R~b. Then
(a1 xν+1 − aν+1 x1 ) + (a2 xν+2 − aν+2 x2 ) + · · · + (aν x2ν − a2ν xν ) = r′ (6.2.1)
and
(b1 xν+1 − bν+1 x1 ) + (b2 xν+2 − bν+2 x2 ) + · · · + (bν x2ν − b2ν xν ) = s′ (6.2.2)
for some r′ , s′ ∈ R× . Since ai ∈ R× and we may assume without loss of generality that i ≤ ν,
from Eq. (6.2.1) we have
xν+i = a−1
i r′ + (aν+1 x1 − a1 xν+1 ) + (aν+2 x2 − a2 xν+2 ) + · · ·
+ (aν+i−1 xi−1 − ai−1 xν+i−1 ) + aν+i xi


+ (aν+i+1 xi+1 − ai+1 xν+i+1 ) + · · · + (a2ν xν − aν x2ν )
Subtracting bi × (6.2.1) from ai ×(6.2.2) gives
ν
X ν
X
− (ai bν+j − aν+j bi )xj + (ai bj − aj bi )xν+j = ai s′ − bi r′ . (6.2.3)
j=1 j=1
j6=i

Assume that R~a is adjacent to R~b. By Lemma 6.2.1, we have ai bl − al bi is a unit for some l ∈
{1, . . . , 2ν} and l 6= i. If l ≤ ν, then
 ν
X ν
X 
xν+l = (ai bl − al bi )−1 ai s′ − bi r′ + (ai bν+j − aν+j bi )xj − (ai bj − aj bi )xν+j
j=1 j=1
j6=i,l

and if l ≥ ν + 1, then
 ν
X ν
X 
xl−ν = (ai bl − al bi )−1 ai s′ − bi r′ + (ai bν+j − aν+j bi )xj − (ai bj − aj bi )xν+j .
j=1 j=1
j6=l−ν j6=i
2ν−2 × ×
Hence, there are |R| |R|R×|
||R |
= |R|2ν−2 |R× | classes of common neighbors of adjacent vertices
R~a and R~b, and so we have (2).
Finally, suppose that R~a is not adjacent to R~b. If ai bl − al bi is a unit for some l ∈ {1, . . . , 2ν}
and l 6= i, then Eq. (6.2.3) implies that xν+l or xl depends on other 2ν − 2 variables similar to the
2ν−2 × ||R× |
previous paragraph, so that there are |R| |R|R ×| = |R|2ν−2 |R× | classes of common neighbors.
Assume that ai bl − al bi ∈ M for all l ∈ {1, . . . , 2ν} r {i}. Then bi is a unit, so
xν+i = b−1
i s′ + (bν+1 x1 − b1 xν+1 ) + (bν+2 x2 − b2 xν+2 ) + · · ·
+ (bν+i−1 xi−1 − bi−1 xν+i−1 ) + bν+i xi


+ (bν+i+1 xi+1 − bi+1 xν+i+1 ) + · · · + (b2ν xν − bν x2ν )
Clearly, if xk ∈ M for all k ∈ {1, . . . , 2ν} r {ν + i}, then xν+i ∈ R× . Hence, there are |R|2ν−1
classes of common neighbors. This completes the proof of (3).

Furthermore, the above proof gives the following result.

Theorem 6.2.3. (Theorem 2.5 of [31]) Let ~a = a1~e1 + · · · + a2ν ~e2ν and ~b = b1~e1 + · · · + b2ν ~e2ν
be unimodular vectors in V and assume that ai ∈ R× for some i ∈ {1, . . . , 2ν}. If R~a and R~b are
non-adjacent vectices of GSpR (V ) , then the number of common neighbors are
(
|R|2ν−2 |R× |, if ai bl − al bi ∈ R× for some l ∈ {1, . . . , 2ν} r {i},
|R|2ν−1 , if ai bl − al bi ∈ M for all l ∈ {1, . . . , 2ν} r {i}.
174 6. Applications

Definition. A strongly regular graph with parameters (v, k, λ, µ) is a k-regular graph on v

vertices such that for every pair of adjacent vertices there are λ vertices adjacent to both, and
for every pair of non-adjacent vertices there are µ vertices adjacent to both.

As a generalization of strongly regular graphs, Erickson and Fernando [22] introduced Deza
graphs, which were firstly introduced in a slightly more restricted form by Deza and Deza [21].

Definition. A regular graph with degree k on v vertices is said to be a (v, k, λ, µ)-Deza graph
if any two distinct vertices x and y have λ or µ common adjacent vertices. A Deza graph of
diameter two is called a strictly Deza graph if it is not strongly regular. For d ≥ 2, a k-regular
graph G on v vertices is called a d-Deza graph with parameters (v, k, {c1 , . . . , cd }) if every two
distinct vertices of G has c1 , c2 , . . . , cd common adjacent vertices.

In particular, a 2-Deza graph is just an ordinary Deza graph.

We conclude some direct consequences of Theorems 6.2.2 and 6.2.3 in our main classification
theorem.

Theorem 6.2.4. (Theorem 2.6 of [31]) Let R be a finite local ring with unique maximal ideal M
and let (V, β) be a symplectic space of dimension 2ν.
1. If ν = 1, then GSpR (V ) is a strongly regular graph with parameters

(|R| + |M |, |R|, |R× |, |R|).

Moreover, if If ν = 1 and R is a field, then GSpR (V ) is a complete graph.

2. If ν ≥ 2 and R is a field, then GSpR (V ) is a strongly regular graph with parameters
 
|R|2ν − 1 2ν−1 2ν−2 2ν−2
, |R| , |R| (|R| − 1), |R| (|R| − 1) .
|R| − 1

3. If ν ≥ 2 and R is not a field, then GSpR (V ) is a strictly Deza graph with parameters
 
|R|2ν − |M |2ν 2ν−1 2ν−2 × 2ν−1
, |R| , |R| |R |, |R| .
|R× |

Example 6.2.1. Let p be a prime number and let R be the ring of integers modulo pn , Zpn , or the
field of pn elements, Fpn , where n ∈ N. For ν ≥ 1, let V denote the set of 2ν-tuples (a1 , . . . , a2ν ) of
elements in R. Consider the symplectic bilinear form β given in Example 6.1.2. The unimodular
vectors in V are those (a1 , . . . , a2ν ) of elements in R such that ai ∈ R× for some i ∈ {1, 2, . . . , 2ν}.
We write Sp(2ν) (R) for this symplectic graph. The above theorem gives the following results.
1. The symplectic graph Sp(2ν) (Fpn ) is a strongly regular graph with parameters
 n 2ν 
(p ) − 1 n 2ν−1 n 2ν−2 n n 2ν−2 n
, (p ) , (p ) (p − 1) , (p ) (p − 1) .
pn − 1

2. The symplectic graph Sp(2) (Zpn ) is a strongly regular graph with parameters
 
pn + pn−1 , pn , pn − pn−1 , pn .

3. Sp(2ν) (Zpn ) is not strongly regular when ν ≥ 2 and n ≥ 2.

Next, let R be a finite commutative ring. By Corollary 4.6.7, R is a product of finite local rings
and we have completely studied our graphs over a finite local ring. Write

R = R1 × R2 × · · · × Rt
6.2. Symplectic Graphs 175

as a direct product of finite local rings Ri , i = 1, 2, . . . , t. Consider V = R2ν , a free R-module of

rank 2ν, where ν ≥ 1. We have the canonical 1-1 correspondence
ϕ (j) (j) (j)
~x = (x1 , x2 , . . . , x2ν ) 7→ ((x1 )tj=1 , (x2 )tj=1 , . . . , (x2ν )tj=1 ).
Note that if ~x, ~y ∈ V , then this correspondence induces the symplectic map β on V by
 
(j) (j) (j) (j) (j) (j)
β(~x, ~y ) = β ((x1 )tj=1 , (x2 )tj=1 , . . . , (x2ν )tj=1 ), ((y1 )tj=1 , (y2 )tj=1 , . . . , (y2ν )tj=1 )
= (β1 (~x(1) , ~y (1) ), β2 (~x(2) , ~y (2) ), . . . , βt (~x(t) , ~y (t) ))
X ν X ν ν
X 
(1) (1) (1) (1) (2) (2) (2) (2) (t) (t) (t) (t)
= (xi yν+i − xν+i yi ), (xi yν+i − xν+i yi ), . . . , (xi yν+i − xν+i yi ) ,
i=1 i=1 i=1
(j) (j) (j)
where ~x(j) = (x1 , ~x2 , . . . , ~x2ν ) ∈ V (j) := Rj2ν and (V (j) , βj ) is a symplectic space of Rj of rank
2ν, for all j = 1, 2, . . . , t. Since R× = R1× × R2× × · · · × Rt× , we have
ν
X (j) (j) (j) (j)
β(~x, ~y ) ∈ R ⇔×
(xi yν+i − xν+i yi ) ∈ Rj× for all j ∈ {1, 2, . . . , t}. (6.2.4)
i=1

This shows that the adjacency condition does not depend on the bilinear map β. Recall from the
statement before Lemma 6.2.1 that when Rj is a local ring, the adjacency condition becomes
ν
X
Rj~a is adjacent to Rj~b if and only if (ai bν+i − aν+i bi ) ∈ Rj× . (6.2.5)
i=1

for all j ∈ {1, 2, . . . , t}. Therefore, it follows from Eq. (6.2.5) that
GSpR (V ) ∼
= GSpR (V (1) ) ⊗ GSpanR (V (2) ) ⊗ · · · ⊗ GSpR (V (t) ) , (6.2.6)
1 2 t

as a graph isomorphism. Here, for two graphs G and H, we define their tensor product G ⊗ H to
be the graph with vertex set V(G) × V(H), where (u, v) is adjacent to (u′ , v ′ ) if and only if u is
adjacent to u′ and v is adjacent to v ′ .
From Theorem 6.2.2 (1) and the above discussion, we have the number of vertices of GSpR (V )
is equal to
t t
Y Y |Rj |2ν − |Mj |2ν
|V(GSpR (V ) )| = |V(GSpR (V (j) ) )| =
j=1
j
j=1
|Rj× |

and GSpR (V ) is regular of degree |R1 |2ν−1 |R2 |2ν−1 . . . |Rt |2ν−1 = |R|2ν−1 . Moreover, every two
adjacent vertices of GSpR (V ) has |R|2ν−2 |R× | common neighbors by Theorem 6.2.2 (2). We record
these results in the next theorem.

Theorem 6.2.5. Let R be a finite commutative ring and (V, β) be the induced symplectic space of
rank 2ν, ν ≥ 1, discussed above.
1. The symplectic graph GSpR (V ) is a |R|2ν−1 -regular and isomorphic to the graph

GSpR (V (1) ) ⊗ GSpR (V (2) ) ⊗ · · · ⊗ GSpR (V (t) ) .

1 2 t

2. Every two adjacent vertices of GSpR (V ) has |R|2ν−2 |R× | common neighbors.

Example 6.2.2. If m > 1 and m = pn1 1 pn2 2 . . . pnt t , where ni ∈ N and pi are distinct primes for all
i ∈ {1, 2, . . . , t}, then by Chinese remainder theorem,
R = Zm ∼
= Z p 1 n1 × Z p 2 n2 × · · · × Z p t nt .
Consider V = R2ν , the induced symplectic space of dimension 2ν, ν ≥ 1. By Theorem 6.2.5, we
have:
176 6. Applications

1. the symplectic graph GSpR (V ) is a m2ν−1 -regular and isomorphic to the graph product

Sp(2ν) (Zp1 n1 ) ⊗ Sp(2ν) (Zp2 n2 ) ⊗ · · · ⊗ Sp(2ν) (Zpt nt ),

(see Example 6.2.1), and

2. every two adjacent vertices of GSpR (V ) has m2ν−2 φ(m) common neighbors, where φ is the
Euler φ-function.
The numbers of common neighbors for two non-adjacent vertices are studied in the following
theorem where we apply Theorem 6.2.3 on each factor.

Theorem 6.2.6. Let R and V be as in Theorem 6.2.5, and let

(j) (j) (j)
(j) (j) (j)

~a = (a1 )tj=1 , (a2 )tj=1 , . . . , (a2ν )tj=1 and ~b = (b1 )tj=1 , (b2 )tj=1 , . . . , (b2ν )tj=1

(j)
be unimodular vectors in V where (ai )tj=1 ∈ R× for some i ∈ {1, 2, . . . , 2ν}. Assume that
R~a and R~b are non-adjacent vertices of GSpR (V ) . Let {j1 , j2 , . . . , js } ⊆ {1, 2, . . . , t} be such that
(j ) (j ) (j )
(j ) (j ) (j )

Rjk a1 k , a2 k , . . . , a2νk and Rjk b1 k , b2 k , . . . , b2νk are non-adjacent vertices for all k ∈ {1, 2,
. . . , s}. Then the number of common neighbors of R~a and R~b are
 
Y Y
 |Rj |2ν−2 |Rj× | Ck ,
j∈{1,2,...,t}r{j1 ,j2 ,...,js } k∈{1,2,...,s}

where
( (jk ) (jk ) (jk ) (jk )
|Rjk |2ν−2 |Rj×k |, if ai bl − al bi ∈ Rj×k for some l ∈ {1, . . . , 2ν} r {i},
Ck = (jk ) (jk ) (jk ) (jk )
|Rjk |2ν−1 , if a i bl − a l bi ∈ Mjk for all l ∈ {1, . . . , 2ν} r {i},

for all k ∈ {1, 2, . . . , s}.

Proof. It follows directly from the isomorphism (6.2.6) and Theorem 6.2.3.

6.3 Vertex and Arc Transitivities of Symplectic Graphs

In this section, we show that our symplectic graph GSpR (V ) is vertex and arc transitive.

Definition. Let G and H be graphs. A function σ from V(G) to V(H) is a homomorphism from
G to H if σ(g1 ) and σ(g2 ) are adjacent in H whenever g1 and g2 are adjacent in G. It is called
an isomorphism if it is a bijection and σ −1 is a homomorphism from H onto G. Moreover, an
isomorphism on G is called an automorphism. The set of all automorphisms of a graph G is
denoted by Aut (G). It is a group under composition, called the automorphism group of G.

Let G and H be two graphs. Let σ and τ be automorphisms of G and H, respectively. It is easy
to see that the map

ρ : (g, h) 7→ (σ(g), τ (h)) for all g ∈ V(G), h ∈ V(H),

is an automorphism of G ⊗ H. Thus, we have shown:

Theorem 6.3.1. For graphs G and H, Aut (G) × Aut (H) ⊆ Aut (G ⊗ H).
6.3. Vertex and Arc Transitivities of Symplectic Graphs 177

Definition. A graph G is vertex transitive if its automorphism group acts transitively on the
vertex set. That is, for any two vertices of G, there is an automorphism carrying one to the
other. A graph G is edge transitive if its automorphism group acts transitively on the edge set.
An arc in G is an ordered pair of adjacent vertices, and G is arc transitive if its automorphism
group acts transitively on its arcs.

Note that an arc transitive graph is necessarily vertex and edge transitive. More on transitive
graphs can be found in Chapter 3 of Godsil’s book [14].
We recall Proposition 2.3 of [26] as follows.

Theorem 6.3.2. [26] Let R be a local ring. If {~x, ~a} and {~x, ~b} are hyperbolic pairs of unimodular
vectors in V , then there exists an isometry σ in SpR (V ) which leaves ~x invariant and carries ~a to ~b.

Lemma 6.3.3. Let R be a finite local ring and let (V, β) be a symplectic space of dimension 2ν.
Then SpR (V ) acts transitively on unimodular vectors and on hyperbolic planes.

Proof. Let ~a and ~b be unimodular vectors in V such that R~a 6= R~b. By Theorem 6.2.2 (2) and (3),
for every two distinct vertices of GSpR (V ) , there exists a unimodular vector ~x such that {~x, ~a} and
{~x, ~b} are hyperbolic pairs. Then Theorem 6.3.2 gives an isometry σ in SpR (V ) which leaves ~x
invariant and carries ~a to ~b. Hence, SpR (V ) acts transitively on unimodular vectors.
Next, let {~a, ~b} and {~c, d}
~ be two distinct hyperbolic pairs of unimodular vectors in V . Then
there exists an isometry ρ in SpR (V ) carries ~a to ~c. Since {~a, ~b} is hyperbolic pair, so is the pair
{ρ(~x), ρ(~a)} = {~c, ρ(~b)}. Again, Theorem 6.3.2 implies an isometry τ in SpR (V ) which leaves ~c
invariant and carries ρ(~b) to d. ~ It follows that τ ◦ ρ ∈ Sp (V ) maps {~a, ~b} to {~c, d}
R
~ as desired.

Theorem 6.3.4. Let R be a finite local ring and let (V, β) be a symplectic space of dimension 2ν.
The symplectic graph GSpR (V ) is vertex transitive and arc transitive.

Proof. Observe that for any isometry σ of V , we have the induced automorphism Tσ on the vertex
set of the symplectic graph GSp(V ) given by

Tσ : R~a 7→ Rσ(~a)

for all unimodular vectors ~a ∈ V . Let ~a and ~b be unimodular vectors in V . By Lemma 6.3.3,
there is an isometry σ ∈ SpR (V ) such that σ(~a) = ~b. Thus, we have Tσ ∈ Aut GSpR (V ) and
Tσ : R~a 7→ Rσ(~a) = R~b.
For edge transitivity, we let ~a, ~b, ~c, d~ be unimodular vectors in V such that {~a, ~b} and {~c, d}
~ are
hyperbolic pairs. Again, by Lemma 6.3.3, there exists an isometry σ ∈ SpR (V ) such that σ(~a) = ~c
and σ(~b) = d.
~ Therefore, Tσ ∈ Aut GSp (V ) sends R~a to R~c and R~b to Rd.
R
~ This proof also shows
that the symplectic graph GSpR (V ) is arc transitive.

If a finite commutative ring R is decomposed as R = R1 × R2 × · · · × Rt , where Ri is a local

ring for all i = 1, 2, . . . , t, then

GSpR (V ) ∼
= GSpR (V (1) ) ⊗ GSpR (V (2) ) ⊗ · · · ⊗ GSpR (V (t) )
1 2 t

as we have seen before Theorem 6.2.5. From Theorem 6.3.4, for each i, we have GSpR (V (i) ) is
i
vertex transitive and arc transitive. By Theorem 6.3.1,

Aut (GSpR (V (1) ) ) × Aut (GSpR (V (2) ) ) × · · · × Aut (GSpR (V (t) ) ) ⊆ Aut (GSpR (V ) ),
1 2 t

it follows that GSpR (V ) is also vertex transitive and arc transitive. Hence, we have proved:
178 6. Applications

Theorem 6.3.5. If (V, β) is a symplectic space over a finite commutative ring R, then the symplectic
graph GSpR (V ) is vertex transitive and arc transitive.

6.4 Chromatic Number of Symplectic Graphs

In this section, we study the chromatic number of symplectic graphs. Surprisingly, vertex transi-
tivity is essential in this combinatorial problem.

Definition. The chromatic number of a graph G is the smallest number of colors needed to
color the vertices of G so that no two adjacent vertices share the same color. The chromatic
number of a graph G is commonly denoted by χ(G).

The chromatic number of symplectic graphs over a finite field is recalled in the next proposi-
tion.

Proposition 6.4.1. [33] If k is the field of q elements and V is the symplectic space of dimension 2ν,
ν ≥ 1, then χ(GSpk (V ) ) = q ν + 1.

Let R be a finite local ring with unique maximal ideal M and residue k = R/M . Let V be a
free R-module of rank 2ν, ν ≥ 1, and let V ′ be the 2ν-dimensional vector space over k induced
from V via the canonical map π : R → k given by

π : r 7→ r + M.

Moreover, if (V, β) is a symplectic space, then (V ′ , β ′ ) is a symplectic space, where β ′ is given by

β ′ (π(~a), π(~b)) = π(β(~a, ~b))

for all ~a, ~b ∈ V . Here, we write π(~a) = (π(a1 ), π(a2 ), . . . , π(a2ν )) for all ~a = (a1 , a2 , . . . , a2ν ) ∈ V .
Note that the relation
R~x ∼ R~y ⇔ kπ(~x) = kπ(~y ) (6.4.1)
is an equivalence relation on the vertex set of the graph GSpR (V ) . Since R is a local ring, it follows
that
β(~a, ~b) ∈ R× ⇔ π(β(~a, ~b)) 6= M ⇔ β ′ (π(~a), π(~b)) ∈ k × .
This gives (3) of the next theorem.

Theorem 6.4.2. Let R be a finite local ring with unique maximal ideal M and residue k = R/M .
2ν −1
Let κ = |k||k|−1 and ~x1 , ~x2 , . . . , ~xκ be unimodular vectors in V such that the vertex set

V(GSpk (V ′ ) ) = {kπ(~xi ) : i = 1, 2, . . . , κ}.

1. The set Π = {R(~x1 + M 2ν ), R(~x2 + M 2ν ), . . . , R(~xκ + M 2ν )} is a partition of V(GSpR (V ) ),

where R(~xi + M 2ν ) = {R(~xi + m) ~ :m ~ ∈ M 2ν } for all ∈ {1, 2, . . . , κ}. Moreover, for each
i ∈ {1, 2, . . . , κ}, any two distinct vertices in R(~xi + M 2ν ) are non-adjacent vertices.
2. |R(~xi + M 2ν )| = |M |2ν−1 for all i ∈ {1, . . . , κ}.
3. For unimodular vectors ~a, ~b ∈ V , we have R~a and R~b are adjacent vertices in V(GSpR (V ) ) if
and only if kπ(~a) and kπ(~b) are adjacent vertices in V(GSpk (V ′ ) ).
4. For i, j ∈ {1, 2, . . . , κ}, if kπ(~xi ) and kπ(~xj ) are adjacent vertices, then R(~xi + m ~ 1 ) and
R(~xj + m~ 2 ) are adjacent vertices in V(GSpR (V ) ) for all m ~ 2 ∈ M 2ν .
~ 1, m
6.4. Chromatic Number of Symplectic Graphs 179

Proof. The first part of (1) follows from the relation (6.4.1) and (4) is an immediate consequence
of (3). Note that

β(~xi + m
~ 1 , ~xi + m
~ 2 ) = β(~xi , m
~ 1 ) + β(m
~ 2 , ~xi ) + β(m ~ 2) ∈ M
~ 1, m

for all i ∈ {1, 2, . . . , κ} and m ~ 2 ∈ M 2ν . This proves the second part of (1).
~ 1, m
Next, let m~ 1, m~ 2 ∈ M and assume that R(~xi + m ~ 1 ) = R(~xi + m
~ 2 ). Then ~xi + m~ 1 = λ(~xi + m
~ 2)
for some λ ∈ R× . Thus, (1 − λ)~xi = λm ~2−m ~ 1 ∈ M 2ν . Since ~xi is unimodular, 1 − λ ∈ M ,
so λ = 1 + µ for some µ ∈ M . Hence, ~xi + m ~ 1 = (1 + µ)(~xi + m ~ 2 ). Finally, we show that
R(1 + µ)(~x + m) ~ = R(~x + m) ~ for all µ ∈ M , ~x ∈ V unimodular, and m ~ ∈ M 2ν and we therefore
have (2). Clearly, R(1 + µ)(~x + m) ~ ⊆ R(~x + m).~ Since µ ∈ M , 1 + µ ∈ R× . Then r(~x + m) ~ =
−1
(r(1 + µ) )(1 + µ)(~x + m) ~ for all r ∈ R which gives another inclusion.

It follows from Proposition 2.3 of [33] that GSpk (V ′ ) is |k|ν + 1-partite with partite sets Y1 ,
Y2 , . . . , Y|k|ν +1 , where Yi ∩ Yj = ∅ for all i 6= j and there is no edge of GSpk (V ′ ) joining two vertices
of the same subset. Moreover, the subsets Y1 , Y2 , . . . , Y|k|ν +1 can be chosen so that for any distinct
indices i and j, every y ∈ Yi is adjacent to exactly |k|ν−1 vertices in Yj . In addition, the chromatic
number of GSpk (V ′ ) is |k|ν + 1 (Proposition 6.4.1). The canonical map π : R → k and Theorem
6.4.2 give the following theorem.

Theorem 6.4.3. Let R be a finite local ring with unique maximal ideal M and residue k =
R/M . The symplectic graph GSpR (V ) is |k|ν + 1-partite with partite sets π −1 (Y1 ), π −1 (Y2 ),
. . . , π −1 (Y|k|ν +1 ), where Yj , j = 1, 2, . . . , |k|ν +1, are subsets of GSpk (V ′ ) discussed above. Moreover,
for any distinct indices i and j, every a ∈ π −1 (Yi ) is adjacent to exactly |M |2ν−1 |k|ν−1 vertices in
π −1 (Yj ). As a result, the chromatic number χ(GSpR (V ) ) is |k|ν + 1.

Proof. From the above discussion, it remains to derive the chromatic number of GSpR (V ) . Since
our graph is |k|ν +1-partite, χ(GSpR (V ) ) ≤ |k|ν +1. To prove the reverse inequality, we consider the
induced subgraph of GSpR (V ) on the vertex set {Rx1 , Rx2 , . . . , Rxκ }. By Theorem 6.4.2 (3), this
subgraph is isomorphic to the symplectic graph GSpk (V ′ ) with chromatic number |k|ν + 1. Hence,
the chromatic number χ(GSpR (V ) ) is |k|ν + 1 as desired.

We shall conclude this section by studying the chromatic number of symplectic graphs over a
finite commutative ring. The key ingredient is vertex transitivity discovered above.

Definition. A set I of vertices of a graph G is called an independent set if no two distinct

vertices of I are adjacent. Write α(G) for the size of largest independent set of G.

For example, if R is a local ring, Theorem 6.4.2 implies that the sets R(~xi + M 2ν ), i ∈
{1, 2, . . . , κ}, are independent sets in the symplectic graph GSpR (V ) . Since the symplectic graph is
regular, it follows from Theorem 6.4.3 that:

Theorem 6.4.4. Let R be a finite local ring with unique maximal ideal M and residue field k =
R/M and let (V, β) be a symplectic space of rank 2ν, ν ≥ 1. Then
 |k|ν − 1 
α(GSpR (V ) ) = |M |2ν−1 .
|k| − 1

Definition. A fractional coloring of a graph G is a mapping f whichP assigns to each indepen-

dent set I of G a real number f (I) ∈ [0, 1] such that for any vertex v, v∈I f (I) = 1. The total
weight w(f ) of a fractional coloring f of G is the sum of f (I) over all the independent sets I
of G. The fractional chromatic number of G, denoted by χ∗ (G), is the minimum total weight
of a fractional coloring of G.
180 6. Applications

The color classes of a proper l-coloring of G form a collection of l pairwise disjoint independent
sets I1 , I2 , . . . , Il whose union is V(G). The function f such that f (Ij ) = 1 for all j ∈ {1, 2, . . . , l}
and f (S) = 0 for all other independent sets S is a fractional coloring of weight l. Therefore,
χ∗ (G) ≤ χ(G). Moreover, when G is vertex transitive, we have the following proposition.

Proposition 6.4.5. (Corollary 7.5.2 of [14]) If G is a vertex transitive graph, then

|V(G)|
χ∗ (G) = .
α(G)

Let R be a finite local ring with unique maximal ideal M and residue field k = R/M and let
(V, β) be a symplectic space of rank 2ν, ν ≥ 1. By Theorems 6.2.2 (1) and 6.4.4, we have
|R|2ν − |M |2ν  |k|ν − 1 
|V(GSpR (V ) )| = and α(G SpR (V ) ) = |M |2ν−1 ,
|R× | |k| − 1
respectively. Since the graph GSpR (V ) is vertex transitive, it follows from Proposition 6.4.5 that
|R|2ν − |M |2ν
|R× | |R|2ν − |M |2ν |k| − 1 |M |
χ∗ (GSpR (V ) ) =  ν = 2ν ν
= |k|ν + 1,
|k| − 1  |M | |k| − 1 |R| − |M |
|M |2ν−1
|k| − 1
which is equal to the chromatic number of GSpR (V ) . We record this result in the next theorem.

Theorem 6.4.6. Let R be a finite local ring with unique maximal ideal M and residue field k =
R/M and let (V, β) be a symplectic space of rank 2ν, ν ≥ 1. Then

χ∗ (GSpR (V ) ) = |k|ν + 1 = χ(GSpR (V ) ).

It is easy to see that if there is a homomorphism from a graph X to a graph Y , then χ(X) ≤
χ(Y ). Let G and H be graphs. Since both G and H are homomorphic images of G ⊗ H (using the
projection homomorphisms), we have that
χ(G ⊗ H) ≤ min{χ(G), χ(H)}.
Hedetniemi [25] has conjectured that for all graphs G and H equality occurs in the above bound.
This conjecture is still open. However, Zhu [34] showed that Hedetniemi’s conjecture is true for
fractional chromatic numbers.

Proposition 6.4.7. (Theorem 2 of [34]) For graphs G and H,

χ∗ (G ⊗ H) = min{χ∗ (G), χ∗ (H)}.

Let R be a finite commutative ring decomposed as R = R1 × R2 × · · · × Rt , where Ri is a local

ring for all i = 1, 2, . . . , t. Then
GSpR (V ) ∼
= GSpR (V (1) ) ⊗ GSpR (V (2) ) ⊗ · · · ⊗ GSpR (V (t) )
1 2 t

as we have seen earlier. By Proposition 6.4.7 and the above discussion,

min χ∗ GSpR (V (i) ) = χ∗ (GSpR (V ) ) ≤ χ(GSpR (V ) ) ≤ min χ GSpR (V (i) ) .
1≤i≤t i 1≤i≤t i

Since χ∗ (G SpanRi (V (i) ) ) = χ(GSpanR (V (i) ) )

for all i = 1, 2, . . . , t, it forces that
i


χ∗ (GSpR (V ) ) = χ(GSpR (V ) ) = min χ GSpR (V (i) ) .
1≤i≤t i

Together with Theorem 6.4.3, we have our desired chromatic number.

6.4. Chromatic Number of Symplectic Graphs 181

Theorem 6.4.8. Let R be a finite commutative ring decomposed as R = R1 × R2 × · · · × Rt , where

Ri is a local ring and ki is its residue field, for all i = 1, 2, . . . , t. If (V, β) is a symplectic space
over R of rank 2ν, ν ≥ 1, then

χ∗ (GSpR (V ) ) = χ(GSpR (V ) ) = min |ki |ν + 1.

1≤i≤t

Corollary 6.4.9. Let m > 1 and R = Zm ∼ = Zp1 n1 × Zp2 n2 × · · · × Zpt nt , where ni ∈ N and pi are
primes such that p1 < p2 < · · · < pt . For the symplectic space V over R of dimension 2ν, ν ≥ 1,
we have the chromatic number of the graph GSpR (V ) given by

χ∗ (GSpR (V ) ) = χ(GSpR (V ) ) = |p1 |ν + 1.

182 6. Applications
Bibliography

General References
[1] D. S. Dummit and R. M. Foote, Abstract Algebra, 2nd edn, Prentice-Hall Inc., London, 1999.

[2] J. B. Fraleigh, A First Course in Abstract Algebra, 7th edn, Addison Wesley, New York, 2002.

[3] P. Grillet, Algebra, 2nd edn, Springer, New York, 2007.

[4] T. W. Hungerford, Algebra, Springer, New York, 1974.

[5] I. M. Isaacs, Algebra, a graduate course, Brooks/Cole Publishing Company, Pacific Grove,
1993.

[6] N. Jacobson, Basic Algebra I and II, W. H. Freeman & Co, 1996.

[7] A. W. Knapp, Basic Algebra, Birkhäuser, Boston, 2006.

[8] A. W. Knapp, Advanced Algebra, Birkhäuser, Boston, 2007.

[9] S. Lang, Algebra, 3rd edn, Springer, New York, 2002.

[10] W. K. Nicholson, Introduction to Abstract Algebra, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New Jersey, 2007.

[11] J. J. Rotman, Advanced Modern Algebra, Prentice Hall, 2002.

Technical References
[12] M. F. Atiyah and I. G. MacDonald, Introduction to Commutative Algebra, Addison-Wesley
Publishing Co, Reading, Mass.-London-Don Mills, Ontario, 1969.

[13] D. M. Burton, Elementary Number Theory, 7th edn, McGraw-Hill Higher Education,
Dubuque, 2010.

[14] C. Godsil and G. Royle, Algebraic Graph Theory, Spinger, New York, 2001.

[15] T. Head, Modules: A Primer of Structure Theorems, Brooks/Cole Publishing Company, Mon-
terey, 1974.

[16] W. C. Winnie Li, Number Theory with Applications, World Scientific, Singapore, 1996.

[17] B.R. McDonald, Finite Rings with Identity, Marcel Dekker, New York, 1974

[18] M. Reid, Undergraduate Commutative Algebra, Cambridge University Press, New York, 1995.

[19] I. Stewart, Galois Theory, 3rd edn, Chapman & Hall/CRC mathematics, Boca Raton, 2004.

[20] D. J. Winter, The Structure of Fields, Springer, New York, 1974.

183
184 BIBLIOGRAPHY

Research Articles
[21] A. Deza and M. Deza, The ridge graph of the metric polytope and some relatives, Polytopes:
Abstract, convex and computational, T. Bisztriczky et al. (Editors), NATO ASI Series, Kluwer
Academic, (1994) 359–373.

[22] M. Erickson, S. Fernando, W. H. Haemers, D. Hardy and J. Hemmeter, Deza graphs: A

generalization of strongly regular graphs, J. Combin. Des. 7 (1999) 359–405.

[23] Z. Gu, Subconstituents of symplectic graphs modulo pn , Linear Algebra Appl. 439 (2013)
1321–1329.

[24] Z. Gu and Z. Wan, Automorphisms of subconstituents of symplectic graphs, Algebra Colloq.

20 (2013) 333–342.

[25] S. Hedetniemi, Homomorphisms of graphs and automata, Technical Report 03105-44-T, Uni-
versity of Michigan, 1966.

[26] W. Klingenberg, Symplectic groups over local rings, Amer. J. Math. 85 (1963) 232–240.

[27] F. Li and Y. Wang, Subconstituents of symplectic graphs, Europ. J. Combin. 29 (2008) 1092–
1103.

[28] F. Li, K. Wang and J. Guo, More on symplectic graphs modulo pn , Linear Algebra Appl. 438
(2012) 2651–2660.

[29] F. Li, K. Wang and J. Guo, Symplectic graphs modulo pq, Discrete Math. 313 (2013), 650–
655.

[30] Y. Meemark and T. Prinyasart, On symplectic graphs modulo pn , Discrete Math. 311 (2011)
1874–1878.

[31] Y. Meemark and T. Puirod, Symplectic graphs over finite local rings, Europ. J. Combin. 34
(2013) 1114–1124.

[32] Y. Meemark and T. Puirod, Symplectic graphs over finite commutative rings, Europ. J. Com-
bin. (2014) http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.ejc.2014.05.004.

[33] Z. Tang and Z. Wan, Symplectic graphs and their automorphisms, Europ. J. Combin. 27
(2006) 38–50.

[34] X. Zhu, The fractional version of Hedetniemi’s conjecture is true, Europ. J. Combin. 32
(2011) 1168–1175.
Index

5-lemma, 98 constant term, 59

content, 63
abelian extension, 156 coset, left or right, 9
abelian group, 2 cycle, 19
act faithfully, 8 cycle structure, 20
act transitively, 8 cyclic extension, 156
algebraic closure, 136 cyclic group, 4
algebraic element, 69, 165 cyclic module, 100
algebraic extension, 70, 165 cyclotomic field, 158
algebraically closed field, 62, 135 cyclotomic polynomial, 65, 156
algebraically dependent, 165
algebraically independent, 165 d-Deza graph, 174
alphabet set, 90 defining relation, 92
alternating group, 21 degree of a field extension, 68
arc, 177 degree of a polynomial, 60
arc transitive, 177 degree of an algebraic element, 70
Artinian module, 127 derivative, 138
Artinian ring, 127 derivative of a polynomial, 71
ascending chain condition (a.c.c.), 123 derived length, 80
associate, 53 derived series, 79
associative, 1 derived subgroup, 79
atom, 53 descending chain condition (d.c.c.), 127
automorphism group, 18 Deza graph, 174
automorphism group of graphs, 176 diagram chasing, 98
automorphism of graphs, 176 dihedral group, 4
automorphism of groups, 6 direct product of groups, 28
direct sum, 96, 99
basis, 100 disjoint cycle, 19
bilinear form, 169 divide, 52
binary operation, 1 divisible module, 109
binomial theorem, 40 division algorithm of polynomials, 60
Burnside theorem, 11 division ring, 41
butterfly lemma, 76 division ring of real quaternions, 43

canonical projection, 13, 48 edge transitive, 177

Cauchy theorem, 12 Eisenstein’s criterion, 64
Cayley theorem, 9 elementary row/column transformations, 114
center of a p-group, 24 elementary symmetric functions, 145
center of a group, 5 embedded, 49
center of a ring, 46 empty word, 90
central series, 83 endomorphism of groups, 6
centralizer, 5 entire, 41
characteristic of a ring, 43 epimorphism of groups, 6
characteristic subgroup, 80 Euclidean domain, 57
chromatic number, 178 Euler φ-function, 2, 16
coefficient, 59 even permutation, 21
cokernel, 96 exact, 14
commutative, 1, 2 exact diagram, exact sequence, 96
commutative ring, 39 exponent of a group, 30
commutator, 79 external weak direct product of groups, 28
composition series, 78
conjugacy class, 8 factor group, 13
conjugation, 8 factor module, 96

185
186 INDEX

factor ring, 48 Jacobson radical, 126

field, 41 Jordan-Hölder theorem, 78
field extension, 68
field of fractions, 49 kernel, 6, 46
field of invariant, fixed field, 142 kernel of a module homomorphism, 96
field of rational functions, 145 Kronocker’s theorem, 131
finitely generated free module, 100
finitely generated module, 100 Lüroth’s theorem, 167
fractional chromatic number of G, 179 Lagrange theorem, 10
fractional coloring of a graph G, 179 leading coefficient, 60
free group, 91 least common multiple (lcm), 56
free module, 100 left regular representation, 8
Frobenius’ automorphism, 139, 153 line, 170
fundamental theorem of algebra, 151 linear fractional transformation, 8
fundamental theorem of Galois theory, 147 linearly dependent, 100
linearly independent, 100
Galois extension, 144 local ring, 52
Galois group, 142 lower central series, 82
Gauss’ lemma, 66
general linear group, 2, 41, 86, 113 maximal ideal, 50
generator, 92 maximal normal subgroup, 77
generators, 4 minimal polynomial, 70
greatest common divisor (gcd), 56 module, 95
module homomorphism, 96
group, 2
modules over a PID, 111
group action, 7
monic polynomial, 60
group algebra, 45
monoid, 1
group of symmetries, 3
monomorphism of groups, 6
group of units, 41
multiple root, 71, 138
group ring, 45
multiplicity, 71, 138
groupoid, 1
Nakayama’s lemma, 127
Hedetniemi’s conjecture, 180
negative Pell’s equation, 55
Hilbert basis theorem, 125 nilpotent element, 126
homomorphism of groups, 6 nilpotent group, 82
homomorphism of rings, 44 nilradical, 126
hyperbolic pair, 170 Noetherian module, 124
hyperbolic plane, 170 Noetherian ring, 123
norm, 153 √
ideal generated by, 47 norm map on Z[ d], 55
ideal, left or right, 46 normal basis, 164
ideal, two-sided ideal, 46 normal basis theorem, 155, 164
identity, 1 normal closure of a group, 92
independent modules, 100 normal extension, 143
independent set, 179 normal series, 75
indeterminate, 59 normal subgroup, 4
index of subgroup, 9 normalizer, 5
injective hull, injective envelope, 111
injective module, 107 odd permuataion, 21
inner automorphism, 18 orbit, 8
integers modulo n, 2 orbit-stabilizer theorem, 10
integral domain, 41 order of a group, 2
internal direct product of groups, 29 order of an element, 4
internal direct sum, 100 orthogonal complement, 169
internal direct sum of groups, 28
internal weak direct product of groups, 28 p-group, 23
inverse, 1 partition, 20
irreducible element, 53 Pell’s equation, 55
isometry, 170 perfect field, 139
isomorphic (series), 75 permutation, 3
isomorphism of graphs, 176 Poincaré upper half plane, 9
isomorphism of groups, 6 polynomial, 59
isomorphism theorems of groups, 14 presentation of a group, 92
isomorphism theorems of rings, 48 prime element, 53
INDEX 187

prime field, 68 syllable, 90

prime ideal, 51 Sylow p-subgroup, 25
primitive, 63 Sylow theorems, 23
primitive element, 140 symmetric group, 3
primitive element theorem, 140 symmetric rational function, 145
primitive root of unity, 156 symplectic bilinear form, 169
principal ideal, 47 symplectic graph, 171
principal ideal domain (PID), 47 symplectic group, 170
principal ideal ring, 47
principal series, 78 torsion element, 120
projective linear group, 87 torsion free, 120
projective module, 105 torsion subgroup, 29
projective special linear group, 87 torsion submodule, 120
purely transcendental extension, 165 torsion-free rank, 112
trace, 153
quaternion, 42 transcendence basis, 166
quotient field, 49 transcendence degree, 166
quotient group, 13 transcendental, 69
quotient ring, 48 transcendental element, 165
transposition, 21
rank of a free group, 91 transvection, 87
rank of a module, 103 trivial G action, 8
reduced word, 90
refinement, 75 unimodular, 170
regular n-gon, 4 unipotent matrix, 87
regular module, 95 unique factorization domain (UFD), 54
retraction, 98 unit, 41
Riemann sphere, 8 unity of a ring, 39
ring, 39 universal mapping property of a free group, 91
ring of Gaussian integers, 57 universal mapping property of a free module, 101
ring of polynomials, 60 upper central series, 83
ring of quadratic integers, 54
root of unity, 156 valuation map, 57
rotation group, 4 vector space, 95
vertex transitive, 177
section, 98 von Dyck’s theorem, 93
semigroup, 1
separable element, 138 Wedderburn’s theorem, 43, 160
separable extension, 139 word, 90
separable polynomial, 138
short exact sequence, 96 zero, 39
short exact sequence of groups, 14 zero divisor, 41
simple, 22 zero ring, 40
simple extension, 70, 140
simple group, 77
skew field, 41
solvable by radicals, 161
solvable group, 79
special linear group, 86
spectrum of a ring, 51
split (polynomial), 131
split exact sequence, 98
splitting field, 132
stabilizer, 8
strictly Deza graph, 174
strongly regular graph, 174
subgroup, 3
subgroup generated by, 4
submodule, 96
submodule generated by, 100
subnormal series, 75
subring, 39
subring generated by, 39
sum, 100